Roy-walton-the-complete-walton-vol1.pdf

'I'HE COMPLETE WALTON bv Rov Walton Copyrightl,ewisDavenportLinritcd

IrirstPrintcdl98l SccondEditi(,n1999

Printcdbl Thc BookC0npanyLtd.

VOLUME ONE by JuliaWalton Illustrated

LewisDaveuPortLitnited 5,6 & 7 Charing Cross(lndergrountlArcade, The Slrand,London WC2NlHZ

Foreword

I feel very flatteredas my extIemelytalentedfriend Roy Walton *ou"riia'trtut I *.it" few vords asan introductionto this book' " well ove. 20 yearsa8o, whilst on a visit to Lorrdon,EnglandI tttit iime an intimatef iend of Alex Elmslev r"i [ov. ii. *i" "t saythat I wasmorethan impressedby hi$ u"i Cv's,tnita, I .utt greatknowledgeand skill. Sirce that time, he has written severalexcellentbooks dealinS rn"iiiv-*irrt puvtng *rds. I havenevermet anyonewho hasread rtrem.andsrudiedhis mcthodswho did not enthuse' I havecarefully looked over the conteotsof this book and I .onria"i ii reaily Sreat contribution to thc literature on the i"iii""i. i"*l.t" i"i ii clearlv and thoroughlvexplainedin detail andsomeof hisncwercffectsaretruly brilliant' I assureyou, ihat you will enjoy manyhouls of satisfactionand to add m;ny newitemsto the fascioating t" ."i-"v^t"i-,i "ute *udy of card handling. Dai Vernon LosArueles 7th Octob€!l9El

INTRODUCTION time haselapsedsincemy first collectionof Someconsiderable published and in the interim period severalother card tricks was bookletshave beenoffered to the fratemity containingfurther material. The letters and comm€ntsI have receivedregarding these Dublicationshasled meto believethat theyhavebcenwell received amongcard conjurers,and I wasdelightedwhen Davenpon's I shouldpreparea compilationvolumeof theseilems. suggeited this book therefore,containsall of the materialpreviously offered h booklet form, togetherwith two additional sections' one on tricks and one on sleights.The latter chaptershould be helpful to readerswho are nol familiar with a particulaf sleiSht mentionedin one of the trick descriptionsThe movecan be quicklylookedup in the final chapter,althoughlealningit may lakea little lonSer. a selfcontainedvolumeof tricksand This book is essentiallv hopeyouwill find cards,andt sincerely \leightswith unprepared to yourrepertoire you worth adding will consider InanyilemsIhat ROY WALTON l98t

CONTENTS Chapter I-The APERITIF I MUTUALMINDREq.DING 2 MONEYPOWER 4 OILANDQUEENS 6 THE(ARL LE FONOTRICK 7 MISSIONACCOMPLISHED 9 AFURTHERMISSION t0 STEPPINCSTONES ll THE WACKYCARD TRICK I5 THELEAPERACAIN l7 THEXPLUSONEACETRICKl8 JAYBEETRANSPOSITION m TAKINCTWOACAIN,AGAIN 2t IMPACT THE OVERWORKEDCARD u THE OLD FASHIONEDWAY 25 CANNIBALCARDS 27

Devils Pta),thinCs THECHANGELING HAPPYWANDERERS LIBERTY ALMOST IMPROMPTU SUITYOURSELF YOU NAME IT-I'LL CHANGEIT FINDERSKEEPERS YOU CAN'T CHEAT AN HONESTMAN NEYERCIVE A SUCKERAN EYEN BREAK COLOURMACIC TIIE INCONSTSTENT LIAR HELENSBURCHSPELLER CARD CASE

29

x2 33 34 35 39 q 43 45 la 50

Chapter 2-Cadboad Chatudes HELPMATES 54 JEFFERSON'SJEST SMOKESCREEN 56 THE FINISHINGTOUCH 79 COYERPASS 60 TWICETWO 82 COINOBYEBYE 62 ANOTHERFINEMESS 85 5TILLCOLLACTING 63 PARROTTFASHION E7 REVELATION 64 UNACCUSTOMEDAS WEARE EE r929ACES 65 TIT FORTAT 90 WRONGAGAIN BELOWZBRO 93 I'RAVELLERS INTTME 69 NORVELLE 97 DEMIDEMON '71 WHISTLEAND I'LL COME 102 Chapter 3- Tale T$riste6 A SWITCHIN TIME 106 MATCH-A.MATIC ll0 STRANGE ASSEMBLY 107 AN ILLOCICALCONCLUSIONlll (.oINCIDENCEIN COLOUR r09 INSTANT INTERCHANCE lt3 Chapter 4-Ard kripl rHE MAOICALELIMINATOR ll6 CHOOSYCHOICE t25 rHE IMACEMAKERS llE SURPRISE SURPRISE t27 PUSHOVER t2l COLOURME JORDAN t28 KINGSOOFORTH tn GREENTURTLE 130 IHE AMBITIOUSCHOST t25 RETURNOFTHECANNIBALSI3l

CONTENTS Chaptet s-Trigger foEe

TRICGER SHOWDOWN HOP"A.LONCHOFZINSER TRIC'CERHAPPY

I34 JAIL BREAK 137 CREENHORN I39 HORSESENSE I4O

142 143 144

Aapkr 6-Some Late Extra Cad ftick THE "THING ER ME JIG'' TRICK SATAN'SMIRROR WITCHCRAFT NOWANDTHEN STRETCHINGA POINT

146 I47 I49 1J2 I53

PAINTBRUSHCHANCE WARPAINT SAMEAGAIN PLEASE COMMAND APPEARANCE HAPPYFAMILIES MONTMARTRE

Chapte. 7-7hal Ce ain Sonething CROWNUP HOFZINSER 166 FACETO FACE THECARETAKER 168 FIRESIDEFACES DACWOOD'SEATS 169 REYERSE PREDICTION JUSTINTIME I7O STUDIEDIMACE ITSASETUP I7I ATRICK FORMR HALDS PENNYLANE I73 THE HELENSBURCH ONE TWO THREEBLANK I74 TRIANCLE THESMILINCMULE 175 Chapter 8-Sleights THEMULTIPLESHIFI rE6 THE SECONDDEAL TI{E HALF PASS IEE THE BOTTOMDEAL SECONDSIN t9r0 TI{E CHOST & JORDAN THE WEAVESHUFFLE t92 COUNT TI{E MONTETHROW 194 THE OVETTE/KELLY THE CLASSICPASS 195 PLACEMENT THE TURNOVERPASS tvl THE HAMMAN COUNT THE PUT DOWN t99

SHAKEDOWN SONOF TETRADISM MINUS48 CHAIN LIGHTNINC CTIANGINGTIMES COLLECTINCBOX

Chapter g-Round Up 2II DIVIDEDWESTAND SIMPLEMATHS 2I3 DOUBLEDISCOVERY 2I5 TWSTER 216 CIRCUT-ATION 217

155 156 t57

rs9 l 6t t62

t77 lEo lEl tE2 lE3

ml b1

m1 209 210

219 ?21 222 223 225

"For Jean,Julia and Sarshwho havePut rcal mqgicin mt l{e"

ChapterI The Devil's PlaYthings ..APERITIF'' is dcaigncdto beus€dasa leld in to anycff'cl The following s€qucnce usincfoul cardiof ilmilar value.Il iscxuamclylikcly that your fav-ouritc rricfinvolving four cardsof similat valuais a four a'e tricr' so tor mc aiicriorion *i witt us€accs.Prior !o showingthc effccl, thc four ac'6 shouldbe aranScdas follows: facc up aceof diamonds,Iac' down acc oi-rti".t", i"". io"n acc of spadcs,fa.c down ace of clubs ln lhis ati puaa in th; right hand trouserpockcrof vour suit' .i.aiti.i'trtiv thc - -n.aceof clubsfacing thc body. pi"iit h-a"a to a spcttatorro thoroughlvshufflc' ard whilst hc is doini thisyoureachinro yourrighthandlrouscrpoctetanopalmlne four aces,thc aceof diamondsbaingthc one neSrestth€ palm Exl.no i.]itrana for rnc oackto bereiumcdto you, ard hold it fac! down' """. ot rtt'. pack fa.e up with rhe riShl hand' usinglhe iiir rrr. rlo 'dge tn€ of ihc rirhi trand -.a fir$ fingcr, and laavcthis csrd fac' up ou top ol it ovcr to its-valuc, and lhcn passth€ right hatd cirl'"it-iit" ""J. ieDosirinr lhc four palmcdcrrds upon it in th€ normel colour change tttir i, haschangd to rheaccof dismonds'Thumboff *-oi*ot ".it"r. rhc '-ir-aceof dramonds,and lcaveit facc up on thc trblc' will now uy and up in thc l.ft hand,atrd sayvou itt.-*"ii""i pacl carryorrt To do lhis o.oauii a sfona oceusingihe facccardof lh€ ol lh€ rcar caro whcre lhc onc of thc standardcolour changcsleights, prlrn this card I fact, adual fac!. tn to lh; o".r-it .*t.,riii*y"*.d mcntioning pack and bcfote up, fac€ thc tum.d i tt""" i..J-i"i.,ii.ir.i methodyou usew l reslll m wha(is Soinglo happ€nncxt. \ly'hichcver rhc aceof he3!!sappcaringat the faceof lhe pack. Tum thc pact face down in the l.ft hand, and pick up a little ftngq brcak belowthe top thrcccards. ssvvou havcnow foundthclwo redaces,Icavingonly theblackoncs andplaceil faceup' on top ot ro dilcovcr.PickuDtheaccof diamonds reallylum dorvnall fourcards but pp."t down' p""1. it face n 16r*n irr. is on. redaccon top of the therc that sav nns.. uteak. rrt. tiile ,uoii I

The Devil's Plalrhings pack,and alsoone at the face.Turn the packover, to exhibitthe aceof heartsat the face.In turninStle pack faceup, take ahisopportunityto pick up a left liltl€ fingcr breakabovethe top cardofthe pack(theone rcarestthe palm), Havingshownthat you havea red aceat lhe top and bottom of the pack,you now givathe packonecut sayingthat thiswill obviouslybring the two red acestogether.In makingthe cut, you mustleavethe card nearestfte palm, whcreit is. Therearcmanywaysof accomplishing this, but an axc€llentsl€ightto uscis Ed Marlo's lilde fingcrpull do*,n. Using this, you simplycut off the faceportion of th€packwith theaceof hearts et the facealtd appcarto placeit b€lowthe oth€r faaeup portior, but rcally pull downon thc top cardof thc pack,with theleft little fingcr, so thet it rernainswhareit is, ard the scclionwith the r.e of hcartsat the fac€ go€sin bctwcerlthis cerd, and lhe remaind€rof thc pack. An alternativemovewould be to undcrcuthall of the prck, ard drop it on top of the ac. of hcarts,but ducto thc lcft littlc fings break,you easily wilhdlawa s€clionof the packabovethe breel, lcavingthe top card bchind.Therearc othcr techniquesof cours€,and it m.tters little which you uscas lonS as thc prck is cut orcc, but lhe top card is relainadin position. Now sprcld the pack in a lonSfaceup spre.d, shovinglhat the two red ac€shavctwo facedo*n cardssandwichcdb€twe€nthcm. Removc thesefour cards,and turn ov.l the fac€down onesto showthat the two black aceshavenow b€enfound. ..MUTUAI-MINDN,EADINC" In this trick you apparcntlyreadlhe sp€ctalort mind, andtb€nlet him 8et his ol'n back on you, by rcadin8yours. Commcnceby running throuShthe pack and removingthe ac€, two and threc of clubs for the spcctator,and the ace, two and thr€€ of diamondsfor youlsell. Tuft the remainderof lhe packfacc down and plac€it on tllc table, but in tlis action paln the top card into lhe right hand.Pick up your acetwo and threeofdiamonds,andaffan8ethemin sequcnccso that you rrill know which is vrhichwith ftem behindvour back,Sayyou will secretlyrevarse oneof thcmas a Dredicrion. Place rh.m bchindyour back,and addingthe palmedcerdio $em, se€retly arfirngCthemso that thcy readas follows: Fac€downaceof diamonds, facc up two of dia.6onds,facedown indiff€rent card. faceuD threeof diamonds.Bringthemoul from bchindyour backsquared ui, rheace beingthe top facedown card. Ask thc spe.tator!o placehis threecardsbehindhis bach,to s€lectany onc,andplaceit faceupon lhetabl€.Younowsho$tharyouhavemada a succBsfulpredictionby revealingthat you havereversedthe matchidg cardin your packet,as follows:

The Deil's PlaYthings the ace,spreadthe cardsdoinSa singlebuckl€' l.If he hassclected tne wtrictrwitt rcveal two andthreefaceup, and lhe ale facedown' Rfrove the facedowncardwith the right hand,andshowthat is the ttrctwo' simplyspreadyour top two cards'holding z. - iitre trassetected a singh ctd, which will revealthe two face G. i""fonii tq*t"a "" two caros' lhe othcr of centrc uDin the doublebuclle ke€pingthe lop two cards the lhre€, 3.lf hc selected .qu"tJ a. onc, *ttictt will reveslthat the threcis the only cardface sai-thatasvouha"eonly madea singlepredrclronit couldhavebeen yourback .hiii.lio voi *i ,.p""t ihc effect.Plecevourcardsbehind place his lhe spcdatorlo procedure, ellowing i.pau,tt. i*"ct Repeal the lable up on place face one ""iin. and u".t irir* uif,iJiis -a the eff€ct a third time."gain '-'-r.fa.aG, tim€ you brilg your cardsftorn behindyour back to t"v, """tt anyof thc threecards'by a-.i"av'ln*t" co,t"41616s i6 16vcal ,rr." thaniust squaingthe ralher "t. However' earlier' rtre'orocedures_dAailed theceldsto showlhe spread I normally r.u"lation. iiia'iup "rr.t.a"tt and then removethe reversedcard with the right it ""t,."t, it in rhesameposilionin ihespread' "i.aliilr" rcplacing il;. i;ilii.";; this action Thecardsarcurenplaceo afler -d but not squting lhe spread yourpredictionfor lhe nexldemonstratlon' behindvourba;k to reverse lurncdovcr'.over but aI iou do is tum the cardyou had previously proceei Thecffec!is to ord€r arain 16uiingrtrepacfetinto thccorrecl facethe rhree lhat all so ovcr, revered.card trt"i i6" i"-"a ,hc 'irpii your back' placing behind lhem -samewav.before a chanccto readyourmind'in *ltino* iive lhespectalor s." ttt"i you "o,t had with him Placcyour packct lhe samea! ctrances, tact.'rtrrer adjusllhem,so that lhcy are.all secletly and i.irl'rJ-"""i u"ii "ga", top' and theolher thrc€runnmg on being card indificrent iacedown, rhc it. below in seouance '''irti-ii. and fourthcardsfrom ouita."tv to ao by tumingthe second thethird transferring position and lhen in ttr. ioo o"l" Uurr.i"ing them top. card downro the '-n.^.". ift" iJpiialrfercnl card' keepingit facedown,end pla'e it hislhre€cards to spread r-i ao*n on ,op'otrttapack.Askthespeclalor matc of thcone is dr' guess which one to i"". uo on rtt. raut..*_a lry made up his pack he has llthen the on f""e down rrJ". iott of"".a "nu his choiceanddropir facedownon top oflhe i'"i.i.t.ir'riiiti. oi"t "p chooscanorhcrcqrd Reechb€hindyour back n""[. s"r vou *iit no* lnJ"auitiv t.to". Itt" cardlhat maffiesup with lhr onethespeclator from face r,"t iu.i ei"..a ot rrt. pack.whichis easyb€caus'heselected to decide pack him and ask o"op i, t""e aownon lop of lhe uo theon€ matches thinks which hr "1"tJrl rr'o* ttii ,.tn"in;ngt*o faceup ones on top' face down it pack, to drop and thcn vouhavcius! dac;d olr the 3

The Deeil,s playthings Remove.lhe finalcardfrom behindyour.b.acl (rwosquard asone),and tts facr.and followoneofihc louowtngprocedures: Sxmpse r. rr ll.matchesrhespecrarortre.rnaininS taci ca.J-ontfreaUle. . tum thr righthandoverro showrhc face,and sayup .1W.lt, t.""t it..J ale correcl". pick up rhesp€ctator,s cara,a"a iface it on",tielace oi yours.ard rum de csldsfaccdo$,n. Thumboff,i,. r.p f*. a"*"-"*ii an_d droprr oDrop-"of thepacl, tlen dropthe refu;-fit;;;';;;:; r:p. farrly takc.offlhc rop two faccdowncards .f rhi;"ci,-;;'l# tnemrac€up. .,Welliflhesernarched. wh

ttre,nexr r*onairs inturn:il;;;;;il#tr::::'rtff*f

The Deil's

PloYthings

mixed condition. Removea coin from your pockct, and hand it to a speclalor, requesting that he should drop it o'l the back of any card on lhe tabl€, When he has done this, removc a second coin froln your pocket' and droD this five cards to the rtht of the one olr which the sp€ctator has Dlacediis coin. Start your counting of live, on the card imm€diately to coin, and ifyou run off the riShthand endof ihe richt of the sD€ctator's your at Ihe begiMingofthe left hand end, counting continue the sp-read, an crample ol this is shown in Figura l.

;:T:nTJ

berwe€n rhcrishtrhurnb*d-filg;., ;.i#j::: :_.]:1S,.T,t9l rnp^ossrdc tor rhcsp€ctators

ro secwhichca.rdof €sch-t;; ;;;;;; omer..rrus actjonwill prevcn!an observant spcctat;rnorineihai ii;e secondand lhhd.palls flom lhe lop conlain t" ;;*;;;:d;;:.:: Alrematrvety. if whenyoulookat theface ^cardi of yourcara,-yorifind ,^t. ,or ii sp€ctator's lasria". up .impii 1::s Jnatch+e i,ip-ii.ii"j downon top of rhepack,and lel thespccraror "rra, pt""e tls'1""rJ"rj ii". down,ontop ofall, andthenrevcalrhaia o"irsmatchasdelailed rn rncrarrerpan of lhe pr*ou, ,".*r"r'll"tt ..MONEY POWER'' following€ffaclwasevolvedwhilstendcavounn8 ,_The ro solveoneof Jack Avis'sproblens, throuShlhepackandremovcfivesersofcards, eachof rhessmr ,,-Run varue,A5 theseselsare located,arrangee4ch onc so al.ternale andrhendropthemfaccdown-ontherable.Atthat the colour; rhe;;;;l;;; or rnrs.op€rarion, you will havea packatof r*enry caras on tJ ralt. consrsrrns of fivcscrs of fourcardi,each sclof r";iu"rig .'rii,l.i"liii v€r_ue and atternarinSin colour. Ther. is no necessiry for rhc;ok;;i rwenlycarcts.ro alrernare in colour.An example il;i "i,h";;;d;';;;

i'{iiji3""1T#:it{:,Kff li.T,fr 33H;ttiir(-;d;t:

lnere.$ no scfiecyabout l}e cardsbeing ramoved, . but do roo mucharrention.to !hem.Sayrharyouwi bril;;;;;;;;;ifi; not draw ano do thls by holding tle packcl

face down faro.shuf fles.wherhir" rh;i;;;;;;; ;;1'til'.iil#tff

lff ffiT;

o€tars ol the rcversrfaro m6y be found in rtre ..oia rasrrionei'ivui;l e ect. in lhis book. The packet or c![cts must not b€ cut in -etsewherc oerw€ejr Ine rever$ faros. but you can cur as many trmesas you wish wnenthe shulfleshavc beencompleted. cgmptetcd.dc rwo revcrsefaros, hold lhc pac&el of rwenry caros -_jl:vjn8 lace dowr in thc Iefi hand and deal our a row of rcn cardsfac! d_o_:n de"tinsfromRIcHT to tefr.r";" ,-t.'.lrn'"iiig iJ 9nlhe.tabte, c&ds In the teft hand face up, and sprcadrhemin a fan ro stro* itr.i. A

COINPLACED PEsFOFMERS

wmW WWW WW f s clnos ro ntcxroFsP€crAToRs

KEYNUMBEAOSTAINED THISOUANTITY BY DOUBIING ONE ANDAODING OFCAROS

Figure1

The sDeoator has placed lhe coin ona catd in from the righl hand end of rhe row. and vou hav€counledfivc to the right of lhis coin, running oft the erd of lb; sprcadand continurngal lhc bcginninSagainlo bring to the Ddition mark€d P, where your coin is pl.ced. vou ' Exolain tirc freedom of choicc that hal be€ngivcn to tha spcciator' and whilsi doinc this. norc how many cardslhere src to lbe left of the coin nearestlhelefi hand end of lhe spr€ad,irrespcctiveof whelhcrthis coin has been Dlaced ficrc by the pcrformcr or tha speclalor. Double rhis number. and add onc to it. In thc illustralion sho*n, thrc are thret cardsto rh.lcft oflhecoin n.areslthc lctt hand cnd oflha spread,which when doublcd atd havinS onc added, gives a kcy number of s€ven' You now have to close up the face up spreadof tan cards in th€ left hrnd' bul in this action pick up a little fingcr break below th€ numbcr of cards cquaito the key numter from the FACE of lhis packel.ln our example, rh€ break would b€ b€low s€vencards. This can be done exlremely quickly, b€causeas you know exactly how many cards you have, you can 5

The Devil's Ploythings mentallycount from eith€r end to lessenyour wolk. For seven!you would couni three from the top end, rather than sevenfrom th€ face, and pick up your break,Turn the packetfacedown, and calry out a lurnover passat the break position. Now deal out lhesecardson lop of the ten alreadyon the table, bui this time, dealfrom LEFT to right, maki4 ten pairs of facedo\rrr cards. Talk aboutthe powerofmoney, and casuallyturn all pairsup wilhout coinson, to showthat noneof them malchin colourand valu€.Request the spectatorto remov€the coin from the back ofhis cardand then tum them over to showthat they matcbin botl colour and value.Have him do the samewith your coin, to find that no! only do thesealsomatchin colour and value, but they are also of th€ samevaluea! his pait. NolE*If you are performing wifi a spectator sitting opposite you, you canhand the packetof lwentyczudsacrosstohim for the first ten to be dealt out. This will automaticallyplacethemin right to left order from youl point of view, alrd as long as you deal the next ten, the lrick will reacha satisfactoryco[clusion. ..OIL AND QUEENS'' When I originallyworked out this effectI thoughtit only suitablefor magicians, in view of its surprise endinS, when related to the conv€ntional oil and water effect. However, I have found that this endingis also Sood for lay audiences.Originally, I usedaces,but Milt Kort suSgested that face cardswould give a greaterconirast,and sinc€ then I've alwaysus€dqueedsfor the effe€t. Before commencing,arrange the following nine cards itr order, reading from the top of the face down pack: 6C, 7H, 85, 9H, 7C, followedby the four queens,in actualfac! il is morelogicalto memorise the stackand removethe cardsfrom a shufflcdpack, and placethem on thc lable. The first fiv€ indifferent cards are not critical aslo their valucs, but you shouldsel€ctcardswhich are not too easilyremembered. For easeof explanationlet us now assumethat you haveth€ stackof cardson top of the face down pack. Rapidly count off into lhe right hand the top nine cardsof th€ pack but do not draw attentionto the quandtyyou dealoff. Turn them faceup, and hold them from abovein the righr hand, the thumb at the near shon end, finSersa! the far one, and forefinger on th€ face, in preparalion for the Brother Hamman packetswitch.Say ihat you havea Eroupof cardsalternatingin colour Illustateihis by dra*ing them into the left hand one by one, sequence. sliding lhem off with the left thumb, saying "black, red, black, red, black, red, black, red, black." As you mention eachcolour, you draw the appropriatecard off the fac€ofahe packetonlo thosein ihe right hand, and at cardnumberfive,

The Devil's PlaYlhings $hjch in our e\amplewould be lhe sevenof clubs you executelhe Brother Hamman packet switch, continuing th€n to deal through the remainderof the cards, Draw all attentionto ihe alterationof colours' and no attentionat all to valuesand counl them fairty rapidly keeping the cardsin modon, Souarelhe packeland turn il facedown in the lefi hand. Dealon the rabli the top aour cards in a packel.sayingas you do so. "red, black' red, black,leavingme with red, black,red, black " In line withthelatter remark, you appear simply to count the remaining foul face down cards in the left hand into the rieht, but you actuallydo this as follows Deal one off fairly, deal altot}ler off farrly on top of the first on€, now buckle the bottom ;ard so that the next two caDbe taken as on€, on top of those aiready h the right hand, and place lhe final card in the left hand beneaahthose already in the ri8ht. The effect is that you simply place four cardsfacedown on the table, statingthat they ar€ red, black, red, black,rvhichshouldleaveyou with four in fte hand,likewis€consisting of two of eachcolour. Now make a little maSicalgestureover the group you ate holding in rhe right hand, and lurn Ihem face up. Perform the standardghosl counr:to revealthal lhesecardsare all black. You are actuallycounting five as four, concealingtwo, but tbe techniqueis cxactlythe sruneas tlre standard four as four elost count. Turn these cards which in our examplewill appearto be all blarck,face down, and say "off coursethese will b€ . . ." qld then as you tum them face up' continue your senlence with the *ords ". . . the four queens",which shouldcomeassomewhat of a shockto lhe spectators, ..THE XARL LE FONG TRICX'' An extr.mely simpla principle is us€din this effect, but b€causeof the dressinsil is not at all obviouslo an audiencejust how very simplelhe ln addition to a pack of cards,you wlll requirethreedice' meLhod-is. Hand the threedice to a spectator,and suggesttha! he rolls thcm on ihe table a few times, to satisfy himself that thcy are quite convenlional Nowhand him a pack ofcarda, and requestthat he givesit a shuffle,and holds it face down in his left hand. Turn your bact on th€ proceedinSs,or if performing seatedat a table' .imDl' turn your head away. and rcquestthe spedarorto seleclone of rhe;ice and rou rhison the table.unlil he is salisfiedthat the uppermost number is arrivod at completely by chance. When he has done this, tell bim to notethc card that occupiesthis positionlrom the top of the face downDack.and rememberit carefully.Extendyout hand for thepack to bc pliced therein,blt do not look towards lhe dice a! all. If you are na;din8 whenpresentingthe trick, you simplyhavethe packreplacedin 1

TheDeeil's PlaYhings yourhands,behindyourback. Sayto anotherspectatorthat you would now like a secondnumber chosencompletelyby chance,and havehim pick up the two dice that werenot usedby the first spectaior,and ihrow theseon the table, io ar ve at a chaircetotal. lt is worth pointing out lhal the lotal of these lwo dice,shouldnot aqualthenumb€rthrown by lhe fi.sl spectator,asit would makethe tric* meaningless. Whilst you havebeenexplaininghow the secondnumberwasto be chosen,and possiblyletting thc spectatorroll the dicea coupleof times, until s.tisfi€d with his choice,you havequietly broughtthe packto the froDt of your body, or below the table, if performing s€aled,and rcversedthc ordcr of the top elevencards.Simplycounl elevenoff, alld replaccthem on top. to groupthe threedicefairly clos€toSether, Ask oneof the sp€ctators so that whenyou turn round, you will be unableto tell which wasthe original ona thrown, and which wer€the latter ones.Whenthey have irdicatedthat this hasb€endone,turn around,andquickly mentallyadd the upparmostflguresof thethreedicetogetler. Accordingto theanswer you obtain, you mustcarry out onc of thc following actions. . , l.If the totalis twelv€,do noding. Justplacethepackfacedownon the tablealongsid€the dice. 2.lf the totalis belowtwelve,you mustrenovefrom the top of the pack, cardsequalto the differencebetweenthe total, and twelve.I palm the cardsiDto the right hand, and then placeth€ pack on the table,retaininSthepalmcdcardsin my hand.You couldalsoundercut, bu! I prcfer thc effect to be that nolbing is done to the pack from thc momentyou turn round, until it is placedon the table. 3.lf the total is abovetwelve,transfcrthe differenc€betwe€nfie total and twelvefrom the bottom of tle pack to the lop, by any sl€ight you favour. I actuallybottompalmthe appropriatenumberof cards into theright hand,alld addthernto thetop in ii squarinSactionand then placelhe pack facedown on tha table. Figure2 sho*s threepossibiliticsin line with the abovcrules,and the appropriateactionis dctailedbeloweachsetof dice,to makeeverything quitcclear. At last wehavcreachedthe point in the trick, whercthep€rformerhas no morc*ork to do. Explainthat it would beimpossiblefor youto know thc position of the sel€ctedcard, and usuallythe sp€ctatorswill aSxee with lhis srstcrnmt.Ask the spcctatorwho rolled the first dieto nowpick it up from thc table. Saylhat the two remarningdicewerethoseusedto frc€ly sclcctanothernumber. Explainthat you will nowmalrcallycausetheselectedcardto leavethe first position it occupicd,and travcl ro thc position signified by the s€condthrow of dice,ht lhc spectatorcount down from the top of the pack,to the valueof thc two diccrcmainingon the table,and thentum ovartha card at this positionrevealingit to be the s€lectedonc.

The DertiI's Plqyt hings

EXAM

F;l

l. . l

'6

EXAMPLE 2

A)

V

r...

l"| r;1 l..l

l. al TOTAL OF12 SONO ACTIONREOUIAED TOTAL 13 OF SO TRANSFE8 r 113-12) CARDSFROMBOTTOM TO TOP Figure2

EXAMPLE3

Fn --1 .j) I..J F_l .l

I

TOTALOF7 SO TRANSFER 5 (12-7) CAROSFROM TOP TO BOTTOM

..MISSION ACCOMPLISHED'' The plots of lhe followidg two effects are by no mcansnew, ard mally methodshave been explained in the literature of card magic. All that is offered here are two furthcr methods, offerinS economy of motion, to bring about the desiredeffect. Removefrom the pack the kiDgof hearts,and the king ofdiamonds. l{old the pack face down in thc lcft hand, and thcn placc onc of tbe red kings face up at the bottom, and one face up at the top. Explai! to thc audiencetlat you have tumed tha kirus facc up as you do not wish them i o be selected.Riffle down the l€ft hand outcr com€r of tbe pack with the lcft thumb, requestinga spectatorto call stop at any point. When hc do€s so. bring the right hand over thc pack, ard cut th€ upper s€€tion off, holding it from above, thumb at thc naar sbort end, and fingers at the ol her. Extend the left hand seclion of the pack towards the sp€ctatorand thumb off the top card for him to take. Whilst h€ is looking at hi6 card nnd showing it to other memb€rsof the audience, reassemblethe pack. Riffle the outer left hand corner of thc pack again, until you reach the lpproximatecentrepoint, and bring the right hand over in exacdythe someaction as before, to cut off th€ upp€rmost section of the pack. As $on as the outer end of the pack is conccaledby the ri8!t fingers, drop rhebreakheld by the left thu$b andjusr lift the faceup king in the riSht hand.This is lhe standardmockpasstechnique,and you will find it quite dcceptiveprovided the cards are kept low and tilted downwards slightly, ro that the back are prominent. Have the selectcdcard replacedon top of the supposedlower half, and then appear to placc the upper half on top

The De|i|'s Pldy|hings of the selectedcard. Only on€cardis goingon top ofcourse, but lo add to the deception,when you bring this card over lhe left hand section, hold it aboul a quarlerof an inch abovethe lower packeland only lo*er to the top ofthepack asyou tik the outer short endofthe pack upwards, simultaneously making a squaring aclion with the right hand by moving !t to and fro along the short end of the pack. This procedure will completely cover the fact that only a single card is being added by lhe right hand. Point oul that the kinSs still occupy their original positions, by fanning the pack slightly to show them. Say that you will causelhe kings lo lcave the top and bottom of the packand travcl to the c€nue.Squarethe pack, and hold it in the left ha.d and say you will make lhe top king go first. Ex€cute th€ Erdnaic colou cha[ge, method one in legerdemaln section, of "Expcrt at the Card Table", to make the king appear to vanish, Really you hav€ simply transposed the position of the top two cards in the pack, and the king is now face up, second from the top. From thc audimce'spoint of vie\t, you havepassedyoul hand over th€ face up king, alld upon relnoving the hand, a face down card is revealed, and thc hand is empty. Saythat thc bottom orc has also gone, and show this ao b€ true by tuuing the pack face up, but as you do this, executea tunover pass around the cenlre of the pack. Turn the pack face down again, and spreadwidely on the table, so fiat the two face up kings are rev€aledarolnd thc centre, *ith the s€lectedcard caughl b€tweenthem. ..A FU'NTEER MISSION'' Before commcncing this effec!, er$ure that th€ kings of hearts and diamonds are saparatedin the pack. Rm the pack face up betwcen the halds, until you comc to a red king, brcak $c sprcadin two al this point, so that the king is on th. face of the section hcld bi the left hand. call attenlion to its suit and then rcturn the right hand spreadof cards above it, so that it can b€ grasp€dby thc fingertips of the right hand and taken away bencath the riSht hand sprcad in its nalural position, io88€d slighdy to tha lcft. Tum the ri8!t hand sprcad fac€ do*n and releasethe kiDg so tltat it falls face dos,i on the table. Say that wc now nced the othcr rcd king and mcnlioD the suit you ate now looldng for. Replacethe sp.ead of cards in the right hand face up, on !ho6a in th€ left, and coniinuc to thumb cards over with the l€ft thumb untrl you come lo the ncxt rcd king. Break lhe spreadat this point in the sameway as you did for the first one, and exhibitthe king at the faceofthc lefl hand spr.ad. Bring the ri8ht hand spreadover the lef! one to appearto take lhe king as bcfore, but really lakc two cards, the king, and the one immediatcly below it. Turn lhe right hand spreadfacedown, and apparentlythrow the king face down on top of the one alteady on the iable. Tum the right hand cards fac€ up, closing the spread slightly as you do so, lo conceal

l0

The DeYil's PlaYthings rhekincartherear,andplacethesecardsbelowthosein theleft hand'so u..ot; lhetop cardof thepackwhenil is lurnedface iir"iirti litu "irr down.Praciisethe abovesl€i8htin front ol a mirror' andyou w llno itt"rli ii quit. a""epliu..Ther;is nolhinghardlo it sinc€thecardsarein it's quileeasylo takeoff two ratherthanone' , ro.e"aiona,nun, iroin G-r"". or,it.-aleft ha;d seclion.Havingdrartnattmrionro the kinc. il shouldb€ removedand placedfacedownon the tablewlln a i;trii ;ri;i il, smoorhaclion,eiacrlvsimulatinglhe mannerin which $e __ iirst one wasfairlY rernoved ian *tl r""" aor"n'pack for a card to be selcctedand remember'd' pact, and haveit returnedto the top of lhc lef!- hand u.fiJ'm it to lhe top, bv mcansof the pass This will ;;il;;J]H;;d"i..l to &e top of the facedownpack$'ith a red king cara sefectca u*u lie belowir, mmediately .ir"-"."'wifi senarne two red kingson a missionlo find thesel€cted lhis,pickui lhel$o facedowokingsandflash .^r?i,rii "t "ou-tintion rnakingsurelhat thefaceof lherearonels not fronl one, rhetaceof lie .iooiJ iv onrvtpt.aaingrhemvcryslighllv.Dropthekingsfacedown' dn IoDof lhe Dack,and carryoul the Erdnas'slipcut whlcnglvcstne tne ofiuning thekingsinto lhecentre.but reallyjustloosens rmoreision pack' ar' 6nd the gone into down hai now iines rhe s"" pause, lhat starc '.J."ia. cid. After a slight for ihe selecred ..ir.-tri* r.""J;,, *a arenow bringingit r.rpto thetop aS6rnsav 'I ,rr-" ii""? -,i""a to lu{n lhe-top rhi;k thevshouldbelhereby now',andinvitea spectator foundthe indeed havc they rev€al that pa.f to r"". up, irr. o] irriff iu#t them' between \clected card,whichis sandwiched you wish, an addilionalconvinc€rcan be insenedioto lhe NorE:lf " " red to havca blackkingnextto lhe-second iou',ini,uv the effect' of ap-parintlyremoveat the beginning itit v*"tonging "ri, meansttlai itre black king will be switchedfor the red one' rt'ii rader than an indifferent card, alld therefore,at the stagein the irick wherethe facesof the kingsarc flashedbeforeplacingthem on-.p ol rtt. p"ct, you showa fair bit ofthc rearcard'eslon8 thefac€cardlo Byspreading parts"an arecovered. asth; approp;iate lefl comer it coverslheouter position, so that ttreteftin a diagonal right inner lhe your ovcr right lhumb placing and ki;g of Lh€black is Siven corner.a fairly naluralappearance ..S EPPINGSTONES'' chequer a very interesting s,rmetime aco. Karl Fulvesdevelop€d 'Pallbearers' Review" publhhed lhe in *trictr'*assuU5equenrly r'r,'r,iim, 'lhc tollowinaeffeclusesiheprincipleot thrsandappliesit to cardsir"_ir,r"tirt tl" packand removelhe valuesace,throughto kind'

The Devil's PlaYlhings

The De'r i I's PIaJ t hings makintsurethatyou remotefour ol lhe samesuil,theothettuiLsbeing we m]xed. Erhibit theselhirte€n cardsto lhe audience.slressrnglhat hate remotedonecardof eachvalue,and thensbufflethem up Say "ou iou will lav th€secards face down on the table in the form of magic it.pping.ron"t. Rrmov€cardsone by.onefrom the far" and placethem facedo*'rr on the tableas shownln flgure J

N

NI

r<: t.- \

ROW 1

\\

N\i

\\

N NJ

N

N N\

N N N

ROW2

ROW3

f.'-\ N\

S

F\

F]

N

fsl r....I

N

ROW4

FOW 5

Frsu'e3

I hr€ecardseo in row one l$o in lhe ne\I. andso on unlil all Lhineen rii-e lace down on lhe table The corner\ of lhe card5can i"ra'-i ,"ir'.i than jusl touch as shown in lhe illusLration'$hich is "".iL". ino* ir vo"ire working on a re\tricledarea The cardsplac€d "t.iui-tl in rows two and four, and signiliedby an S on the illus'ration,must be the four of the samesuit, for example,let's say, spades'

t2

Pick up ih€ remainderof the pack and say you will selectone card lrom i(, as a prediction.Look for any pait of cardsof the samevalue, .nsuringthat one of them is a spade For instance,you might decideto osethe two of diamonds,and ihe two of spades.Remov€the two of and placeit facedown on the table, as your prediction,and cut 'pades, diamondsto any appropriateposition in the pack that you rle two of lnvour for forciflg a card. The card you place asideas a prediction must llways be of lhe samesuit as the onesin rows two and four' Saythat the thirteen steppingstoneson the table reprcsentvaluesfrom rce to king, and you now requireone card to representa suit. Forcethe rwo of diamonds onto a spectatoras this card, but do not let him look at rr. Simply ask him to leave it face down on the table. Requestthe trssistingspectator to m€ntion any number he wishes.Whilst there is no r$triction on his cboice,h is advisableiosaybetweenfive andtwmty, so rs not to make the trick too tedious. Now ask him to pick up the face (lown suit card, and touch it on thc back of any oI the valuecards.As {)on as he doesthis, you maketh€ following simplementaladdition,to liccide whether you should tell him to start counting on the card he has rouched,or the next one. l If his chosennumber,plus the row number,gves an evenanswer, start countingon the NEXT card. 2.If his chosennumber, plus the row number,givesan odd answ€i, start countingon the ACTUAL card he is touching. N.8.-The row numbersare shownon the illustration,one througl to five. Instead of adding the row numbers, so:nemay find it easier to add the number of cards IN THE ROw to the selecled number,and tb€n apply rules I or 2 above. ln accordance*ith th€ rules mentioned above, he can then tap his face ,k)wn suil card around the st€ppingstones,moving from one card to !rolher in ary directionhe wishes,as long as hismovesarealwaysmade irom one card !o anotheronetouchingit. In other words,all movesar€ (liagonal,but compl€'tefreedomis givenasto how manytimesh€ wishes ro change direction. Upon finally rerching the numb.r hc sel€cted,he ,!oDs the suil card facedown on this card (it will alwaysbe oneof those ,irrked with an S in th€ illustration). 'lhe unwanted twelve cards are now gathered up and replac€don the l)rek. If you wish,you may flashthe facesof these,aslong asyou do not .xDosethe value card coffesponding to the value of your pr€diction (in ,,ur €xampletwo). Pick up th€ face down suit card from above the value card and point ,'rr thai of the thirteendiffer€nt valu€s,one hasbeenselect€dFlip the vrluecardfaceup, usingthe mexicantumover, sothat the two showsup Now saythat as you mentioned €arlier, the othet one would representthe Turn this faceup, and placeit alongsidethe valuecard, pointingour '|lil. rhat thesetwo cardsnow rcpresentthe two of spades.Have a sp€ctalor rl|rn over your prediction,to showthat it is correct.

The Devil's Playthings Additiond Climrx For a little extra effoit, you can add a fu her punchto the end of the effe{t as follows. Beforecommencing,secretlyplacethe 2D, 4D, 6D, and 8D into four different pock€tsofyour suit, so that you canimmedialelywithdrawany oneyou wish al a laterstagein the trick. I placelhe 2D in the right hand trouserpocket,tbe 4D, in the ri8fit handjacke!pocket,the 6D, in thelefl hand jacket pocket, and th€ 8D, in the left hand trouser pocket Thus, they rcvolve in numedc order around the body, aod their respectiveposi liorls are easily rernember€d. Whan you commencc th€ effect by removing lhe values from ace to king, you mus! ansue that your four like suitsare the 2, 4, 6 and 8 of spades, the other eight cards being rnired suits as before, but withoul spades,and it is of coursethe 2, 4, 6 and 8 that go into positions marked S in the illustration.Their order is of no importance. At the stagein the effect whele you remove your prediction card, you must ramove a spade as usual, as your prediction, but the forced card must bc a diamond. The values of thcs€two cards mirst be the same,but rememberthat twos. fours, sixes,and eighls,are not availableto you. FoUo* through the effect as oriSinally described,until you rev€al youl prediction cafd as being correct. Now point out lhal if you rev€rsedth€ rol€s of the suit and value cards, a completely diffcreni card would be producad. Say that you placed a card in your pocket as a secondprediction, before commencin8 the trick, and then reach in and produce the appropriale onc of tllc four, lo show that thfu prediclion is also correci When revcrsingthe roles of the two cards, you will always end with the 2, 4. 6 or 8 of diamonds, so producing it from your pocket is quite easy. Alt€mrlive M.thod The preceding routine has been dcsigned to convince lhe spectators lhat a seeminglyfree choice of valuc is made from an array of cards ftom ace to king, which ar€ not switchcd. After tbe value card has beetr selccted, you are able to show tlle other cards, conc€a.lingonly one, to add strelgth to the fact that a free selectlon has be€nmade. It is possible to remova the mexica[ tumover from the routine, but retain much lhe sameeffect, by adopting the following proc€dure. Have thrc€ cards of likc value on top of the pack before presentinglhe trick. Whiht thesecan b€ of ally valuc you choose,we wiil usefours as an exampl€ in this description. Also remembet lhe card immediately below the thre€ fours, which is actually the fourth one from the top of the face down pack. For our examplewe will call it the sevenofdiamonds. Note that this card must NOT be the fourth four, and if by a coincidenc€the fourth card down is the samevalueof the thre€like valuesaboveit, you mus! altcr it. Say you will write a prediction before commmcing lhe effect, and actually write the four of diamonds on a slip of paper' The valu€ being ahesameas your thre€ card stack, and the suit being thal of the fourth card from thc top. t4

The Devil's Playthings Run through the pack face up, and removethe valuesacethrough io trng, rhe suitsbeinSwell mixed. In removinSftese,ensurethat you place rhc lourth four on the face of the group of thirte€n cards. Having rcmovedthe cards,exldbit them spteadslightly in th€ riSht hand, a[d rhensquarethem up on the faceofthe pack. In this action,pick up a l€ft lirrlefinger breakabovethe lowermostthreecards.Havingsquarcdthem on the face, lif! the ten cards above the fingcr break up, holding them ircm above by the riSht hand, fingers at the far short end, and thumb at rhe near one, and twist the lefl hand down briskly so lhat the pack can be Irlacedfaca down on the table. Turn lhe batch of len cards face down, and give lhern a shor! overhand \huffle, retaininS the four spot at the face. Drop lhem face down on top {,1 rh€ pack and deal them oul to form the steppinS stone layout, as \hown in the illustration. Deal rows numbercd one, lhree and five first, and finally rows two and !i)nr. Th€selast four cardsdcalt will all be fourspots. You are in a position to forcc t]le seven of diamonds which {recupies the'low top positionof the facedown pack, and the trick proce€ds rxactly as in the lirst method. When you corne to th€ final point of (hecking your prediction, no mexican turnover is nece8sary,for the [)wer card of lhe two remainin8 on lhc table, will always ba a fout spot. ( are should be takrn in picking up thc twelve cards remalning, so tltal rhc rhre€ fours from rows two and four arc kept al the back of the other (&rds, and not expos€dif you flash tha faces of the unwanted cards. lf you wish to add lhe additional climax to this rnethod, you will need ro pr€load the foul pockets of your suit with writtcn predictions for the \.ven of haarts, spades,diamonds alld clubs. You would distribute these In known suit rotalion around tlre pockels, so that any particular one t ould readily be produc€d. Thc value will always ba a seven,and only the wit will vary. ..,I'HE WACXY CAND TRICX'' I)oker dice do not seemto have be€n us€d very $cady in magic, *hich rr surprising b€causethcy crrtainly add intcrest to an effed. Sode time nlo Jack Avis poscd a problem involving such dice, and although reveral irlutions have been offcred, none really comply striclly with the tcrms of thc original problern. Whilst toin8 with this problem, wilhout coming ut) with any real satisfactory solulion, I did discover scveral off-shoots, ,'rc of which was the following. lhc basis of this effcct, is lhe fact tlat very few p€ople know much rltrrut poker dice, and beli€v€ therc arc many more possiblc combinaI krrli available when aranging thcm, than there really arc, if you r€quest rhot cach die has a differ€n! vslue showinS. Ilcfore commencing the effect, arrangc the lop sevencards of lh€ fac€

The Devil's Plajthings

TheDevil's Playthings

down pack as follo*s: QS, X, 95, AS, JS, KS, l0S. The actualorder of the five spadesrunning in positionsthreeto sevenis of no importance. Now placea left handinner cornercdmp on the bottomcardofthe pack, Give a sp€ctatora set of five poker dice and invite him to arrange them on the table, so that thereis a different cardshowingon the top surface of each.When he has done this, Iook at them to seeif he has a queen showing,if so, proceedas in (l) below, and follow by (2), if not, go straightto (2). l. Say$at beforeproceediogwith the effecl you will do a little test to seeif the almosphereis suitable.Reachover aod take the die with the queen showing and place it in front of you. Double lift the lop card of the pack, calling atlention to ils value;turn it face down, and rcmove the top card. Rub the faceof this card on the queen,and then turn it face up, to show it has turned into a queen. Comment that conditions seemto b€ favourable, and replace the queen face down, on top of the pack. Cive the die back to th€ spectator,and ask him to placeit with the others,but to turn it, so that another card is upp€rmost,which of coursemust not be of the sameas any of the four on th€ other dice. 2. Ask the spectator, to fre€ly selectany die, and slide it towards you, st.essinS that the selection is completely in his hards. \rvhatever valueshowsat the top oftbis die (it will be an ace,nine, ten, jack or king), spell it out, a card fo. each letter, placing the cards as spelt, from the top of the pack, to the bottom, and finally placing the one falling on the last letter face down on the table. Cut the pack twice, ending up with the crimped card on the botlom again. Rcquesthim to freely selectanother die, and place it in front of you. Spell the value of this one, again placing cards singly from the top to the bottom of the pack, for each letter, until th€ last one is reached, which is placed face do*n on the table, together with the one akeadythere.Cut the pack twice,returninSthe crimpedcard to lhe bottom, Repeat this procedure for a further two dice, bu1 at the completionof the spellidgof the value of the fourth one, look rcwardsthe final die that t}le spectatorhasleft, and ifit spellswith three letters (ace or ten) cut the crimped card to lhe bottom as before, but if it spells with four le$ers, cui the crimped card to the top. Finally, spell out rhc value of the last die. Placing the spelt card aside wit}t the other four. Stressthe ftc€ selectionofth€ spellingsequence, etc. and then pick up the five face down cards and turn them, faces towards you, D€al them out, one by one on ahetable, to show thar the spellinghas found the actualvaluessiSnifiedbythe oneson thepokerdice,and asanadditional bonus,they are all of the samesuit. I havefound that you can increasethe effectdightly by finally dealing the five cardsout in the sameorderasthe dic€on thetable.Placethedice sideby sidein a line asth€ spectatorpushesthem towardsyou, io make

lhis easyto do, and you can quickly selectthe appropriateonesftom the lan and deal them out in an overlappinS spread. The spectators will normally assumethat they came out in the cotrect ordel as they were spelt,so you get an additionalbonus,wilhout any additionalwork.

t6

..THE LEAPER AGAIN'' This is a variation of the classictrick invenled by Charles Jordan. The cffect is extrerncly direct, and very startling to all audicnce. Have the pack shuffled by a speclator lh€n dividcd into two approximately equal halves on the tabl€. W}lilst he is doing lhis, obtrin a litde Inoisture on th€ tip of your right ha[d s€cond finger. Raqucst the \pectator to hand you eithcr hatf of the Dack. Hold these face down in your left hand and spreadthem sligihtly as you are talkinS, to allow your secondfinger to transfer a littlc moistur€ onto the face of the top card. square the packet and squeezeit between the thumb and fingers of the lcft hand to enswe that the top two cards ltrill temporalily remain rogether. Ask a spectator to mcntally decide on a number b€twa€n five rnd twenty. Wben he has done this, combencc to dcal the cards in your packel face up in a pilc on thc table, counting aloud as you do this and rsking the spectator to remembet the card that falls at his mentally sclectedposition. Your first two c?fds will of coursc go down as onc duc ro the moisture.Deal.Uht throughyour packet,and then pick them up lrom the table and tum them face down again into the left hand, in this trction push the top card over about h3lf an inch to free it from the one lnmediatelybclo* it. Hand the packet to the sp€ctatortaking great care that no false moves trr all are made from lhe moment you pick up the group and hand il out ll)int out that you could nol possibly know the position of the mentally \clcctedcardin this sectionof thepack. Now pick up lhe other facedown tucket from thc tablc for yours€lf, and hold it in your left hand, in much Ihc sameway thc sp@tator is holding his. Explain that you would like the \|c€raror ro deal his cards face down onto the table until he has reach€d position,so thal his cardwill be the top oneof the pile he has hir selecled {lcak down, i.€. if he thouf[t of t€n, he would deal cencardsonto the rrbl€. At the sametime, deal cardsdown ftom your half of the pack in flnison with him, and when he has completedhis dealinStake the rcrnainingfacedown cardsfrom him, and placethem facedown on top ,'l rhe cardsremainingin your left hand. Ask the speclatorto coverhis ,k.rh cardswith his right hand so lhat no'one can touch them. As if to rllu\tratethis, cov€ryour dealtcardswith your riShthand, but reallyuse rhir actionto add a cardto the top of them which you havepalmedfrom rhc top of the facedown group of cardsheld in yout left hand. I he positionat this slageof the trick is that the spectatorand yourself nrc cachcoveringa dealt packetof cardswilh the right hand. Ask the

t1

The Devil's PlaYthihss

The Der)il'sPldYthings to remotehishand,andturnlheLopcardof hl\ packetfaceup' \oeclaLor yo!r lo findhiscardhasgone Sloqlyremove andheshouldbe5urprised the tha! to show card the top packet turn over youi and iight tranatrom l€aped across. card has selecied ,,THE X PLUSONE ACE TRJCX'' (WHEREX IS THE NUMBEROF ACE TRICKSYOU ALREADYKNOW). to bea sleiShtmuchne8lededin cardmagic' dealseems fhe second reputationof great difficulty On the other of ih because Dresumably bv manylo beaneasvsleight'is much t""J. irt.io"tii tit,, opinion.thal ir wouldbebetterfor cardmagic' -nsideled .".tti.iiJl "rin. "if rii" r""ona a"A *.t" usedmorefrequentlyandthedoublelift a lot less' i"""iniv io .r*ur. naturaldoublelifi is \erv difficuh' althoughthis and it is forlunatefor the accepled. i""iJo.l noat""t ,o" begenerally theabilhyto readminds haven't manvnaUirulaouUte-tift;sthatlhey tricks Someexcellent an audicnc€ to sleighl rttis t tt.ti aimonstrar;ng includ' Miller' charles bv T€.hnique". Caid in "-e"pert aiscriuea ".r. ini a veri nne acetriil usinga seconddeal, this is anothbracetdck' thesam€sleiShl usinq --iii"-ii.""gt, ,rtip*i and remolelhe four acesTurn thepackface theacesfacedownon top Allernativelylel a spectalor dr-op down.and i.mouetheaceior anyfour cardsof likevaluehemayprefer'andplace facedown oo top of the Pack. then _ Dealthe acesfacedownin the fotm of a letler T asshownin Figure4

Figure4

I he first one is dealt extremelynearyour edgeof the table and the next rhreeare dealtabout eighleeninchesaboveit, in a line from left to right, scconddealingon the lasl on€ deall. Now deal three catds face down on lop of the ace nealest you' r{!ersins lheir order in dealingthem down. Deal lhree more cardsonlo r.rchof ihe upperthreeaces.Plac€lhe pack facedo*n asid€on lhe table. ro your left, Briefly summarisingthe previousactions,you have dealt threecards ,'nro rh;ace in positio; oneofFigure 4and lhen lhreeonto eachof those rn oosirionstwo. rhreeandfour, andlhepack ha! now beenplaced€rside' Pick uD the thrce caadsabovethe ace at position four, and tuln them taceuo. showinrrhemto $e audience.saying'three cardson lop of this irce . ind thenicplaccthem facedo\flr on ihe ace.Do lhe samewith the iieao at oosition three, but aho flash lhe ace below th€ three indifferent .uti.. tjo ttt. same at Dosition two, and again show all four cards, rcDlacinsrhem in the samepositionon the lable Pick up lhe facedotxn nacketai positionone, andhold it in the lefi hand, thumb off lhc firsl ilree facedown cardswithout altcringihcir order' and hold thernin a lmall fan in the right hand Turn the card remaining in the left hand ,'ter- to show it ii an acc and ask a spectalorto commiLlhis ace lo rrn:morv-asit is a leader.Turn ir tacedownin lhel€fl handagain.andgo 1.,reDl;celhe lhreecardsheldin lhe righl hand backon lop of it' bul a' {)on as the lowermost one is replacedabove it, lurn the upper two face In and flash their faces,saying lhat therc are rhrc€ cards above the t.rder acealso. ln replacinglhe two cardsyou havejusl flashed pick up r left littl€ finger break belowthem. lnvite a sDectatorto carefully pick up the four cards at position four' trnddroD them face down on top of thoseat positionthte€, and then to rrke thi;combined heapofeight cardsand drop it on the four at position rwo. wlilst he is doin; this, takc the leaderpacketfrom the lefl to the [!hr hand and Dalmtie two cardsabovethc little fingcr breal into the ,,itrr trand, using the samehand to place lhe lowest two squaredup oirt.atv on rtreuule, back in posilionone Thereis amplemisdirection ;,u rhis palm if you draq altenlionto lhe carewith which the olher lhree by lhe spectator' I'cnpsshouldbe assembled carefullyso thal the aces sa\ rhat vou askedfor them!o be assembled to show rhat lhis is so ginal positions, offer and *ould rerainrheir o scoop the assembledpackei of twelve cards towards you with the right t rnd, and in this action add the two palmedcardsto the top. Immedi rrcly lurn the packet faceup and placeii in the lefl hand, ard with $e lclr iand thu;b off no morethan sevencards.Exhibit this smallspr€d r(, rhe audi€nce,pointiu out that thereare still lhree cardsabov€each l|.c. You can illustratethis by holding the spreadin the riSht hand, and ,orDting off the cardswiih the left hand forefinger. squar€the packetup and turn it facedown, droppingit on top ofthe l9

l8

The Devil's PlsYthings

The Der)i I's Pla! t hings remainderofthe packplacedasidepreviously.Pick up the pack and hold it face down in tte left hand. Now lean forward over thc table, and deal the cardsout in a spreadas follows: threefaceup, one facedown, three faceuD.one facedown, threefaceup' andone faceclown However,you musr seconddesl on the last thre€cardsdeah down. The effect is that you are agarn showinSrhal the acesare fourth down' throuShoulthe crouo oftwelvecards.You dealthem in a spreadon the table,righl away i.om the masrerheap,so tha! no allention is on lhis heap. Request a spectator to snap his fingers ov€r the backs of each face do*n ac€. When he has done so, ask him to removethcm one by one and turtl them face up. Under the misdirection of this action, top paln into th€ right hand th; top two cards of the pack' as you take it from-the left lo rh;right hand, and plac€it fac€do$l| on lhe table, to lhe riSht hand side.Jus-tbeforeihe sp€.latorrurnslhe third supposedaceover, to find that i! har vadshed, saoopthe l€ader pack€! towards you with the right hand, placingthe thumb on the faceofit asit comesoverthe rearedgeof the table, and then turn it face up and throw it in a slight spr€ad on th! table, saing, "no, you will not find them lhere,becauselhey ar€ hele "

All.rnrllt€ Method

by,usins_aobor@ ,u.crecrmayarsobeachieved 111|!:[T,il,l

thereader liilL;iii lL,lli'"ffirlill."Liili"""l;;;on.arrhougrr a rhe i"o prace iokerin ' il",J;1;#5rii,ifriloo'ffi,'a."r".',io'

iliJ{il $r.I'i."[:fl ["li.llis:: *]','mlfi r;;'1;"1;,$"**;i

rir,'xl''*:*""..l"l**'*t'*:::**$:riT:l:; rh. I rdnasemdhd lo any o,h* I h"ut *lth..€leclcd card and rhen I hc oerformernow asksfor the pos(lon 0 lastcard'-i'e' the on dealing posilion, bollom ,,,,1',iri""" i. ,rti "".cd t rnr rnvitethe spectatorto checklhls carq'

;;';ii: ;;J;".iii;;** ";' v""r,'-"11-f "#3l,l}""f ly':',f,; 'l"Jilf

tffi thisvouI'11:l;eca;[ aoine ,|,,i""'liii ifl i?'ii""iT "iirii-r'.I' b'ine a"d

cad i'rre i'LT,l#l',ll'-xl?;;;;; Itl;:l ii?1,11,1"'*.T rln.clfectto a conclusion

.JAY BEE TRANSPOSITION" This is a nice opening effect, as the climax is reached fairly quickly' ahhough it can also be done at arry potnt in your progrzunme. ExDlainrhal you needa full packofcalds bul nol thejokcr' and so run rhrouih fte faceup pack,removinglhcjoker and handinglhe remajnder of lh;Dack lo a sDechtorto be shuffled Placethe joker inlo any con_ uenienipockei with the righl hand, and immediatelypalm it out again' When the spectator has completed shuffling ask him lo not€ any card in lhr Dackand remembcrits posilion from lhe top. Erplain that he will tind this easierif he choos€sa number lhat is nol loo large' allhough there is of course no rcstiction. Take care that he understands that the position should be noled from the top of the face down pack, Take th€ pack back fronl the spectalorand add your palmedjoker to thc toD. A,sklhe sDeclatorto tell you the position he decidedon' and when he does so. deal cards face up on the lable to onc lessthan rhis numtter, using the seconddeal Deal the ne card fairly, face down on top ofthe fac€up onesalreadydealton the table.Ask lhe spectalorif he ac;eesthat this is ihe cardal lhe positionhe chose lvhen he doesso' ask him to starethe narneof thc card, and then havehim tum the card face uD to revealtha( il k now lhe joker lhal was seeminglyplaccd in the .xrket beforethe effcct commenced.Palm lhe top card of the pack inlo ihe right hand and produce it from th€ pocket into which you placedthe ioker earlier,to concludethe transposition. 20

,.I

TWO AGAIN. AGAIN" ^KING

i; ,i:;T[1,"":,il1l:.T'a?'H;# ,,,ii}*l'.:ff""[[T$.lff ""il,lllTin"

lhemfaccuponthe undrhrceofclubsandplace

jn*'*;l'*l'':l ilIr:ilfif#fi f,iH::r;,::lu,s,nt pacx "".,,,"o

which will givc you to the threccardsyou naveremoved' 'trn* a(cntion orrhe againDropthemfaceupon-rop

:::;:.ili;;:hl;ft;em thclirtlcfin8etbreskup' al-lsixcardsabove iiii,ii,iiti ,'rti-* Dropone tnd fingerups fiumb "iiir,ins uieen theleft ir;t, ,'i,,i 'lii..iiiti

;*-:",tli*nn,ll,*l;;i'l**in:s:$lrlii ii,lil,il

rightftumbattnenear lhemfromabove' r'olding """'r'.rurt,rv'

\iT,it""l'.l"iii lll',l]fl ;H'|"'lf iiirr l'*';*,lliu':*[".'ix.fi

r'"y:ml;i?'lii,:!! ;*,'H',1il"Til1,-""11''J"'J:i:rliffi rightthumbwith lheleft r,'nof thetwo andtakeup !h€Dreaxlrom the l0of lhe'FindersKeepers" Figure i,,i""ii"""..rrtitplsi,.n isshownin

:Ltl*:Tli#; ,,iiEm;*':x;;:Tllii,tx;iii.lSTili:H 2l

The Deyil's Plalthings faceup on the pack,outjogged slightly,with the aceat the face.Brinc therighthandoverto lifr lhethreefaceupcardsoffthepackanddo thi; by placingthe thumb at the near short end of the joggedcards,and fingersat the far one,andlifting !h€thumbendfirst andihenmovinr the riSir handtowardsthr bodyslightly,andlhe packa\raytrom lhe bodv slighdy,so tharonly lhreecardsareactuallyremoved, theothersbeinc squarcdup with the fac. do*tl pack.Placethe threecardsremoved,stili faceup, on top of the card caseso that they can be pickedoD without fumblinglater. SpreadthemsliShtly,just undera whiteborderwidth, so that it can ba seenthat threecardsare present. Ask a spectatorto fr€€lynominateth€ oce,two or threeof clubs,and point out that the onehenames,will bethe oneyou will usefor the trick. Whilst cxplainingthis, cut threecardsfrom th€ top of tle Dackto the face,andpick up a left lirlle fingerbrcakabovethebortom;ardol rh€ pack. Adopt one of the following proceduresdependingon whichcard he selects. l.Ace of clubs:relesse the left little fingerbrcak,as it will not be required.Cut off abouthalf the packand placcit on thc table. pick up lhc threecardsfrom thecardcasestill faceup, andDlacethemon rop of rhishalf andgiveit a singlecut. to scndrhemio rhecentre. Casuallycut lhe remaininghalf in your hand,andplaceit facedown on th€ table, alongsidethe other one. 2.Two of clubs: undercuthalf the pack, leaving the bottom card b€hind by meansof the left little finger breakand Dlaceit on the table.Civethehalf on thetablca singlecut. placethehatf rernain_ ing in the lcft hand,facedownon thc table,anddropthe catdsfrom thecardcasefac€up on this half. cive it a singlecut to sendthemto t}le celtre and leaveit alongsidethe other half. 3. Threeof clubs: undercuthalf the pack, and placcit facedown on the tableand in doingtlis, leavebehindthe cardbelowthe l€ft little fingerb.e3k (theoriginal bottom cardof the pack).ptacethc three faceup cardsfrom thecardcase,on top of the faccdownsectionon th€ lable, andgiveit a singlccut to sendthemto lhc cmtrc. Casually cut the remaininghalf in theleft hand,andplaceit facedo*,Don the tablc, alongsid€the other one. Havcthe spcctstorassisting,placethe forefingcrof eachhand.on toD of eachhalf, so that no cardscan betampfled with. Sayyou wil causi cardto lravelfromonchalf to theolher,leavinrlhetwo his nominared oncsbehind,Havehim removchisforefingers. unwanted ands;readrhe halvasfacedownlo seelha! lhishashapp€ned. respecrive Thc;eshould be a sliShtpause,bctweenthetime the spectato.placeshis fingcraon the backsof thecards,andlheclimaxof lheeffeq, ro male him iorqetinro whichheaprherhreccardswereplaced.Thisis because if henoirinates the ace,it docsn'treallytravelat all, but stayswhereit is, and the other two cardsmakethejourncy. 22

TheDeril's ploythirlgs ..IMPACT" Theideafor this effeclcame toInewhilst readingtheexcellentbook by VerneChesbro aodLarryWast, called,,Tricksyou CanCountOn,'. In th€reis an effect called"Ajr Mail',. in which a card vadshesfrom one envelopeand reapp€arsi! anoth€r.In recentconversationswith Aler( Elmsley, I foundthatin hr!€arly exp€iim€nlarions with hisghostcounl, hehadusedit for causing r csrdto;anishwithinar envdofi. I hopethc readerwill forgivetbe ralharprecntioustitl€ I havegiven6is effect,but in showingit, I havefoundthtt thc climax is extremelystronSfor the comparativelysimplcme.rns enrpbyecl to brinSthe effecl about, Oblain four envelopes, into*hich a playint card will just fir nearly. (^ ul lhe llapsott theenvclopcs. sOthat theyIOol muchlhCsamcfrom eitherside,and finally,cura holein lh€ faceofeach.sboutoneinchin diametcr.and positioned at thecentreof the face.Afiangerhe four envelopesso ftat fie thirdonedownfrom th€ toD hasthe cut out hole pointingtowardsrhe floor.ard rheoth€rlht.e€iravethe holcsuoocrmosr.Placelhe mvelop€s in yourpocker.logethcrwilh the foui accs Irom a pOcl.andyou arcalllcrdylo D€rform. _ Removelhe cardsalld mvelolcafrom your pocket.and placelhe ac€s tac€up onthelaDle,Asl(aspectator iShisfavourite tOtell youwhichaCC oneand asan.c\amplclq 9ayhesuggcsrs diamonds.Sprcadlhe four enverop€s out rn a tan,holdmg therhin lhc left haid, asshownin Figure J.

OPENINGPOSITION

ENDINGPOSITION

Figure5

You can ofcoursc flah lheholesin dre first, secondand fourlh, bul not the third which h rcversed. PoiDrour $ar.ech envelopewill jusr hold oneof the aces,and illustrale this by taking each acefrom thc table, and 23

TheDevil's PlsYthings

The &eil's PlqYthings insertingit paflially into each€nvelopeface down, ensuringthal you envelope. olacethenamedacein lhe revers€d the situationwill look somcthinglike At lhis stagein the proceedings rhe left ha[d sideof FiSure5, which sltowsall four aceshaving been stlll in thcir insert€d.You cannow turn the handoverwith the envelop€s sDreadcondition. to showaUis exactlyas you claim, and one acehas beeninsert€dinto eachenvelope.Closethe fan of envelop€sup, and in. Dushlhe accscomplelely Th€ placinglhe lastoneundcrnealh. Chostcounlthe four envelopes, showing of the ac€s will seewhat appcarsio te the four backs spactators throughthe cut out holes.Sayyou will now try and caus€th€ €nvelope cortalning the nominatedace,to reverscitself within the oiher thte€' Slowlyspieadfte cnvelop€sout bctweenyour hands,so that it is seen thisenvelope $a! thethird from thetop hastumedfacedown.Remove you havebc€n that whilst State the table. ald drop it, stil facedown,on yet if you you do not know over, turn aa cnvelope in making successful havcmadetheright oneturn over,but beforeremovingthc ac€io check, vou will reDeattheeffect. - Turn thethreeenvelopes in yourhandoverso thattheholesfacethe face down onefrom the tableandinsenit s€condfrom floor. Pick up thc thetop, saing that they nowall facethe sam€wayagain.Casuallycounl th€mllrom handto hond without alteringtheir order, but showinSthat they are all facedown. Squaretbe packetof mvelopes,and tum urem ov;r so that the cut outs are upDermostChostcountthcm, placingthe last one underneath.so that once again the backsof the acasshow throughthc cul oul holes.Startto spread!hem,asif you areSoingto reoeaithe effectof makingone rurn faccdown' and lhenpausc,and it wouldbea betlertrickifyou couldmaketheselecled sl;le tharperhaps out ac€turn faceup within its envelope.Slowlysprsd the four €nvelopes into a vridefan, and it will be seenthat the namedorlcis indeedfaceup within its envelope.I normallynow pushall four acesup for abouthalf in this stat€on thetable.Restassuted their lengtha.llddrop the envelopes that somcbodywill pick thernup to take a look. Presentediorrcctly, the appearanceof the ace face up within its envelopeis quiteastounding,and you may find it evenmoreeffectiveto handtheenvlbpesto a spectatorpiior to theclimaxof theeffect,andlet him spreadthem out within his own hands.since no movesappearto havetakenplaccsinceshowiruhim that the aces4reall facedorur within tbeir envelopes,thc exptessionon his face whenhe spreadsthem and firds his acefaceup is amusingto watch.

Thc patterth€mewhichregistersin a veryamusinS{,ay with aIIaudieDce. irick is comparativelysimpleto perfom, so rcad on wilh confideDcc. Secretlyravers€the lowerhatf of thc pack(half pass)and pick up a left Iurle finter break.bdweenthe two halves Bnng the riSht handovcr lhc oackto-aoparmtiycul off aboulhalf, and as rh€right handlakcsits oorrionoi cards,usethe right thumblo drop the two cardsimm€diarcly aboverheleft little fingcrbreakto thetop oflhc lowerhalf.Removcthe sectionof cardsnow abovethe finger breakand fan thcm glightlywirh rheright handturningthcmfaceup say you ar. Soingto mix rhepackilr a facJuo facedowncondilionandpushthe faccup fatrnedcardsinto thc facedon'nleft handsection,al a Freakformcd by pullitrgdown with the left thumb on the outar lcft haBdcomer of the catdsi! the left hand. Havingpushcdthe riSht handcardsin, squarcup tha completcpack.. Dou--bie undcr+ut one card from top to bottoF, turn tha wholepack over and do a calual faro shuffle retainingtop and bottom cards iu oosirion.Turn lhc packcompl€tclyovcr again,andexcculeasolher faro ituffle maintaining top and bo(om cards in positron. These faro shufflesare not accurateonesand the only rcqurementis that thc top and bottorn cardsremainin position whenone half is push€dinto the other.You shouldnow beleft wfuha packof cardsin theleft handwith a facedown cardon top. Doubleundercutthis card from top to bottom, savrhat for thetrick vou will useoneof the faceup cardsin lhe psck. r;rn (hepackcompletelyoveragain,and call altentionto lhe card face up on top-l€t's sat it's the five of spadct.Ask a speclatorto cxtcndhis handpalm upwards. Tum thc fiva of spadesfacedownon top of thc packbut usathe hit doublelift lechniqueso !h&ttwo cardsalc tumeddownasonc. Rernove rhe loD face down card and plac€it on the spectator'spalm and then of lhe packon top of lhiscard,sayingthat theidea Dlac€ ihc rcmaindcr of the trick is to causethe fiv€ of spadesto magicallytravel from the bottomto the top of the pack,but in additionto doingthis, on its *'ry uD.it hasto turn all the faceup cardsin the packfacedown' so that by rlie time it reachesthe TOP, all the pack will againb€ facingthe satrre $av,As youreachtheword'top' in yourpaltet,turnthetop cardof the afldplacelhis crrd naik faci up, and showlhat il is the liveof spades you of thc s€ntencein the rernainder conclude iaceup on thc table. As take the pack from way round, the right all being referenceto the cards out the card'su il you havcgonerilht rh€spectatorand start to spr€?rd rhrourh the Dackdown !o the lastcard, whichyou tum ovcr and show, rhuss-ilenllyproving that the fwe of sp.desreallyhasgone.

..THE OVERWORXEDCARD''

..THEOLD FASHIONEDWAY"

This trick is basedupononepublishedby Bill Simon,andalthoughlh€ hardling is slightlydiffermi, the main featureofferedto the readeris a

Removefrom thepackeightpairsof cards,eachpair beurgof the same In other valueand colour. However,no valuesshouldbe aepeated. 25

TheDevil's PlalthinSs words,if one pair is the nine of heansand ninc of diamonds'another pti .*t Noi contltt of thcnineof clubsandlhe nineof spadcsFor !ia.Dli. *. vou temovemiShtbeas followsrloH' loD' 5s' 5c' thepai$ ""ta. iilzt. bs, oc, efi, co' lH' ?c' ?s,9D,9H.Asvouremove lhe table,so up on row, facc overlapping tr-o* itr. p""f_,pi"". rft"min an you dolnS' are what apectalors to thc thar _ it is aDDarent i"rinr i,fiou"a rl. ciShtpairs,plsct thc remainderof thepackalide' of iairi' andtum themfact down' sayingthal you souarJu-othe spread '" litlh, lo thal lhe speclalorshave no idcr as to the *i]i-nti*-rrrir Mix lhcm by rapidly doing thr€€ revcrs' faro o.titio" "".a.. "i on€ cardup, alldon€downthroughouttnepacxer is, Thal ahuffl.s. -y iog anJrrren irrlp oiri t-n. ioSgedcardsarld placcthcm underor abovethe reverscfarosare 'in' or 'out' shufflesis of ia."i"ing rtif. wrt"li, th-csc b€twcenshuffles.nor afler all lhreeare not cut no consciuencc,uur ao comDletcd. --fil"i"o rft. mixinS,dcil thepacketof six!'€n cardsinlo lwo "o.of.l.a i""I"g alter;ately Handoneof theseheapsto eachof f"*;;;Gil;, specr;rorA ro curhis facedownpacketof i;;;ili;;;Gr4"":Ask

sq@ N N @

N Figure6

26

EACHSPECTATOR CAN STABTAT A N Y P OIN TA N D OE A LH IS 8 C A FOS IN IN A C IR C LE WHICHEVEF HE DIRECTION

wtsHEs

The Dellil's PlaYthings them in a f&c€ eichl cardsas many lim€s as hc wishes.?rndrhendealcan dealaround he lhat poinling out o" lhe lable. i.i*r a-r"f. 6 seeFigurc "i ""tai ,iOr to lcft'lusrasie wishcs iigi'i ii.'riiiii " a3he timcs many as g cards "' packat of cighl his ri"". tp""i"io. Hc by A dealt his cardsin a circleon lop of rhos€ *i;cs. ;d lhcn dcil""i to lcft or'lert to rislrr f;om rhccirclc'.a.ddcal ;#i;"f;Aitril;; d€ll will they dircclion which in .ii,i. ol"ioutrv' inc. *cy havcd'cid'd Thiswill

*i*ai

direction' ,itl"-,ii,i.i iJ ai aghtcardsin rhcsame

pairsof cardsin a circlc' ,e*ti '-ir". io .igitt fac. ao"n ftcac pairsdroppingoneon lop of rhc oths' to, s "olL"i "oit at any-poini in lh' circle' 6nd 8'ther tratt t"i'"g"itiit.-""ouectinSto.lcft, and thcn handthemstill facc right or ih;-up trom tcft to rigbt that havcprobablyalrcadl gucssed i"*., iol.". -"vi"g s.v ,rt"t irtc speciarorslhey canmatchup' Tum the cards ,o't"" fto" msnyDairs rou ni" if ch€ckir8lo-sc' how lhcy have8ot on-ano ii*-a-*iiJiy.*tott' "" tigtrt fan, aid lool around the ctnu' of thc .;;; ,hcrn io a t*itv'"dfi;t to elch other thar reFai .their .valuc ;;;'ffi ;;; #fi a ro, iniran"", you might find a five and a six' followcdby Erfier nin' and s€v'n uv a "!ooco"". niic, followcd ;i;;;and il.*ii;;;: r. itilablc, and tavinS loca!'d a line of four clrds LJ,f"* "iii*. dos. lhc spr.sd, but pick up a litll' fingcr break floor) and thcn ti't. top &ta! of this goup (top-bcin8ncar'st thc -rJit-i*"tg.a, pass at the brcak turnover i doing p""r.o taie aowr, "-Uor" iiir'irti'-rn'pl-ctc pactet down face of the loD to ttrc cards ,tt. r"ur ioncd rnc run For aramDlc,if you dccldedupon me nv€' slx' five' six "iiii'iiil,rt'ia"g. six

now'beon top of rhepacl in fivesix' fiv' liirll,iii-JJ,i.ii;ild fromandvoucan *iI 0".*oal gtoupsfor youto choosc with thcrule it complics as as long "*raii.'niii '',iri'"i .iiJ ,rt to" "onvirient haic doncverywcll' proc'€dto thc apcclalors -"i,ioiv conn.,"i"grttat -";;;to th! mblein pairsto rcvealthat€vcrypairhag d#;;:;il i" io this vou musl s'condderl or thc last card.of ;;;;A;. $rrtins wirh pair numbcr one' and codrinuins ;i;;ai'-oair;, bvsavinsto Thisrsquire to remembcr h;!t6;ds. ;;;;i;"i '""v dcalth! not l do dcil ihe yours€lf,top, sccond,top, top' tnrougnout pair asit ia in aoo".ttapping row' but-prcferto isol'te eoch li*ie* "aral to addto thc ellccl' whichs€cms rev€aled. .THE CANNIBAL CARDS'' us€oflhc s€cond !o bea sensible whlt I consider Thiscffectillusiratcs complctclv which out' uting.at,att irti d.i'l'r;i,iii i;il-,. '"! focil point, be broulht ""tat can the cffecl whilst and i""-*ri'rt"i-aci of the climination bv enhanced " is not diiccrncss W o,i"i .*"t, i s lo d'aler s€cond to be an exp€n "t"i a;d. lr is noi at ar Dec€ssary ;; poor a even allow will thc inbuih misdir'flion rn"-f. u.. of tftia "i.f, ""

n

TheDevil's Playthings This stalementcan only be provedby deal,to be passedunchallenged. tI€ eff€ct to arl audicnce. showing Run throwh the pack and removethe two blackiacks, placingthem faceup on lhe tabl€,sayingthat thes€two cardsrepresenttwo cannibals Removclhe four aces,and sandwichthernbctwe€nthe two jack, sa)'lng who havebeencapturcdby thecanni' that thc ac€sreprescntmissionaries balswho aretakiDgthernbackto their village.Onth€tablethareis nowa sprcsdof six faceup cards,a jack at eachend,and the four acesin the centrc. Squareup lhe packet,anddrop it facedownon top of the pack,saying that on thc way backto thc village,the first cannibalgot hungry.Deal out the lop fivc cardsof thepackin a faceup spreadon the table,second dealingon thc fifth otrc, whichu'ill revealthat onemissionaryhasbeen catcn.Pick up thc sprcadof fivc cards,turn it facedown,andplaceit on top of th€ pack. Saywhentheywcrc a little ncarcrthc village,the othcr cannibaltrcamc hungry. Deal out face up, the top four cardsof the pack, s€condd€alingon the fourth one, which will reveal$at another missionaryhasbctn eaten.Catherup the spreadof four cards,and place thern facedo*n on top of the pack. Mention that the cannibalsnow thought thcy would havea s*cat, and deal out threecardsid face up spreadon th€ tabl€, seconddcalingon the third, to revealthat only on€ missionaryrcmains.Placcth€sethreecardsfacedownon the pack,and mcntionthat the cannibalswcrestill hungry, so that whcntheyreached the villagetherewcrc no missionacs left. D€aloul two cardsfrom the pack,faceup on thc tablc, s€conddcalhg on the s€condon€,whichwill sho* just the two canmbals.Pick thesetwo cardsup, altdhandthemto a sp€ctator,gefcrably a lady, and say, "lell me, after that meal,do they fe€l any fatter to you?" Strangelyenough,this normallygetsa laugh! Takebackthc two 'cannibals'ard drop themfacedownon lop of the pack.Now say,that in actualfact, thc story wasnot stdctly true asyou did safalyarriveat the village,wiih the told it, bccausethc missionad€s carnibals,Illustrale this, by dealingthe top six cardsof the pack, in a faceup spr€adon the tablc, scconddcalingon the second,third, fourth agarnsandwiched andfifth cards,whichwill rcvealthe four missionaries yout patter by saFng thc missionEnd thcmc two cannibals. betweenthe arieshad convertedthe cadnibals,who becamcveg€tadans.

The Devil's PlsYlhings ils caie, in this condition, and you arc all set' ''"rfi'"i it .it"*i"g itt" *tict, removetbe pack from its case'holding you as the Jc JS and the remove alld cards, rr*,ro. ii.rn tfriouO ttre $em siightlv spread,faceup on tle table-The ii,a-id ii".*i. trr.."ii,r, jack of clubs Now ;il;;;.I; l."i of spades,must be belowthe the lwo lacxs'asm betwcm thcdremovethc four aces,andsandwich cards on thetable'and up six face lhc up square irri irp.oapru pacl ".,tion. facedown' and Tum lhe them lop of on up, dron rire Dack,face seconddcalingon thefiflh one' to showin a.ii,ifi"p ii'"! *tal "ut, ij"l*iir'i-t ilr"", a","ils as alrcadvcxpleincd,ftal oneof $e missionThe cardsarc daehin an overlapping' .frce.up ;:i."-;;;;';"'.

dcalI useisrhestrikeone'whichstvcs ihes€cond

iiJlltJia dcaltis angles'aslongasthecatdbcingsecond I"- ii"t il '1" before pack in facr' "tl Almost "irno" the il leaves i"-.a f"* colour rhc odd visibilitv or the "" about .-taoi"tely iit"" *e wonied ii';;tir;;;,ik .u?;:;.ciii';ii rvpeof ihe p*k up slishtlvandcsrrvou! a necklie while carcfullv up illi's1"i"il'" *t"ta ti fiv€card;'ard squarcthenpack' line Thenin the lop of thcmfac€downon t,iiii"* the fourth on d€alin8 s€cond "ia-a.p four, "i, theme, deal oul wirh th€;;lter d€Iingon!h€lhird Ga$er ail ourthree,second 6"ii'.i'if'!. ""0 on thes€cond' "p dcaling second two, deal out and Ltrem uo

ill.Jll

'

be iefi wirh the two blackjacksfaceup on the YJ;iu;";;;ll" pi"i andhandit to a spedatorin lin€wirh spades iiii"il t"ur.. "p "f of t.nrioned, askinga ladvto sct if fte.'cannibal' ;;;,;;;J;;tit is returnedto you'placelt When theiackof spades teelianvfirrer. ^race uo undir the jack of clubsand then drop thesetwo cards'careruly .,ir"i.a. r"ii,i.r" ." ropof thepack Youarenowreadyto showthat reallyeaten,bv dealingoff six cardsin a face in'" .irri.^i.i"t *iii ".ver dealinSon all six' sccond the lable, uo \Dreadon -'rdi. lwo between againsaodwiched gi"" voutrti rourmissionaries you explain when "irr pattcr arrd your story with *r"i'tJr._fi."'""..v v€8etar' "n andlhcy-became lhc cannibals converted Ltrurihi missionatiei lnlsnao ellcd the only lhal saying line, additional add an rans.voucan csrds^face of six Turnlhespread complexions .. iirir-*^i. lrom "r,"i,tt.ir will beseenlo havecnangeo of th€cannibals do*n- andthebacks blueto red.

C:rn b.l Crrds Wilh Colour ChrdgeEndinS.

..THE CHANGELING"

For a little extrawork. an additionalkickercanbeaddcdto tbeclimax impromptu of thisroutine.In obtainingtheextraclimax,thecomplelely nature of the effect is losl, and a sliSht stackis requir€d,as follows, rcadingfrom the top of the facedownpack:red backedJS, bluc backed aroundthe JC, the remainderof the bluebackedpack, and somewhere centrepoint of the bluebackedpacka red backedJC. Placethe packin 28

andreturnedto lhepack,controllingit sotbat.il Havea cardselected oo endsuDsecondfrom thetop of thefacedosr pack An casywayto Accomplished" lhe in "Mission ,rri"i,i" ii. trti to"r pa;sdetailed book. ctfed in this " *. i.p *td of the packcallin8attmtionto ils valueemd i"r" li'r"." i":*taa fhce ii on theta6k ooublelift to showfte ,r'#i"r" ""* 29

The Det'il's Ployt hings nextcafd, tum it facedownon the packand thumboff thc top cardface down on ftc table alongsidethc first one. Have a apectatorplacahh fingeron thc backof oneof thcsetwo cards,and intcrprgt his ahoiceso that hc selectitheclrd that is actuallyth€ onctakcn flom thepackat the bcgindngof thacffect. In othcrwords,if hatouchcsthc co[ect cardthis is his s€l€ction,and if he touchesth€ $Todg one, this is th€ card discardcd.Pick up thc cardtrot chosan,and showthe facaof it. andthcn hold it facedol,n in the righr hand,thc pock still beinghcld in thc l.ft. Ask the sp€ctatorto placchis fingersoD tba back of tle tabl€dcard 8nd rub tlc faceon thc tablcand thcn tum thc card fac€ut, whichwiu reved that it lra! tuncd into thc selcct€dcard. Undcr tbc cxc€llcnt misdircctionof thi! aation,do a convcntionalbottom changcwith tha cardin your right hsnd, i.e. thiacerdis placcdon th€bottomof thcpack, lnd thc top cardof th€ packi! takcn in ito plac€,or altcmativclyu6€a toDchangc.Saythat lhe spcctrto$ areprobablywondarinl what would havchappcnadif thc othcr card had b€€nchoscn,Placctha facedo*n cardin your right handon top of the fac€up oneon thc tablc, and thcn pick up both clrds togeth€rbctlvcenthe sccondfingerand thumbof thc right hard as shownin Figurc7.

Figure7

TWOCARDS PICKED UPAS AEOVESTILL FACETOFAC€

Releasetic right sccond fingcr g:rip on the two cards so that lhcy strap ovcr togcthar and ale now grippcd bctwccn thc ritht hand lirst fing€r and rhumb,which is lhe conventionalflip changcaction.placc the two cards down on lhe lablc again and draw b.ck the uppcrdost facc down one, to rcvcal the fac€ of tha onc bclo*. In linc with this action, you havc rcachad the stagain your patt6 whcre you hrva ask€d th. opcctaiols if th€y arc wondcring what would havc happctrcdif thc othcr card hsd bcen selecicd. Now you say ,Well, in that cas€, this onc would not have changedto thc selcctcdcard, but tlis ona would., DurinS thc LATTER hdlf of thc prcvious s€nta!@ you tum thc face do$n, upFrmost card faca up, to rcveal thot lhis now has changcd to th€ selcctcdcard.

30

The DeYil's PlaYthings lare h is helpfulin lhistrick if thctwocardsshownbeforethechanges by lhis ensurc I usually and the spectstors by ,..".uetcd or""i pack b€for€ of rhc rop rhe at "r._ioitv ana tD"d.* ;i ioier il ffiilii; lhc.ffacl. commcDcing .'THE IIAPPY WANDERENS'' in Somclime a8o, Edward Marlo publishcda lrick in "Ibidem"' one thal so pack, oul sprcad the replacedln *tds, t-f"*'"iitiO "r,r"l rh; othcr tq,o travelledto thc top andbollom ,.-"ioJ io ifrJ"*t.. :';fi:';1i. ii';id;;, -awasthe inspirationror thc followins rouune " f"*;p in the tight hand and se'rcilv reven' the top ti;Iff;';;i pacl' *'i-.tr,ft i""f roo" niare$ lhe floor) Run throughlhe faceup

lla-,r''"i-.riiiiii*r'

before quccn andkiogof anvsuit'lr isadvisable

thc cffect to trotethc valucso[ the top ano seconocaro or comrncncing *t"t.tot. ignorethc sui! of rhescif oneor both happcnlo ii" .""i. whcnioo*ing for thc iack, qu'cn and ling of vour ;;d;.-;d","i'a thffi".tlil'o*r r"". up on thelablc, prcfcrabtyon top of !h' cardcas€' ii u. rit"iJup with caselitcr, and calc thc jack' que€nand ..iiiiii -ti* suit (ior cxamplc,diamonds)in the l'ft hand' ard "rt".it "r-irt. tttg audimcc.Tum thcrn faccdown' and mix $e liiiuiitii"lt-i"*li. do n iii"" *ta. iit*, to ttt"t thei! ordcr is ulknovn Hold thcmfacc thc above immcdial'ly break " pi"k up a litlle finger l.',i. f"fi-rt*a "ia t*fiffip ,r," r""" up p"ck, in th€dght hand,andplaccil srill faceup-on rdn of ihc lhrcc faccdown picturccsrds.say you will now cut mc Jacx' of thc pack Gvc th' pack onc cut' bul o"l* *i iiog r. ttt" "artrc pull down movc, 30lhrt lhis card is rctainedin ii-trit"aoccr "'ifr,.-ri. oi thc pacLgoesin abovcit Alrcrnarivelv' ;fi;;ffi;fipcrfuf cardb.lo$'th' lcft littlc fingerin positiqn' !h. ii iii'.'i"i trt"-"i"i, 'lns i*"-down clr'ds arc nocrtog'"therin thc ccnuc bv il;-ti;;:-,iil bctwcd thc h8ndsuntil vou havcrcrchcdth€ tilp;"t i;. ;;;dil "p spr.ad s littlc rvavpast them -closc^the have on"r, .nd if,i.. i.i.t*a a lcfr linlc fingcr br€akbclowthe frcc of the t,iiii"t ljii ":p''pi"i, rcl,clscdcdds. centre onc of lhc thrcc"p *t;.-fi; kinB of diarnondsro 6usc th€ j.ck, qu'cn t-; 'nd oul a tumover carrying pack dowtr, facc thc *tcn tuto ."iJo* of thc faccup onc s€' will immcdiarclv "ria rn" tpectatols u ii. o.iJ. wav t'clow littl' out a "Li ,rt. topl sran sprcadinglh' cards ii"*i continuc and "*a-. centr€ thc ncar ", a .ccond on" sho*s up iii.-a-a packin the Exhibit thc bolrom is at ""rii l.sl ooc to*i-i.g lo tito* tlu, the €xtra n' if,it aooa]tioorot torncnI taling cerathat you do not expos€ you will now-make.thcn " thc top picturecard Say facetro card bclow ctos€ up the pack' and pick up a little finSerbreal iii"Jt'"r-"rt*ll"i". 1l

The Devil's Playthings abovethe centrefacc up card. Tum the pack face up, and carry out a tumover passat the brcak. spreadthe pack out betweenthe handsto showthat the thre€cardsare now facedomr togetherin the centre. Whenyou gometo tltemremovethemoneby one,anddrop themface do*,non the table, thusr€versinglh€ir ordcr, Pict up the lop oneof the threeon the table, and turn it faceup, and plac€it belowthe face up pack. Pick up the nextfacedowncardon the table and tum it faceup, alld placeit on the faccof the pack.Tum thc packfsce downand take fte last fac€downcardand pustrit into the ccntreof the pack.Turn the packfaceup again,aDdhold it from abovein tllc right hand,thumb at the near short end, and fingersat the far one in prg,aration for the Ovettemastermove.Saythat you havecausedthec,Lrdscithersideof the ccntreone to jump to the endsof the packand backagain,but nothing reallyhashappenedto the c.ntre one.Point out thet you bavea picture card on the face,and alsoonc on the top, whichyou showby sliding it out with the left hand and then rcplaceit, but us€the Ovettcmove to really replaceit secondfrom thc top. Say you will now try to llake somethinghappcnto all thre€ cards including thc ccntrc one. Turn the pack face down c{rying out'a turnovq palBanywhcrearoundthe centrepositio!, end spreadit face downon the tablc. Thapicturc cardseeminglyplaccdin the c€ntre,has now tumed faceup, and the cardspreviouslyat the top and botlom of the packnow resideeithersidcofit. You hav€achievedyour promiseof makingsomethinghappento all thraecards

Thc principleusedin this effectis an interestin8one,althoughunforttmatclydueto the stackrequiredit is moreor lesslimited to an opening cffect, but as suchh quite effectiv.. Arrangethe top sectionof the packr€adingfrorn tbe firs! facedown card as follows: 4 6 9 I 4 x x 6 x 9 4 x I 9 9 x 6 6 1 4 x x I (x canbe any card). Valuesonly arc of prime ihponance in thc stack,althoughlhe first four cardsshouldbe of mixedsuits. Felsc shuffle the pack altd thultb off thc top four cards withoul alteringthcir ordcr, plscingthe rernaindcrof the packfacedowDon the tablc. Crt the smallpacketof four cardsasmanytides asyou wish and thcndcalthamout on th€ tablein a facedo*n linc from left to right. Ask a spectatorto pushany on€of the four cardsout of the spr€ad.Gather up tha ramainingthrcecads, by placingtlle oneimmediatelyto thc lefl of thc sclectcdore on top of its immediateleft hand neighbour,or if thereis no neighbour,on thc cardat the extremeridt hand endof the threcand thenthcrc two cardson top of the oneto thcir left. To makc thingsquitecl€ar,thc following exampl€sshowhow the remainingthree cardsshouldb€aisqnblcdaccordingto whichoncofthe four h sclected.

The Devil'sPlatthinSs Figure8

placeD on C andlhm lhesctwo cardson B' tf A is sclect€d, setcctea. 2 . ii o is iucc ,l on D ard th€nth.s€two cardson c' l

3 . lf C is s€l€cted,place B on A rlrd lhcn thesctwo card! on D' 4. lf D is sel€cted,place C on B and thcn thesatwo calds on A'

EoH the thrcecardsfacedownin the right handand taketh€top card and olacr it face up on tbe table. If it is an acaor four spot lake the io"eimost cara of ile remainingtwo in your hand, aDdplaceit to rhr ii"trr olitt. oo. attoav on thetablc' andthenlhe final oneto thc right of ii;e iwo. lf rhc rrsr iard vou dcaloul tu not an ac€or four. you simply aJ ttrcm alongsiaecach;thcr in r conventionalmannerfrom Lft to richt. 'pick uo tbe rcmaindcrof th€packand ded downlo the vilue of cach on tiretable'placing$e cardsdealt.toface or-rir"rtti.i ia". up ""tdsifthe orderoflhe lhr€ecardsis ace'runc'slx' downaside.For€xample, *ourJ"ount ao*i, one for ace'and placclhis cffd faccdown aside "ou ln tle table.andttrenninccards'placinglhc ninthcardfac€downwith noally six, piacinalhe sixthcatd, facedownaside' irr. pt*iou" on., slan'with ltrc lcft hendcard of thc line ol a*'ays rrt"r -a i.rii.t"r vou originally,and rhree.Hav€the;paeatorturn ovcr thecardhe sclccled kind. of a thm yourthrc€cards,lo rcvcalfour ..ALMOSTIMPROMPTU'' Thh trick usesthe samcprincipleas that usedin "Lib€rty"' but an effort hasb€enmadeto rcducethc preparationto a minimum,andhence the titlc. A stackof four cardsir requircdand I hav€often found that will a stackof ttris sizc,it is quitc possrblcto lcaveit in the packwhilst Dcrforminqone or two olhcr cffects,and lhen cut i! to the appropilatc ooskionwim vou wishto procc€dwith thetrick involvingth's€ cards A iarcenumberofcard tticks do not involveshufflingthc packto anySreal wallworthremembering' cxtint. - _i.i and so rheideaof a latml strck is four cardstogcthcrin following have lhc rttat * no* a.tut. vou

The Devil's PlaYthings other method. I believe that tbe handling is as direct as one is likely to obtain. Run ihrou!fi the pack alld rcmove the four aces,placing them face up in a small fan on the table. ln arranging them on lhe table mak€ sure thcy arc in easily rcmembered suit order. The one I use is hearts, spades, diamonds and clubs, so that the aceof clubs would be the face accof the four on thc table. Say you will replacethe fout accsfac€ down on top of the face down pack. Do tlis but retain a break below them with th€ l€ft little finS€r. State ihal you would now like to have a clrd selectedand do this by riffliru down the lefi hand outer comer of tha cards with the left thumb until told to stop. At this point, cut the cards above the left thumb off from the pack, but retain the break with lhe riSlrt thumb below th€ four aces. Thumb off the top face do*n catd of the lower half, emd reassemblethe pack, takrng up the brcak b€low the acesagain, with the left littlc finger. Havc thc sp€ctatornote his sclect€dcard' and remember Riffle down with your left thumb to about the centre of the pack and bring thc right hand over as if to cltt the upper s€ction off but in aciual fact, lift off only the four cards atove the left little finger break. Have the spectator replace hfu card on top of the lower section, and tb€n replacethe cards held in the right hand on top. This is lhe standard mock passprocadur€, bu! done below four cards instead of one' aid the usual iafeguardsof curling the fingeF of eachhand around the endsof their resDectiv€ oacketsto concealrheir lhicknessshould be followed. Some thougbts on the mock pass handling can be found in thc "Mission AccomDlished"eff€cl elsewhcrcin this bobk. Ask ihe spectator to tell you the sui! only of his selectcdcard, and say you wiu first of all sholrl a trick involving this suit alld the four aces.Daal down the four acesonto the table, but seconddeal on $e suit of the aca which coincid€swith the one he names, and continue to sacoDdd€sl until four acesare face down in a packe! on lhe lablc. For lhe suDDosed examoii. if he saia aiamonds,you would know lhat the lhird ace from rhe ton in the rcmcmberedsuitorder would be a diamond,so you would deal down two cards fairly, and tben sccond deal for the remaning two. oive lhe packet of focc down acesto lhe assistingsp€cletor, altd ask him to placc one undcrncath the packe!, and th€n one fac€ up on thc tablc. Whcn hc do€s this, state "thafs not thc ace of diamonds" Ask him to place anolhcr ona undet thc packet, and thc next one face up on |hc tabG and again repcat your phrase "that's not the aceof diamonds". Rcqu€sthim to placeonemorebelowthe packet,and one faceup on the tsblc, and sayagain, "that's not th€ aceof dramonds". I lc will be l€ft with one face down card, altd by the presantationhe will rinumc that in someway he has beenleft with the acecorrespondingto I hc $uitof his sclectedcard.Cestureihat hc shouldturn lhis card faccup, one,sayagain"and that's not the ace rnd {N hc s€csthat it h his selected

TheDevil's PlaYthinSs the ace;f diamondsis here". tnlinewiththe laiter ofdiamonds,because Darr of your final statement,lop paim lhe ace of diamondsfrom the pack, with rheright hand, and produceit from your insidejacketpocket ofthesurprisewhen ;tmDlemisdirectionis presenlfor this palm' because is his own. final csrd lhat the finds the ipcctaror ..FINDERIi XJEPERS'' The effccl of most 'vou take a caId and I find it' tlp€ of tdck' depends on how the card is found for its ent€rtainment velue, ralher than how inseniouslvlhe D€rformerconldves to make the seleltion aJ|dcontrol ,pp"r, pof..tty t"ir. ln lhis lrick lwo cardsare sel€dedand found in a

way. surprisiru Runthroughthe packandremovethe ace,two andthreeof clubs' with rhe threeat lhe face olacinr 'turn rhcm-faceup on the table in ordcr. pict upa little fingerbreak hand, and in the l€fl down t-heoack face below rh; loD threecards. Pick up lhe three cards from lhe table and Dlaceftem stil face up. on top of lhc pact. Squarelhetr| up wilh lhe ;emaindcrofthe pack,and with the riglt hand lift all six cardsabovetha left litlle finger brcak up dighlly, until they call be supporled trc$r€enthe tips of th€ laft fingers and thumb, the thumb b€ing at ona long-side and fie fingers at the othcr. This allows you to dtop one card from the bottom of the group with lhe right thumb and ro pick up a thurbb brcak above it. Now removc the packct of cards a{'ay from the pack. At this srageyou rcally hav. six cards in the riglt hand, with a thumb break abdve thc low€rmost one. Th€ effect fiom the audicnce's point of view lhould be that you have used thc left hand to assist you in squaring the cards in the right. Throughout th€ prcccding actions, the ridt hand holds the cards'from above, thc thumb at thc near short end, and the lingers at thc far one, with the forefinScr rcsting or1 the face of lhe nackel. Requestingthat the sp€ctatorsshould notc that the three cards are in order, bring the face up packet over the rtain face down pack, and by [sinc the leit thumb,draw lhe lhrce ofclubs onio lhc top of the packbut lcav; it in an outjogaedposition,for about half aJIinch. Now draw the t wo of clubs from the face of tha right hand pack€t onto the three already on top of the pack, and position if squaraly with the three' so that both edrds are not butjoggcd. This laavesyou seemingly with the ace in the right hand, but aclually four cards are b€ing held as one' with a bresk 0tove the lovermost one. Place the aceon top oi the two, pickinS up the hreak from thc right thumb, with the left littl€ finger. withdraw the cmDty right hand away from the pack slightly. Figue l0 illustratcs the lcft hand frosition at this sta8a. The right halld now app€3rs to lift off the ace, two and three away liom the;ack, a|ld the outjoggcd position of thes€cards makesit logical

TheDevil's Playthings CA R OSA B OV EB R E A K AN EOU TJOGGE D AB OU T72"

Figurel0

LITTLEFINGERHOLDS 8N €A K B E LOW 3C A R OS

thai such an action is possible' The right hand finge.s are placd at the far sho end of the cards, and thc thumb at the near one. The thumb now lifts its cnd for about an inch atrd the csrds pivot upwards, stiU touching at the far short end of lhe pack. In this action the lcft hand mov€s the pacl forward slightty and tha right haDdmovesils cards back slirhtly. Thesetwo actionswhen combinedare barcly perceplible'but ha-vetie effect of squaring up $e cards bclow the little finger brcak wilh the rcmainder of the pack and l€aving the ridt hand with just tllree cards. Thesethtee cards, which can be spteadjust under a white bordet width of card, are placed face up on thc table, pr€ferably on top of the card cale so thal you can pick them up wilh easclater. Thc main pack is now turned faca up in thc left hand and the left little finccr obtains a break abovc thc top card of the pack (the onc near$! tl|e flo;r). The riShthandcomesoverand underculsaboulhalfthe pack.but b€causaof th; litdc fmger brcak. leav.s behind rhc actual top card of the Dack. The hindu shuffle fu commenced,drawing off very small packets ;nto thc left hand s€clion, and requcsting a spcctator to call stop at any Doint.when rcqucstedto stop exhibitthe cardat lhc faceof lhe left hand section and rcDosition thc cards in lhe riSht hand so that lhey are ready to carrv out lhe bvetle Dlacementmove. Hiving shownrhc iard a! lhe faceof the left handscctionof the pack' push it over with the l€ft thumb and deposit it bclo* fte right hand iection, but really executethe ovette move, 30 that it actually is in the secondoosilion.Leave it protruding by aboul half ils width on the lef! handsiacof rhe right hand pecker' Now exhibil lbe nexl facecardon the left hand packet, and request a seaondspectator to rem€mberthis one. Thumb il off slightly to the right as if to emphasisethe selcction, a[d then retum it squarc, but pick up a little finger break below it. Bring the

3E

The Defil's Plallhings up the .ighthandcardsabovetheleft,placingthemontop,andsquadng wholepack.Turn the packfacedowncarryingout a turnoverpassat the little finger break, and then placingthe pack facedown on lhe table. Pick up the smallpacketof cardsrestingon lhe card caseand place themstill faceup in the left hand,taking the opportunityin this action, to obtaina lefi little fingerbreak,belowtheaceof clubs.Explainthat the ace,two and threewill become"findar3" andhelp you to locatethe two selectedcards.Pick up th€ facedown pack on the table wilh the dglt hand,holding it from abovealld placeit still facedown on top of the faceup acein tlle lefl hand.Sayyou mus!cut the "finders" to thecentre ncarthe selecledcards.Civethe packone sothat thcy will besomewhere cut, but executethe little fingerpull downmovewith the lowelmosttwo cardsof the pack,sothat thc upp€rsectiongoesbetweenthesecardsand theremainderof the pack.Squarethe packcarefdly, and thenspreadit face down on the table, to sho* that two cards have been trapp€d betweenlhe ace,two andthree.IJt a spectatorremoveall five cards,and confirm that the caughtonesarc the sclectedones, ..YOUCAN'T CHEATAN HONFSTMAN'' This trick is bas(don the old classicwhercthreejacks are continually dealtout into onehand,the secretbeingthat a fourth oneis broughtinto play.Contraryto someopinions,I hsvc found that atreffect catrsomerimesbc strerigthmcdby substitutingsleightoI hand for subtlety,and rhisis wha! hasbeendonehere. Runthroulh fte packand removethe four jacks,placingthemon the rable.In doingthk, alsolocaletheaces,drd pGition themon the faceof rhe pack vrit! six cardsb€low tbem. In olhar *ords, the acesoccupy positionsscven,eilht, nine and ten from the faceof the pack Turn th€ pack facedown in the lcft hand.Talk aboutd.monstrating Samblingcontrols,etc., and tbumb off four csrdsfrom the top of the pack. Turn thes€over alld ltrashthem briefly, sayingfour indifferent cards,and then replacethernfacedo*n on top of the pack. Pick up lh€ lbur jack and drop thes€facedown, on top of the park. Now dcal out rwo handson the lable, dealingfirst to the spcctatorand then to yourrelf. ln actual fact you deal as follows: top, bottom, top, bottom, top, bottom,top, top. Pick up your handand turn it faceup spreadingit to showyou haveno jacks.Replaceit on top of thepack.Ask th€ spcclator ro€xaminehis hand,andhefindshehasthe four jacks,Replacethescon rop of the packand aSarndea.lout as follow: top, bottom, top, bottom, rop, bottom, top, top. Briefly flashyour handoncemore and replaceit whenthe four on top of the pack,and th€n€xaminethe spectator's, will again be revealed. lacks Sayyou will repestthe demonstrationa third time. Drop the four ircks on top of the pack, ard deal out as before,but this time deal, 39

TheDevil's PlaythinEs

The Dev il's Plalt hittgs

bottom,top, boltom,top, bottom,top, bottom,top. Reachforward wilh your right hand, as if to again indicata that the iacks are in the the spectator'shandandthcn say"it's a lirtle diffcrent this time b€cause jacks are here," Turn ovcr YOUR hand, and showyou havcthe fout jdcks. Rcach towards the rcmaining face down hand, and say, "of cours€,herewehavctha four . . ." atrdasyou turn themovcr, say, ". , . ACES". wbich will comeas a surpdse,as thay will be o(pcctingiust indifferent cardsto showup as thcy havcon the previouslwo phas€sof the trick. In vicw of thc fact that only oncof tha indiffcrentcardsremainson tha first two phascsof thc trick, you may prefcr to makeus€of this fact, by cnsuri4 that whcnshowingth€ indiffcrcnt cardsat rhc bcginninSof thc effcct, thereis a Fomincnt oneat the faca.For inctalcc you could haec thc jokcr at the tacc of th€m. If you now tum th. indiffcrcnt crrds faccdownandpull thcmonlo tlle packwith thc left thumboncby onc,thusrev€rsingthcir ord€r, andthen do tle samcwith the four jacks, you can continucwith th€ trick, but havingdealt out th€ two hands,if you pick up your hand by toking the top facedown cardoff, andscoopthc othcr thre€catdsup with it, there will still be s joker at thc facc,and by implicarionlhcaefour indiffcrcnt cardswill b€ th€ sameones.You n ould then replac€thcm on top of the pack, againpulling thcm off ona by onc with th€ left thumb to rcvcrsc thcir ordar, and then of coutsc doing lhc samcwith the four jacks. Follo\xirg thc routineyou woulddaalout a sccondtimc, andagainscoop up your indiffercntca.dhasp,by mcatlsof thc top card,sothal theiokcr would showst the facaonccmore.

givea shorthistoryofthc *ell known "Threc CardTrick", andillustrate the important fcatwes by meansof lhrce cards. Explain that in the earliestvcrsionof thetrick theyus€dthreequ€ens,andon thc faceof on€ of thesequeensthey mark€da circle, and the queenwith the circleon, wasthe on€ you had to find. In line with this s€nteDc€, tuIn the thee cardsover by tilting the right hand, exhibitingthe fac€ ot th€ qucan. Montethrow this cardto positionA in th€ illustration. Immediatelylift up the new top card, readyfor tie montethrow and turtr the hand to sbow4 s€condquccn.Montethrow this to positionB, in the illustration. Tum ovcrthebandto showthelastquecn,at thepoint in thepatts whctr you say"they markedthe queenwith a circleand this wasthe oneyou had to find", and drop it facedown to position C.

B

W FigureI I

"NEVEN GIVE A SUCKDRAN EVEN BREAX" I considarthe "Thraa CardTrick", to bc onc of tha mostenterlaining that canbc shownto an audiancc.This vcrsionis complctclystandardin construction,but hasa logictl story to tic tha movcstogethcr,aDdalso climitretcaany sclcationby thc spoctstorsa! to whichcardis tba quccn,a fcaturc that is worth rcmovingif you rre Dcrformingbeforemorc than ona sp€ctator,bccsusath€y will normaly disegee ovcr thcir sclcction, ard onc will theraforebc right. No tcchdcal descriptionot thc montc thro* will bc aivan,sincath€ standsrdotrc is uscd. In my opinion, tbc bastdcscriprionis to bc found in tha "Eipart al the Cttd Tabla", by ErdMsc. You will needthrcc cardsof matchingbacks,onc bcing a queen,6nd thc other two havingblank fac.s. They arc arrangcdwith the quccnat tha face,and placcdin your pocketin this positionuntil you arc rcady!o perform. Rcmovcchcthrcc cards,and hold them facc down in the right hrnd, lifting the top oneup, rcadyto maketha montethroiv. Saythat yolr will 4

Now saythat a few yearslatcr, thcy found that the rnarkedcirclc did Iot showup too well againstthe backgroundof the quecn,so instcsdof usingqueens,thcy usedblank cards,alrd thercforethc circleshowcdup muchmorecleady. In line with this statcrnent,pick up th€ facedown cardat positionC, and placeit abovethat at positionB. Lift thesetwo .ards up and turn the handover to cxhibit the blank faceof the lowermostone. Monte throw this card down to position B and with rhe left handpick up the card from position A and tum it fac€up lo showit as hlank, and also tum over the ght hand to sho* lhe one there alsois hlank. Drop thesecardsbdck r€spectiv€ly at positionsA and C. Now say that.still later, thcy removedthe nccessityof markingthc crrds at all, and they usedtwo queens,ard one blank card, lhe blank rl|rd beingthe onethat you had to flnd. ln line with this slatcmcnl,pick un thc facedowncard, at pogitionC, and placeit abovcB, pickingthe rwocardsup togcthd. Turn thc handto fla$ tha quccnat thc face,and 4l

TheDevil's Platthings montc throw this down to position B. Tum the tiSht hand to show the iimaining cara is al.o a quecn,and drop this al posilion c Lift up rhe card at isition A with the left hand, ard show ils face to bc blank' as you vou r€;h fte line in lhe patt€r aboul lhe blank card beirS lhe on€ positronA in down facc cerd the blank find. Replacc iave to Say,but now l'm Boingto showyou lhc modamvercionof the "Three

iti,rtii two blank cardsare uscdand one quem' and c"rl'i.iii;;. "na ;h;;"; v." ilaveto find. As vousavrhis.pickup thecards th.;t;l; at obsitions A and B and tum thcm focc up, placi[g thcm' sprcad s[gllrly,in th€ lcft hatld,rhcnwith lhe righl hand'lum up the cardat DositionC to showit to b€ a qu@n. '-ph". rtrc oueenfacedown;t posilion B, and !h€ bl&tk cardsrcsp€cl' n uoo C Pici up thecardat posilionc and placcit in.i" ui qu..tt po.ilion B' and takeup the blankcard at position A irt'" -riiooi "t "t"'"" throw the quccnlo positionB, thc l€ft hand card in the l€ft hand.Montc lhe riSh!handc.rd fairly to positionA saythat iaitlv io po.irion c, probably lhinkingthequeanisat posltronB' anoturnn are -a theaudiencc it is not. that uD to show facc _-i.lori ptobablywondcringwhat the Sambletvroulddo if r"v-*t"v ".. to.*ni dia plct ttti qucen.Plac€the catd from position B, faccdown on thaouecnat DosilionA, andtakeupthccaJdfrom positronL' ln lnc lefi hani, tum tirc faceslowardslhe audienca,showingthc quc'n al the i""" or iri" iigrtt rtanapair. Montelhrow the queento posiiion B, fajrly tfuow rheleft halld cardlo positionC. Pick up lhe c8rd Irom posr[Pn.L rvith rhe risht hand. bclowlhc card alreadythere,and monlethrow uc uooc.rnoil-catain tttc tiSht handto positionA, and drop th' remarning you oii ar positionC. Now iy, lhat normally.theg&mblerwould exp€cl lacl' posilion in actual B, but point catd at to thc ro sale,clthis card, atrd itr. i"*. i rtiii, na i'oinr to rhecardat posirionc Now, if thiscard *.tJ..f"e"a, *i tt"tivou pushlhc cardal positionc forwardslighdy' hewoutdflip it ovcrto showyouw.r€ wrong,likc this Pickup lhe^caro from positionB ard do a verypoor Mcxicgnturnovertyp€cnang€ol rnls po.ition c, flipping it faceup on thc lable You arc iot rh" on wlrr "t ""rd facc do*n in rhcright hend'whichthesDcctators a card now holding calo you lnat changc assumcto bethe quccn.Saylhat thcy probablysaw for this onc. andhcrayou point first lo thc fac€up cardon thclaolc' alro thcn to lhc facedown onein the hand,but did theysccyou changctlul thc hatro' ona.for tbrsone. H€rcyou point firsl to the onc facedowa rn you point whcn posilion A i""" a.*"-one on lhe tsble at iriii,.n'rrti DJ sctlon this follow !o lhe one facedown oo lhe table. irnmcdiarcly l one st the Turn willbcseen tobcthcquecn it tuminSitfaceup, when is blank' il to show ov€r, l€fl hand in thc bcinqhcld *nil:iilii;i swindlc'andthat evenif ;;;hoh thin; is a complete aftttt"c cttat *i.c.tto*n, it wouldbeimpossibl€to find thequ'€n Pick blankcardin the mont.thiowpositions. i ii.-.-& in ,rt. qu'en at lhe lace "on"*tional thc with right, pair in ftc cards of lefr hand,and 42

The Devil'E PlaYthings Montethrow thc queento positionB. Fairly thtow the left handcardto positionC. Pick up thc cird at posilionC, belowthc onealreadyheldin the riSht handand lurn thc two overto showthe faccof th€ lower one' saying "blaDk card number onc." Monte throw this card do$n to position C, ard then tum the remainitrgcard in thr riSht handover to ;how i!3 facr, saying,"blank cstd numbcriwo", anddroppingthis face down on top of th; one alrcsdyat position C. Strte lhat the crrd at posrtronB mustthercforebetha queen,andtum it ovcrto showthat this alsois blank.

"cotl)uR MAGlc" onc of AlaxEl6slcy's Thit eff€ct wasevolvedin an effort to ra_crcate perform lhe trick, you wiU na€d To cards. tricks, bul using ordinary cardswith fouicontrastfug or diffcr€nt colour back dcsi8tt5.I would \ugg.st thal you lry thc eff€ct out by removingtha approprialccllds r"frlreo, *;ring utecolourson lhe ba.L with a fch ripp.dren. This givc you witi -a a goodideaof the.ffcct obtaincd,ard if you think it worth whila you can th.n obtain cardsrvith rhc properlyd.signedbacks. Thacardsneedcdrrc as follows:ycllow backedking of sDadcs'grecn backedking of hearrs,rcd baakcdjack of spad€s.Thesethee c,rds are placedid tli€ outsidebrca,tpoct.t of yourjack t, wiih thcjack of-spadcs at the facc.You will alsonced,readingfrom thc faac,bluabackcdquccn of bearts, red backed8cc of hearts,rcd backedjacl of clubs, Srccn backedaccof clubs,greenback€dking of diamonds,yellowbaak€dace of spadcs,ycllowbackedki[g of clubs,blu€backcdaceof diamoDdsand blu; backcdqueenof diaoonds. Run throuShthis lroup of nin€ cards nnd injog atl acesfot abouta quartcrof all inch. Placean elasticband urouni ihe completepackct, ovcr thc narrow width, so tbat thc trinc cardsarc lockcd in poiition, $dth the accsstill injogged Placcthenr in rhe outer lcft hand jacket pocketof yout suit, and you arc readyto perform. whell wishingto showthe cffect, ramovethe packeiof cardsfrom tha lcft handjackct-pocket,8ndhold thcmin the left handsothal th. ioggcd portion oi thc acesis conccalcdby the lcft fingcrs, With thc dght hand itrurnb,flick the uppcrcnd of the pa.k t rathe! quickly' sayingthat vou havea g:roupof picturccards,with whichyou would likc to demonstrata lln unuiua]irick. fte rc$on for flicking quickly is sothrt thc spccntors tharubbcrband'and havenochance ro countthepicturec5!ds.Rcmove pushthe joggcdcardssquaraand hold the packetfacedown in the left hand. Kcep the fingcrs curled around thc end atld th€ hand low to Loncealthe thickness. With you right hand rcachinto your ouier breastpockctandremove thc thrci cardJthere.Placethem faceup on thc tabL, sayinStbat yolt rlso usethreefurther picturecards.Theorderof the tablcdcardsreading 43

The Devil's Plqythings f.om the faceshouldbe JS. KH. KS. Ghostcount the facedown cardsin |he left hand, to show they have blue backs, and place the last blue card on top of the packet.Wren carrying out the ghost count which is the standard fow as four one, injog the third card counted slightly. This will allow you to bring the right hand over and place the tllumb on ihe injogged card, lifting it slightly, and pushing it square,so that the thumb can be partially inserted undd the top two cards and thesecards can be r€moved as one by the right hand, the thumb on th€ face and fingers on the rear of th€ near short end. lts face is fla3hed,showingthat it's a picture card, and lhe right hadd then travels up io the outer breastpocket of your jacke! and pushesthe card in. Bring the right hand down to the left hand packet again, lo make a squaring action, and lei the facecard drop off the righl thumb so that the left little finger can obtain a break above il. With the right hand pick up the.iackof spades,alld tum il facedown, showingthat it hasa red back. Say that esch of the tabled picture cards has a strange power over the onesin lh€ band. Appear to push the face down red card among the fac€ do*n blu€ ones,but really insertit immediatelyabovethe facecard, by m€ans of the left litde finger break. Push the red backed card square, and pick up a lcft little finger break above it. Cive the packet a singlecut at the break, and lhen ghost count them again, injogging the third card slightly, and placing the fourth on top, to show that the red backed picture card has made all the backs change to red. Repeatthedoubl€ lift of the top card and its insertionin the outer breasi jacket pocket, and then show that the king of heafts has a green back. Insert it among the red cards, but really sccond from the face, using the sametechnique as previously dcscribedand then cut the packet and ghost count aa before to show all the backs are now green. Remove the top greenbackedcard, doublelifling as usual,and placingit in the pocKet. Insert the final yellow backedking of spadesinto the packel, second from faceas usual,then cut and ghostcount to showthe backsare now all yellow. Double lift tlle top yellow backed card, and place in ih€ out€r breastjacket pocket. Statethat the spe.tatorshave seenthe power of tbe individual cards that were on the table, but they may like to seewhat would happenif lhe piclure cards in the left hand were brought clos€ to all colours at once. Takethe facedown8roup of cardsfrom the left hand with the right, and tap it on the oulsideof your breastpocket.Now spreadthe cardsout, to show that each back h of a different colour. Mentionthat whilstperformingthistrick a speclatorsaid,'1hat would when playing cards", and that you be a very useful accomplishment replied,"yes it would, but surelymoreusefulifI couldchangethe faces, ralher than the backs." You now turn the four cardsfaceuD. to reveal that they are aces. 44

The De l's PlaYthings NorE:-ln carryingout the ghost count throuehoutthis trick, take the cards rather more deeply into the riSht hand than usual' to discrns€lhe thicknessin the earlynagesof the effed. Also. keep th;ands low, and the backsof the cardstowardsthe audience' Rememb€rthe backs change coloul, arld this is what they will watch, not the edges. M€ntion the fact that you are using pictutc cards frequently throuchourthe roulioe to improvethe final climax' and remem_ ber afu, that the facesof the doublelifi€d cardscan alwaysbe flashed Prior to Pocketing thcm. ..THE INCONSISTENTLIAR'' The use of a pack of cards as a li€ detactor is a very old idea' but I believe Bruce Cervon and Larry Jennings were the first to usc carclsto indicate whether the aNwers to a seriesof questiodswere true ol false The normal Dresentationof this trick invites the assistingspectalor to tcll lies whenevei he wish€s, but in Inost of thc publishcd v€rions I have read. this lie has to be consistenr'ln other words. it lh€ jacl of clubs and vou askedthe sp€clalorlhecolourofhis card' hemiSht \aereselecred lie and sa) red. lt you lhen a5kedhim lhe suil, it would haveto be hearts or diamonds to biconsistent with his first lie. Sinceyou have invited the tDectatorlo tell lieswheneverhe wishes,lhcre seemslo b€ no reasonwhy hl shouldnot, in the examplequotedabove'say first lhal he selededa rcd card, and ihcn in answerlo your secondqueslionlhat it nas a spade' Therefore the fftst important point about the following version of this cffect, is that thc sp€ctator c5n lie or tell the truth in answer to your questions without any r€strictions whatsoever. The s€cond point of r;terest is that provision is made in thc routi[e to preclude from the ,oeoarors'mindanv thoughtthat you havearangedthepack one final teaiurethat haspromprediheinclusionof the ettectin lhis book is ftat it t,asa logicalclimax,aor havingfound out wheiherlhe spcclatorhaslied ,'r lold ihe trurh by rhe cards revealedin answer!o his questions'yo! to sp€ll down in the pack ro find his now apply the ttoihfu! *s*"t. sclected card. A cer[ain amouot of memory work h involved to learn this routine' hur be assued that its effect warrants the homework required lt is rrrerestingto noterhat you only haveto slackonemor€card to coverall ,onrinqeniiesof inconsislentlying. lhan if you wereusinglhe consislenl lyingp;esentation,wherethe itdicating cardsarive on top of the dealt Explain to ihe audience that you are goilg to illusfate how an clcctronic lie delector wolks Have a card selected from the pack, rdurned and conlrolled to the second from face position. Continuing

45

The DeYil's PlaJthings havelo havea with vour Dattertheme,saythal eleclroniccomputers each slepin this what to do, lell lhem to iro-'.tnrnJ of insrructions out at high carty the machinewill that an acrion t.ot.,*ting iioii"mrn. io&. s"v rhir lie det&ors work rhc samewav,and vou will teacha you lurn lhe on€ Duringthis discourse' iiJ"to. rto* to proSramma the facetwo off Push actions following lhe o'""i tac. uo ana i*tiorm the but rememb€r right hand' the inlo order rhe *ittrout atrcrine cards Iower onc (the sclcctA csrd), count two morc cardsonto these lf th€ sdJed cardwasa facecard(jack, quccnor king) tha nextcardyou deal inio irc aglt l-a .nould ah; bc a facecrtd. lf th€ sclectcdcard wasa sDolcgrd.-lhenexl cardwould ne€dto bea spotonc lf thc approprial-e to you. continuclo dcaluntil it is, bul up jog all cardis not avarlable dcaltcardsby aboutlwo inches.\t/henyou rasahthe dcsiredfaccor spot caid,io*ct tireleft land anddcalthisin thenormalposilion Runlhrce cards in the norma.lposition. Th€ next card m|Isl be lhe same -ore asrheselcctcdon., ifivailable dcalit over, if not, deslcardsin an coiour uoiocrcd oositionuntil it is avarlable,and thendealit ov€r on lhe lowcr and thenanothercardo[ fte samccolouras .&i6i. ol"t on. .ot" "ard cards,and onecard of lhe samesuil as mor€ dcal thr€€ one, rhesel€c1ed rtri r"rc"r"a ooa.aot onemorccard,and onecardof lhe slme sui! asftc selcclcdon€, and finally on€mote card andthen oneof thc samesuit as one, th€ selecte
The Detil's Playthings oacket. Now ask whetherthe card he selcctedwas red or black alrd iependingon his answer,spellour lhe appropriatcword. makinga .eaondfaccdownpacketlo therightoflhe firsl one,andplacingthenext cardfacedownin front of this packet.Finally, askthesuit of his s€lected card,and spellthis facedownonto the table, makinga newhcapto the right of the other two, aDdagoin placinSthe De\t card, face down in front. Spella.llsuitswithout an 'S' *i!h the cxccptionof clubs'i.e. heart' diamond,spode,clubs. Now saythat you will teslihe efficiencyof tha lie detectorby ch€ckidg the answerslo the variousqucstioN. Tum ove! thc card in front of the first Dacketandreveslthat this truly showswhctherhe selecteda faceor a sDoicard. Likewisc,turn overthc cardin fro[t of the sacondpaclet to ,evial the true colour, and filally the cardin f.ont of thc last packd' to revealthe truc suit. lrlv€ thethrecfaceup cardsin front of eachof thair resp€ctivepackers.Whcn dcaling the packetsovcrlap thc dealt cards sliShtlyas in Figur€ 12balo*, which showsthe position reachcdat the conclusionof the pre{cdingsentelce. Figtne12

r,Ac€oRsPor

THISHEAPIS IGNORED

COLOUR

su|r

ww uu\ ant

IS BEDBUTFIVE DIAMONDIS SUITBUT COLOUR CAEDSO€ALTTHEREFOREFIVECARDSOEALT THEREFORE R€MEMBER-2 +2 REMEMB€R

B€fore concluding the affect you havc another small mental task to Dcrform, which is to rnakc €ach of the face down packets corrcct in ftcordance with the face up card above it. lf however, thc spectator has rold thc truth on colod alld sui! you have no adjustmerts to make, but if ny lics have been told you rDust proc€€d as follo$,s, in thc cas€of tltc lirtt packct, you have to do nothing at aI sincethe *ords face or spot contain tha samcnumber of lctters. The colour paaket will alwaysconlaill thrce or fivc c4rds, and becauseof their spreadcondr47

The Devil's PlaYthings tion you canreadilyseewhetheryou needto addtwo or subtracltwo to plus mak;il arreewilh thefaceup cardin front of it Simplyremember or packe! fivc will always contain two or minuslwo. Similarly,lhe suit once speh, thcrefore' has becn if a dia$rond sevencards,andseven,only two or minustwo to make againyou will simplyneedlo remember.plus ,i. t"Lt of tle faceao*n cardsaarerwith lhe faceup one.Thisfigurc, in coniunction*ith the one you havememoriscdfot lhc colourpack€t' will giveyou an answerof nothing,minustwo or plustwo, or minusfour or Plusfour. ivith this frnal figurein mind, you now gatherup the thre€facedown oackets. olacingthaoneat theexlrcmeriShton ils lefi handneighbour. ind thesi two dn rheexlremelefFhandone.Placethis packelon top of accordingto $e the facedown pack,anCnow makethe adiustmenl way of getlina d is the simplest undcrcutting figur;. DoubL mcmorised way of adding of cards,aud-a simplc injog run shuffle, is the easiest this can quite you cards, have to lose thern. Don't forget also, that if leave two or packets gather up and accldentally you the easilybe don€as pack. These tbe you replace below subsequendy whiah table; on the four c6rdsmustonly b€lostfrom rhecolourandsuitpack€lsYou will also lhal eventhoughlieshaveb€€ntold,no adjust' find on manyoccasions, out by a plustwoon lhecolouriscancelled tr€cause mcntsarenccessary, a minust*o on thi suit, and vice verJa.Figure12illustratesonecondi_ tion wher€this hasarisen. Concratulale$e assisringspeclatoron havingdesignedsuch an in arldsaylhat havingfoundthetrulhftrlanswers efficidt Dro8ramme, to information you this will now apply card, tie s€lected resocctoi actualy find thc cird. Spellingfrom the faccdo*n packonlo the table, to lhc threefaccup cardsstill therc.sp€llfaceor spol' thcn according colou and finallvsurt(S oniy on clubs,as b€forc).Turn overthectrd falling otr the last lattcr, and it will be the selectedone. ..THf, ITELENSBUNGHSPELLER" manyy€arsa8oby This effectusestha countspelltechruquedeveloped StcwartJames.Carcmus! be tak€n asin all trick of this rype' that the what hehasto do, otherwise,you will sp€ctatorcompletelyunderstands will be very difficult to corr€ct. which onc md with a failure. and of this,alsoa compe' a full gackstack,endbecausc Thetnck requires rcm falseshufile.Th€ slack,readingfrom thc fac€of lhe pack,is as follows: 95 JC IOSOC JSKC QSKSAH 2H 3H AD 4H 2D 5H ]D 6H 4D 7H 5D 8H 6D 9H tD r0H 8D JH 9D OH l0D KH JD JokerQD KD AC 2C AS 3C 25,lC 355C 45 6C 55 7C 65 EC?S9C 85 loc. Thequeenof hearts shouldb€crimpcd,sothat you canlocateit quickly,or alternativelyiusl memodseils ;pproximate positiod, so thal you can cut to it fairly 48

The Devil't Ploythings readily. This trick is idealto pcrform seatedst a table,althorUhit can bedone standingin front of a s€atedaudicnceby plrcing the pack behind the bact at the appropdate point, Howcvcr, I will assumeyou arc p€rformingcloseup, at a table, Rcrnovcthe packfrom its casc,and givc it a couplcof falseshufflesand cuts.Asl a spcctatorwhetberhc prafcrs rcd or black cards.If he saysblack, you mustcul the pack, so that the quac, of heartsis et thc face,if he saysrcd, you needto do nothiDg. Ptacetltc packbenerthtbe tablc, and hold it faceup in thc lcft hand. Ask thc spaclatorto think of arlycardof his s€Lctd colour,and 8oythat asyou bring cardsout from bcneaththc trblc, andplaccthentfaccdown oDtop of rhc table,heis to mcntqllyrpcll out the namcof his thoughtof card, rncludingthc word 'of'. lt is advirablcto giv€a quickilluetratlonof whatyou mcanat ahisstage,by actuallymcitioning a card,and explain_ iDghow it shouldbc spelt. The valuc is countcd,so for five he would count fva a d not sp€ll five, and thc rcmaindcrof tha card is spclt normally. Only lhe nameof the card is considcreda$d ncvcr thc word 'the' in front of thc nama, Whcn you are sulc ha understand!this procedure,comm€Ilccdraving cards out from bcncathrhe table, as follows:if heselcctedred, bring out tcn cardsfrorn thc frce of th€ pack, turning them fac€down ss cachis browht out, arld placcdon thc tablc, bui from elevenonwardspusholf two cardsfrom thc faccinio th€ right hand,and r€lurn onc of thcsr und€rthepack,thc onc that is rctumedto the pack, is the one that originally wassecondftom thc face. You wiU find upon trial that this action is extremclysimpl€ and rapid. From elevcnonwards,you simply pushtwo card6ovcr and take thern in tha right hand, and tlcn rvith the lcft fir8ertip, pull thc lowcrmostoDcof th€sebackundarthe pack, bringiogthe ore rcmainiDgin the ri8[t hand, out from under thc tablc aDd tuming it fact down as usual, bcfore placingit on top of the oncsalr€adydealtin a paclct otr the tablc. This action of pushinStwo off ard r€iuming onc bcncaththe Pack is con_ tinucd from positioncLvcn onwardsuntil told to stop by the spectator you havcrcachcdthe final letter of his mqrtal sclection. becaus€ If hc thoughtof a bla.k c.rd, you dcaleightcsrdsfairly from the facc, and thcn proccld arith the tcchniquc dascrib€d,from positio! nine onwards,until told to stop. whcn told to stop by the spectator,you will havcon the tablc a small Dackctof facc do*n cards, and under the table you will hava the remainderof tllc pack, faceup in the lefl hand. Rcmov€the pack from underthc tablc, tuming it face down in this action, aod place it face down,on thatablcalongside thc dcaltcards. Now askthc spectatorto tell you the nam€of his mentallyspeltcard. lf the spectatornamesany heart,club or king, tum overlhc card on top of thc dealtoff packe(lo rev€l thementallys€lectedcard. lf he namesa cardthat doesnot fall within the prcviowly mentionedgrouping,turn overthc top card of the pack, to rcvealthc mentallys€lectedcard. 49

The DeYil's PlaYthings ..CARD CASE'' The inspiration of lhis effecl was a lrick publishedbv Alex Elmslev severalyearsago callcd "BetweenYour Palns". The o;ly preparario; requiredh to ensurelhal lhe queenol hearts ls on toDof the Dack. Removethe cardsfrom the card case.and say lhar vou will olaceonr card back in the caseas a prediction. Hold lhe c4s.;o rhat tire flaD ir uppermosl,and bcnt back along the top side of the case,and held rhcrc by lhe left fingenips.Takc lhe lop card ol tjlc tace down packand Dush il into !h€ card casefacc do$n. The diagram illustratei rhe waf thir should be done, but the actual flap would bc held flat again rh; card caseso that it will not bc loo obvious to tha spcctators whiah way the cala really is up. Having plac€d lhe cad in thc case,close the flap, alld Dlacethe caseon the table, turning it over as you do so, so that the side wiih th€ half moon cut out in, is now uppermost.

Say that for the next pan of lhe lrick, yo! require a card to be selected but it musl not be a qu€en. so you wlll rem9ve the queensbeforc proceedhS wilh the trick. As you have tle€n sa''lng rhis. you have run ftrough the fac€up pack and lhrown rhc king of hcans.widour revcaling its face, face down on the table. You can now seaachfor the ranalnin8 que€nsin fie pack, and remove them. and drop them face down on rop of lhc ting ofheafis, ensuringhowever,that you placethe que€nof diamonds down last of all, so that it becomcstie loD card of the Dacket of four on lhe tablc. Haod the remarndar of the pack to a spectator artd ask bim to look throughiI. and selectany card he wishes.Whcn he hal doneso. givehim a feh tipped pen to wrile his signatureor rnrtralsot the face of thc selectedcard, and aftcr he has done lhis, have the selecftd card returned to the cmtre of the pack, and then control it to the toD. Say that you always do a trick with tlle qucens before attempting to find a selectedcard, and if the lrick with the queensworks, there;s a 50

The Dev il's PlsYt hi,tgs r,r,d chancetha! you will also be ablc to make th. selectedcard trick work. Whilst sayingthis, pick up the top face down queenfrom tle tnrfketof four on thetableand Dlaceit on top of lhe pacl, but outjolged l,'r about two inches. With the left first finge.tip, push off a very small t![eket of around six cards from the face of the pack and take them *ith rhc righl hand and dcposit them on top of the outjogged qu€an, but rtuare with thc bulk of the pack. Pick up the Dextque€n, and placeit on roDof the face down pack, squarewith the first outjogg€d queen.Again lush a small packet dol'n from the face of the pack with the lcft first I rrgcr, and dcposit thcsecardswith tllc right hand on top of the pack. Do r[c samet*icc more, so that you havc epparently placcd th€ four quecns In diffcrenl positions in th€ face down pack. Tum thc whol€ pack face and if you wisb, flash the facesof lhe first thrce queensby sprcading 'rD. rhcm slightly. Now push all four cards flush with the pack, but calry out l)0i Vernon'sMultiple Shift, or orc of its variatrofi, so that the four lrgSed cards, after completing thc shift, are on top of the fac€ do*n l0ck, and immediatcly bclow them will be the siSned, s€lect€dcard. Double uDdercuttwo caralsfrotn thc top of the pack, to the face, arld Irrk up a left little fingcr break under the third card from the top of the t'l|.k. Say ftal you will lry arrdcausctwo queens!o appearon the top. l rk€ off the top card of th€ pack, turninS it face up and replacingit still Ircc up on the pack, iniogged for about I inch. Plac€ the riSht hald | lrgcrtips on lhc face of tlis quccn and the fac€ dowD card imm€diately lrk)w ir, and push both cards forward together, until thc quc€nlin€s up wirh the bulk of th€ pack, and a single card is now outioggd. Rernove ihis outjogged card, and tum it face up to show it is a secondqu€€n. I'Lrceit still face up orl lop of the face up quecn already on the pack, and t||'r)car to lift both off the pack, by putting the right thumb at the near rl(tri end, and the fingers at th€ far one, holding tb€ que€nsftom abov€. Aer ally lift the thr€e cards above tbe little finger break, plus one more ( rrd, which is picked up by the right thumb from the pack, so that in ncrual facl the.e are four cards hcld in the right hand with th€ riglt rtrnmb holding a brcak atrove thc lowermost one. with the teft thumb, draw the fac€ qucen back onto the pack still fac€ ,rp and then briru the right haDdover as ifto lift it off, but rcaly deposit rhc cards below the right thutnb brak on top of the face up qucen and Itr off the two cardsleft in the right hand. You can spreadthesecards v.ry slightly,b|rl no more ihan a white border width. I'lace rhe pack face down on the table for a mom€nt ard pick up the .nrd casewith the left hand. Push thc two cards in the rirht hand still In(c up, into the cardcasc,but do not op€nit to do so Simplyslip them rr bctweenihe closedflap snd lhe halfmoon cut out, and thentap them rlr lhey will actually still be resting above the flap. l'ick up the pack again, and sayyou will try and make a third queen nltcar on the face.Tap the back of the pack and turn it over, lo reveal nlolher que€non lhe face. Saythat if you reversea card in the pack, ia

The Devil's Playthings sometimcsinfluences another card. Turn the queen at the face over so that it is face down on the face of the pack. Give th€ pack a singlc cut, but carry out th€ little finger pull down move with the card nearestthe left palm, so that this card is retained in position after the cut is completed. Spread the pack in a face down spreadon the table, to reveal tha! the queeDyou turned over has now causedthe remairing qu€€n to tum faca up alorgsid€ it. Take thcse two face up quecns out of the spraad, squaring tlcrlt up in thc sane way as the previous two were dhibited, and push then into the cerd case, above thc ones already there. There are now four cards resting above the closed flap of tb€ card case. Pick up the card case, and open th€ llap, which will cause the four cardgrcsting above it to drop down on top of the one that was alrcady in the case.With lltc right hand, reach into the casc, and rathcr briskly pull oul the lowermost card by grasping it betwecnthe tips of the fingers and thumb. This will be the queen of hearts, and you will find, when you do this, that it is not possible to seeth€ position tbis queen comes from, if you take it out fairly quickly. Having removed lhe queen of heafls, you can now, remove the oth€r three face up queensfrom abovethe final face down prediction card, or altematively, l€t a spectator r€move them for you. In any case,you will end up by eventually having r€moved the four fece up queens, but it wi b€ seenthat the face down prediction card is still in the casc. Mention to the spectatorsthat this c6rd was placad in the case b€fore commencing the effccl. Have the spcctator who signed the selectedcard, remove this card and look al it. He should be surprised to find that it is his own card, with hh signatureon.

The Devil's Ploythings is broken at any point by the spectaior,you can closethe upper half squarewith the original bottom card and then turn this half faceup to show the selection.Have the spectatorsign the card at the face of this half, and then drop this half on top ofthe other one, so that the selected (ard is sandwichedin lh€ centreof lhe pack. Fan the pack, faces towards tbe audience, and pick up the top queen from the group of face down cards on tlle table. Insert it inlo lhe fan immediately above the red backed card, and leave it outjogged slightly, but positionedso that if you lower the fan so the backsare seenby the audiencethe red back will be complerelyhiddeD. With the fan lower€d to its face down position, insert the other tbree face down queensfrom the lable, taking thcm from the top one by one, and pushing them inlo various positions, each one b€ing lhree or foul cards up from the previousone, When you insert the last one, which is not really a queenat ILII,slideit over slightlyto the left, so that when you roughly squareup rh€ fan, and turn it face up, the face of the king will be hidden by the orher queens. Having tumed th€ pack face up, square up the outjogged (tueensand pcrfonn the Multiple Shift, to bring them to the top of the pack. Now proced cxactly as described io ttre original version of the rrick, but at the climax, when you have r€moved the four face up queens liom the card c6se, you can show tbat there is still a red backed card insid€. Point out that this was in the card care as a prediction before eommencingthe eff€ct. Ask the spcctalor lh€ namc of his card and th€n have him check youl pr€diction. Not only is the prediction correc!, but his signature has mysteriously transferred itself to the face of the |redictedcard. In fac!, if he chccksthrough the blue pack, he will find rhat the blue backedtwin has no *{iting on it.

Trrdrposldor of I si8n.lur€ vrdraioo. You rnay care to try oul th€ followinS variation of the card caseeff€ct. Have aJ bcfore the quee! of hcarts inside the card case, but it has been placcd thcrc before performing the effact. Give the cnclosedcard caseto a sp€ctator saying you have sealeda card in the cascbcforc commcncing the effcct. Have him shakethe caseto satisfy himsclf that there is indeed a card inside t}le case,ard then place the card caseon the table with the half moon cut out uppermost, as before. In the pack whicb we will say is blue backed, you must have one red backed card in a known position. As an example let's say the red backed card is second from the face. Co throuSh the face up pack removing the suppos€d four que€ns in exactly the same marner as described previously. No* turn Lhcpack facc down, and lose the bouom card, by cutting or shuffling, so your red backcd card h left on the face of the pack. The rcd backed card has norp to bc forcaC, without its back bcing exposed.Here I use the lan force where the bottom card is run around the fall undemeath and held in position at one end, so that *hen the pack

52

53

Catdboard Charudes

Chapter2 CardboardCharades .IIELPMATES'' cardsby The themeof this effect is the revelationof a pair of selected have see if they which are first tested !o other cards, meansof lwo magicalproperti€s,to aid them in finding tbe chosenones No prior arrangementof the pack is requiredand the plot is an extremelysimple one for an audience to follow, the latter quality being an essential ingredient for any effect shown to laymen. Hold the pack face down in the left hand and riffle the outer left cornerfrom top !o face with the left lhumb, inviting a spectaiorio call stopat somepoint. Try to time the riffle so that he stopsyou som€where aroundthe cmtre ofthe pack. Removethe uppersectionoflhe packwith the right hand and o\hibit the face card of this half to the spectatol, askinghim to rememberit. As the upperhalf is beingshown,push over the two cardsal the top of the remainingsectionheld in the left hand sliShtly,so that the left little fing€r tip can pick up a breakbelowthem, beforedrawingthem back againto squareup with the packet.Replac€ tlle dght halld sectionof the pack on top of that in the left hand but maintainlhe little finger break. Riffle down with the left thumb for a card to be selectedby a secondspectatorbut this time usethe standard Riffle Force technique, so thal t}le point where the sp€ctator really tells you to stop is ignored,alld fte uppet half is removedat the breakpoint Exhibit the facecard of the upp€rsectionto th€ secondspectatorand ask him lo rememberit. Replacethe upper half of the pack onto the lower ooe and at the very momentit coversth€ lower half secretlyturn the left hand sectionface up by the normal Half Passtechnique,bul as the halvescometogethertake a break betweenthem first witb the tip of the right thumb and then with fte left little finger. It is important that ihe Half Passis comm€ncedjust as the upper sectionis beingreplacedon the lower and nol after a time laps€prior to makingthe pass.The latter approachwould tendio spoilthe timing and make it difficult to compleiethe sleightwithout a senseof'something havinghappened',beingconv€yedto the audience.After the completion 54

ofthe Half Pass,the right hand stayscurvedoverthe top offie packand immediatelydrops five cardsfrom the face of the upper sectionof lhe pack onto the faie up lower one, the cards being r€leasedfrom th€ tip.of ihe right thumb. The left little finger retakesits break abovethesefive Lardsand the right hand lhm movesaway from the pack Saythat you will endeavourto find the selectedcards by Deans of two othei cards bur that you must first test the cards selected,to seeif they have any magical abilities. Cive the pack oDe cut at the bleak point' completing thi cut and sBtrng that whatever cards come !o the top will be suitabla for the test. Double lift the top card of the pack showing its lace.and then lurn iI face down again. Removea singlecard from rhc roo and Dushir inlo the /ot& sectionof lhe pack, carefullysquaringthe Daik afr;r rhisaclion. Turn Lhetop card ot the pack fac€up and placeil passedils tesl. as srill faceup on lhe table,saying$at it hassuccessfully next card at the top lift the top. Double ir has magically travelled to the card rc be iested. will th€ second that it be and sayinS iis face, showing Figurel4 FACEUPEXCEPT ALLCABOS /,

IlI

ALL FAC€O O WN

TOP CARDS \

J

l<.-

<-A

Cadboard

Charades

Turn the two cardsface down back onto the top of the pack and then push off a singlecard from the top of the pack, and insert it about a quarterof the, ay dowlr from the top of the pack. As you push it into rhe pack usea sliShllydiagonalaclionso that as the pack is squared.lhe leftlitrle finger can obLaina break immediatelyaboveit. Turn lhe Lop card of the pack face up with the dght hand and place it with the previous one already face up on the table, sayldg that the secondcard has ;lso passedits test, so you car now use[hesecardslo help you find the Cut off th€ cards above lhe little finger break with the riSht hand and placethem on the table in position 'A' as shownin the Figure 14. The ;ext sectionof the pack you cut off with the dght hand must be at ihe point wherethe cardsarebacklo back,this is about onetbird ofthe way do*n, and if you cut in a natural manner at around this point, lhe cards will automatically break at the dght place Always lift the upper section uDa tinv bit at the nearshort endofthe pack to ensureyou havehit the rigtrt spbt before removinglhe cards, so that any adjustmentcan be m;de while you still havetie opportunity.Placethis sectionat position 'B'. Finally placethe remainderof the pack at position 'C'. Pick up o;e of the two facecards from lhe table altd place it face down on top oa pack€t'A'. Takepack€t'B' and placethis facedown on top of 'A', tte c;mbinedheapbeingperfectlysquared.Take the remainingface up card from the rable and place it face down on the combined 'AlB' h;ap. Take packet'c' and placeit on top of the 'AlB' one' but jog it slightly b de left along its lonS side as shown in fiSure 14. Pick up the co;pleie pack with the righ! hand,holding it from above'the fingersat the f;r sh;rt end and the thumb at the near one, and move it towards the left hand. As it reachesthe left hand and'starts to b€ lowered into the left palm, usethe left fingersto cany out the Half Parswith the lowersection ;f the Dackwhich is convenientlyjoggedto the right, and then hold the Dacksouaredin the left hand,the riSht hand movingaway.The appearin"" of th. *hole ."qu"nce is simply of placing lhe two cards in differedt parts of the pack, and then placingthe pack in the left hand. Cut about on€ third of lhe pack frorn top to face, and then spreadit in a long face down line on the table. The two cards with 'magical cardslo Lurn DroDeirieshaveturnedfaceup and alsocausedlhe selecred iaci uo. one selecledcard teine immedialelyadjacentto each o[ the 'maglcones . ..SMOKESCREEN" Tbe plot of this effect is a favourite of mine and involves carrying oul a magi;al interlude with a group of cards, before using them to find one that has beenpreviouslychosen.In other words as in 'Helpmates" the magicalability of the cardsis tested,beforetheyarerequiredto carryout 56

Cardboad

Charudes

rheir real task. Before proceeding with the technical details, I would like to mention ttrat credii for tbe Ghost Count and the small packet reverseex€.uted reversal during the count goeslo Alex. Elmdey, and for lhe progressive of cards by using the counl. ro Bro Hamman To be as cofiecl as Dossible.I must alsocredit CharlesT. Jordanfor his originatronof the ;rincirl€ of the Ghost Count, which is to count four cards as fow, but acruailvconcealoneot rhemin lhe counling. As pointedoul by Francrs Haxlo;, this appearedin Jordan's "Thirty card Mysteries" booklel, iFhantomAces', in 1919,a rather staggeringrevelation' underthe title performing the effect place the KC fac€ up inside the card case Prior to and close the flap. Afiange the remarnder of the pack so that reading from the top of the face do*n pack the order is KS, KH and KD' lbllowed by the balanceof the cards To commencethe routine, fan the pack for a card to be selectedand afrer it has been removed, close the spread and hold the pack squared face down in the left hand. when the sp€ctatorhas commited the card to In€mory,undercutIhe pack for its replacemcnland belore offenng the orisinal uDDerhall for the selecledcard lo be replacedon top' pushover oi spadesslighlly so thal lhe left little finger can take a break 'hittlng helow ii Now let the spectatorplacehis card immediately above the king ,'l ,Dadesand thenreplacethe oder halfof the pack on top, lakingcare lo maintarnthe l€ft litlle finger break belowthe king of spades. Say that you have found the kings to be the most magical cards in the lrck and that beforel-indingthc selectedcard. you would like to give a ,icmonstrationof the kings' abilities Turn the pack faceup and in this xcrion do a Turnover Pasaat the break point. Show thal there is a king at rhe face of the pack and then turn the pack face do*'n again and flip the r,,o card of thi Dackface up and face down again, to shou' thereis a ..ond king at the top. Hold rhe pack facedo\*n in thc righl hsnd' the trandbeinglcurvedoverthe top ofthe pack, lhe thumb beingat the near \hort end and the fingers at the far one. Thc actual grip is the one ,.quired for executirua Sideclide. Bring lhe left hand lo the packand by .rlrpearto draw the lop and tacecardsfrom lhe pack simuhaneously. the sliding and then on the face piacingthe thumb on ihe top and fingers i*o cards off and dropping them face down on the tabl€. In actual fact' ,r is the secondfrom ftc€ cardwhichis removeddueto the standardSide ( ;lide move being carried out *ith the aid of lhe right finSerssay that you ;ill now try and find the other lwo kings. Before doing rt,'r ci'e thi Dack a false shuffle reiaining lhe lop and face cards in I' Arr;on. I normallyusean overhandshuffleralher t hana riffle one.asit \ems to give a better implession of the top and face sectionsof the pack I'cingmiied. A simpleprocedureis to draw off the top aid face cards r,,Bctherin the first overhandshuffleso that they end up at the faceof rh('packupon its complction,andthendo a secondshufflewhich retains rlc iace cird in positionby pressurewith the left fingetsand bringsthe

Cardboqrd Chqtudes

CardboardChorades

s€condfrom the face!o the top againby droppingsmallpacketsonto tha cardsin the left hand,until the original secondfrom facecardis thrown smSlyon rop. Hold the packfacedorvnin the right handandthrow it to the left hand retainingthetop and bottomcardsin the right handby pressurewith tha fingcrsand thumb on the resp€ctiveandsof thc pack. Turn lhes€lwo cardsovcl to showthem briqlly as two kingsand then placetheh faca down telt{€en thc two alreadyfacedown on thc tabl€. Pick up tic four cardsfrom the tablaatrdholdthemin the right hand, the hand holdingthem from .bove, the fingersol the far short end and thc thumb at thc nearone, thc hand baingcurvedoverlhe backsof tha cards.trl placingthc cardsinto position in thc ridt hand, usethe left thumb to spread them very sli8htly diagonally,the thumb actuslly spreadingthem at the left inner corner,This spreadshouldonly b€ vety slight, no mole than lhe white border widtb, and is doneto emphasizc the fact that only four cardsare prescnt. Us€the left thumbto drawoff threecardsfrom the onesbeingheld in theright, the $umb slidingoff eachcardsinglysolhat theyendup in thc left halld irt reverscdordcr but not absolutelysquar€.Twistthe lcft hand towardsyou so that the facesof the ki!8s arevisible,and pushthe card in the right h6nd in the secondfrom facepositionk€epingit facedo*n. Thefacaof the right handcardmustnot of courseberevealed.Theviaw thc audiencehas,is that oneking har bem insertedfacedo*'n amongthc other lhree fac€up ones.Squarethe packetof cardsup and tllen turn thcmfaccdown. Saythat the kingsalwayslike to facethc samewayand Chost Count tlle four cardsto rcvcal that they are apparantlyall faca on topoftheolhars,Placethecards down,placinS thefinalcardcountad againin lhe riShl hand usinSftc right hand Siip previouslydcscribcd, with the hand beingcurvedatlovcthe facedowll cardsand also spread the cardsslightly againat the left inncr com€rwith thc left thumb. Saythal you will try the samcthing with two kingsrcvcrs€d.Thumb off the top two caldsonc by onewith lhe l€ft thumbso that thcy endup in the left hdndin rcvcrscdorderand thentwist thc handtowdrdsvou, so that the faccsof the two kingsare s€enby the audienc€,Ins€rtth. two cardsremainingin the right hand facedownbetwaenthes€lwo cards,so thal from the audienct'sviewpointtwo fac€downkingsin th€ right hand are beinSim€rtcd betwccntwo face up otresin the left. &uate up tha packetof four calds and turn thern face down in the left hand. The chost Count is now carricd out again to showthat all four kings arc again facedown, but a slight variation takesplaceat the stagein thc countwhereyou haveonly onecard lcft to countin the left hand. Bring the righ! hand with its thr.e cardstowardsthe one in thc left, but by tilting the right haltd inwardsslig]rtly,actuallytuln the packetof three cardsin this handoverastheygo beneathth€ final onebeingtakcnfrom the lcft hand. This reversalmoveis an extremelyeasyoneto makeand althoughthe anglesaregooddue to the naturalmisdrrectioninherentin 58

rlr( .ounting, it h advisableto try and keepthe back of the riSht ha[d rowrrds the;udience as the movc t4kes place. A little practice in frodt of n nrirror will show how deceptivethis count lcversal is. Place the packct rl lbur cards face down in the right hand in the usual positiol and *ith rhc usualsli{ht sprcadal the lefl innet comcr. sav rhat you will now try wilh three kings revets€d.Thumb off one ur.l trom tie too off those in the riShr hand with Ihe left rhumb and r*i\r lhc lefl hand so lhat lhe faceof lhis king is visible Plac! th€ three (lrds in the right hand on the facc of thc one in the laft' the appcafance hcina that you are placing three facc down kings on one face up onc. soua--re uo ihe cardJin the l.ft hand and lurn them overso that th.y arc lftc down. The Ghosl Counl is againmade,but lhistima it must be donc ro concealthc bottom card, which is in fact thc *ay Jordan did it in 1919. llricfly, the l€chnique is to hold the four cards in the left hand at the tips ,'l rh; fincersin fte slandardgip uscdtor this typc of counl, and then rh mb ofitwo cardsinto rhe riSht hand wilh the dgh! $umb, rcversing lhcir order in this aclion and when you come back to thc left haBdto thumb off a third card, thc two already in the right hand go undeneath tho$cin the left and are addcd to the face ofthc two cards already th€re. As soon as thcsa cards alc in position, the left thumb pushes off thc unncirhreecardsoflhe four now in lhe left hand by pushingagartrstthc l;ti hand long sideaDdthcselhrcc cardsare take! in fie right hand The linal ca.d is iaken from thc left hand on top of these to complelc th€ sav rhat as well as making faceup kin8sturn facedown. you canalso rrrki face down ones tuln fac€ up Ghosl Count lhe cards in lhe slandnrd Llmslevmarnar to showthat thayar€ still all faccdown, placingthe tl|'r card countedon top. As you makelhis counl. injog th€ third card ,ounted sligltly, Squar; up the jogged card with the assistanceof the r'rhr handand lifl ii sliEhtlyin this actionso that the lelt little fingercan r.ilr uo a breakbelowthe top two cardsoflhe four. Hold the packetface (t('wnin rhe lcft ha[d marnlaininglhe break. Statethat you will fts! of all lum one king face up visibly and seeif rhis has any cffect o! t}le others. Lifi off the top two cards as one by virrue of rh; break being held, tum them face up and insert them b€tw€en rhe two facc down csrds r€maining in th€ left hand, the left thumb tip oullincdown the facr crtd of thc facedown pair al (heouler left corner a gap for casyinserlionof rhe taceup kinS{s).Rememberof i,, pro-duce coursethat the krnls ar€ handled as ona card. Ghost count thtcards to show that there ale now two kings face up' olacincrhelastcardcountcdon lop ofthe group Counl themonccmore irrrngihe samegrip as the Ghosl count' but this tim€ counLfaidy and olac; the la$ card comted Detealrt the others. This will show three kings Irc now face up. Finally Chost Counl the cardsagain,placingthe last cord counted terow the others. The effect will be that all four kings are flow face up, althougb in reality only three ar€ face up and a face down

Cardboord Charades card is positionedthird from the face of the group. Mak€ some mention of the fact thal having exhibiredsomeof the king's powers,you will now try and get them to assislyou in finding lhe selectedcard. Still keepingthemfaceup, pushall four cardsinto thecard caie so that they fall upon the faceup king that is alreadyin rhe case.To coverangleshere,I normallypushthe four cardsinto the card casewitb the flap in its closedpositionand oncethey hav€completelyenteredthe case I flip the flap of the caseopen and then shui again. By inserting them with the flap closed is meant that they are slid in between {he tonSueof the flap and the sideof the case. Hand the caseto a spectatorand ask him to rest it on th€ main pack for a moment.He is then requested to open it and removethe packetof cardsftom the case.Whenhe spreadsthe kings,he will find the selecled card reversedin lhe centreof them,

,,covERPASS" The four tricksthat follow, are basedupon a passdoneund€rcoverof the top card, or cards.Sincefew descriptionsof this type of passhave appearedin print, a technicaldescriptionof th€ sleight will be given beforedescribingthe effects.I would like to mentionhere,that a superb e\ponentofthis passis Mr. FredRobinson,and whilst I am not a! liberty to give details of Fred\ excellenthandling, my method, due to its similarityto Fred'sin severalrespects,is givenherewith his permhsion. The powerof the CoverPassis considerable and I stronglyrecommend aIIy card enthusiastwho has not yet addedit 10 his repertoire,to do so without delay.

Cardbodrd Charades half \ o an d wit h t he lef t lhum b slide olf lhe lop car d of lhis sD ectal ors.

rhecardisrhenpulledsquareandrhe rv 'pecrator' ,f"iii."" o. "."a position,bv simplvdropping " horizontal t;i ;;ii;;;-,;t';; ";'isinal down the '"ri.laft hand of Lhepacl(is movedoler rhecardsin thelefl ,i"rti r,""a 'i"i"" n."J- in?""o-*tt beingmadefrom the riShl handside Asihe righl handcards;taIl ro moveacro\slhelefLones'andal thepolntwheretney dr about.r'..rhecardsbelowtherishtrhumb ;;;;;G;, il;;;i grippedbv the,lefltand llnger and areimmedialelv ureaiiie released pas'r'Atler rhe orop nas handed for lhe classictwo dD\ in DreDaration

wiLhourpail:'l;l'fl continues rtrerigrttrand uienmadJ. :::,[il3i',1: up w squared hand are in lhe card or cards

gripon r""i. iftii-o""lti"" it tttownin Figure15 Notethatthelefthand were carr)Tng if a5 the same vou ," ,n. tighl is eracrlv ii" ..J'],i"*a The it-ir"i.Jp"". irt. litttetingerbelowandotherfingersaboverighr the of rhe back bv is conceated " card\ "ri .t rhe p.iiii;." .Grri l"gg.a Io Iheaudirnces rru"na ani'attoUvt<..pingthepacklowdownin relaLion viewpoint.

. / ---,-

R IGH THANDSHI €LO S / SECTIONOF PACK ,) TH A TISJO G G ED TO R IGHT

Technique for Cover Prss The passmay b€ carriedoui under one or morecardsand is invisible when due atiention is givento techniqueand angles.The pack is firsl held in the left hand with the left little linger holding a break under the top card, or cards,that you wish to rctain in positionwhilst the passis completed.For this descriptionwe'll assumea break is held under lwo cards. With ihe left lhumb, riffle down the outer left cornerofthe pack until you reachup approximatelythe centreof the pack. Bring the rigbt hand abovethe cardsin the left and lift the halfpack abovethe lefr thumb up, taking up the break from the left little finger with the right thumb, the right hand holdingthe cardsfrom above,iis thumb at the nearshort end of the pack and fingersat the far one, We'll assumethat lhe purposeof riffling the cardswasto haveone chosen,so you now lift up the lower sectionof the pack with the left hand so that the facecardis towardsthe ffi

TO PCARDACTSAS COVEAFORJOGGED SECTIONOF PACK

SECTIONOF PACK JO G G EDTO RI G HT

Havinc p.otthe cardsinto position. the passcan be carriedoul

#;;hf ;;i;;"i;

quite

ti canbedonelnrhenormalwavor with.the iil;; il;"; )ou areusins' ,im",;;p;ndinsonrhetvpeor presenrarion

Iypeor t iavour the riffle pass,but onl) if lhe riffle canbejushlredrn Ine

orthe aIethedroppins 'liJlli',iilt"ililS;"nt points ot thesleishL

oler Ine ..ud' so that Lhevlog lo the righl as you bring the rlcj|Lrano rne aller nano l.ll. and Lhe!quaring of rhe cardsremainingin the rlSil

of thepackbeins .i'"i'. *"ii irrj.ii r'i'"alonssideot lhelowersecrion 6l

CardboordCharudes

CardboardCharudes heldin the left hand. The rigbt hand finSerscurledaroundthe outer end of the pack hide the tapered break that exists prior to the pass being carriedout.

in rhecenlre Lhatthis is now lhecard previouslyreversed

ll r; til ;;; ;; ;iliut

in a rp. G,rtlt'"*a out a lirlle rhenrurnlhe packover caro reversed 'i.ii the of face lle reveal .""alii"'. #ti lhe righl handto packat the

lTiI;';;' d;l;;fft

.,GOING BYE BYE"

Usebothhands

cenlr€ u"tii *'" r""' ao*ncardaroundth€fanned

wai turnedracedownontothe

beginnmg,

This is a transposition effect which registerswell with a[ audiencefor two main reasons. The first is that th€ transpositio[ is dircct, and the secondthat lhe back of onc ol the transposedcards is apparently in view of the audienceat all times. Hold the pack face up in the left hand and draw attertion to th€ face card. Appear to tum this card over so that it is fsce down od thc face of thc pack but really turn two cardsdown as on€. TuIn the two cards down rathcr rapidly, so that the face card of the pack is not exposcd for any length of time. As an example, lets say th€ card you have drawn the spectatorsattention to is the six of hearts and it is now apparently resting face down on th€ pack. Riffle thc outer left corner of lhe pack with the left thumb riffling from top to bottom and requestinSa spectalor to call stop as you reach thc approximately ccntre of the pack. Take care to commenceyour dfflc a little below the upper two cards of the pack. lvhen the spectaior requestsyou to stop, bring the right hand over the pack to remove the upper half, the thumb at the near short end and fingers at the far one but before lifting the half off, lift up the top card very slightly so thal a thumb break can b€ obtained below it almosl at lhe same time as the upp€r half is removed. This leavesyou with the upper half held in the right hand with a thumb break under the top face down cald in preparation for the Cover Pass. Draw attention to the narnc of the card at ihe face of the left hand packet, pointing out that this was the card you were requestedto stop at. Push this card slightly over to th€ right with tlle left thumb and use the left hand edge of the half pack held in the dght hand lo flip the side jogged card face down on top of the face up cards in the left hand. Do this slowly to emphasizethe fairness of the operatron. Thc position at this stageis that you have on€ half held in the left halld and one in the right, each with apparently a noted card face down on the fac€ of each. Actually the right hand sectiol hastwo face down cards on the face. Replacethc right hand sectionon top of thc left but in this action cafty out e Cover Passunder thc top card, which you had previously prepared for, by obtaining a right lhumb break earlier in the effact. As you square the cards after replacing the right hand half, 8et a lcft little finger break under the two fac€ down cards at the fac€ of the pack, Tum th€ two face down cards abovethe little finSer break over so thal thcy end up face up on lhe face ofthe pack, and the spcctators will s€e

62

..STILLCOLLECTING'' of andaskhim lo removeanyt\ro -aces Handthepacklo a spectator lhe to shuffle him Request you and hand themto ,rr"'lu-._ relerseme "oiou, whitsrhels doinsrhis' secretlv ,i. p"ir b:l:Y"tlt:la: ue 'ii"fii.t-"i rtassivm vousorhatir isface i"*Ju.. oi rrt. piit t. ^"0 trp ol i;p a s'iighl6reakbawecntheaceswirhthe ;;;iie;bov;ii lhe richt thumb. "'wi?"'i.ir. his shuffling'lakelhe packbackandhold.it pack' "..pr.red i.li rtand.Placetie lwo aceson top of lhe thal r"*'a'"*" l"*y""i mention and oth€r' ii*ii" tii.. i"t.tu[v tquaredoneabovelhc go pick rtretrict Asrhev ontorhepack' l;::::: ;iil.6;;;ii,;itorm a so rhat the ;ight dumb wirh the tefi lirtl€ fins€r ;; ;;;;;i-fffi hreak ' 'ii.i* is heldunderthc top ace packandwiththethumb ri fflethenear th€ ii. iie-hi;"ta ' "bove the faceunlil vou reachaePro'dileJl:1t: lr'on'ini upi""'at from upperhalt In .i"i* oi ttJ o".r. cu rh€packal thispoinr'holdingfte

atth€ thefingers iili'.r'"n",:riJiii]ii ,l. rr'"i"'u"ittreneaishonenaand takesup thebreak

i,, ir'Jtco"turiontor lhecoverPsssThelbumb "i. the packfrom th€lcfi littlc finger' ." tr'. ''' p""rt'irt"i"" to.fie "r "*iiil,ti"J .f the llft handsectionof the packsliShlly packet' the of "*atttti"'t, ata rr'." nip lr taceuponto! tne 'i'i','tiiilii,ili"'il handiongsidcwith fte lcft handlong srdeorcard tiirti t'it,i,tiiiit lhe of namc lhe to i" il. tlgrtthani Drawaltcntion ,'*t.iffii ro t;' rf rhe lowerhalf and requestthe spectarors il,;;; l; ;;; .ommit it to mcmory. '' of thepackon top of thelefl handone iiiii""" ,ii-ii*r ri-a section the two halves As thc i.a is sandwichedberw€'en * iiii-iriJi"'JG

above irnmedia(elv i'"'ijli'"ili. ili ii.i*t*ii iil.l.tir'-a trtt' nng" card' lop lhe thepassundercoverof it" iici up c"ti anatrtcnexccore will rhat stare vo! iq'a'rJ in rrrercrrhand' iffiig if,.;;fiil;iiv

thr trct rlhrstrate how lhe acesat ur€(op ot tne psekcanhelpwilh lhemwrln ''' -" remove \lightlv and pack of rhe ioti"i irt. lop rr,*. card up facc the ir'.mlna *isntranro'ho'"rhar downaces' ritiii"g"ards rhe lwo facr packis now between 'r'"iu'riirtan'a. rhi of ir,,.irr. isalsoslill-holdl""a' ".nti. ortlc t't' i]1il'i; il,nl;ili;".i;i.i "tich th€two race between from card tie faceup ;;;;"i;;;;i, ",; "."ue it on thetable. ,t,i*n onesand olacc 53

Cadboad charades

Cardboard Charudes Saythat just in casethe spectarors did not seehow the trick wasdone, you will repeatit, but this time you will leavethe acesfaceup on top of rhe pack,wheretheycanbe watchedclosely.As you makethis starement bring the two facedown cardsin the right hand over the pack and place them still in an unsquaredstatejoggedslightlyove. the riSht hand long edSeofthe pack. Retakethem in the righr hand, but this time hold ih€m from above,the thumb at the nearshort end and the fingersat the far oneand squarethem up by lifting them slightlyabovethe pack and rhen runningthembackwardsand forwards,their long edgesrunningbetwe€n the tip of the left thumb at one sideand the tips ofahe lefl fingersat the other. On one of the backwardmovements,drop the lower card of rhe pair heldby the right hand so thal it squaresup with the main pack and lhen continuethe forward movementbut with only a singlecard. Curl the right band forefingeraroundthe left hand long edgeof this cardand pull on it so that thecardswivelsover until faceup, pivotingbetweenthe right hand secondfinger and thumb held respectively at eachshort end. Placethe singlecard faceup on top ofthe pack, takinga left litlle finger breakbelowit. The effectshouldbe that you havesquaredthe two face down acesand placedthem both face up on top of the pack. Using the sameactionas ea.lier in the effect, usethe right thumb to riffle up*ards from ihe face of the face down pack, placing the thumb on the near short end. Keep riflling until you cometo the face up ace which is aroundthe centreof th€ pack .rndthen let one more card drop from the rhumbonto this aceand cul lhe packar Lhispoinl, by removing the upperhalf with the right hand and holdingir in rheposirionrequired for the Cover Pass, rakinS the break wit}l the ri8ht thumb rip as previouslydescribed.Turn the left hand so that the facecard is towards the spectators and thenpushthe top card partiallyoff rhepacketwith rhe left thumb so that its face is exposed.Ask the spectatorsto remember thh card and then pull it back squarewith the remainderof the packet and turo the hand so that the half pack is facedown again. The righl hand sectionis now replacedon top of the one in the left hand and a left little fingerbreakpickedup betweenthe rwo halves.The CoverPassunder the.topcard is now executed,and the pack held for a momentsquaredin theleft hand.The right handnow spreadsout the top threecardsofth€ pack and re rovesthem in a slightspreadto showthat a face down card has appearedbetweenthe face up aces.They are turned over and dropf,ed on the table io r€veal that the card betweenthem is the one from th€ centreof the pack.

r,rnsferring thc pack to the riSht hand in preparatron for an overhand lhuffle, the break beingtaken up by the riSht thumb in this action. The .urds above the thumb break can then be shuffled off into the left hand |nd the final sectionthrown off to bring the selectedcard to the top. Any \imilar control where the cards appear to be mixed can be used, but not v,,ur favourite'invisibl€pass',which would make the presentation iUogical. Say that there now is thc problem of firditlg thc selectedcard, but the rask may have been made easier for you if the shuffle has accidentally brought it to the bbttom or top of the pack. Turn the pack over to expose rhe fac€ cerd alld ask if it happens to be the chosen one. Wben the sp€ctator denies that it is his, turn the pack face down and say, "well how about thc top one" , As you saythis, do a double turnover of the top rwo cards and l€ave them face up on top of the face down pack. The \pectator will again state that this is not his card. State that as coincidcnce doesn't app€ar to be on you. side you will haveio work for your living. The pack is still lying fac€ down in the left hand, with apparently one card facc up on the top. Obtain a br€ak with lhe left little finger under the top card of the pack and th€n with the left rhumb slowly riffle the outer left corner of the pack from top to face, irrt(inga spectatorto stop you aroundthe centreofthe pack. Make sure vr,ustart your rifflr below the top two cards of rhe pack to ensurethal you do not exposethe extra fac€ up card at the top. When the spectator eallsstop, bring the right hand over the pack and cut off the half pack rbove the left thumb break, holding it in the appropriate position for (rrrying out the Cover Pass,with the riSht thumb tip taking the break Irom rhe left little finger. Usethe left hand long side of the half pack held in the right hand to ,lip rhe top card of the Ieft hand seclion face up, and ilate that you will rsc ihis card to help you find the 3electedone. Replacethe cards held in rheright hand ot top of lhosein the left and immediatelyca y out the Itassunder cover of the top face up card, which will bring the card iust ilipped face up al the centrc to th€ second from top position, and send rhe select€done do*,n to the c€ntre. Casually appear to tum the card at the top of the pack face dorvn but I cally do a double turn down, so that the two face up cards at the lop are turned down as one card. say the easiest vray the face up card at the renrre could help you would be to turn itself into the chosrn card. Spread rhe pack in a lotg well spacedfac€ down spread on the lable to show thal rhis hashappened.

..REVELATTON" "1929 ACES" Have a card selectedby a spectatorand returnedto the pack, Usea simpleshuffletlpe controlto bring the card to the top, suchas holdinga break above it with the ieft little finger after its retum, and then

This effect requires an arrangement of the top sevencards of the pack which readingfrom the top of the pack is as follows: face down card,

64

65

Cardboard Charades face up ace, face down card, face up ace, face down card, face up ace, facedown card, face up ace,temainderof face down pack. lf presented as an opening effect the arrangement presents no problem,but if usedas an intermediateone, it may be helpful to outline the procedurbI useto mak€the anangemenlin front of the audience.It is necessaryto first of all get the four acesto the top of the pack unobtrusively,one way beingto cull th€m du ng a precedingtrick, in which you have a lcgitimate reason for looking through the facesof the cards.However.the method I favour is to hav€ the four acesand one otler card in my pocket b€fore the performance, the aces having their backs towards the body and the fifth card /aci'rg the outetmost one. A trick is performed during your ptogramm€ in which a sel€cted catd travcls to your pocket, and in removing this card the five cards already in the pocket are palned in the ha.d that produced the chosen card, and added to the top of the pack. This leavesthe foul acesface up under the top face down card of the pack and if the pack is given a faro shuffle in which only the iop five cards are perfectly accurale it will be in tle correct order to proceed with lhe effcct. The faro shuffle csn be of the 'in' or 'out' varietyand the extrafacedown cardsl€ft at the lop of the set up do not effect the working at all. If you prefer an approach in which the acesare culled to lhe lop of the pack during a proc€€ding effect you still have the problem of Setiing them correctly positioned before you can proceed with this effort. One way would be to turn lhe pack face up, Half Passthe fow aces,cut one card from face to top alld then turn the pack face down and give it one faro shuffle. Having achievedthe basic set up in one way or anothcr you can now continue your prograiime with the following sequenc€. Spreadthe pack betweent}le hands !o show casually that the cards are face down, but do not of coursespread the top few cards, which would reveal the face up aces.Squarethe pack face dor\{r in the left hand and take a left lillle finger break under the top card. Cut about thtee-quaiters of the pack off with the right hand holding this section from above, the thumb at the near sho( end and the fingers at the far one, and taking the break from the left little finger with the right lhumb. L€t this section of the pack dribble down from the right hand to the left, until only about half the pack is left in the right hand. Make some remark sucb as "remcnrber all face down" as you do this action. Finally, replacetlte half pack held in tha right hand on lop of those in the lefl and immediately carry out the Cover Passunder the top card. Start to spreadthe pack slowlybetweenthe handssaartingright at the top so that the cards are seento be face dowo unlil you hit a face up ace around the centre. lvhen you cometo the acepush it over dighaly so that the face down card below is exposedand then removethe aceand place it on the table. Squareup the remainderofthe packand hold it facedown in the left hand. 6

Cardboord Charades srale ihat you will try and makea secondaceturn face up and as you .iry this, lifi off about a quarterof the pack with the riShi hand and let rhcrn dribble down back on top again. Spreadthe cards fac€ down I'crweenthe handsuntil you cometo the next face up aceat the c€ntre, l,[sh it over so that !h€ card belowit is exposedand then removeit and r'hce it with tlle oiher on€ alreadyon the table. lvhen you removeil, do vr by splitting the pack so that the aceis at the face of the upper half whichis beingheld by the right hand. The righl hand movesto lhe table r,' depositthe acetherealtd then returnswith its half pack but replaces rl,cmbelowthosein the left hand,thus cutting the pack and bringingihe rUnaindefof your stackback to the top. Spreadthe pack betweenyour handsto showthem facedown but not \lrcading the top few cards,andthenrepeatthe squaring,dribbling,and ( over Pass already explained in connection with lhe revelation of the trsl ace.The pack cannow be spreadout to revealthe third ace,whichis ,frnoved and placedon tbe table as previouslydescribed,and tbe pack ,r\sembled without a cut, by placingthe half pack held in the riSit hand l,rck on top of thos€in th€ left. The final aceis producedby ribbon spreadingthe pack in a wide face rlown spreadacrossthe table,which addsa punch to the productionof when performingthis effect I usethe riffle Cover Pass,and actually \rarethat by clicking the cardsI will causethe acesto turn over one by r'r)c.Whetheryou adoptthis procedureor a CoverPasswithout riffle is |,tr the read€r to decide.Whilsr you only have to do a pass for lhe |roductiol of acesone and three,you shouldtry and make your pack lxndling look the samefor acestwo and four. ..WRONGAGAIN'' The follow the leaderplot has becomea very populat one in card Inagicand numerousvadationshave appearedin print involving not only lhe colours of the facesof the cards,bul also the colours of the hacks.It is certainftat otherpeoplehavethoughtof appling the follow rheleaderthemeto the suitsof the cards,but I do not recallhavingread rr in print an'.rhere. As thereare four suitsin a pack, lhe fact that these ean sort themselvesout dep€ndingon the leader cards placed above rhem,seemsevenmoresurprhingto an audiencethan a two-fold separarion, and technicallyit is just a! easyto do. Removefour cards of eachsuit from the pack ard arrange the sixteen rards so that eachsuit group is together.For easeof explanationI will refer to a specific suit order, ahhouShsuch an order is not striclly necessary. Lets say that readingfrom the face you hav€, four hearts, lollowed by four spades,followedby four diamondsand finally four .lubs. ln selectingthe suil cardsfrom the pack, pick spot cardsthat are

Cardboad

charades

not easilyremembered. SDreadthe sixteen cards face up betweenthe hands, pointing out that vou have four cardsof eachsuil and also drawingallenlion to the order 6i rhe suir groupsfrom back lo face. ln our exampleclubs' diamonds. inadesand hearts.Closeup the spreadbet*eenthe handsand lake a left litle fing€r break abovelhe borlom two clubsof the paclet. Turn the complet! packet face down, carring out a Turnover PassaLlhe break ooin't.so that two cardsare secretlytransferredlo rhe faceof $e packel.

Figure16

Cardboard Charades land with th€ one at position 'C', retainingthe one at 'C' in your haod' r rraneethe one in your hand wilh the card al posilion B', relaining-the ."ia i.or 's' in your hand. Finally place the one in your hand al order of ,r.titi"r e', p.i.tit"g .ut tllat you have compl€tely altered the the leadercards. Turn thc threc face down cards in front of leader 'A', face up, taking .ur. to t."p ttt.ln sq*.e and deal off the face card onto the leadet card i._.-rro* irtit trt. tuitt aatch. Turn lhe remaimng two cads face down ar..ing lheir ord$ and replac€lhem above the leadcr card' "uhout tttis ptoiea,rre for lhe heapsunder leadcts'B', 'c" 'D" r.oeai 'nd and do packets once again around Savthal you will changethe leader rr"sivirraiging 'D' *ilt 'A', retaining'A' in your hand Now chang€ iii. r*'oiatii in-vou. ttand wilh lhoseal 'B', relaining'B' in vour hand' your hand' rt'"nqi itrot ln vo* tt-d with thosea! 'c', retaining'c' in position 'D" Jnd f;ally Dlacelhesatwo cardsat palrs of face dow! oncs above the the each of frorn Take the top card top of th€ leader groups up on packeti them f&cc drop and leader immediately trclow them, to again show that the suits match' Say rhal ir would make no differenceif you changcdlhe face down .urJiaiounO. ana ao rlis bv changing'D'with 'A , renining 'A'in vo-ur r'ani.-tlen :n'*lttr '8" retaining'B' in your hand, then 'B'wilh 'C" your hand r.i"irilne'c' in your hand. and fin.uy placing the catd in single cards yolr down the facc il is Remember Jo*n ui ootirioti 'D'. dowrl above thc face replaced and they arc stage at this J^no" arounO laceup leaclerlfoups. Turn each of the face dowtr cards face up and drop them oII lop of the teadergroups above them to reveal that the suits have a8ain followed the leaoers, ..TR VELLf,RS IN TIME"

Thumb off lhe top four cards of lhe face down packet without .eveFingtheir orderand drop fiem al positjonA in thcdrawing.Thumb oirilc nexr four and ptacethem at positionB, and lhe next four at C' and the final group at D. iurn the top card of eachgroup face up.andplaceiI immediatelyin front of its o\r'ngroup. Thescleadercardswill be in lh€ correctsuit order in ,c"oraan.e with lhe order of the cards as oriSinallyshown to th€ ioeqators. ln our etample, readingfrom l€ft to riSht' or A lo D, lhey ; l be ctubs,diamonds,spadesand hearls. Taik aboul th€ power of leaders,etc. or if you have some brilliant narretof your own whichgelsawayfrom thiswell lroddenpath' uselhis. ;d sendme the delails.Now changelhe fac€up leadercardsaroundas follows: Lifr up the card al positioo'A' and changeil over with the one at Dosition'D', retarning'D' in your hand. Now changeth€ card in your

Plots concerned with makinS time movc backwafds ol forwards ot*avs seemto UeweUreceived,evenwhen applied to a card trick,-as has r,*r'aon" ft"t". Th€ geDcral lheme of the trick is that three differcnt a*i to pi"k of cards at thrce different stagesin time, and ffio-"i" " rttingscancclthemselves oul as lime movrs back."" trt.ti ir'.ri""iiv lf you find you condrlion their original t.vcn lo *uiai, untit ttr. fiction writing ""ta. you up science always takc cad *ell, can oiesent this idea Applyln€ tricks! doing card pard it lhan probably get more for -vdu'll iir* ti.rni ,,i.-"tai las onlv occasionallvbecndone,and Ed Marlo's iil.ni 'r'i No. ? is an approach well worth studying' la""rtine' ln tuc. Havinc set the sceneby stating that you are going to Sivea demonstrarion of time travel with a pack of cards,pcrform the following actions:

68

69

Cadboard Charudes SrryeOtre Saythat youwill firstof all separate theredcardsfromtheblack,and do this by runningthrouShthe facc up pack and upjoggingall the red cardsas you cometo them, After upjoggingthem, strip them out and placelhem on the faceof the pack. Run throughthe facecardsof the pack to checkard showto the sp€ctatorsthat they are all red and then cut themoff ftom the face,tum themfacedown, and placethembelow th€ rernaining26 blackcards. Now run throughthe facesof the black cardsand then temovethem andplacethemstrll faceup bclowthe facedownredcardssothat thetwo halvesar€ faceto face.As you plac€theblackcatdsbelowthe redsthey will naturally b€ in a slightly unsquaredcondition and as you square thcmup, pick up a brsk at approximalelythc centr€of them,aboutone quaftcr way up from the bottom of the pack, in pr€parationfor a TumoverPass,Turn thepackcomplctelyover,carryingout a passat the breakpoint, and finally holdingthe packfacedownin the l€ft bandin a squarcd condition. The effect of the procecdingactions from the audidcesvie*point is that theyhavesecnyou scparateth€ red ftom the blsck cardsand plac€the coloursfaceto face. Riffle th€ rearshortendof thepackwith thc ri$t thumbasif looking for thc placcat the centrewherethe cardsare faceto face.Really,just rifflc to the approximatecentreposition and cut ihe up!rcr facedown sectionoff and placeit still facedorur, on the table. K€€pthe remaioing half faceup in lhe left ha[d. Str8€Tro Statethat at the s€condstagein time you aregoingto tum som€cards faceup in cachhalf. Commencewith the red half in the left hand by riffling thenearshor!endwith the riglt thumbfrom bottomto lop, until you reachthe point whercyou havejust passedtwo face up rad cards immediat€lyabovethe lowcr facedown ones.cul the upps cardsoff and turn them fac€ down and push them into the olher half with a w€avirutypc of action,but tak€carcthat you do not disturblhe two face up cardsat the top. Squareup thc packctand placeit on the tablewith the two faceup cardsuppermost. Pick up th€ olher.facedownhalf from the tablearld placeit still face down into the left hand. Riffle thc ncar sho.t end of this half from bottom to top with theright thumb, until you reachthe poinl wheretwo facedown cardshavejust b€€ndropp€don top of the lowcr face up it off at thispoint,tum it faceup andweave cards.Cuttheuppersection taking carenot to disturbthetop two cardsof into theotherhalf,again thc lower half, whichthis time witl be fac€ down. Squareup the cards and then tum themcompletelyover and replacethem in the left hand. 70

Ca board Charudes Ieallvcu insrw: tTrt; ot rime5. i,,, rhepacker acouple mrt"liH rL,rr.I srmpl ) cu l onceand hold a br eak. wh'lsl

;;

;*i';l';ll;]:, i:,p'ii!:.*!!i ir;i :;{i:;tiitrili"T:u, Tli: i','"*f; # ;m;:."':'"'}i, ii:n:::'J.' .il*ml**',':"x rabl; alongsidethe one alreadythere' Stsgelhree At ihe third and final stagein lime' sayyou

*i;ii'ilrJ,i;;;;;

will placethe lop card of

harrand upeither oiis iirr' oorniiuvpickins

j#:*:,11,*'#ffi i".'ii"i! :ilf :Tf *r of the cenlrc Ihe inlo push it and '?fi'"J.-TllLlf *. *p r*e rlowncard airi".'i"i..ir wirhthe i]il.'iiilrri iiiiih;g''r'e halrpackontherableDorhesame orherhalf. Conclusion to reileratewhat has lakrn It is advisablebefore endinglhe effert

one'. vous€parafiffJ"itfrl: pru..sltpivt"t. ttt"taLtimesrage you reve

irom theblacks,al timesrag€lwo' thr;eyouplacedthelop cardsof eachhalr into ""i'ii"art'"iirti,. ",*. the '"i:ilt:i.r, makinstime so baclwardsstasebv.sras€ Repeat and cenlrc' in lh€ *ere olaced rhal. nu,niioi-t'"rli,op ."tit of eaih hatf turnthctop card eachhandandsimuha;eouslv i"il.a liiii "r,rt "iir' "weareback r"* upsavins

;i;il;ii

i\,ilXti,ll',,T'";.1"i'i?"ll!

lTilJH:"s,Ti#ii'"1t:i'#ii;;;;;;;ui;" ;""*.'ffi bv.remarkins :;r aT b;:Hl','n: ii*nl L.orp"'iv,r'i' ".tion spreadslace up itac€ two" Finally flip the iir??a *i or""i i*a', stageone.

"rc

ilffi

al I'me nowin a mixedstare'aslhevstarted

..DEMI DEMON''

i'i_;ll ,'..',i':lTfl:l#':;l' :i::$itr:ij.",';:1,$rl; lll'pi althoush,rhrs rhis'b€cause menrion I iirliii"';v audienies' lo rr unimportanl.esp€clally comDatatively

iii#f,e'ri"

cardsis eflicientlh€impor(anlthlng io ro."tinetli.eeselecled up-pro"ir, '71

Cardboad Charudes is to revealth€ cardsin an entertaininSway. Two presentationideaswill bc given at the end of the technicaldetails. Prior to performance,lhe pack hasro be stackedso that all cardsof the same value and colour have exactly twenty five cards betweenthem. The easiestway of allallging them is to first of all sort altd reass€mblethe pack so thal each of th€ twcnty six pairs are together, bui not in any particular order. Fo. €xample, rcading from top to face the order might be: 4H, 4D, 25, 2C, KH, KD, AC, AS, and so on. The pack can now be dealt into lwo face down heaps, dealing alternately in the conventional manner, and thcn assembledinto one pack again by placing one heap on top of th€ other. The trick can also be performed with a pack in th€ conventional nerr pack order, and the sliSht variation rcquired for this approach, will be mentioned at the end of the description of the standard procedure for a pack slacked as previously describcd. False shufflc the pack al|d follo* this by a few Senuire cuts. Hand the pack to a sp€ctator and ask him to cut it a couple of time and then place it face down on the table. Ask the assisting spectator to cut off a little underhalfthe pack and thento dealfrom this grouptwo handsof cards, stopping the deal when€verhe wishes.The cards are dealt face down and whenhe slopsdealingit mus! be in the standardway, so that eachofthe haodshas the samenuhber of cardsin it. If you are confidentthat the spectator understands the procedure, you can turn away while he completes the dealing. After th€ dealing of the two hands, lhe speclator will be left with a small packet of cards in his ha[ds. Ask him to note the top card of this packet and then to shuffle the packet to los€ the card, and finally to drop the packet on top of thc lower section of the pack that was left on the table at the beginning of the affect. For easeof explanation this spectator will now b€ called spcctator 'A'. Requestspectator 'B' to pick up the first hand ofiards from the table and spcctator'C'ro pick up the secondone. Ask eachspectatorto note and rememberthe top card of the hand lhey hold, and then !o shuffle the cards. Either one thcn hands his cads to th€ other and th€ comDosite packetof handsis lhoroughly shuffled. Pick up the remainder of the pack from lhe lable and hold i! face down in your left hand. Take back the combinedpacketof hands from th€ appropriate spectator and place it on top of the pack, taking up a left little finger break b€low it. Cut th€ cards above the lirtle finger break from the lop lo the face of the pack. Cive the pack one perfect 'in' faro shuffle using the almost universaltechniquewherelhe cards are held with theL edges low:rds the performer so that as the two halves are pushedsquarcit is easyto make a glimpseas shownin Figure 17. Bcfore thc halves are pushed complctely square! t}le left ihumb pulls back the top crrd of the lower half slightly which allows you !o seethe top card of the upper half; thc one immediately arove the one being

't2

Cadboard Charudes

TOPC A R DGLI M PSEO

Figure17

THI RDFRO MFACECARD G TI M PS€D

pulledback by the left thuhb. This cardis remembcred, lett sayil's the 55. At lhe sametime as this is taking placeat the top of the pack, the right ahumbcarries out a similar action at the face. Tbe right lhurnb pulls back the face card of the uppcr section of the pack which allows you to Slimpseand remcmber the one immediately aboveit in the lower section, saythe sevenof diamonds. The halvesare now pushedcompletely square and you finally rememtrcrthc face card of the pack, say the aceof clubs, beforeplacingthe pack facadown on the table.Thus, in a very fast and latural way, you have glimpscd and remembcredthe top, third from the lace add face card of the pack before placing it on the table. FiSure 4, shouldclarify the action. The three cards remembercdin our example were the five of spades, sevenof diamonds and aceof clubs, and lheseare the direct matesof the rhre€selectedby the spectatorsid the correctA, B, C. order. Spectator 'A' will havenoredthe five of clubs,spectator'B'thc sevcnof heartsand 'C' the aceof spades.After the pack hasbeenplacedon the table I ask \pectator'A' to call oul any six cardsin the pack but to includeamong rhemthe card he noled. I saylhat he can speakslowly or quickly, but that I will try and tell which card named is the selcctedone. Since you nlreadyknow the name of the card, finding the right one to nameis no problem. ii is surprising how many people se€mto accept the explanarion as Senuineand by the time spectators'B'and 'C'have to namesix tards, they take great care ao name each card *ith identical inflcxions. If the reader has difficulty in rememberingthe three key cards, a

CordboordCharades mayb€lakenaflerthe faroshufflehasbeen slichllydifferent -lr" approach all ar; glimpsed.buLthe packis placedbehind .-lt't i.'-.ii .a. "t thetop cardplacingit lacedownin heremlovei *a u*r. irt. J"ri.i.*i iiotir oiip"a"ro.'e, the thitd from fac€in froDrof'8" andthe lace 'n' 1613mqre-his i"ti in fionr ot'c'. rne packis handedlo sp€clu1o1 lo removehrs' to finally 'C' his. and rcmove card,lhento'B'lo s€lected lhe alongside the lable on placcd down face are fh"i. *.ee'""ta. placed The lhree lhere*", tlie performerhasalready ,ooioo,i"" ""iat ,rt.n rurnedfaceup to showthal theymatchin colour oiirr Ji."tai"t. ind - _ftvalue. ooiv t.t"ln. lo mmlion lhe procedureto adoptif thr effectis loo.iio.-.d u.ing n.* packwhichis in lhe followin8orderfromtop king of " Ac€ lhrough etc., havebeenrenoved i*.. irriiol* "ii* irtrougttking of clubs,kinSthrouShaceol diamondsand i'ti"rir. 'rir--iii.""ii "". ln faq, this order has to be amended sp'ades. "*-.r whenlhc jokcrsetc areremovedYou is *ioment ia.u i"i,i"l i'f with theleil thumb.andthm afterlaking *i soilJrfrc -f,ih. tfrinestspades on the ro spreadthethirleendiamonds rfreminioUtcrlgntfranacontinue pack the first b€low the of the remainder ,n* ,pread i*. oiitt.t, up lhey end lhal so "ia spades lhirteen lhe ."iositions ntlt ."iat i*"ri".i" pcrl€ct faro given two pack now is clubsThe L.i*.lnirr. ai"*onat "tid'in or'out'is ofno consequence asthepacKls shuffles,whelhcrtheyare your sixcard you twentv aid can ofcours. .nd i" ir"" ir""'ii""aiir", " i"" for thc two cardsoi sarnecolourand valueal the """f."i"'i*f the shuffleswilh a /a/secul' Conclude ccntrJooint. --i.l'o."-rrt.p"ir. into two fscedownh€apsof lwenlysixeach'the it "u, o"ii rtt. ..nt,. aidingyourcultingasusuelone of theseheaps "oiour JiiLln d""i .*"..e o.aerto the othcr.spectator'A' notl takeseither *ittr thcdealingasalreadydescribedHowerer'$'hen rrJi anJoroceeas his cardand shuffledhis packel.it is Itir pacl(etmat rs hc hasseiecled of the packirnd-thencut.to lhe ie,urn"ato rft" top of the remarnder are afterbeingshuffledlogether 'c's packcts [ir"-. soo,"ro.i 's' to lop from th€ be cut "nd now ieolacedon roaof thepack Onecardmust pcrfecr shuffl€ 'in' faro the out pack carrying bcfore ;l ft ;;:l;; *. ctimps.d.whcn peckingthekevcardsby pllling irt. Lv "'r"r. #rr,""i0. ihe;ettiand bft thumbsvoulookal lhc oner'vealedby i.J ""iJr*"-oli'sl Ld rhenlhe onebv fie lcfr thumband finallv$e irt. ilgrri ol rrt. iacr. rlis is ncc€ss!ryso that you rememb€tth€ keysin i"". .B'. .C. order,theactualpositions .A'. """t4 of thecardsyouhavegllmpseo, ,J in tih" o.d"t vou ,nust rememberthem b€ing,third csrd from the l"a nta y facecardof th€ pack Thetechnicaldeuik u"it... i." bedandsno\lnln descrl "*a of thesfim;s€sareexactlythesamcaspreviously with a newpack' you ofpresmlalion llpe t"tching i""i.?. iiuiing trt. .i.i Lro"i ,rt"-,rtitartom fice, rop andthentacecardswhcnlhepack ir pr"iJ Lrtina vout u""k to ensuri theyate placedon the tabl€io 'A" 'B'. 'C'. order. 1A

Cardboard Charades ..JEFTERSON'SJEST'' If I were aJkedto pick my favourite effect out of lhis book' this on" *ould Le my ihoice. It is based upon Alex o"iil*t"t :'Point of Departure" but certain alterations in the handling -Elmslev's have be€o which a ftom €nvelop€ transparent of a addition .ade, including the lo vanhh h is surprisinghow muchmore effecl a .ii."i.a "p-p""tt "".awhen thc obiec!to b€ vanishcdis enclosedwlthln someolner vanishhas ouiia. irt.otv which can easilybe testedby p€rforminglhjs €ffect' " by a con"enlionalvanishof the facecard oflhe pack usinglhe ioiioweo hand as cover, and seeingwhich registersmore strongly with the spetrtalors. ihe enveloperequiredis ratherlike lhe type usedtohold seasonticlels 10 in Brirain. but its ;ize is imporlant and it will probablyb€ necessary lhe lSa.shows Figure piece of celluloid yourself i from make it up loi."i oi irti *"dop., its lenCthshouldbe exacllythat ofa plaving-card placed toiihi *iatn .muta'u auout+* wider than a card, so that cards simply by my envelopcs I make too tightlv. in itri envelope do not fit using right srze, it to the cutling and;fter u lalf iotJln"itr. seal the bottom aIId side of thc envelope Thc half-moon cut se otJpe to "ittutola oul J'rhe cnd of the envelopemust e\tend throudr both thicknessesof celluloid.Having equippedyourselfwirh a-lransparenlenvelopeand a oack of cards you arc rcady rc proceed with th. cffecl. '' iu"i ttrc on tttjtabli and run through the pack from th€ face "ntaop. Transfer lhis ace and the card !o its l€fl to unili uou corn" ro a t"a "cc. p"ct thc face sactio! of lhe pack awsy wilh lhe irr.io'o of O. , uv "utting to ft€ left of the acc Place lhe right i.-ediatcly iioru frana. ""tilhos€ in lhc lcfl and leavc lhe aceaJ|dthc card above h;d section"titt. bchind ii on roo ot ttre pacf. Now return lhe cards in lhe ri8!t hand to the fac€ of the Dackand iontinue runni[g througl lhe packunlil you com€to thc Cur tt'c p."k at ihis poiol and fairly place lhe red aceon ,""ona rca "".. using lhe same action as before lop of lhe pack if the oaik wcrcturned facedo*rl at this stagelhe order from lhe top would b;. red ace,any card, red ace. Howevcr,in fic adion of tuminS rtri oaci iace ao*n *ittr thc aid of the righ! hand, a breal is pickedup ;nd'evcntually held below thes€cards by the left litdc fi[8er' whcn the oackis in a fice dovmcondltion.The techniqueI us€is lo bringthcrlSht irandover the faceup pack, placingIhe thumb at lhe nearshort end and linrers at !h€ tar oni. tte riehr thumb drops lhre€ cards from the boiiom of the pack and picks up a break abovethem Thc righl thumb and fingers the; sfide al;ng th€ pack until they are about ]' away.from the l€ft-hand lona side andthe left hand swivels ihe pack over until it is face down, the iards pivotinS between the rig:ht thumb and second fing€r, the right $umb being pressedagainsl lhe inner end and thus miinraining r'hebreak. once ihi pack i5 face down. the left hand little lingercan;ck up the breakbelowthe top thrcecardsand the right hand

Codboard Chorades

U SESE !L O T A PE T O S EA LE O GE S

Figurel8

The top aceis now slid offthe packby the left thumb and takenin the right hand, fingerson the faceand thumb on the back, and exhibiredto the audience.The right hand comesback over the pack to apparently take the othcl aceb€lowthe first one, but reallyrwo cardsare takenas onewith tlle aid ofthe breakbeingheld by the l€fr little finger.The right hand secondfinger goesinto the break and grips rhe two cards very tightly by pressingthem againstthe thumb, and then movesa*ay from the pack towards the right, the two acesbeing in a slightly fanned condition.As the right hand mov€saway,the left rhumb lightly restson the back of the pair of cardsbeingtaken as one, and movesto the right with them, to giverhe impressionof pushingthem off. The facesof rh€ two red acesare displayedto the audienceand ahenthe face one is returnedto the top of the pack, reallyof coutse,two beingreplacedas one. The aceremainingin the ri8hi hand is againshownand rhenturned facedo*i and the iop card of the pack slid off by the lefr thumb to be placedoncemore belowthe acein the right hand. The two cardsin the righl hand which shouldnow be in a casuallysquaredstateare placedin the outer breasthandkerchiefpocketofyourjacket so that theyprotrude for about 1", the facesbeingtowardsthe body. The action should be accompanied bysomeincrediblywitty .emark,suchas, "lets put the ac€s her€for a moment". Only the outer one of thesetwo cardsis really an The remainderofthe pack is givenan overhandshuffleto lransferrhe top card to ihe face,and is then fannedfacedown for the back of any card to be iouchedby a spectator,When a card hasbeen touched,the pack is split at rhis point by the right hand so rhat rhe selecledcard i3 ar

C.adboard Charudes the fac€ of the upper section.The card is shown to the spectatorsby \rmplyraisingthe packetofcards in ihe right hand sothat their facescan bc seen,after which the cardsare loweredlo their originalposition,and rheselected oneop€niyslid off onto the faceof the cardsin the left hand, by pushingon the faceof it wilh the right fingersandpullingwith theleft ones.Th€ cardsremainingin lhe right hand are replacedabov€thosein rhe left. The pack is now turned fac€ up in the left hand, bul the same rcchniqueis usedfor oblaininga break under the facelwo cardsof the pack with the left little finger, as hasbeenpreviouslydescribed. The select€dcard at the face of the pack is now apparently pushed lorwardslighilyto an out joggedposition,so that it extendsfor about I' heyondt}teouterendof the pack.Aoually lwo cardsarepushedforward ls one by placingthe righl thumb ai the inner end of lhe two cardsand \ccood finger on the fac€ and then moving the rieht hand foruard \lighrly.I believethis type ofpush off wasoriginatedby Cliff Green.The ,ight hand removesthe two joggedcardsholding them squaredas one, rhe thumb beingon the faceal|d the fidgerson the rear. The left hard rwistsoverwith the remainderof the packand placesit facedown on the rable. The transparentenvelopeis picked up by the left hand and the two fardsheld in the right insertedinto it. From the spectato$viewpoint,the \clectedcard hasbeenremovedfrom the face of tb€ pack and placedin rheenvelope.The envelopeis turned around to €xl bit both sidesof it .rrd the card imprisonedinside. It is finslly held in the left hand in a \crtical positionwilh lhe fa€eof the card(s)insidetowardsthe body and rhehalf moon cut out ai the top, The right hand now reachesfor the two cardsprojecting from the l{rter breastjackei pocket and appearsto removethem, but in aclual lrct, pushesthe one nearestthe body down into the pocketwith the right rliumband cnly removesthe outet card. This cardis immediatelyplaced I'chind the e[velope held in tbe left hand, behind meaningthe side r.a/eir the body. The effect from the audiencespoint of view b€ing that rhc lwo aceshave beenplacedbehindthe envelope,out of their viewthe group of cardsis now tilted inwardstowardsrhe body by the left lirnd until ihey reacha horizontalposition,lhe aceon the outsideof the lrrlelopenow beingnearestth€ floor. The right hand holdsthe group for ., rnom€nrto aid the left in repositioningthe group. The left hand lak€s ,,1)the grip on the end of the group as shownin figure l8b. It is imporL,Dr10notethat the halfmoon cut out is underthe left thumb. The fight l,irndsiidesout theacefrom und€Ithe envelope,movingil in an upwards ,[rd diagonaldirectiontowardsthe right as it doesso, and placesit on r(,| of the envelope.From the audimce'sviewpoint,oneofihe two aces l,.low fie envelop€has been taken and placed on top, so that the {rvclope is now sandwichedbetweentwo aces, I hc right hand comesover to the group and placesthe thumb on top 7',7

Cardboord Charades

Catdboard Chorudes

and the fingersunderneaihthe outer short end and dealsthe uppermost acefac€down onto the table. Care must t!€ taken in doing this that it is dealt strai8ht forward and that the long sides of the group remain parallel as the ace is dealt off. The righr hand now app€ars to deal the €nvelopeoff onto the table but in actual fact thc left thumb pusheson the back of the upper card in the env.lope and the left first finger pulls on the face of the lower one, a very easyaclion becauseof lhe half moon cut out. This left hand action has the effecl of feeding tlle envelopeforward into the right hand where i! can b€ dealt onto the table lo the riSht of the c5ld alrcady there, and l€aving the lower card from the envelopein the left hand, *here il is assumedto be thc second ace. Having placed tlle envelopeon the table, th€ right hand takes thc final card from the lcft hand and placesit on the tableto rhe riSht ofthe other two. The dealing action is car ed out witholt undue hasle, alld provided you have ensured tlat your envelopc is slightly wider thaD the catds, should present no problem technically. The spectators see the back of a catd ill the envelop€, but this card is now an ace and the chosanone is thc apparent acc at the right hand end of the tabled cards. Pick up the card at t}le right hand end of the line of tlre€ wilh the right hand ard plEcc it still facc down into the lcft hand. wlen picking it up, take it by thc outd short end u/ith the right hand and t*ist it round, €nd for end, as you place it in the left, so that the far short end now comes nearcst the body. Now pick up the €nvelope repealing the end for end turn, and place it on top oI the card in the left hand, but pick up a Ieft littlc finSer break below it as you do so. Finally placc the lasl card from the table on top of the envelope. Repet the twist around action as you pick the last card up, so thal eventually when you havc all three cards in thc left hand thc half-moon cut oui will be at thc outer end. BrinS the rielt hand over thc lcft one, thumb at the ncar short cnd and fin8ers at the far one and takc the group of cards from the l€ft hand, pickina up a break above thc facc card with the riShl tbumb. Move th€ group towards the pack to place thcm on top, but just a.tthey reach the point whare thcy are r€sting on lop of thc pack but still being held by the right hand make some remark such as "let ma show you the faces of the aces" and immediately move th€m away from the pack a8ain witl the exception of tha fac€ card which is aasily left behind on lop of thc pack, due to the right thumb brcak bcing held above it. The imFcstion to aim for by your patter and actions, is lhat you are going to placeth€ sandwichof catds on the pack but suddenly chang€ your mind. Do not worry aboul lhis drove-remenbar from the audiencesviewpoint the sel€ctedcard is still within att envelope, so the only thing you could possibly hav€ dona wou-ldhave been to have left an ace o[ the pack, but you ale now going to show that ,ol, acesare still prescnt. Transfer the cards from the right to left hand and use the same Ieft hand grip as shown in Figure 18bonly this time the half moon cut out will b€ at the outer end. With the right hand appear to withdraw the acc

liom the face of the group, show its face and then replaceil. What you acruallydo is to placethe right hand forefingerin the halfmoon cut out rnd by light pressuredraw out lhe ace from within the envelope The right hand actionis exactlythe sameas previouslydescribedfor dealing rbe lhree cards on the table, except that the frrst card is taken from the tace rather than the top. As soon as the ace is withdrawn, its face is shown and it is furned face dow!, and replaced squarely telort'the cnvelope.The uppermost ace is now taken off by th€ ri8]tt hand, its face shown and then replaced on top again. whilst this ace is b€ing shown, rhe back of lhe otlcr one is showing through the transparcnt env€lop€as silent evidence that the selectedcard is slill present. Thc upp€r ace is reDlacedface down on top and thc group taken ir o the right hald still squared but held so that they can be quickly fanned out. Say "Watch, cvaporation", and qlickly fan them in the riglll halld to revealthe €mpty cnvelope.Turn the fan to show both sidesand then drop the group on rh€ table. A spectator will normally want to look at th€m There are 1wo final froints I lhink are worth mentioning. The first is rhal if the p€rforming conditioN are suitable, it is quite easy to lap the unwantcd cad, ratlcr than unload it onto the pac*. lf this approach is used, the correct moment is immediately after you have dealt thc cards rnd envelopeonto the table and are just going to pick them up again to reDlacein the left hand. The one at the right hand end is placed into the lcft hand which is rested at the near €dg€ of the table, th€ card being positionedlow down in the hand so that it is not visible to the spectators. As you reach forward with the riglt hand to pick up the envelope, the .ard in the lcft hand is lappcd and then the left hand moved forward slighrly to meet the envelope whicb is placed in it by the riglt hand, rpparently on top of the card already there. The final card on thc table is t)lacedo[ top of th€ envelopeand you are then re?rdyto proceedwilh th€ I inal phaseof the effect where the acesare sho\{t to be eirher side of the cnv€lop€.lt is important that the cnvelop€ is never brought neat the edge of the table, which is why it is suggestedthat the lapping is done at this nage in the effecl, rather than later. The secondpoint is that the vanished card should not be reproduced, .rs ir detracts from the effect,

78

,"'HE TNrcHING TOUCH'' fhis is a variation on lhe classictdck where acesappear to iump froft ,nrepositionto anotherin lhe pack. The methodusedis alsothe classic ,tr)eof a pass,but I have lried to make the effect easierto follow for th€ \t,ectatorsby having t}le acesface up, whilst the remainde. of the pack i5 lnce down. In addition, a climax to the effec! is given, which I have lound is completelyunexpectedby the audience.Il is surprisinghow nppealingthe plot of this effect is to an audience,and we owe a debt of

Cardboard Chorudes gratitudeto the inventorof thisbeautifultheme,whosenameseemsto be lost in antiquity. Run through the pack and remove the aces,placing ihem face up on the table. At the sameaimeas you are removingthe acescull the four queensto the top of the pack. Whilst talking about the aceswhich are lying on the table,closeup tlle faceup pack and a,5the cardsate squared up in the left hand, reversethe four queensby meansof ihe Half Pass. Now cut one card from the face of the pack to the back, and turn the pack face down in the left hand. Pick up one of the black acesfrom the table and placeit face up on top of lhe face down pack. Pick up the other black acefrom the lable and placeit faceup on the boltom oflhe pack. Now spreadthe packout in a facedown faD,laking careas you do this to first of all pushover the top black ace slighlly with the left thumb so that ii is jogged to the right, followedby a block of about 6 cardsand thenthe remainderofthe pa€k spreadnonnally, until the other aceshowsup, faceup at the boltom. Emphasizethe positionsof the two aces. Close up the spreadand turn the pack face up in the left hand but as you do this cafiy ou! a Tumover Passat the approximatecentrepoint of th€ pack. Poin! out that the acethat wasat the faceof the pack hasnow goneand then turn the pack face down, 1oshow that the one placedat the top bas also vanished.Spreadthe pack face down betweenthe hands to show lhat the two aceshavecometogeth€rat the centreof the pack. when you reachthe acesin the spread,pushthem both over with the left thumb so that a back is visible below them, but then push a block of about six cardstogether,beforecontinuing10 spreadthe remainderof th€ pack. Hold the spreadpackin positionbetweenthe handsto exhibitthe two black acesface up at the centreand then closeup the spread,but in this action get a left lltle finger break betweenthe two aces. Turn the pack faceup in the left hand, carryingout aTurnover Passat the breakpoint showingftal a fac€down card has returnedto the face. Turn the pack facedown lo .evealthat the otherblack acehasjumped back to the top. Spreadthe pack so rhat it is held in a falned positionin the left hand by first of all pushinSthe face up aceat the top over with the left thumb, thena block ofabout six cards,andthenih€ remainderofthepack, uniil ihe other black aceshowsup at the faceendofthe pack. Hold the spread in this conditionby the left hand only. Pick up the two red acesfrom the tableand insertthemtogetherfaceup at the approximalecentrepoint of rhe pack beingheld in the left hand. of the right hand and lhen Close up the spreadwith the assistance casually respreadthe face down pack beiween the hands and reemphasizethe positionsof the aces,taking care to push a block over after the first blackacehasbeenpushedover.Closeup the spreadand in this aciion take a left little fingerbreakbetweenthe centrered aces.Turn the pack face up in the left hand carying oui a Turnover Passat the 80

Cardboad

Charades

breakpoint and immediatelyafterthepassretaina hold on the pack with rhe left hadd, the positionof th€ hand beingexacllythe sam€as if you were about to do a glide. Place the rieht thumb on the face of the pack and the fingers on the top and draw off the end cards of the pack simultan€ously, and place them face down on the table. The action of taking off these two cards should immediately follow the pass. From the speclators' viewpointthe two blackaceshavebeenplaceddown on the table. Turn the pack face down and slan io spread the cards between lhe hands until you com€ to the two acesat the approximate centre point. Pushtheseover with th€ left thumb to show a back below them and then lhe usual small block, followed by the remainder of t}le pack spread fairly. The face up acesat the centte will be se€nto be black and after a pause,you can reach lowards the lwo on the table with the riglt hand and turn them face up to show they are the red ones, and lhat a iranspositionhastakm place.The spreadpack at this stageis held solely by lhe left hand. Cut the cardsin thc lcft hand so that the two black aces becomethe two top csrds of the face down pack, they of coursestill being in a face up conditiol, and close up the spread so that the pack is held squarein the left hand. The tno red acesar€ at this stagestill on the table. Pick up the red aceswith the right hand and place them undcr the pack being beld in the left, keeping them face up as you do this. Spread the pack between the hands pushing the small block after you have pushed overthe two black accs,and thm continuingthrough the pack until lhe rwo fac€ up red faces are revealedat the other end. Stressthe fact that you have two aces at each end of the pack and tlten close up the pack r.rkinga little finger break at the approximalecefltrepoint of the pack. l rn the pack face up in the left haltd carrying out a Turnover Pass at rhe break point, and then spread it face up between the two hands to \how ihat the four 'ac€s'havecometogetherat the centreof the pack. whcn you reach the four face down caads, push them over to rev€al s llce belowthem and then a smallblock followedby the balanceof the t,rck. Hold the pack in its spreadcondition in the left hand and temove rhc lour face down cardsat the centrewith the right hand still keeping rlrcmface down. Say "and thads about the besttrick I know with four ,lrrens", on the final word, tuming the cardsin the right hand face up ,!rd dropping them on the table. Sinc€the four acesare still face up in the pack you may be temptd to \lncad the pack and revealihem for an additional climax. I strongy ,(lviseyou not to do this, but to concludethe effectat the revelationof ||c queens.My normalprocedureis to cut the packso that the acescome r()rhc top, face up under onecovercard, which is automalicif you just Lrr lhe pack six cards below the point from which the queenswere ,.'roved. The lop cafd of the pack is then slid out from the top wiih lhe ,,Fhrhand, tumed facedown and then replaced,after which lhe pack is r[lrcd face down again by twistingihe left hand back. The right hand 8l

cordboa Charudes turn lhe top cardot lhe packtacedownbul reail) cannow aDDarenlly ol th€naturqlprcK rtrrnall fi!tcards down,a tairl) easyactionbecause arecarriedoul actions These back to baik u-oooini*t'at" rttaa"taaare given rimewillbe and ample pack manner. *irtt rhe iitil icasuai'tovlng the spectaof ihe reaction oathe queens,and iy'iiri i"iprir. "pp.iar-ce mrs. .,TWICETWO" TheDlot for this effect belongs!o Karl Fulves,my contributionbeing *r.i" irri't",rt"a usedto achieveKarts premiseBeginby secretiy ar€faceupunderthelop caro arra;qimlheDacksothatlhe fourqucens coloursequence in ahernate tit" qu..nt b€ingstacked oi[ioi.r, -'i*.'irr" top five cardsin th€ retains which falsesh-uffle ""*-" i"vl." will try andcurthepackso thata queenwill lwocarosIrom ""iii." ""d',rti" up at therop Do thisbydoubleundercultjng aonearface duringthis down face held face rhe;ackbeins ;ff;;il;;ii;,f; yo!promlsm' pack as ofthe on top up acrion.,q. oueinwitl appearface lifl oll thelaceup i.i"g itt. igii rt-a.iir to thepackandapparenllv anotherqueen will reveal ouee'n. Uutieallvraketwo cardsar one,which first one Userhe the as lhe same ii* irierirsr.itscolourbeing handlong rishL ""Eio* rhe queen over slishrlv second i.ii rtiri:i" goeson (ne rt that so hand $e riSht into ""irt.rtine rake it then and sideof lheDaak in lhe righthand with lheaidofthe lefrhand i*".rirt.lr"."" "ir*av raceupirdr in theriehrhandandthenpullrhe ;i;;;G;. il;;; direclionsotharrt "p,h; iori.i.ata od,l.ltti.. tlighllvto theleftin a diaSonal ls nol snowrng' the index but while border jogged a about for is sidr irnrn',ii'"_uo;.n... ui."point you havemadetwo queen\of lhe same rLetoPof thepackandar€nowholdinsthesein :;i;t;;;;;;;p "t iaceup, but with therearonejoggedsughllvto lhe ii" .;"rti[-a. "itt shouldbewi$ rhethumbar the i;fr. fl'.;;isht handgrip o;the queens ir'ii-i.a. ii^gJ,'. the f; one'and handcurvedoverrh€cards "r '.* alonStheirlength. cardof lhe uie the left handlongsid€of lhe quecnslo flip lhe lop (hepack sav top of on up f""t ft-ro, u k;;;" 'not"ni to ",;#;;;;. inai rtriscaia wlt acra! a predicliononeand requestthespectalors risit in the h€ld queens b€ins Useth; edseof lhe ;;;;;i;;. ir..Jio irio trtl'."ta tacedownagainard th€npushit slighllvto thc leftlhumb,sothatil issid€joggedoverlhepacxlor aooul rilhl wirhl_he In lne ngnl thr fac€up que€ns h;f its *idth. Now pushit in betwe€n groupof the top of lhe lrom i.lia- i,""ri. Dosi;ionbeingthirdcard to insert iL tasv makes ".i""r lowel.queen p"tition ;f Ihe qi*"" ;.giJ thc push you il bei\reen as posilion bul correct at the cird r'le oreaicrion across up queins,injogit slightly,so thal.whfnil ha! squared pushInr th' lhe right thumbcan reachdosn and dreaarlof rtreDackeL, 82

Cardboad Chorudes joggedsectionsquare,and in thh actiontake a breakimmediatelyabove cardsquare,the thecard. Sothat the right hand is freeto pushthe.iogged lefi hand holdsrhe packerofcards for a brief momentat the long edges. Havinggot the break,the right hand movesthe packetback and forth betweenth€ left hand fingers in a squaring action and ai it comes above the pack, releasesthe lwo cards below the break so that they are left squ.re on top of the pack. The remaininS two cardsin the right hand are placed face up on the table. The depositing of the two cards onto the pack is done extremcly quickly and as soon as they have been added to the pack, the right hand makes one more back and forth movement with ih cards beforc placing them on the table, They should be placed on the table almost completely squarebecausethere are only two cards presenl, wher€asthere should realy be thre€, Say that the prediction card has been sandwichedbetweenlhe que€ns for safe keeping ard you would oow like to have a card selectedfrom the pack. Whilst explaining this, give lhe pack a singlecut at its approximate centre point and as the two halves come together take a left little finger break betwe€nthe two sections. Use the left thumb to riffle the outer left corner of the pack from top lo face, requestinga spectatorto call stop al some point. When he does so, bring fte right hand over the pack to apparently lif! off the cards at the posilion he has chosen, but really lift off all the cards above the left littlc fing€r heak. This is the standdd Riffle Force handling. Before showing the spectator the top card of the lower seclion of lhe pack,aipthe left hand upwardsso that the facesof the cardsare towards rhe audienceand then thumb the card off of the pack for jus! over half its widlh, so t}lat its name can be noted by the assistingspectator. Tlis handling conceals the fact that there h a face up queen immediately belowthe selection.If you are workirg surroundcd,turn the left hand almosl completely over so that the backs of the cards are towards the lloor before pushing the sclectedcard over with the left thumb. After the card has b€en notcd, dra* it back squarewith the pack to cover the face up queen,before tuming the left hand so that lhe half pack it holds is onceagainfacedown.Drop the cardsin the righi bandon top ofthosein rhe Ieft and place the squared pack face down on the table. Briefly mention the name of the prediction card that was placed betweenthe facc up que€nsand say this will be the male of the card just roted by the spectator.Ask him the nameofhis csrd and whenhe names lhe sameone as your prediclionsay "well, in tbat case,the only thing to (lo is to makethe predictionvanish". Showthis hashappenedby spreadr g the two faceup queensyourselfor invitinga spectatorto spreadthem lor you. Saythat it is normalto end a trick by findinga chosencard,and rhenspreadthe main pack in a long fac€down spreadio show that the rwoqueensof the oppositecolow haveturned faceup and caughta face ,!)wn €ard betweenthem. Turn the card belweenthe queensover !o ,.veal it is the seiectedone. 83

Cardboard Chorudes Altemrtive Proc.durc This routinc utilizeslhe principl€of the Henry Chrisi Forcefor the flowswrll andcan cards,thc sequence teveising ourooi. oi tor"ing s(arlby having routine firsl lolhe [. ri*J." *"*i"-tt -a* unsller;ative que€n'faceup second black the card and naiffer€nt a tiact oueen,an in the fourth spades ace of pack, the and the or lip irti i*Jutir card' a you do*n havc a face "*aneadingfrom the top irom too position queen. aceo[ face do\'n face up i"I. * iti*t. i"". up lndifferentcard. pack' dovn lhe face of *a rh.n rtt" i..ainder ip"a.i ' shuffleDack.retainingihetop four cardsin posttlonanosayyou*rrr pack rrv-anaiausea quccnto ippear iacr up on top of rhepack Civethe aI queen will appe$ up black face io to.. tt'e top cardandlbe described procedure aircadv wift the "itio "ui continu€ ,rt.i!" *'o."rniJ. Nlw in the firsaversionto showthal anolherblackqueenis belowlhe llrst' between i"tio*ea uv tttestro*ingof thepr€dictioncardandits insertion th€ lable' up on phcing face them irt. i*o ou""*, prior t; lfvou;xaminelhepackat thisstageyoushouldhavea laceoowncaro of lhe iit'. roo. iorro""a 6v *e faceup cardand thm rheremainder "r at"". n" itackis heldsquaredlacedownin the lelt hand """-i-f".i iii*Jirt. o""i to""ios a speoatoiand askhim Io cul a seclionoff down i"l" rrtii. i"ta" from him and nip themfaceup onto lhe faceyour hands' pack belwem Ihe spreading Sran t"t, hand r"aii"" *i lh€faceupcardsovetuntilyoucomelo thellrst lacedowncaro Dushins Rh""e the faceup secrionof th€ packu'ith theriShr ilt";-d;.;. i*a r."iino irr. f""" ao$n onesqu;redin thelefi Lifi theleft handup andthenpushthe arelowardsth€audicnce * itrriitt. il".t ot rtt. for abouthalf "ards it extends the thumb, so that ;;;;J;il;;;,i". to pack "ith a sp€staror Ask the of it;widtb overthe riShthandlonSside top with the flush it back draw then card, and thh ."...Uet ttt" oa.. of Li rhi oacr usingrtretefl lhumboncemore Drop thelefl handso Ihal oni.rn-€ lacedo*n and thcn placr thecardsfrom the ifr" "t. richt""r'* hand belo, those in the left, so that the pack is once more a*embled --iri"nJtrt. into one o""r to t"cond spectatolto cut a sectionoff and repeat trr" o.oi.aote " aesc bed in thc previousparagraph'-b'Jtat.the ".ttte packby placingthe cardsin the riSht handon "nii.i irnJitage_.eassenute toD -'iil of thosein the left. thenameof hisnotedcardandthenspr€adthe iie nJ a"sistatt pack o".iiioii*"i ,rt"rrti. ,.teclionis lheonlv faceup cardin lhepack'cul ano the o' lop card the becomes ihe Dacksotha(thefaceup card laDle' on the pack down face place the and down then fliD lhiscardface '''iJ*iiwill andsay.lhal.lhis t"* p*ai",ion cardrheaceof spades. wnenne selecllon alsistant-s andvalueaslhesecond bethesamecolour spr€adthe two queensapartlo statesthat he notedthe aceof spades, showihat thepredictionhasvanished. M

Cardboad

Charudes

Say thaa although th€ prediction has vanished,most conjurersend rhejrtricks by finding tle chosencard, so you will try and usethe queens ro helpyou. Cut aboutl from the top ofthe main packand placeit to the right of the balance.Now cut about + of tlle cardsjust plac€ddown and t)lacethem to thedght ofthe previoussection.In effect,the oriSinalfac€ \ccrionof the pack is positionedat the left hand end of th€ line of three packets,Placeoneofthe queensfaceup on top of the centrepacketand rhendrop the extremelcft hand packeton top of the queenso that il is \rndwichedbetwe€nthe two sections.Placethe other queenface up on rop of the left hand group of cards and finally drop tb€ right hand \.ction on top, so that the pack is once again assembl€d into one. Pick up the completepack and spreadit facedown betweenthe hands \nying "notice that the queensare well separated".As you closethe \pread,take up two breaks,the left little finger immediatelyaboveth€ .lrd facing the queennearestthe face of the pack, and the left third ling€rimmediatelybelowthe queennearestthe topofthepack. I find the breakseasierto obtainif the dght hand secondfilger presses againstthe hack of the queennearesithe top of the pack whiht lhe pack is being \lowly closed,so that the left lillle finger can pick up its break first and rltcn as the pack finally squaresup, the left third {inger can take over lrom the position beingmarkedoff by the right secondfinger. Now do a tripl€ running cut onto th€ table, by laking first the cards irbovethe third finger break and placingthem on the table, followedby rhc next sectionabovethe little finger brcak and finally the face section ol lhe pack. Eachsectionis takenby the riSht hand and placedon lop of rhc one previouslyplaced on the table, so that the pack is finally n\sembled into one again. Give the pack one more fair cut and then \t)read it face down on th€ table to reveal that the two queenshave now t,,metogethcrwith a singl€cardcaughtbetweenthem,whichthentumed vcr. is seento be the secondselection, " ANOTHER FINE MESS'' l'his is a variation on "Wrong Again", to give an effect which is .rnilar to the classicRoyal Assembly one. The amount of mixing nl'parentlycarrid out is far lessthan in other versionsoflhis effect, but I nill considerthe audienceimpacl to be strong, and in fact, that the n )plicity of the presentationhelpsimprove the climax of the trick. Removethe aces,jacks, queensand kings from the pack and a$ange rh{mso that the four acesarefollowedby the jacks, thenthe four queens rrd finally the four kings, lhe kings being at the face of the group of !\rcen cards.The suit order of eachgroup is of no importanceand in Itr.r it is an advantageif the suitsare in a haphazardsequence, spread the sixteencards face up beiweenyour hands, carefully poinf ,rf out lhe posjlionsof the aces,jacks, queensand kings. Closeup the

85

Caldboad

Charudes

Catdboord Charudes

spread and turn il face down under cover of this aciion pass two cards from ihe rear of ihe packetto the face, Usethe Turnover Passfor this

^E n n nAt;.]Iil

mrn r r nrnn 8l a)

il

L-- -.1

E22 n2 rl v7v2 v7-l

trn

(,/ /l

l/A

V ./l

VI

V2 ,/7

v77

D

E

v ./\ V,4

,.PARROTT FASHION''

v2

r,4

aa (/l

Laz.) r./ I f,/.

v/,1 r-' I

Deal out the lirst four cards face down in a lioe from left to right, turning the first cald deala face up. D€al the next four in a row beneath the first, again dealing from left lo right &nd tuming t}le first card dealt face up. Repeatthis dealingfor two more rows until the layout of the cardsis as in Figure 19.The effectis |hat lhe top row containsaces,th€ secondjacks, the third queensand the botlom one kirus. A card is face up at the endof eachrow as a reminderofthe typeof cardsin that row. Sayyou will placetwo kingswith two aces,and do this by picking up the two facedown cardsat the right handendofrow'D', droppingthem on top of the facedown cardimmediatelyto the right of th€ faceup ace, and then slipping these three face down cards ben€ath the fac€ up ace. Figure 19 shows the appeararce of th€ layout at this stage. Now say you will plac€ two jacks with two queens, and do this by laking the two cards from the right hand end of row 'B' and placing them iogetherwith the secondcard froh th€ left in row'C', benealhlhe face up queen, Next, place two aceswith two jacks by taking the only two cards remainingin row 'A', togelherrvith tlle last one in row'B'and slipping them benealh the face up jack. Statethat two queensalrd two kings remain,and as before take the lwo cardsfrom row 'C' and tlle singlecard from row 'D' and slip them beneath the face up king. 86

Afl€r some appropriatemagic action' such as doing nolhing' reveal rtrcfacesofeach group of four cards,to showthat they haverearanged so that all lik€ tlpes ale gtoupedtogdher' rhemselves

Run through the face up pack and remove the two red queens,placing rhemfaceupin the table.Turrl the temainderof the pack facedown alld caty out a Half Passwith the lower sec(ionof the pack' 'rrmediarcli lefi iiltle tinger breakbetweenlhe r\to halvesas lhey come r'r(kinc uD; i.'cerhir. The resuhis thal lhe pack is h€ld in the lefl hand. apparently taJedown.but reallvwith the lowerhalf faceup, anda little fingerbreak betweenlhe two sections. Pick uD one of the red queensand irlsert il fac€ down into the pack at 'he breai poinr, retakingthe breakabov€the queena5 il is.pttshed .uuare.fhi queenis inreriedfrom the rearendol Ih€ pack.which males ro insertir at the riShl ptac€and alsoto pick up a breakaboveit' 'r'easv tlcl ;p lhe orher queenand placeit on top of th€ pack. mildly poinlinS ()ut toihe audiencethat the two queensare sepalatedby about half the (o Starr to sDreadrhe pack betweenlhe hands inviling a spectator is fhe spread him towards cards \lect a card'asyou exlendrhe fanned are cards poinl, the fac€ up that so break up to the ,l courseonly made not €xDosed.'Whena card has been taken, closeup the pack again, ,,ranraininsthe break wilh the lefi lit(le finger above lhe centre red ,tueen,but also lifting the lop card of the pack sliShtlywirh the riShl ri,umt so ttrat it can hold a bieak belowthis card at the rear end of the r,Jck.As soon as rhe spreadhasbe€nsquared.lhe upper sectiono[ Ihe which i Jck above!he lef! lirtl; finger breakis lified off bv lhe right hand lrill keeosits thumb break und€r the top carcl. The s;ectator is invited to place his selectcdcard face up on top of the trJit Dact in the teft hand and you requesllhe remarndetoI rhe audience r,' commitrhe card ro m€mory The righl handsecrionis replacedon lhe Lrli and a top card Cover Piss caried out, th€ left hand little -finger rcrakinea break bet*een the two halvesas they cometoScther'lf you wish,y6u cannow twist the left hand over so that the pack is faceup and ,.J-,h.,oo ou..n on.. *ilh the lefl thumb to exposeilsfaceslightlyand ',,, ."-.-b.. oneou"enat lhe top and onein lhe centre" Afler show,',r rheoueen.it must bedrawnback\rith lhe left thumbso that ir is once .q,rare with th€ pack, beforethe pack is once again turned lace ',r"'n ,lown. li you includethis flashingof the queenin the routine you must rrte careto maintain the left little finger break. lilate that vou will now turn half of the pack face up, and do this by . rrrrrns off the uoDerhalf of thepackwith lhe righl hand,taling all lhe .,rrlslbore the ieir tittlefinserbreak Now tum lhe lowerhalf Iemain' 8?

Cardboard Charades

Cardboard Charades ing in the lefi hand faceup and replaceit still faceup, belowthe cardsin lhe right hand,but leaveit joggedfor about l'!o the left ofthelong side ofthe upperhalf. With lhe left hand spreadout the faceup cardsslightly beforesquaringthem up with the upperhalfto showthat the cardsreally are face up. This is an important 'convincer'in the effect becauselhe spectatorshad previoud,v seenthat the upper half was face down when a card wasselectedand they now seethat the lowcr half really is faceup. After the pack is square, remark on the face to face condition of the halves and turn the pack over three times to illustrate your comment Cive the pack one cut and then spreadit in a long line face down on the iable to show |hat all the cards are now face down with th€ exception of ihe red queens,which ar€ face up at the centte. Point out lhat they have one facidown card betw€enthem and removethe group of threecards, turningthem overto showthat the onebetweenthe queensis the selected

Figute20

I

.'UNACCUSTOMED AS WE ANE" This rrick is similarin effectto Dai Vernon's"Twisting the Aces" but doesnot usethe GhostCount. As the cardsare not countedat anytimein in th€ trick which is appealing. the routine,thereis a certaindirectness Begin by removing the four acesfrom the pack and arrange them from toD to face in a suit order you caareasilyremembel.In my case,it is heirts, spades,diamondsand clubs,ihe club beingat the face.HavinS got rhem into your kno\tn sequmce,lransferthe top acelo the faceof ihe packetand they will b€ in lhe correctorder to proceed l suggesllhis approach, rather than arranging them in the correct order sfaight away' as most conjurers have a favourit€ sequenceof suits that they know by heart, so why leam alother one, and run the risk of forming a menlal suit cocktail on some future occalion when the trick is being shown. From now on in the patter outline given I shall refer to the suit order I use, bu! the reader msy well be using a completely different one. HavinS shown the acesin a sliSht face up spread, turn the four cards face dow; and in squaring them up in the left hand, obtain a left little fing€r break above the face ace (hearts) and move the right hand away Sat that the action of stroking the four aceson the fingersof the left hand has a strangeeffecl. Bring the riSht hand back abovethe cards beingheld in rhe lefi, placingIhe lhumb at the nearend. lhe lorefinger on top and lhe remainingfin8er5over the far end Keepthe righl hand well over the cards so that the fingss at the far will prove adequatefor the half pass move to follow, Having explainedlhat stroking has a strangeeifect, movethe packetof four cardsdown from the baseof the left thumb towardsthe fingertipsofthelefthand, whichstretchopenuntil they reach the position shown in Figure 20 B€fole opening how€ver' and at the exactmomentwhenthe right hand takeshold ofthe cards,the 88

.reebelow the left little finger break is turned up by gripping its riSht I'rnd sidewith the left fingersand pulling it down and over. At the same rrrfle,the right hand is moving lhe packel downwardsuntil it meetsthe l,rceup aceand then continuesunlil the packetpassesoff of the finger rrr)softhe left hand.The strokingactionis design€dto coverthe lowness i,l cardsin the left handafter this i)?e of reve$alsleighlhasbeencarri€d i,rr, the weaknessof lhe move b€ing in fact coveredby the action r.(luiredby the left hand,to allow for the strokingaction.For theactual ,.versalof the lowestcard I preferto havethe left forefings aroundthe ,,,rrerendofthe card with the renaining fingersat the right side,but the ,.rder can experimentto find the easiestproceduresuitablefor himself. Afrer the strckingaction,the cardsare spreadin a smallfan and held | | rheright hand to showthat th€ aceof heartshasturnedfaceup al the (rrom. The top cardoflhe fan is now takenal|d placedat the bottomof 1r,. group by the lef! hand, the cards still being kept in their fanned ,,'Idirion. Say that the aceof hea s now occupiesthe positionthat the .r c of spadesdid occupy,the aceyou name,beingthe oext one in your ,,rrsequence. Bringthe left hand up belowthe fan andusethe two hands ,,rctherto closethe fan but in this actionpick up a left li$le fingerbreak ,rl!)veth€ bottom two cardsand turn both of theseciudsovcl together, ,,rtrlcrrhe paiter alld aclionof the strokingprocedurealreadydescribed. spreadthe four acesi[a fan asbeforeto showthat aheaceofspadesis iace up secondfrom the bottom. Transfer the top card to ibe ','trv l\'||om keepingthe fannedcondiion and saythat the aceof spad€snow \Lupies the position that the ace of diamondspreviouslyoccupied. ( l,^c the fan betweenthe two handsand take a left litde finSerbreak .,|l,!e the bortom threecards.Reversethesewith the strokingactionas 89

j

Cardboard Charades before.Srarl lo spreadthe card\ oul with rhe lefl thumb but aft€r ."-rri." .ni.-a o:"-, ao a singlebuckl€.sothalthenexllwo cardsslay i""iirr.:. *a thm lhe boltomcardshowsas a singl€card- If vou can' aliiw the cenlretwo cardsto spr€adlery sliShlly.ralherlhan be oeao .quare.Hold lhecardsin thelefl handlo exhibilthenow laceup aceoI diamonds. -'iui.itt. top .-a *iLrtrherighl handandpushit inLothelan immedi,telv abovethe bottomcard,andas you pushit square'usea sllghlly iL' iiuionJu"ti- .o ,rtut,he lefi lhtle fingercanoblaina breakbelow with hand left in the ** tii"g heldin a squaredconditioo ii'""i"&"iit is nowin t"t,im card Sai that theaceof diamonds utiJ"i"".',rt. is at the as il and pieviously occupied "irt. i." *", lhe aceof clubsj6ere will be ablelo it. the spectators "oti *i,tt i." i,iii. ou"i.,, "o lhe course "u.65 is o[ to lhe aceofclubs.Theacenamed *i"Jfv ii. ii "ft*g" next in voursuit sequence -ii,i'"'t. thepacketandlifl rherop threecardsolfas .i"rti t "ver "ita ;ardsaboverhebreak'thethumbar the three tlte ii iitpii iini"e "*. n."i.'na. rit. for.fi_ng"ron top and the other fingersal lhe-far.end irr" ifti.l*i. of theihreecards Lift thecardsslighllvabove """*"u"* il'iii. i!?"ii'",*;itt; lett handandrhendo a rapidforwardandbaclthe far mds of lhecardslrom tne wardactionwilh thehand,releasing ii"iti ir*itt as vou do so, so lhai the cardsrapidlvurn righl over are grippedbv the right handfirs-tfinger.and i.i"irr*"'rl ""ilr'trrel rhu;b al thefar end,lhethumbnowbeingon lop andthellngerDelow replacelhe cardson lop o[ the ooe remainlngIn tne lell lmmediarelv oflhe cards movement rr-a.irtiii'.t"jrtv ,"*ing placeon thebackward ac€of clubs' the to charues & diamondsvisibly irr" ir lrt"iitt" th€ tableto on """ dropped and "'iii"i out fanned now be itt. iou. ""o "".at up face one is only the show -J that the top one ''TIT FORTAT" of lwo effecls.lhe first DaiVernons "l' Thisis reallva combinalion in lhe Phoent(magazne'anotne 2. 3" whichwasoriginallypublished Nonconformisls"'publishedin the l"ona'i,,f'anin car'aner'i "ett that arc combincdand not the p.esentation ideas iiiii."rrv tt'" iiiii.. ones' to Ih€originallypublished dissimilar ,n.ttoor. * rft.ti heartsano ol thr€f "t. t\'vo and theace. Runlhroughthepackandremov€ lop ano on the lwo so that them erhibitthemiotheaudienceArrange 's heap' unsquared sliShtly in a $e table on down irt.t face irt"" of thepacl andconlrolit.Io "r""i ci.a sete.rea fromlheremainder iiaiii palm rheloD,Dropthepackfacedosn ontolhe lableandtn th'sactlon packer rhree' two one' for lhe Reach hand itt. r;ghl iii. i"i'*ii';"i" vou.until.il *-d pick ir up bv scoopinsit Lowards ;ihiil;;;;"t;, th;ed8eof lhelableandlhenlurn il faceup by placrnglherrgnr reaches 90

CardboardCharudes rhumbon th€ faceand thentwistingthe handover' Placethe faceup into the left hand and transferthe fac€card t *iin ift" "ri-t "ard "aa"a l,iii" r*ii"t to dt" ."*, makinSsom€remarkto covetthis,of Setting cardsinto numericorder. the ' -!i*"i out to showthem oncemote' but usea single ili" dt.* "*as asonecard closeup de arekeptsquared irt. tulii. to irt"r slil' faceup onc of ".ntr.lwo hand in lhi left squared '#"i lhreecardsandyou of the one ""Jn"rJtrt..*ds any i""itedio name i. ii,. .*",iitt on€by thefollo*lngmov€s' lo theselecled frasctranScd irr.n!lo* tfrarlt""* lheymayrun lrom DacK order' numeric in are the cards whits! Notethat ofexplanalionI willrelerto lhecaro to face.or face!o back,sofor ease position, ratherthan by its name' uv its irr" .oi"tatot "ttoo."t If Rcrr Crrd Nrmed Pushoverthe two facecardswith tbc Ieft thumbandhold the lasttwo it"uav the cardswith the righi handasyou do this' and *r#o ^'..". left handalone,to showthat the namedcard ii;fi;"th;;il;il;he haschangedto the selectedone. If CentreClrd Nrmed packetfacedo*n asyoutakeit with thcriShlhand Turnthecomplete remarkinsrharrhis\r'ill on thelefi sle€ve, f*.'"iili.;acket ,j;;;;; one Replace cardinrothesclecled .h;sinsthe chosen ;;;;;.;ii;;f pushing thelop bv it out and fan a.*" i" t-helefi hand ir"i..i]"* the Take 'i" card as one squared face two fte t*ping ,""'"*ai o*i rhat so tiShtlv fairlv ""a them bv .iihihand tft. Sripping into '"*^J."ra. rirevdo not moveout of posilion.andthentwislthehandoverlo snow lo the ro revealthal rh€cmtre onehaschanged of irt" agajn once are 'rr"'r..". so thcy ""ta. again back hand the dti" tum r.i""[J..",'"ti

lf Frcc Card N.m€d fake off facecard*ilh right handand hold it for a momentsaying ',rtit ii Nowl;ke lhenexlcardfrom thelefi handgoup "ou..rtoi..". il, i."tiv rakelwo asoneby bucklinglhe botlomcard ,'" irr."ri* "iii, thelastcardirom thelefthandandplacell on rne lake \lichrlv.Finallv gilen is tharyou haveshown ir.". .'r',i".. iit ,t. ,igttr.Theimpression countedtheotherlwo on it, and then itrenamedcaldasif to emphasize ''tfi

up and spreadout it""t", ir rr,"n."olacedin the lefl handstill fac€ 9l

Codboard

q,ith the aid of the riSht hand, spreadingonly the face two cardsand ke€pingthe last two squaredas one, to show thal the namedcard has chanSedto lhe selectedone, The effectnow proce€dson to its final phase,ahhoughlhe impression you endeavour oneis to givewhenthe namedcardchanges to the selected that t}le trick is over. After the cha[ge, you will be l€fr with t}Ie fan of three cards in one of two positions, if the face or rear card was named, the fan will be held face up in th€ left hand and if the centre card was named the fan will be held face down in the right hand. A different handlingis usedfor eachof iheseas follows: frll frcc up in Icft Hlnd Twist the left hand over so that the fan is fa€e down, and with ihe assistance of the right hand squarethe cards up and leavethem face down in the left hand. Take the top one off with the riglt hand and replaceit on top of the marn pack. Say "you are probably wondering what wouldhavehapp€nedif you had not namedthe (heresaythe name of the top card) but had chosenone of the others". Turn lh€ cards remainingthe left hand faceup and pushoff the faceone and takeit in the righr hand. Name the card being held in the right hand and say "supposilg you had chosenthis one'' . Replacethe card in the right hand behindthe two beingheld as one in the left hand, bul leaveit outjogged for about 1", the cardsstill being face up. With the right hand pushthe facetwo cardsasoneup until theysquare up with the outjoggedone, and then pull just the faceone back down again to its original position to reveal the changeof the rear card to the selectedon€. This is an extremely simple action, the right thumb being plac€d on th€ lower shor! end and fidgers on the face of the two of hearts,and the thumb pushingthe two cardsas one to line up with fte rear one, and !h€ right finSerspulling the two of hearts back down again by light p.essureon ils face. Twist lhe left hand over so that the cardsare fac€down and remove lhe top one and placeit facedown on the pack wilh the right hand, the heel of ihe left hand concealingthe ov€rlappingof the remainingtwo cards. As the right hand placesthe card on the pack, place the left forefingeron the outer short end of the joggedcard ard as the left hand tums over to the palm up position,lhe forefingerpushesdown, so that when the face of the card remainingin the left hand is visibleto the audienceit is perfectlysquaredas one card, the two of hearts.Turn the left hand overagainso thal thetwo of heartsis facedown and placeit on top of th€ pack, really two as one of course As an aflerthoughtsay"ofcourse you might havenamedthetwo, well in lhai caselhe two would have changedao the selecledcard." ln line with this lastremark,removethe top card of the pack and rub its faceon 92

Cardboard Chqrades

Charades

your sleeve,finally turningit faceup and throwingit on the tableloshow it is now the selectedcard, FsceDon,ntrrn in Right H.nd Brins fie left hand below the righ!, and closeihe fan of cardsup betwee;the two handsand in this actionpick up a left little fingerbreak belowthe top two cardsofthe 8ro p. Say, "you are perhapswondenng what would have happenedif you hadn't namedthe two" Spr€adthe of the right hand, cardsout in a face ;;wn spreadwith the assistance hold of th€m by taking which keeDslhe top two cirds squaredas one asthe togelher lightly holding them and abovethe ieft lilile finger break card pu\h cenLre lhe ac(ion, spreading in the Alst Dreadis made. tli*uiJtr,nn,ru in the fan so thar il ir outioggedfor about l Finallv nold rhe f; fale down in rhe letr hand which is reallvgrippinSthe top ,nd bottomcardsfirmlybul hastery lillle grip on lhecentreonedueIo its outjoggedcondition, which is easilyremovedby the righ' hand and facedown on the Pack. Dlaced ' vmre un the remaininscardstn lhe left handand lhen turn themlace rhemslill faceup in lhel€ft Tale lhe up sirh IheriShlhandandreplace lhe righl hand bl bucklingthe lower \ailh on; tice rwo cardi squaredas faceup cardinthe left handtothe the exhibii iund, and with the left one audiencesaying,"su;posing you had namedthe (herename whatev€r carais in ttrele-fitranii". Repiaceihe cardsin the right hand on1hefal€ of ihe one in the left but injog thern for about 1'. Now concludelhe b) following rhe iinal Lhreeparagraphsof th€ descriplion 'cquence .rlreadv siten lor (he Fan Faceup in Left Hand" condilion' The l;ick must Ilow smoothiv to be effectiveand theremust be no hesitationin following throttgh the variousaiternatives ,.BELOW ZERO'' Therehavebeeoseveralideasalreadyworkedout lo givethe effectofa card slowly sinking down in the pack. Dai Vernon had one versronn versjon niinr in ttti 'ptto"o]"' tagazine, ind Larrv Jenningsdescribeda id€as used preceding Both of the ago. ,,itrito"n to .. .o-" f.-" vears jurt a small of using I heard version packs first the ot caras, but iuti Oe".lopedby Bob ostin and cailedrhe "Submarin€ ,'a.1'eioicatar "as ( a.d . The method I useis completelyditlerenl ro Mr' Ostinsbut Lhe ncrualeffect was inspiredby his trick. Removesix cardsfrom the pack without drawingany atlenlror to lne quantityyou are removing,and arrangethem so tha! the top cardof the one,sucha" an ace.klng or joker' For easeol .'oL,oi* a conspicuous .t.rciior;on I uiil a.sumelh3tlhe cardal lhe Lopol thepacke(ol \rx Isthe 93

cardboard Charodes ' 'pir"" ttreoactetof carals facedownin yourleft hatrdbul asyou put tr'.riirro ocisirion therighthand'usetherighl thumblodrop threr .".lt i'L"iiii i*. "irtr thes;up and(henrakeup a breakaboverhese "r titti finger.Spread lhe cardsour in a facedown irt. t.rt ii.* "*J. Iefl thumb'takelhenext with lhe putrting,rtetop oneover i"n iul"rr.t "irrt of the lefl little finger because move easv ii" *,iut.a ul o"e, in out ttrecardswith rhe "iiai to sp'ead coninue thm ;;;i;;il-ri;;,-;e ii"-iigtt ttard, unlil a spreadof apparentlvfive cardsis i-ii"i"" "r in the left hand. held facedown

Cardboad

Charades

on the rhe thumb is on tbe left long edgeof the packetand the fingers risht' the moving Bv bn top f"*fingJr stiil curved ,t;;;;;:;tfi;; long the along is made action squaring r"" ti;es a i'i"i itJ a"*" short low€r at the " resting linally "r hand the ,i-a.. of rt'" t".. ao"n the left hand inner corner' By presslngdo\rn.on ,:ndwith the thumb on "ardi,

i;.- ili';i

and lifting ;il iards slightlvwith rhe righr rorerin€er

Iiom the tnumo uowardswith the right thumb,two cardsarereleased run! along thumb risht Thc rhem above rhumb ;t-;. .;il;;;.*i;k;; lt reacnes wilh lt unlu lhenearshorlendof lhepacketcarr''lngthebreak bv th€ held up and is rak€n wheretie break i;;; ;;;,i;itl;l of rhe rht eDd ""t';r' alons movins the rhumb i;ii it",;i;i;;;;: fl. ;.us; for aDsolul€ly cards th€ purpose o[ making seeminS nacketis a8;in for lhe

;l',;,l#i:"+.{q tf,*iffi I.;;;;i"fi; i*i:ul'u.*m:Tl"li':i::?::' rorabouthalr it exrmds rhumb-ttnril left the ftfu

/o

";bvhand lon8 side of the packel The righr hand the right \liotr 'i ";.:, the spreadingby placingthe thumb on lop or tne -omesover to assist rnlo In€ Ddckel.lhe secondfinger below the paclel and going dlr€ctly secono ano tiumb righl hand The finger' i"eak heltl bv lhe left little from moved is lhumb lefi and lhc verv Lightlv i"e"lt* i'"*, joker'-rhe outjoss€d paitcito ihe raceor the ""* ,fi;i";.-;"*" "iio ;;;J;;;';i

4r

t$urc z I

face Removethe top card of the spreadwith the riSht hand' lurningit

ii"" ii ii'tr'. i"ter. stiil kepingir faceup' place.i(under^$e hairirs for abour, '.i. ;iine lanandleaveir ouljogged il#.'iii"i'.-a lh€ cards let not lo care taking up lhe fan close zr iiiit. i. FiJ"* fir' lwo cards' au&e tle faci up one,preadandrevealthal therearereallythe fan is position Once j;ker in its out,ogged ."a "plli.i*i the on thelow-ershon€ndof the facedo*n iii.i',"fr"-t" ir,J 'igt'i,humb one,lhe forefingercurucdon top ol Ihc lhe far on ."rar-itiJiit. ftg.i. as samerime i**ai i'"J ii. o*iJi".lt beinghetdin rhelefthand Ar themoves ro. rhe left forefing€r up this frsirion'.rhc il-.'sili;il1;i; jokcr' andbv a iuieiit on enaot tle racedowncardsbelowthefaceup p"irti"e ;ii"n wilh (herighlandleft handfingerstowardsthe th€ "'".Li""J .i"fu f,-aiftt.ui,ft. f"cedowncardsthalarebothaboveandbelow cards do*n face of rhe squaring Absolure ;il';;.:;;;'';'i;iicrlv at rhisstaseof rhe zt (ii);howsthehandposhions ii.ir.iii"il-JFtil the right hand changesits position so that "ff,i"i". th" ,qu"ring ""tion' 94

i.lu itl";;"h;ut;a Jtk;r still. whilsrthe risht handmovesrhe three lace ,lrui li rratrocreatoiertreraboutI l" ro theright Thisshowslwo rwo or conslsts one lower the bul s€cretly the .losn cardsabove ioket berween .;;;;;i;,lt squareitogerher.with tht ioker sandwiched Iheleft right' ro the cards its ,i*i- ,q" ,oori", it tight liandhasmoved joker the.two spreads " and rhe of face fr-omthe ;;";;;*"v ';;;; 'rmaininS cardsbeiowit in a slightlan Therighl handdoes'or release Id.k criDon lhe cardsil is holding 'r.'^ii; seenrhaithe joke' hassunkdo*n rhroush il; t;;;;;a"e ,"'"'."ra'"""i"itaiv *y '.two csrdsabovelhejokerandtwo belowil" ils groupol lnree .u'dasvou makethissralemmltheriShlhandmolesjust cleartheright thev ,,,a. tri"r',r"i. irt. iigttt andbackagain.sorhat the joker above replaced Joxer't.ne andsre then l,andlo;s sideof the whllslInls it steacly below cards the lwo k tr handholdsthe iokerand a minimum' to cards hand the right of ,"ovement ,tti ri".i. x""o ','i"l aboveit Fromlhespectalors to ciearthejokerand8e1back ,urrerioush at*a"looks exacllythesarneasbelore'withtwo cards ',,'l"i.r "i.*lrt. ihe .,nnarenrlv above iokerandlwo below '' Ior againleavinglhe joker outjogg€d i:i"i.'"1"-,r" o""t.i prevrously oesprocedure "arefullv repeallhe squaring .,l.ourhali its lengthand ,lbed. but thistimeth€rightthumbtakesa breakaboveonecaroonry ii, itt. t!t, titrt. finser' The final positionbeinsrhe ",i"iiir.il,r* ,,.,.r.i *ii"",ft .q*..a in thelefl hlnd with a lirtlefingerbreakabov€ ir" i""i.".A jJit'. r"ceup jok€rprotrudinqfor abouthalI irs lensrh

Ardboord

Cardboad

Charudes

from the far short end of the pack. Saythat thejoker will sink throughonemorecardand bring the right hand over ro the packetto assistin the spreadingaclion. Although the righ! thumb is restingon top of the packetit takesno part in the spreading ofthe fi.st two cardswhichis doneby the left thumb.Oncethesetwo cards have been pushed over slightly, the right hand secondfinger enters the left litde finger break as before and locks all lhe cardsabovethis break tightty betweenthis finger and tfte thumb. The left thumb moYes away onto the face of the joker to hold it still, whilst th€ right hand movesits lockedgroup slightlyto the right. Tbe final cardis spreadwith ihe aid ofthe left hand and thejoker is now seento be four cardsdown. The cards in lhe right hard are moved to the right and back again as before!o show that the joker is fourfi card down. The packe! is carefully closedonce again and held in the left hand. The right hand comesoverand movesthe block of facedowncaldsabovethe joker do\I.rtfor about +", by takinghold of them with the thumb at one shon md and the secondfinger at the olher. The right hand now moves to the lace up joker and pushesit down towards the face down cards urtil the joker is fell io line up with the upjogged face down card below it. Thesetwo cards can now be gripped as olre by the right hand and pulledup slightlyso tha! the joker is well outjoggedagain.The effecth thatyou arejustadjustingthe cardsbefore proceedingwith th€ tnck, but you haveactuallysquaredup ihe faceup joker with the face down card belowit. The left thumb spreadsover the four face down cards above the joker to show that it has sunk through anothercard. After pushing&e four cardsover wilh the left thumb, they are takenin their fannedcondition into the right hand leaving two cards squared as one in the left hand The face down cards in the right hand are replacedbelow the face up joker in the left but injoggedfor about + of lhei length.The right hand comes over to square the injogged cards with the joker by placing its thumb on the inner sho( end ofthe facedown group and fingerson lbe outer short end of the ioker. As the cards are pushedtogethera Half Passis carriedout with the four lower facedown cardsso that they end up faceup belowthe two uptrcrcards.Ils quite easyto pick up the break for the passby pushingdown slighdywith the right thumb as the cards ar€ squared. The faceup joker at the top of the paaketis thumbedoff and held in the riSht hand, leavingapparentlyfour face down cardssquarein the left. Say |hat if the.ioker can sink through the cardsone by one, you wonder if it could travel through all four at once. Offer io seeif it is possible, and place the joker still face up belovr the face down packet in the left hand. Statethat whilst you think it might b€ possibleto makeit go tlrough four cardsat once,you doubaif it would be willing to do it whilst face up, so the first thing to try and do is to make il turn fa.e down. As you saythh, take lhe packetfrom the l€ft hand with the right, 96

Charades

l,oldincil from above,lhe thumb al lhe nearshon end. fingersal th€ far ,'".. forinng"t on top. Move the packetawaytrom the left handand "ii and baik for about 6"' and under cov€r of this movemml rorward rcleasclhe righl thumb grip so that the packetlurns completelyoverend i.r ."a *a ii gtipp.a th€ far shon end bv lhe right I humb on lop and "i is relurnedro the lefi hand on the bacrwaro rhe forefinrer below and b€€nlumed completelyover' Theeffecl to arm *aly *.r.rn*i.-u",i* lor is a 'maaicalshakeof $e cards' "i'*rt,ir.?"tato".t wi$ the lefl thumb one by onr until live face last two beingsquaredasonecard The riglt hano the Jown cardsstrow, but moves away afterwards, and leaves-the t" tpread in it""aving -fr"fa "..irir Say "w€ll, that seemsto have made it tum face i"" in tfr"'t"fil*4. toihe top wilhour us spvingon it'" Brin8 the ll"n. no* ii"""".t lurn lhe top card of the fan faceup to showlt ls lbe rrehthand over and 'Jf;ir.. ttr. iot ., h"" t.en revealedat the top ot rhe packet I replaceit rr.._uo onioo ol tft. f"n but injoggedfor aboul half ils lengrhand lhen .ioi.i'rr" i"" ,lp,iating.are to liave thejotcr injogged Atterclosinglhe fan. the face down cards ar€ naturally lelt in a slighlly unsquares fondirion and $e ri8lt hand comesup to the far shorl end of lhem to \quare them up. Under the cover of this action lhe right hand second l.qir soesunder the group and pusheson lhe lowefinostcard so lhat it .n_u."?own*ards ro an injoggedposition for aboul I " The riShl hand of lhe face up joket and pushesit r."* t" irt. near "ttiriend ""* iurward unlil ir hits the lowerinjos8edcarCand is squarewith it At t[ls nase rhe ioker will overlaylhe neal short end ol the pack lor aDoutr ' .,'iirt"ii'nrt, r'una.-,"k; hold of the lwojoggedcardsbv holdingthem rr rhe innlerend and turn them face down as one card on lop ol Ine go oacket.The Dacketis droppedon top of the pack and you are leaclyto to it, chang€ warrants of this one your the reception into neit cffect, or if dancing singingor tap ..NORVELLf,'' The feke throw usedin the classic"Three Card Trick" seemslohave bcenrarelv usedfor any other purpos€.shich is ratherslrangeDecause rnesleiehiissucha derepliveone tn thiseffect I haveappliedlhe monlr ,nin" i" actrie"ea one itread condition, for usein a lranspositionlrick *t"cted card l hav€previouslymentionedin "The ,i,'ofrin* "rn-,"ffv ti.uils iiavttrings '-rttarin my opinion lhe bestdescriplionof the adual :,rrto"; irio ue-toundin "Tire Expen al the card Table" by Erdnase' rosetherwith the bestdescriptionsof many other fine things' haue a joker in the pack and tbat it i5 positioned th..k th"t "ou irri i.nit. U.rorecommencinglhe effeq. Hold the pack so thal "'nuni rhi iacesare towardsyou and run thlough them until you reachfiejoker

Cadboard

Chorcdes

which is pusheddown slightlyro an injoggedposition. Continueto run six more cardspast the joker and then cut the pack at this point and completethe cut, finally turning it facedown in a squaredconditionin the left hand but taking csre in the squaring action that the joker remains injogged.Bring the righ! hand over lhe pack to cohplete the squaring and in this actiontop palm the sixcardsabovethe injoggedjokerinto the right hand, and pushthejok€r squarewith the pack. Sinceyou havenot as yet told the audiencewhat you are going !o do, the impressiongiven is that you have looked through lhe pack for some specilic card and then cut lhe pack at this card !o bring it to the top. Keep th€ cards tilted upwardswbenlooking throughthem, and keepthem movingso that the actual card you cut at is not apparent to the audience. Pushrhejoker slightlyto tbe riglt with the left lhumb and thenusethe righr ftumb to flip this card faceup on lop of the pack, lettingthe right hand naturallycurve over the pack as it flips the joker over. Move the dght hand awayto t}le right again and exhibit the face up joker on top of the pack. Rep€atthe action of flippinS it over again with the aid of the right hand, but as the joker lands face down on the pack let the six palmedcardsdrop oo top of it. Keeplhe.ight hand over the pack and immediately pick up the top card betweenthe tbumb and secondfinger in the classicmontegripwilh the forefingerrestingon the backof the card. The flipping overand pickingup of the top card by the right hand must be an almost simultaneous operation, the overall effect being that you havesho*tr rhejoker on top of the pack and endedup with ii held face down in the right hand. The true stateof affairs is that an indifferent card is held in the right hand and the joker is six down from the loD of lhe pack. Pushthe top card of rhe pack sligltly ro rhe right with the left rhumb and then bring the right hand over the pack and pick up the top card betweenfte third finger alld thumb, below the supposedjoker, in the classicmonte grip. Turn the right hand ove. so that the face card h exposedto the audi€nceand explainthat you aregoingto showsi\ cards one al a time and deal them into two packetson the table, and that a spectatorshould make a mental noie of one of thesecards and also rememberin which packetyou placeit. After you have made this statemeni appauentlythtow the face card of the two in th€ right hand facedown onto the table, but reallythro* the rear card in the saandardmontethrow danner. Thumb off the top card of the pack with the Ieft tlumb and take it below the card held in the right hand in the sameway as you did the firs! card. Show its faceby twistingthe right hand over and then apparcnrlythrow it facedown on the table about 9' to the righr of the firsi one, bui againrhrow the rear card. The two cardson the tablewill not be referredto asat posirion.A, and position 'B'. Continuethe aciionofthumbing offa cardfrom th€ rop of rhe pack and taking it below rh€ one alreadyin the right hand for rwo 98

Cordbodrd Chatudes Inore cards! the first being thrown on top of the face down card at r)osition'A', and the secondon top of the one at position 'B'. ln each easethe facesof lhe cardsare exhibitedin the righl hand and then the I[onte throw madeas they are thrown on the table, Thumb off another card with the left thumb and take il as before in rhe right hand. Ai the right hand twiststo showthe face of this card to rheaudience,the left thumb pushesoverlhe top two cardsof the pack so rhatthe left little fingercangeta breakbelowthemin preparationfor the nexrmove. Once the little finger hasgot its break the top cards are pulled backagainwith tlle left thumb so that the packis in a squaredcondiiion. I he right hand no* monte throws its card on top of the two alreadyat position 'A' and then comesback over th€ pack to again apparently take dff one more card. However, becauseof the Ieft little finger break it :rctually takes two cards squared as one, in exactly the samegrip as was rsed for taking single cards off. The right hand twists lo show the face of rhe card just removed from the pack and then monte throws it on lop of rhetwo alreadyfacedown on the tableat position'B'. This will leavetwo .ards squaredas one in the right hand. Theseare immedialelydropped on top of the pack which is still beingheld by the left hand and the top cardthumbedoff slightlyby the left thumb, and thenflipped faceup on rop of the pack by the right hand to revealthe joker. The effect from the sequencedescribed so far is that six cards have l,een shown and dealt altematelyinto two face down heaps,with a \peciatorcomminingone to memory,and alsothe heapinto which it is ipparenlly placed.I find it makesthingseasierfor the spectatotif you rcrually nameihe cardsas their facesare shown,and it also ensuresthat hc remembers onethatis shown,and not on€that hethoughtwasshown. Ao importanttechnicalpoint is to keepthecardsinthe right hand always .losetogelherso rhat the faceof the rear oneis neverexposedwhenthe hrnd twistsover to showthe facecard.You willhave no troublewith this t,oint if you use th€ Erdnasetechnique.After this short diversionwe rclurn to the poitrt wherethe joker residesfaceup on top of the pack in rheleft hand. Makesomeapprop ateremarksaboutthe st€ngepowersof thejoker r'rd hand it still faceup to the speciatorwho hasremembered a card and ,r\k him to drop it on top of the face do*,Il heapthat containshis card. lhis will resultin thejoker beingdroppedon top of thecardsat positions 'A' or 'B'. If it doesn't, take up Origami, and usethis book for your ,,rodellingmaterial.Whilsi the spectatoris engagedin placingthe joker ,n the appropriarcheap,pick up a left litile finger break belowthe top . irrd of rhe pack. Pick up the lhreecardsthat do not havethejoker on lop of them in the ll,llowingway: if they are from position 'A'take them one by one and t,hcelhem on top of thc packso that their orderis reversed,and thencut rhcpackonceto apparentlylosethem, but retainthe breakwith the right rhumbasyou makethe cut, and relakeit with the lefalittle finSeras you 99

Cordboard Charudes completethe cut. If they sre from position 'B', losethe left little finger breakand pick up the thre€cardsaltogetherwith the right hand, placing th€mon top of the pack without alteringtheir orderandpickingup a left little finger break belowthem. Cut the pack once,blt maintainthe left little finger break as describedif position 'A' werebeing dealt wiih. Cut lhe pack at the break and retain the upper half in the right hand placingthe lowerone facedownon the tablewith theleft. Placethe right hand half into the teft hand and then tip thh half up slightlyal ft€ near sho end so that the face of the bonom card is visibleto you. Your excusefor this action is the remark, "I think that's about half" as you look at the edgeto check.After you havenoted the facecard, drop this card off of rhe right thumb so that lhe second card from the face is partially visible to you and rememberthis one also. Releasethe right hand grip on the cardsand leav€then facedown in the left hand. Usethe right hand to spreadthe halfpack on the tablein a farrly long face down line. Requestth€ spectator who remembereda card lo place the faceup joker asidefor a moment,and then dide the threefacedown cardsthat were under the joker into different parts of the face down spr€ad,telling him as he doesthis to take care that the facesare not exposedasyou do notwish togetaglimpseofthem. At this stagedo not ask him to squar€the spreadup. Bring the right hand over the halfpack beingheld in rhe left hand in a casualsquarinSof the short ends,and usethe right thumb to drop one card from the face. Keep the hand in position for a momenl with the thumb pressingagainst the near short end to mainlarn the break above the face card- Ask the sp€ctatorto tell you the nameof his noted card and accordingto the one he names,carry out one of the following actions. lf face card that you glimpsedearlier-Take up break from right thumb wi|h left little finger and remove right hand from pack. If second from face that you glimpsed earlier-Drop one more card from right thumb and then take up br€ak with lefi little fidger above the two cards,aIId removeright hand. If a card that you have not glimpsedearlier*Drop two cards ftom right thurnb and then take up break with left little finger above the three cardsand removeright hand, Pick up the joker with the riSht hand and make somefurther remark about its strangepowers.Turn it face down and push it into the cards held in the left hand from the rear so that you can easilyinserlit at the breakpoint. As soonas it is partiallyinto lhe pack, releasethe left little finger break and as you pushfie joker squarewith the packetwith the right thumb on its near short end, push downwsrdsslightly with the thumb so that $e lefi little fingercan takeup a breakabovethejoker as it finally squareswith the other cards. cesturewith th€ rigbt handtowardsthe facedown spreadon the table and ask the assistingspectalorto carefullycloseup the spreaduntil the

r00

Cardboard Charudes cardsare perfectlysquared,alld then to turn the half pack face up and leaveit on the table.His, and the audiencesinvolvemenlwith this action giv€syou exc€llentmisdireclionto bring the right hand back to the face down cards in the left hand and reversethe cards below the left little firger break by meansof lhe Half Pass.Only two, three ol four cards will be involvedso tbe passcan be madevery efficientlyand /to breakis maintainedafter the completionof the pass.Immediatelyaftei the Half Passis completed the right thumb dtops two cards from the bottom of rhe half pack and th€ left little finger takesup a break abovethesetwo cards.The right hand can now be removed.Saythat the joker is somewherein the pack€tyou areholdingand asyou makethis remarkgiveihe packet two cuts as follorrs: cut the pack at abut the centre but as you complete the cut, pull down on lhe left little fin8er at the break so that rhe upper section goes in betweenthe two cards being pulled down and lhe remainder of the lowet half of the pack. lnsert the upper half from lhe rear €nd of the lowet one and first of all push it sidewaysuntil the longsidesof both halvesline up, but the originalupperhalf is ioggedfor about half its length at the near short end of the cards Square th€ two halvestogetherby pushingthe inner end of the injoggedhalf with the right thumb, the fingersbeingat the far end, so that i! linesup with the otherhalf, but irt doing this pushdownwardswith the thumb slightlyso rhat as the halvescome together the thumb can pick up a break between rhem. Give the half pack one more cut by simply cutting at the break and completing the cut, The two cuts described are made fairly rapidly as if you are ensuringthat the joker is lost in the packet,beforeproc€eding with the effect. Take the facedown half pack and hold it in lhe riSit hand so that it's positionedabout 6' abovethe face up half on the table Say that the Inagnericpo\rer of the joker will be usedlo draw the spedatorscardoul olihetabled cardsand into the on€syou areholding.Mentionthat asthe rabled cards are face up, the selectedcard will still be face up when it reachesthe face down cards you are holding so it will be easy to find S(aterhat the joker will also tum itself face up to show that it is just as .lever as any other card in the pack. Spreadout lhe face do*,Il cards until you reachthetwo faceup onesaroundthecentre.One will bethe specla_ ror's card and the other the joker. Removethesetwo cards and drop rhemon the table in front of the spectatorwho noted a card. Closeup the remainderof the cardsyou are holdingand hold them in lhe right hand still face down with the right hand holding them from nbove, thumb at the rear short end and fingers at the far on€ Reach lorward with the right hand and placeihe facedown half on top of the lace up tabled one but jog it slightly to the right. Draw the assembled packtowardsyou and squareit up as you lift it fromthetable, doingthis wrth the aid of the left hand. Turn the pack completelyover and thm spreadit betweenthehandsuntil you cometo the point aroundthe centre wheretheyare faceto face.Breakthe packat thispoint and ihen turn tbe lot

Cadboard

Charades

low€rhalf facedown and r€placeit underthe upperoneso that the cards now all face the sameway. Pick up the joker and the selectedcard and plsh them into the pack. The actionsdescribedin tbis paraSraphare simply cleaning up ones, and should be carried out casualt an; rvithout importance. ..WHISTLE AND

I'LL COME''

Therearr very many waysof magicallylocaling the lour acesin the pack bul broadlyspeakjnglhey breal down inro two groups.The firsl of these is the type where the aces ar€ found magically bui revealed in a normal fashion, for example, one may appear at the top of the pack, one at the bottom and so on. The second is the novelty t)?e of ;evelation where lhey-arediscoveredin an unusual way, such as shbodng from the pack into the air. The novelty type of revelation is usedin this;ffecr and the inspiration for tle trick camefroft an Al Leechidea, published in the 'Ncw Phoenix' some years ago. Run through the face up pacl( and remove the four aces,placjng then ^ face up on the table. Close up the remainder of lhe pack and;n this action clIry ou! a Half Passwith tlle lower half of the pack and take a left little finger break betwe€nthis seclion and the one aboveit. K€ep the right hand abov€ thc pack for a mommt immediately after completinS thc pass,and with the tip of the right thumb lift up the top card_ofth; lower facc down section of the pack, so that it is added |o the bottom of the upp€r section. Retakea break with the left lirile finger below the cerd just lified wirh the right thumb. Ar rhis sragein the;ffecr you should

y>\ tt

a

Cardboard Charades haveabout half the pack faceup, onecardfacedown, a break,and then lhe remainderof the pack face down. Take one ofthe acesfrom the table and appearto pushit faceup into the centreof the faceup pack. Reallyinsertthis aceinto t}le breakpoint and thenswingit round, so that it is extendinS diagonallyfrom the outer lcft hand corner of tbe pa€k and h coveringthe left thumb, which is positionedbelowit readyfor a thumb count.SeeFi8ure22 (i). Nole that theeasiestway of putting the card into the break,is by insertingia at the nearshort end and then swingingit round and upwardsuntil it is in the coffect position. Onc€ the card has b€€n inserted the left little finser releases its break. As soon as the left thumb is covered by the outjogged ace, use it !o lhumb count two cardsand hold a break readyfor the insertionof the next ace. Pick up one of the three remaining aces from the table and insertit inlo the breakpoint beingheld by the left thumb tip. The aceis rgain insen€d face up and left outjogged bur a lirtle to the right of the lirst one. Repeatthe thumb countingoftwocards followedby the inseF lion of the ftird ace,and finally thumb countingtwo morecardsprior to lh€ insenion of the final ace. Note that all acesare placed in !h€ pack lac€ up so that they appearto be facing the sameway asthe remainder of thepack.Also, asyou placethem in positionmoveeachonealittleto the I ight so that when all four have been insertedthey extend fiom the outer cnd of the pack in a slight fan, tie fan itself beingpositioneda little to lhe left to coverthe l€ft thumb. With the exceDtionof the first acetlev ,,rernsertedat the outer left hand cornerof the pack, Push all four acesin the pack in a slightly diagonal position and as you squarethem up with the remainderof the pack, take a left little finger hreak above them. D/op one card fromthebottom of the upper section ol the pack to the top of the lower one with the aid of the right thumb, iind retake a break abov€this card wilh lhe left little finger. Keepthe r i8ht hand above the pack making a squadng action and lben cary out a llalf Passwith the lower sectionof tlle pack. lmmediatelyafter complet, Ingthe pass,hold the packin the left handand turn it facedown. TaDthe r.,t card of rhe face down pack wirh rhe righr'hand fingers and say "some conjurerscould make the acesappearat the top, but that's too Turn the pack face up and start io spreadit oua slightly from the face sirying"l couldjusr look for them and pick them out, but that would be r{roeasy", Takecarethat you do not spreadasfar asth€ top elevencards ,ll ahepack. Closeup the pack rvith tle aid of the dght hand until it is ('rce againin a squaredfaceup condilionin the left hand, and thendroD rr\c cardsfrom rhe borromor lowersideof lhe pack\r irh rheright lhumL n d take a break abovethesecardswith the left little finrer. With the li.hr hand cut off about onequarrerof lhe pack from rhe f;ce and place rr below the remainder,but as you placei! in position, use the move orisinatedby Ed. Marlo, bypullingdown the block offivecards with the

a )

102

103

Cardboad

Charades

left litde finger so that the quarterpack goesaboYethesecards.As vou squareup the pack take a left little finger break immedialelyabovethe quarterpack. You will needa patterline to coverthe aboveactionsand I usually say "Did you know that acesare influencedby certainsounds and it is possibleto train ihem in much lhe sameway as animalscan be trained." Turn the pack face down maintainingthe break. Cut off the quarter pack from abovethe breakand 'out' weaveit into the lemainingsecaion of the pack, pushingthe two sectionsloSetherso that they are interwoven for about one and a half inches.As the weavehas iaken place from the facedown endofthe pack you will find a largeblock of cardsat the face end that have not beenshuffled at all. If you have used the standardtechniquefor a weavein which the cardsare held verticallyin the hands,thumbsand fingersof eachhand beirS on the oppositelong sides,you will find it extremelyeasyto placethe left forefingeron the upper short end of the faceblock and push downwardsslightly,so ihaa the whole block is in-joggedfor about half an inch. Graspthe injogged endof this block with the right hand and transferit from the faceofthe pack to the top, but as you placeit on top, makesurethat you line it up with the original top card of the pack, which meansthal the block lines up exactlywith the quarter pack that is outjoggedand partially woven into the larger sectionof the pack. Keephold of the pack with the left hand, thumb at on€ long sideand fingerson the other one, holding lhe cardsat the meshedsectionso that thevare lockedin the partiallywoven condition. Take the packinto the riShthandand positionit asshownin Figure22 (ii) the facesof the cardsbeingtowardsthe palm. I find the easieslway of gettingthe packinto this positionis io takeit with the riShthand, placing the right thumb on the iop ofthe packand fingersat the faceand torn it over, replacingil for a moment in the left hand so tha! the facesare outermost, and then take it again in the right hand in th€ correct position.In positioningthe cardsthey mustbe kept lockedtoSetherat all timesand the block of unshuffledca.dsat the top of the pack must end up in the upjoggedposifon. After all this work you are now at the stagewhereyou can relax and indulgein a little presentation.Carry on with your themeabout sounds affecting the acesard mention that you can locale them by simply whistling. Illustratewhat you meanby giving a shorl whistleand al the same time releasepressur€betweenthe thumb and first and second fingers of the right hand. This will allow the block of cards to drop dowdwardsand reslon thedght litde finger,to reveala faceupaceat the front of the outjogged8roup. Removethis ace carefully with the left hand, takingcarenot to disturbany othercardsand pla€eia on the table Bring the left hand over 10 the cards and grip them tightly at the meshedcentrepoint, the left forefirSerbeingon the back of the cards, the thumb on the near long edgeand the remainingfingerson the far

lu

Cardboard Charades I0n8edge. Removethe pack completelyfrom the right hand, turn ir round end ror end wirh the left hand and rheDreplaceil in the rigbt, taking up rh€ irme grip asprevjously.This \rill againbring the biockofcards on top of rhc packto rhe upperpositionreadyro repeaitbe droppingof this block ro revealrhe secondace.Beforereleasinglhe block however,usethe lef! Irnd to square(heblock at rhe lop ofthe pack up, by runningthe fingers irnd rhumb along tha oppositeshorl ends. This is really not slricily r.((e\,ar),bul acrsa5a kindof insurance lo guaranree a cleandropof rhi You arenow ready!o releasepressureon the lonSsidesofthe block so Llrarit drops downwards10 revealthe face up ace, which as beforeis emovedwith theleft handand placedon rhetablewirh the first one.The previouslydescribedis repearedto revealrhe third and fourth r,rocedure ,!es,Ior eachonereversingthe inrerwovenpackro bring the block to the ,Lppermosi posilionand alsorepeatingthe 'insurance'squaringbetween One brief meniion of the presentaiionangle. I whistle very briefly t{ ior io eachof the first threeacesappearingbul for the final ol|e let a \t)eclatortry his luck by whistling.I lel him fail rwiceand then release Ii,essurero coincidewith his third whistlesaying,, ,there,seehow easyi1 ,\"- lf you can'l whistle!buy yourselfa roy whhtle and blow this a! th€ .rppropriatepoinrs.

105

Tale TWbters Do this by Say you will nolJvchangeover two cards from each ercup pair in.each hand and ooe group, lilling off the top two cu.6. ol sa-'b

,i;e;rft1i'";

Chapter3 Tale Twisters

count e'oopsAsainGhost ;1;p oiir'i oppo.it" picturecardsandagatr

crouDro sho\ the; areslill thepacke!.face down 't'. "oe.ia'tor3, ;,i;"i;"]'i;i;.i #;:;;,.'i-on iiie'taceneptace chost condition spread srshrrv l;;: il;;;-'i;;;;; i;l; them asvoureplac€ ' tpot i;;;;;;;;;il;o-" 1'"y goes irs down on it "o'a" that -a theropone-so r".i io*n oi irrJ,atr. oushoif"i"

,,wn and leavesthe lowir lhree cardsin the lelt nano

the soup rransrer o"iitr'i." ""'9: in '""h wilh the forward reach rtrreecardsfrom vour lefr hand ro lhe rlSnr and (thev spectators sroup or i.;;;"-d ;;i'"'o.*;io"ilr'.."'""'ai 'n' Asvou.rake o rhese^i .".'n i'iJ,:.,ii?"iiil"]- ir,.oi.i up* tutvt top of rhc hand on risht the ;;. k; ;;;. ilil;',r'i. ""iii"rt;' itop ttt" c"tat itomtheleft handon No* 'i""i"'"*i'i"ir "iir'"'i"ii"' r',fof your single spotcardnearyou b€ 'pil"ii6iiJ tf i,.taiJ,:. vouwould e.oup t"v' "t aon'texp€ct would' but I cards' "na rtregictu'e *;i on'cc again ,;;*ii;; lurnvourpacket ";";i;i ,":.1"..irt. pi.i"r. o" tr.t""]on ,rt. nn"t*ord' hisoverto nnd tum ,';il;;;;;iG;il;;*ai. "*a" u1t'" €ffect comes of the end 'p"aoo' the rhev are now soot iards This switch over at ;;;;;;;itr"il;;;.

A SWITCII IN TIME Eff€ct Four picture cards are placed in front of a spectator and four spot cards in front of the performer, Cards are inlerchanSedb€tweent}re two packets,but when checked,lhe spectator still has four picture cards, and th€ performer four spot cards. The procedure is repeated with the sameresult, but when attempted a tbhd time, the packetschangeovercompletely,the spectatornow having the performer'sspot cards and the performer, the spectator'spicture

ur quite a surpiiseto the spectators. llnrl Not.s

Workitrg Deldls Removefour picture cards of the samecolour but of mixed values, thesemight be the KS, QC, JS, JC., ard placeft€m faceup in front of a spectator. Now remove four spo! cards of the same colour and mixed You might choose values,but selectcardsthat are similarin appearance. th€ 7C, 85, 6C, 8C., and dese are placedin front of yoursclf. Having explainedthat the spectatorhas four picturecardsand yourself fow spot cards, turn each packet face down on the table. Removeth€ top card of eachpacketand placeit alongsideits pack€t. Sayyou will changeover one card from eachgroup. Do this by picking up the singlecards,one in eachhand and pushingthem into the second from top position in the oppositegroups. Squareup ihe spectalor'sfoul cards, turn lhem face up and Ghost Count thcm to show four picturecards.The final card of the count is placed on the face of the packet and the packet is replaced face do\r'n on ihe table.Repeatthis procedurewith your four cardsto showtheyare all spot cards,finally placingthem face down on the table in their original posrtrcn. 106

the chost count' when hotding the packcts facc up prior to making with thc lefl card face .,r,r"yi it-. upper'lctl hand c;rnd of-lhe right halld corner lower lh' "o"", rt,umbso rhat rhe index valucis hiddct ard rhe

across stretched ; ililffilJi"ii ii?.ii . ir"r'nuisetru'ins will up lv'dce showins ';i r""t ,rt"i-trt. ""'d il il:;;:ffi:fii--.-*. rd benoticcd. ''

never eJ*"yii"i"l to rrt" t,"o groupsasthe picture andspotcardsand drawattentionto their actualvalues, SI'RANGEASSEMBLY l:flect table Tfuc€ Irour kings are rernovedand distribuled face down on th€ in much the kings of the one upon Lardsare oLced from the main Dack

roulinewerebeing assembrv ;;v?ii;';;;;;,iii"i i."i ':;.;6';i.-Th;;r-# chansedto com'qa to have tttio-iiing, ar. tl'o*n r,"' instead ;,lctelvdifferentcardsbut wheniie masterpacketis tumedover' t01

Tale Tviste6 of kings it is found to contain four aces.The missingkings are found reversedin the centreof the pack.

I'ale /w$ters

Beforepresentingthe effect,a slight arrangementof the top cardsof the pack is required.Readingfrom lhe top this is, ace, ace, ace, KH, reversedX card, X card, X card, X card. The X cardscan be ally cards exceptkings or acesand tlle final one must be remembered(the one in the eighthposition from the top).

Lift the apparentfan ofkings up from the packsothat you canlap the lclt long sid€againstthe top of ihe pack to squarethem up and thenlet rhcsquaredpacketdrop faceup on top ofthe pack(reallyeightcardsare Iurnedover on to the back).Thumb off the rop threefaceup cardsand displaythem to the speclators,the effect beingthat the threekingshave vanished,Turn the threecardsfacedown and reDlac€ them on toDofthe t'.rcl. Cive the pack one cul and placeiL on th; table. Say"you haveprobablyguessed that all the kingsarenow togetherin rhemasterheap,but that would only havehappenedif I had usedaces,'. lurn overthe masterh€apto travelthe aces.Aftet a slighipause,spread rhemain pack to revealthe four kings faceup in the centre.

Working Delrils

..TDINCIDENCE

Preprstion

Run throughthe pack and removelhe followinSfour cards,throwing them face down oo the table as you cometo eachon€ and lelting them fall on top of eachother,red K, blackK, an ace,blackK. Th€secardsare removedfrom lhe face end of the pack and in locatingand removing themyou mustneverlook beyondyour remembered keycard. Do not let the spectatorsse€the faceof th€ acewh€nyou lhrow I down, the other cardscan be flashedif you wish. As soon as you have removedthe four cards,run through the pack until you cometo your keycardand thensquarethecards,but keepa lefi little finger break berweenyour key card and the remainderof the face up pack aboveil. By grippingth€ eieht cardsbelowyour break, move them slightly and diagonallyto the l€ft and leavethem in this jogged position.Now turn the completepack facedown and placeit on ihetable taking careto maintainthe jog so that whenyou pick up the pack later, you will easilybe able to retakea break under the top eight cards. Pick up the four facedown cards,(order from the face,red K, black K, ace,blackK) rurn themfaceDpand Chost Countthemto showkings, the lasi card countedSoing on the face of ihe group. Turn them face down ard deal the top ode on to the table nearestyou, calling it th€ masterking and the orherthrer in a line a little aboveit. Pick up the main pack and placeit in $e left hand,ih€ lefi litle fing€r taking a break underthe joggedblock of eight cardsat the top. Thumb off the top lhree cardsof the pack and plac€ihem on top of the master king. Pick up the other kingsfrom the table one by one and placethem still facedown on top ofthe packin the ieft hand. Usethe left dumb 10push the top two over slighdyinto a spreadconditionand thenbring the righl hand to the packand grip all of the cardsabovethe left little fingerbreak in a lockedpositionso that you can move them all slightlyto the right, The appearance beingthat the threekingshavebeenspreadoLr!in a small fan and movedsiightlyto the right.

108

IN COLOUR''

I flect A group of about a dozencardsare givento a spectatorand the p€rlormerholds a similar quantiry.€sch shuffl€ their csrdsand thenDlace ,',,vrwo facedown on rhe rable.The rabledcardsare rurnedfaceut snd l,)und to be all black and the p€rformerranarks that this is a strange .oincidence.His staiementbecomes more acceptable whenthe ranaining { irds h€ and the spectato. hold are examined, becausethey are all red. WorkingD€hils Without letting the speclatorssee the cards you are removing, i\\cmble two packetsof about a dozeneach, face down on the lable. l'irekelA is all red cardsand packetB is all red €xceptfor the top four which are black. Place the remainder of the pack aside face down and r,rvcpacket A rc a sp€ctator alrd take B yourself. Shuffle the packet retaining the top four cards in position and invite rlrf spectatorto shuffle his. Plac€the top card of your group facedown ,rr lhe iable and requestthe specatorto placeihe top c?rd ofhis group Itr(cdo*n on top of yout card. liach of you shuffle your respectivegroupsagainand you keepyour r,'tr threecardsin position. After your shuffle and whilst squaringthe , (rds in your hands,get a left litile fingerbreakunderthe top threecards ,'r lnegroup, Rcqueslthe spectator to place rhe iop card of his packet fac€ down on r"t, of the lwo aheadyon the table,and you thm appearro placethe top r ird of your group on |op of the onehe hasjust placeddown. Reallyyou t'hcr three cards as one down, by taking th€ three cards aboveyour lrrfcr break,the righ! thumb at the nearshort end and the fincersat tlle 109

Tale Twiste$

I ale I w$rcfs

far one,to conceallhe thickness.As the right handplacesits cardsdown, it squaresthe compleledtabledgroup up neatlyio prevenrthe quantity of cardsbeing noted. Placethe cardsremainingin your handson ihe table for a momentand pick up the smallpacketof four cards.As you mentionhow eachofyou fre€ly selectedtwo cards, reversethe order of the face down cards you areholding by countingoff the first $ree genuinely,and thenplacingthe last three (as one card) on top of these, Turn the cards face up and push over the face threeone by one to displaya fan of four black cards,the rear card of the fan rea.lly being three cards as one. Close the fan and drop the cards face down on top of ti€ main pack. Commenton the fact ofyou eachtaking two cardsof the samecolour from shuffled packeNand the[ say "itt a biggercoincidencethan we imagine, becauseall the o{her cards are red". Tum your respective groupsup to show thal this is so. .MATCH.A.MATIC''

Ell€ct A spectator and the p€rformer each take four cards from the pack. After mixing their cards, e:rch removes one card from their group and after following a magical procedurc, tlese are showrr to match in colour and value. This is repeated successfuily a second time. Finally, tI€ p€rfonner takes the spectator's remaining two cards alrd adds them to his own. lle ca$iesoul the rmagicalprocedure'and they are seento be four

Prtor Arrrrg€ment Rcading from the top of thc face down pack, the four aces,two cards of the samecolour and value,two cardsof tbe samecolour and value. Worlhg D€tdls Falseshuffle the pack and then hand the lop four cards to the assisting sp€ctatoa, taking the next four for yourself. You can take yours by thumbing them off and not altering their order, or counting them off and rev€rsingtheir order. fie remainder of lhe pack is not usedin t}le effect. Requ€stthe spectator to mix his four cards without looking ai them, whilst you mix yours. Mix your four by taking the top two and alternatiIIg them vrith lhc remaining two by pushing them against them, so that tI they interweave. [f eachpair is spreadwhen you do this, it's an extremely simple operadon. Repeat this interweavlu two morc times making a total of three baby faro shuffles. Don't worry about whether these arc {

t

ll0

x

'in' or 'out' shuffles,it's of no importance Now state that you are going to teach the spectatora 'magicai Drocedure'which if followedcorrectly,will havea strangeeffect. First he must transfercardsfrom top to bottom of his group' stopping wheneverhe wishesand holding the card stoppedar in his right hand. whilst he is doing ftis, you do exacdy the same with your 8roup, sioppingon any card you wish and holding it in your right handNow placeyour card on iop ofthe threecardsthe spectatotis holdinS rnd let him placehis cardon top of the threeyou are holding Ask him to .ount tluough his four cardsfrom hand to hand so that their order is Ieversedand the top cardwill endup at the face,illustratethis with your lbur cardsbut reallydo the Chost Count, placingthe last card counted on top. Ask him !o carefullyr€rnovethe facecardofhis group whilstyou removeyours.Eachofyou rub the faceofthecard you haveremovedon rhe table and they are then turned face up rc reveal that they match in .olour and value.Placeth€setwo cardsaside. Ask the spectator to mix his remaining three cards whilst you mlx vours.Make surethat whils! mixing yours,you end with the originaltop .ffd saillat the top. Tell him to againtlansfer cardsftom top to bottom of his packet,finally endingwith any one he wishesin his right hand. You do the same,but actuallystop on the third card in your group (the ,'riginal face card) and hold il in your right hand. Exchangethe single (ardsagain,yoursSoingon top ofhis two cardsand hh goingon top of yours.Continuingthe'magical procedure'theme,tell him to count his rhreecardsto r€vers€their order. You do the same,but usea lhreecard vcrsionof tlle Chost Count i.e. one off fairlv, one back underneathand rwo pushedoff, one off fairly. This looks as if you have counledyour rhreecardsto reversetheir order, Eachof you removelhe lace cardsof your packets,rub lhe fac€sof rhemon the tableand thentum them faceup to showthat theyareof the .,,unecolour and value.The 'magicalptocedure'has worked againSay you will lry something a little different. Take the rcmaining two t rrds from the spectatorand add them to your two Now say "let's see shat happensif we applythe 'magicalprocedure'to thesefour cards.Do rlris,by first of all countiogthem to reversetheir order (I usethe Chosl ( oLnt aSainso that it looks ihe sameas my previouscountt and then Lrbbing iheir facesagainstthetable,after first fanningthem out slightly. ' I Inallyturn them face up to show four aces. .^N ILLOGTCAL CONCLUSION'' | | lecl A smallgroup ofcards are placedfacedown on th€ table wilhout fieir l!(s being revealed. Four red faced c,uds are then removed from the ltl

I

L

Tale Twisters

Tale Twisters of cardsare made betweenthe pack and shown. Severaiinterchanges iace down cards and the ones held by the performer bui this always results in the performer srill holdinS four red cards The natural assumptionon ihe audienc€'spart is thal the face down cardson tne lablemusl be all red ones,and thereloreit is not surprisingtha! changrng cardshasno effecton the colourof lhe onesheldby the performer'Tllev havea litllemorelo ponderon whenrhefacedowngrouparelurnedIace up, for they are all black cards Working Dehils Run throughthe packand removethl€e cards,two ofwhich areblack' ttri itrira onJ stroulaue a red seven.The three cardsare placedn€atlv souared,in a facedown heapon the table with the r€d sevenat the iop Tire spectatorsmust not know exactlyhow manycardsyou haveplaced on the table, nor what thesecardsare, Now removefive mole cardsfrom the pack whoseorder readingfrom the face must be, red eight spot, red spot' black card' black card' red must not know exactlyhow many cardsyou have sDot.The sDectators yet have not s€€ntheir faces Placeihe main pack aside rlmoved and as and hold the cards vou hav€ just removed face down in a squared condition. inreresling Turn the Say "l sould lile lo \ho* you 5omelhinS pack;rofcardsfaceup andChos(CounrthemLoshowIhema' tour red cards, the last card goes on the face. Use ihe samecorner coverrng iectrniqueauring ttte iount at all stagesin this trick as has alreadybeen in "A Swirchin Time . exDlained iurn thepacketfacedownandholdil in thelefthand Removethelop cardand slbe it carefullybelowthe facedown tabledgroup ln its-place takelhe toDcard of the tabledonesand replaceit on iop ofthe cardsvou i"". ai."iv l. v"* rt"td. Turn the packetfaceup and Ghostcount it as four cardsto'showthem all red, the final card goinSon the lace As you do this say "isn't that interesting,eventhough I've changeda card over, they are still all red". iutn tit. p".r.' facedown and removelhe lop lwo card' and.slide or thembelowthe facedowncardson lhe lable Donot alLerlheoroet In rheirplacelakelhe lop lso card.ol the labledonesbul takeIhem oni Uvon.'"nOptu.. rtt.mon top of Ihecardin youl handsso thalIhtir order'i. re.ertd. fake careshefl vou are changingcardsduringthr\ trick rhat you do nol spreadthe tabledgroup too much, for you do nol wantthe audi€nceto know how manycardsarethereuntilthe conciuslon jnterchange of the effect. Always resquarethe ubled cardsafter an them as four Count Jordan your face up and hands Turn the group in you rhis say "isn't that do going As the face. on th'e last caid red cards, 1t2

rrreresting, eventhough I've changedtwo cardsover, th€y ar€ srill all ied". Turn the packet face down and ihumb off the top three cards Lcepingthe last two squaredas one card, Takethe upper threeand push rhembelow the face down oneson the table. Onceyou have goathem l)elowthe tabledones,roughlysquareth€ completegroup.Now take rhe utper threecardsofthe tabledonesoneby on€,and placethemon top of rheapparentsinSlecardin your hand. Theorderofthe threecardsadded Turn the cardsin your handsface up and GhostCount them as four rcd cards.As you count the last two cards,outjog ahemslightly.Repeat lour patter line "isn\ that interesting,eren ihough I'v€ changedthree , ardsover they are still all red". Turn the packetface down and lift up lhe upperfiree cardsat the jog point so that the left little finSercanget a I'reak below them. wlilst the right hand is srill in position, apparently \quaringthe cards,drop one card from the right thumb and retakethe Irlt liide finger break aboveit. Say "it doesn'tseemto matter how many times I changeover cards, rheonesin my hand alwaysremainred". ln a casualillustrationof this ,cmark, removethe top card of the packetin your hand (reallytwo as ,{re, which is easybecauseof the finger break) and slide il b€low the r,rbledcards.Take the top card of the tabledonesin its placeand place rhiscardon top of th€ onesyou are holding.Turn them faceup and do a ,t.nuinecount to show they are all red. Concludeby saying"the reasonI think it,s mostint€resting,is because rhcseare all black". Tum the tabled group face up in time with this

I insl Not€ I)uring all of the interchangesthe left hand fingertipscan assis!the hand in makingthe changes,if the cardsthe left hand is holdingar€ lht ' l.pt fairly deepin the hand. . INSTANT INTERCHANGE'' I llecl

smallpacketofred cardsis handedto a speclatorand rhe performer ,1,rins ^ a group of black ones. The performer showsone of hh black .rrds and lets the spectatorcut it into the centreof hjs red on€s. Ihc performer asks if rhe spectatorwould considerit quite Eood ^ | .k if he could make the black card.,ump back from the specrator's r,,'Lrplo his. Wlen he agrees,the performersays"well in rhar caseit

It3

Ta[e Twiste4 mustb€ a ,erl good trick if I makeour completepacke(schangeplaces". He tums his packeifaceup and il is seento be all red cardsexceptfor the solitaryblackone in th€ centre.r*/henthe spectatorexamineshis' he has the black ones. Working Detrils Removetwelvered fac€dcardsand placethem facedown on thelable. Facedown on top of theseplaceapproximatelytwelveblack cards,the remainderofthe pack beingplac€daside.Pick up th€ group of cardsand turn them faceup. Spreadthemout as iftocheck that you havethe right coloun groupedtogetherand get a left little finger break underthe face card of the black 8roup, and then clos€up the spread. Pushoffthe facered cardsoneby onewith the left thumb and support them with the right hand so that they form a sli8lt spread,but as you spreadthem count lhem silendyunlil you reachtwelve.Do not spread the twelfth card, but take the two cardsas on€ abovethe breakpoint' by inseriingth€ tip ofthe right secondfingerandgrippingthembetweenth* finger and the right thumb. From the audiences'viewpoint you have Dushedoff all the red cardsand areholdingthem in a sliShtspreadin the iight hand. Turn the completefan of red cardsdowD and placethem belowthe face up black cardsin the left hand. and then Spreadout the blackcardsIo \hoq th€mLo the spectalor\ clos; them up again,but get a left litlle fingerbreakunderthe faceblack card. As the right hand is still over ih€ cards, carry out a Half Pass (reverselhesection)wiih all the cardsbelowthe faceone,usrnga Seneral squaringup action as cover for the pass. Hold the packetfaceup in the right hand,the handbeingcurvedabove the packelwitb the fingersat the far short end and th€ thumb at the near one. with the left hund fingers,draw the cardswhich are facedown at the bottom of the packetsliShtlyto the left one by on€,so that they go in a casualspreadonto the fingersof the left hand. Keepthe left thumb againstthe left long sideof the packetso that ihe fingersare ptev€nted from drawingoffmore than on€cardat a time, a firmgrip with the right handon the short endsalsohelpslo controlihe cards.Keeppulling cards out with the lefi thumb until a blackcardshowsup Removeall the lower facedown cardsand placethem in front of a spectator'He will assume lhem to be lhe red cards. You are apparentlylefl with the face up black cards' and the black card at the faceand the joggedbla€koneat the rear,help 10confirm the position.Squareup the packet,turn it facedown and cuaone card flom iop to face. Whilst the riShi hand is still over the packeldrop the lwo ca;ds at the face from th€ right thumb iip and take a left little finger break above ahem. Remove the right hand from the packet fbr a I 14

Tale T wisters Eringthe right hand back lo the packet,approachingit from the rear .[ort end. Push the right first finger tip into the break nexl 10 the left l,rrlefingerand thenmoveth€ righl fingertowardsthe left unril it reaches lll: approximaaecentrepoint of ihe card width, which opensup the r{cak slightly.The right secondfinger will naturallyaho enterthe break rndby grippingthe face1wocardswith thesetwo fingerson th€ backand rhc thumb on the face,you can puli out thesecardssquaredas one and ,[ow the fa€€callingattentionto its nane. lt is thenreplacedfacedowD ,D 1opof your packetand immediatelythumbedoff and held facedow'l i,r rherighthand. Placethe card in the right hand on top of th€ spectator'sgroup of r|parentred cards,and askhim to cut the packetonce,to sendthe card ri, lhe ceotre.Illustratethe cutling aclion by giving your packeta single Usethe patier themeoutlinediD the effect,then turn your packetface and fan it oul, lettingthe spectatordo the samewith bis. The packets 't rt)Pear to have€hangedplaces.

I 15

Card Scri?l ,rhcron the lable, until you are leil with a singlecard in the right hand, \vhichis dropp€don top of all. If you usethis procedureinsleadof the r,! o, do il fairly briskly, to preventsomesharpspectalornotrngthat you riive thirieen cards insleadof r.rtelve,and do not cut filst. Tvrn the I'ncketfaceup and spreadit rapidly betweenthe hands,commentingthal ,1appearslo be fairly well mixed. Look for two cardsnext to eacholher ,)l th€ samecolour, and cut ihe packelbetweenthesetwo cards,so that ,ne endsat rhe top of the packetand the otherat the face.lf you do not ,fe a pair of the samecolour, jt meansthey are alreadyin position,and lou clo not neecllo cut. Hold the pack€tof cardsfacedown in the left hand and sta to deal rhcmone by one in a facedown heapon the table,dealinSratherslowly. lrvile a spectatorto call stopat any poin! in the deal. Whenhe callsstop, \(,u must showhim the faceof the card which occupiesan odd position r()m lhe (op of the packet.This is very easy!o do, if you repeatthe {ords, odd, even,odd, even,asyou deaithe cardsin a heapon the table. whcn he sayssiop, you will aulomalicallyknow whetherahelast card ,lealt was at an odd or evenposilion. lf i! wasodd, short its faceto the .r,ectarors,and then piaceit on top of the cardsremainingjn the left li.rnd,taking a Ieft liltte fingerbreakbelowit asyou do so. If it waseven, .[ow the face of th€ top card of the undealtseciion,and then replaceit ,,rrrop, taking a left lillle finger break belowit. Drop the dealtcardson r,)p of thosein the left hand, and afier a sljght pause,cul the packetat rhc break point and completethe cut. Ilxplain to ihe spectatorsthat you will now demonstratea magical , lrninating procedurethat will find the noted card for you. Point out hrl on no accountaf€ the spectatorslo help you in any way, Placerhe top card under the packetand the next face down on the of under/down,until six cardsare face tble, and continuethis sequence ,],'wn on the table. Pick up thesesix cardswith the right hand and fan !,emouaslightly.Turn ih€ fan face up just long enoughfor the spectar,)r! to seethat all rhe cardsare red, but not long enoughfor them to ,,J!in rhe namesof the cards.Tap the fan squareon the lable top, and r r.D discardthe six cardsface down on top of the main pack As you .rrry oul lheseactionssay, "!he red cardshave beeneliminated.Note I rrt in the exampleI hav€gilen, ihe discardedsix cardsar€red, but they ,'uld equallywell be black, and in this caseyou would say "the black .!,dshavebeeneliminated." Iurn the cardsremainingin the left hand face up and push over the L'.c five cardsone bv one to form a casualfan betweenthe hands.the \rh and seventhcardsbeingsquaredas on€.I will continueihe descrip 1rtrras if th€ eliminaledcardswerered, just amendlhe palterlineslo the ,,lour that showsup rvhenyou do the effecl. Say "I know your card is l,l,rrk, bul I don'l know $hich one it is, let's usethe magicaleliminator

Chapter 4 Card Script

THE MAGICAL ELIMINATOR Eff€cI A card is freelynotedin a smallpacketofcards. The performerstates that he will demonstratea magical eliminating procedurethar will graduallyreducethe packet 1o a singlecard, and lhat ihis wiil be rhe previouslynoted one, w}len the performerdemonsiratesthe procedure,things seemto go completelywrong. However,th€ trick is successfully concludedwirh a surpriseending. Working Run throughthe faceup pack and upjog any six red cards.Strip these out of the pack, turn them face down, and placethem under rhe pack. Repeatthis proc€durewith six black cards. Turn the pack facedown and thumb off thc 1optwelvecards!o show them for a moment, pointing out that you havesix black cardsand six Squareup the tlvelvecardsonto rhe pack for a moment, and in this actionobtaina left little fingerbreakunderthe rop facedown cardof the majn pack. Lift away all the cardsabovethe break with rhe righ! hand and placethe r€mainderof the pack asideon the table. Thumb off ihe six black cards,rum them fac€down and placerhem belowthe red cards.Do the samewiahthe six red cards.Make somesorr of commentas you do this, suchas, "remember,six of eachcolour." Cut the smallpack€tofcards a few timesand thengiveit a pertecrfaro shuffle, followed by one or lwo more cuts. If you do not do a faro shuffleyou €an simply hold the cardsin lhe right hand by the opposire short ends, and th€n puil off pairs of cards from top and face of lhe group wjth the left hand, droppingthe pairs one by one on top of €ach l 16

\quare the cardsand turn th€m facedown. Again do the under/down 1

Ll

Card Scripl procedur€,this time placingthe threeeliminaledcardsfaceup on top of eacholher on the table.Turn lhe cardsr€mainingin ihe lefr hand faceup and spr€adthem ou!, keepinglhecentretwosquaredas one,by meansof the bucklecounl. Take the facecardin the righi hand for a mom€nr,and say "only three10choosefrom, I wonder which one is yours" Replace the right hand card back Delolrthosein the left haod, squarerhe packet and turn it fac€ down. Say you will use the magicaleliminator for the las( rime. pla€e ore card under, and the nexl faceup on the rable,placingthe discardedone on top of th€ other threeface up cards.Placethe next card below rh€ packet,and maftesurethat the packetis perfecdysqua.e-App€arto deal the top card faceup onto the discardpile, but reallydealtwocardsason€ by bucklingthe facecard with the left lilde finger. Ask the speclatorthe nameof th€ card he noted,and whenh€ names it, ac! as if the rick has gone completelywrong. The audiencewill be sureit has. Say, "I did sayir wasa mdgrcdleliminator." Siowlyturn the last card you are holding face up to confirm your staiement. ..THE IMAGE MAKERS'' Effect The performer explainsthat cenain cards in rhe pack are very powerfuland are capableofinfluencing othercardsso rhat rheybecome very similar to themselves. To demonstratethis facehe removeslhe AC and the AS, to act asimagemakers.Anotherpair ofcards are shownand placedbelweenthe imagemakers for a moment, when removedand shown again, they are se€nto be the AH and AD. This procedureis .epeatedwith severalpairs of cards,and the imagemakersare always successfulin changing(hemto the two .ed aces.The effect endsin an unexpecledway when bolh image makers, and cards between!hem, changeto queens,th€ performerremarkingthai howeverinfluentialaces are, ladiesalwayshavethe lasl word. Working The effectrelieson a falsecountwhichchangesthe centretwo cardsof a group of four, for the outer two. The techniqueis a simplecombina tion of the Elmdey and Jordan counts, and whitsr I developedrhis approachindependenrly,Jack Avis had precededthe idea by severai years.Jackcalledhis coun.aheSivaCount, and il waspublishedin issue elevenof the 'Epilogue'magazine. It is the physicalaction of the counts that is identicai, and nol the 8

Card Scriqt one, and t{rfpos€.Jack'susewaslo show five cardsas fottr, concealing to showfour cardsas four, concealingnore. The lechniqueusedis 'nine, Hold iour cardsin lhe left hand, the fingersand thumb holdingthem ,tr their left long side,in the standardElmsleyCount posrtron Pull off.he first card fairlv into the right hand' bv drawingit o{f with rherighl thumb. ,q.s lou appearto take the secondcard, r€placethe right hard card Irlow thosein the lefl. and a1 the sametime, push over the upperlwo iards of its group with the left thumb, and taketheminto the righi hand' As you appearto take the third card replacethe two in the right band hclo\a'tho; in the left, and then push the upperthreecardsoverdightly with the lefl thumb, and take thesethr€ecardsinto the right hand' Placethe singlecard remainingin the left hand on top of thosein the Havingmasteredthe abovecount, we are now r€adyto proceedwith rherouti-ne.Wheneverthe feke count is used,it will be referredto by ihe InilialsS/C (SivaCount). tseforecommencing,secretlyget the tollowing six cards,in order' at rhc rop of the pack: AS, AC, QH, QD, QS, QC, the AS beingthe top Run throughthe faceup pack, and cut the iwo red acesto the top of rhc pack, takingcarenot to dislurb your stackas you do this whln you ,embvethe red-aces,keepthe cardsailtedtowardsyourself,so that the ircctalorswhilstseeingthat you aretransferringtwo cardsto the top, do r()t know the namesof thes€cards.Talk about removingtwo lmportanl , rrds as imagemak€rs. Turn the pack facedown into the left hand' and appearto lift offthe rop two cardswith the right hand, really lifl off four cardsby counlng rhen in a liftinS actionaathe near short end of the pack Turn-thefour ,r,ls iace up o-ntorhe top ot the facedown pack. and lake a lelt liltle ''ngerbr€akbeloqrhem.Pushoverlhe AC \liShdysilh lhe lelt tnumD ,) displaythe two black aces.Uselhe righl hand to take lhe spreaclaces .urf iip itrern face down on top of the pack, bul really Srip all cards ,rhovet}l€ breakand lum them over. Thumb off the top two cardsofthe I'rck and placethem face down on the table for a moment. Fanout the remainderof the pack and havea spectatorselec'any Iwo , rrds, he musl not selectfrom the top six cardsof the pack Plac€the ,ernainderof ihe pack face down on the table, and take the two chosen ,rrds from the spectatorand displayihem fac€ up for a mom€nt say r[ar you will demonstratethe power of the imagemakers l rn rhe chosencardsfacedo\ n and slidelhem belweenlhe lwo lace ,I,)wnaceson the table. Pick up the four card group and hold it face ,]t)sn in the left hand readyfor lhe S/C. Rub ihe right hand forefinger-in i rlockwisecircle on lhe back of the top card, -qaying,"a clocklvise I 19

Card Script aclronts nfcessary to tran\lerrhe lnaSe. Now do rhe s c. ( onlinue, (ayrng. thf acfionmu( alsobeapptiedlo rheimagematerar rhi5end... uo Ine ctoct\\tseacrjonon the bacl of the ne\ rop card. Fdn our the cardslacedown in the left hand. Wirhdrawrhec€ntretwo cardswith the right hand and turn them faceup, to showrheyhavebecomelhe AH and AD SI,are rharthe imagecanbe removed b) a rererse clockwtse movemenl. ^ Keprace the red ace)betweenrhe rwo lace down cardr. and repearLhe sequence explainedin the previousparagraph,bu! moveyour right fore, r,ngerm a counterclockwiseaciionon the backofeach imageriaker, to follow the patterline alreadymentioned.Whenthe four cardi are fanned our and the centretwo removedand shown,they will be seenio be the lwo lhal.w_ere originally\elecredfrom rhe pdck_the imageon rhemha, vanrsneo. Ptacelheserwocardslacedownon therable,and picl up the marnpacl and dropir on top of Lhem.so thal theyendup ar'rhefale of rhepacl, rhepackbeingtacedo$n on rherable.fhe im;ge malers are still beingheld facedown in a slight spread. Tde rhf lop t$,ocardsof r hepackandplacerhembet$eenr he image makers. sayrng."ter\ try wirhanorhfrrwo.ards...Repear theclockwiie rubbingactiononrhe backsof the imagemakerscombinedwith the S/C, and thenremove_the cenlretwo cards,and showthat they havetakeno; the,appearance of rwo red aces.As )ou are,ho* ingthes', tu.n rheimage makerctace up atro. and say. ..evenrhoughlhey influenceorhercard-., merr own appearanceremainsunchansed', . Turn the imagemakersfacedown a;d replacethe red acesfacedown betweenthem. Do the reverseclockwiseaction and S/C, and ften remover,hecenrrepair of cardsand drop them tacea"*n on rtreraUte, rrnattyptacrngthe main packon rop ol Lhem.Do nor showrheirface) lhrsnme.just rall,abourrheacriononceagajnremotlngrhe image. Takethe top t\ o cardsof thepackandplaceLhember$een the imase makers.Do lhe S/C and rheclockl^iserubbingacrion.and then remoie lhecentrepairofcalds^and rurnlhemfaceup, ro \ho\rtheyareagatnrhe rm, aces. turn them lace down and replacerhen berueenrhi image you will removelhe imageoncr more. and do the rever.erubbinS ^^-Sayon tne bacl of eachimagemal,eronce acl,on more. bur whenyou couni Ihe card( lo bring the lowerimagemakerto lhe rop, do a com;lerely/ai. countrn placeof rhe S'C. Remorerhe cenrrepair ot cardsand piace them on the rable, finally dropping the main pack on rop of them. Takelhe lop rr{ocardsof rhepacl and placelhemberween rheimage ma(ers.t o lhe clock\rise rubbingacrioncombinedwhh a7a; counr. KemoveIne cen(relqo cardsand lurn rhemlaceup. Appear\urprised that the) are queens.dnd thenrurn lhe imagemakersfaceup ro sho\r lnar rhe),airo are queens.remarl,ing..oh $ell. ladiesal$ay, ha\e rhe

120

Cad ScriPl ,'PUSHOVER'' l:flfcl Four cardsare removedfrom a shuffl€dpack and magicallyturn face ,rD-in addition they changeto four aces.This effect is basedupon one ,,l PeterKane'scleverideas(he hasmany others)that was publishedin

Working Secretlystart with the four acesin positions6, 7, 8 and 9 from ihe top ,'f the pack, with the card in position 10, face up. Hold the pack tacedown in the left hand and riffle up the nearshort ( d with the righ! thumb until you canseethe back ofth€ reversedcard, r,ll rhe pack up slightlyso that you can see(he near short end, and as !)on as you seethe backof (hecard, take a left little finger br€akbelow Thumb over the top five cardsof the pack and flip them faceup onto r[e top of the pack. Spreadout the face up cardsby pushingthem over rviththe left thumb, until they ar€displayedin a faceup fan, still resting Ltrrtop of the pack. In the spreadingaction, injog the lasl face up card \lrghrly. Point out that thereare four availablespacesbetweenthe five irds, onespacebetweeneachpair ofcards. Closeup the spreadontothe rop of the pack until they arecasuallysquared,and then take hold of all frrds abovethe lefi little finger breakwith the right hand and flip them ,,vcr so that they fall facedown on top of the pack. lmmediatelypress (lo$n with the righl thumb on the injoggedcard, and lift the five cards .rhoveit away from the pack in a squaredcondiiion, the right hand n)ldingthem from above,thumb on the near short end and fingerson he far on€. Hand the remaind€rof the pack to a spectaiorand request lim to shuffleit. Whilst he is doing this, repositionthe five cardsin the ight hand, so that they are in your normal right hand grip for a weave Jruffle. Take carethal only lhe back of the top card is viewedby the .,udiencewhen you do this. Requestthe assisiingspectatorio reiurn the main pack face up onto |,ur lef! hand and thenwilh the aid of lhe lefl thumb, lift it up slightly, ,()that it is positionedin the hand readyfor a weaveshuffle. weavethe .,,rallpacketin the left hand into the main pack in the right, and push rr,crwo sectionsrogetheruntil rhesmallpacke!extendsfor about half its l.ngrh from the largerone. You canweavein at any point you wish,and rhc audiences'attentionis drawn !o the fact that you are filling in the \oacesbelweenthe five cardswilh cardsfrom the shuffled main pack. r)nce the cards are meshedfor half lheir length, pull the right hand tjxcketupwardsand awayfrom rhe pack. which will automaticallydraw 121

Card ScriPt out of the main pack the four meshedcards Plac€the remainderof rhe main Dacka.ideon lhe Lablewith lhe lelt hand PlaierhecardsfromtheriShlhandintolhe left.5lillin lheiroutjogged nare.and holdingthemin thelefi handso rhal lhe lefl thumbi\ on one rongeJgeuna tt.'linget\ on lhe opposheone, facesof the cardstowardr the-Dal; of the hana, and the cards themselvesbeinSpositionedwell awayfrom the paln. In addition,they mustbe placedin tbe handso that the iour cardsixtractedfrom the mdn pack are nearestto you Rememat all times' berto keeD(hebaclsof lhe card5toqardsIhe audience and )oul the card\' \hort end of Lhe/d. on Place\;ur left lorefrnger q unlil the cards on push the thumb ith and ,"dne. tft. o" .i"fr, r-fru:tnu (heright hand so grip of rh-ev ororrudefor abourll . Now changelhe on thumb the tiShtly, four cards itrai ii is actuattvtrotatg aheinjogged the faceof the;roup and fingerson the back' but keepthe grip at the nearshort end,io rhit lhe fingersdo not concealtoo much ofthe backs' R€movethe left forefinger from the fal short end' and then, fai'ly rapid[, pusl rhefour cardibeingheldb) therighthandsqudre$ilh the five cardi rheyaremeshedinto fhis will cau(ea groupof faceup ace'totft" oule. endof the five cardpacket'theseaceswjll of .o-"lnio ui"* "t tp, ote behindthe oth€rin a continuingaction,aftera tq."tta U. iori"" slicht Daus;to let ihe face up appearanceregisterwith the speclalors' mJve ihe rieht hand to the upper short €dgeof the face up aces'ancl olaceaheth;mb on the fa€eoflhe acesand the secondfingeron the face iard of the five card group Move the secondfinger upwards'drawing the card it is restingon with it, until it moreor lesslinesup with the ace group.Notr grip lhe upperfour caldslaidy lightlyand moveLh€masa [toci to rtre.'igt'r,.o rttit Lhrypitot on the lefl 'econd fingerand slart lo directionuntil they complelelyleavethe fiv€ card .."oiue in a cl"ocknise the acesin a fan with lhe righl handanddrop them srouo.No$ sDread iill iace up on rtrerable.Spreadlhe five cardsremainingin the leli hand without drawingtoo muchatlentionto them, and thendrop them on tne

ting€rIsa 'i1,i,11'r1", ,n. 0,"*t", of th€cardup withtherightseconcl

concealedaction, as the backsof lhe five card group are lowards tne audience. ..XINCS GO FORTH'' Effect Four kings are removedfrom the pack and placedon the table The -of remainder the pack is cut into lwo face down heaps, one for a each'ele'l .oectator andonetor lhenerlormer'Perfolmerandspeclator lhelrng'drevanrchedandls'J heip a.;rd andrerurnir to theopposite 122

Cad fttipt onlv ar e ' JD D eari n each heap. wilh a cat d caughl- ber seenlhem Not

the .",J1. uur rhekrns5havealsodta$n Ihembackinto ,i..il** ','.iJ ,)fiSinalheapsthai they camefromlVorking as you com€to Run through the face up pack and removethe kings vr'hilsl essentialjt pack nol face down belo* the ,r'"arein "ir.iti.".r' t.oi* .ti'* rott'"rrrcr'ir thekinss il,i"l

ov€r 'iiir'iii 'n.iJ iurn thepa:kfac€downandspread ")ilL- .iifiiii,;q;;;c; .,i"iilirl'i getalett thespread'

,r."i"" t" ai.pr;vthefaceupkingsln closing Brins ""ia. ,"ir" ri'"".. u.*i i!r"; rhefouriacedowncardsbelo\rh€kinss ar rhumb and end short rhe rar i'.;;;i;"il;;i;; ;;.r' ii"e.." " plus more one lhe break' above iuds eighL i'. r--;ri righrrhumb withLhe downslightlv uvreaching *'r,i.irl' "ii 'ie ,'i,"!"i.".. riShlfinsers tL The above rhe€ighl "i,";".a a;d card *1"-ntf,f ii."f u.t*..n 'his

"i+:*T+iix".'*'trili{i:i-r:mm'iiiii

cardundercoveror Ihethirdlins sorhat ;'';;;;i'";; ;;i;-"Aih; sinsle the r er]asuo in rhesecondtrom rop positionof lhemain pacl . Place as one' lrve caro5 pacl rhe {really r,.t ling in rherighrhandon topof lL,. ouit it ft.li"o.pletely squarewith no breaks'and the actions

,]".".ii.Jii"'iln"iiia-iil ''llit"

four thatvoudidremove io"nrmation

and ,rt.,inrt,handoverlhepacl' iingerrar thefar shortend purrins

wirhrherhumb' iiri if r""' cards ';;;""i ;;';;;;;;';.J fromrhepackand awav *'9' ,rtl .Jt""', uv."".lilii .';-"'p place l normally face up all '1.,..,i.t"* onltt. table.stillapparenrly

il easvto pic}rIhemup ,,]rnuliolr trt..tp,v.aro casi.whrchmakes of the "il.l ,o tr."* ,'i,tr,hetefrtille finge'undetrhetoplwocards poinr cenrre " ii"e'' '"' t ,: i,"^#;r'".;i;;;i;p".r'" 'ppropriate 't'' rhe pickjns-up Ihumb the hand n"ri withthe;i8hr i i"ii"g ir'. Retake half' other below fie "ip.i it placing and r"#.tott cometogether'cul orr "nd, nnee'ias ttretratves ',i""1-"iitri ;,;;;k;;ffi;il;tiie of the'p€craror' rirr in fronr rhem aJ o-race ,, ;;;;. ;;;;;hJ;.;i so lhalvoucanseethe slighrll ,' . r,"iii.."ini.g;" vourhandupwards llom faceIo rop vour rhe cards ,..,,, *iiii ,rf.iiLti rhumb,;iffle nearthetopo[.the ""a. ena near inirre i ,,,Jf.n" i,"'iii";'i 'nenvouser card.SroprtrninsarthApoint' .,'li. *iri.i. tr* u""i ot a reversed '",' ;;*;;iih hfr up onecard'andtare€ and rishrrhudb ',"i;;*-h As vou carrvout this ihis card 'ha ,,'""i-*,tr' i#-r.ft-rrtii" j;i.'. fi;er b€low lheposrrionarrhis hall rhar'\,about i rh-inl ;.it";, ;, " 'i "B rharihe ietrlirrlefingeris holdinga bleal undellhetop loul '"e.-is 123

Cad Scriqt

Card Scri4t cards.Cive the half pack a singlecut, but reallyjust cu1the cardsabove the break 1I) the {ace, keepingfte right fingersover lhe outer end to retainanv breaksafter the cut. but concealthe lack of thickness,,o ',o/hands,let lwo cardsdrop from the as you are squaringthe pack in th€ face,and tak€ a lefl litile fing€rbreakabovelhesetwo cards-Remolethe righr hand from ih€ cards. Turn the top card of the tabledhalf faceup wirh the righl hand, and draw altentionto its name.Say, "lhis is your card, from your packet." Tum the card face down and insertit into the cardsyou are holding in the left hand, pushingil in at the n€ar short end,and inserlingit at the break point. As you push the card square,g€t a left little finger br€ak aboveit, so thai you havea break abovethe lace threecards.Bring the right hand over the cards,againconcealinglhe far short end with the fingers, and cut the pack at fie break poin!, completinglhe cut and taking a new br€akwith the left little finger,underthe top threecardsof me groupTriple lift the lop card and leav€ii face up on top for a moment, keepingthe little finger break below it. Call attentionlo the card, and say, "this is my card." Turn the threecardsfacedown as one, onto the pack,and then lifl off two as onewirh the righl hand, ard placethem on top ofihe spectator'shalfpack. Cive thesecardsa singlecut and requen the spectatorao placehis forefingeron top of thesecardsfor a momenl. As he is doinS this, bring thc righr hand back to the cards in your Ieft hand, and palm the top one into the right hand. Reachdown with lhe righi hand and pick np the faceup kinSgroup, taking it by the opposite shorl ends,the hand beingcurvedover lhe faceof$e cards.This pick up is very easy,if you haveprevjouslyrestedthe kinSsacrossthe card case. Place the face up kings in the left hand, ready for the Findley Teni Vanjsh,the cardsbeingheld a lirtle abovelhe pack by the left thumb lip on the upper long side. Talk about the kings finding the two cards,and appear10 lifl lhem awaywith the right hand, but really replacethe palmedcard onto them and move lhe left thumb outwardsslighdy so that the five cards fall down onto the main group below them. Move lhe right haDd away, keepingit curved slighlly, as if ir w€re holding lhe kings. when it is positionedover the spectalor'shalf, slowly closethe right hand in a rubbingaction, and ihen open it to show the kingshav€vanished.Ask the speciatorto removehis fingeratd spreadout his halfpack facedown on fie table. Whilst he is doing this, give your half a singlecu!. Whenrhe spectatorhascompietedhis usk, lwo kinSswill showup in lhe cenireof his spread,with a face down card caught belweenthem. Now spreadyour half 1l)revealth€ samecondition.Say, "not only have the kingsfound the cards,but theyhavekeptthingstidy by drawingyoul card back to your half, and mine back lo mine" Turn thc face down cardsbetweenthe kingsovcr, one by one, as you mak€ thjs rcmark. t24

..THtr AMBITIOUS GHOST'' Elfect thal wasinspiredby Al This is a smallpackelambitiouscard sequence Review'lt is g"-k;i;" i. 2.3,4 version,published in the'Pallbearets with th€ conlinuing ; ide;l as an interlud€before driitty, "".i""rv "na main ef{ecl usingthe four cards \! orking Removelhe A, 2 3 and 4 of spadesfrom the pack' and arrangein irum€ricorder, r€adingfrom lhe face Fan them out and displaythem to to their order. Closeup lhe spreadand irr"_"rai**, if-*itg "tlention rurn it facedo*n. Sai, "lel's reversethe order ofthe four cards,so that in o.a"t from the top." Ghosl Count (Elmsley)the cards' 't,"y.rn -i"l? the lasrone on top 'r,lacins ir'. ,"p *t,l and placeit on rhe borlomot Ihe pacLer'lap-the *ti litg... of;he righ! hand, and tbenturn the iop cardface ..t.f*iirr up to sbowthe aceis backon top. Removetheaceand placeit faceup on rhetable. iufe it. top cura oftle threeremainingand placeit on tbe bollom of tn pa.ter, saylng lhe lwo no$ 8oe\ underneath l urn lhe lop card ..e up afleriapprngrhepalkel and \ho$ tharthe lwo i' bacl on lop' l'lace 't'i"..the two on the table ofthe two remainingbelowth€ singlecard, sayin€' ttr" top "".a rhethrei goe,underneath l urn lhe lop cardfaceup lo'hou"the 'oo andlhendropiLon thetable.Sho* Lhalonl) theIoul ,reeha' rerurned, .',,rr."tnalnsin v"u. trand.Meniion that ihe four spot hasdonenothing ,, far, so you will give it a hard test. Pick up the threecardsthal were ,trscariedbnto the iable, and assemblethem inio a face down pacKel' ''..r(ethe four lop o[ lhis packel and then 'pot, also lacedown on a5 folloqs: thelbul'''counl Ihe count llme Counrrhecard.,but "ror the remainingthre€ count abo\'e it," cards lhree ,)lf one card, "and ,,tar. itip ttt. top cu.a taceup to showthe four spol ha5dsento thetop '( HOOSY CHOICE" I lfrcl A spectatormanagesto sort out a quanlity ofcards into fie four suits' l',ush he onlv .ee' rhe backs lhis i\ a vatialionon Karl Fulve'' ' | \(n"I4one]P;L'posirionand Bro Hamman\ "Suit Your\elf ' 125

I

' lil

Card S(riql Working Run throughthe pack, and throw out in a faceup heapon the labl€, five clubs,five diamonds,five spadesand five hearts,the hearlsbeing the facefive cardsof the group. Discardthe remainderof the pack. Pick uo lhe t$entycardgroupand holdil faceup in therrghlhandin rheBiddI srip, thehandbeingcurvedaboverhecards Drawollthefirn intorheleflhand,andasyoupullth€lhitdoneoffwilh lwoheartssinSl) theriShlhand place Ihe tir.l lwo cdrdsbackundernealh rhumb, rhelefL cards.Continuedrawing off cards fairly wirh the left thumb until you come to the club seclion.Here the first four clubs are pulled off nor_ mally. and the final one(reallythreecardsas one)placedon the faceof rhecardsin the lefl hand.From lhe audience'sviewpointyou havedrawn atrention to the faci that you have five cards of each suit grouped toselher. iurn the cardsface down and thumb off the first five cards' placinc them at pos. A. As you placethem down with the right hand' turn the roDone raceup. and placeil in front of the four lacedowncard" Ihumb oti Lhrnexrfile card\and placelhem al pos.B againlurninglhe lop one faceup, and placingit in front of the packet.Repeatwith the nexl five cardsand placeat pos C. You now havefiv€ facedown cardsleft. Thumb off the iop four and placethem at pos. D, and plac€the final card faceup in front ofthem. Rememberthat you thumb offcards at all rimes,and do nol allertheirorder. Picl uo rhe tour cardsbenealhLhelace up hear!and apparentlymix them up; but keep track of the original top two cards. Say' "if I mix ftey areall dese. it is still very easyfor me lo extracttwo heartsbecause flash their lwo cards, facesto top fie samesuil." Pick out the original on the face up hean face down, drop fiem hearts and show they are mixing lhe remaining for by it harder will make /or Say, "l inalicator. rwo heartswith two ofthe spades" Takethe top two cardsfrom the face down four at pos. B, and mix them with the two alreadyin your hand. to s€lectanytwo ofthese,asyou fan themout for him, Invite a sDectator fac€ down on the spadeindicaior. Drop the his selections and drop your handawayfrom thesuitgroups,at pos.E to in two cards remaining form a new group Prckuo Ihe loDlwo cardsttom pos.C andmix Ihemsirh lhe remain with tso ol ine rwocardsat pot. g Say I qill mLxlwo ol lhediamonds thi spades."Invite a speclalorto selec!any two cardsfrom thesefour. nron the two he selectsface down on the fac€ up diamond indicator' ruo on top ol heapE Dseird the remaining cards from pos. D, and mix them with th€ two top two the Take choselhet$o he Ihinksarethe cardsaI po\. ( , I el a \pectalor remaining clubs. and drop hit selection.,still face dosr. on the face up chrb indicaror.Discaldlhe remaininglwo card\ on lop of heap E Pick up the two facedown cardsremainingat pos. D, and usethemto 126

Card Scriqt \coopup theheapofcardsat pos E,sothalthevgotothebottomofthis trcas.As you do this, say, "if you were not successfulin finding the .orrecr suits. thesewill be in an awful mess" Drop the lop two tace (lownon the indicaloral pos. D, the nexl iwo at pos C, lhe nexl al pos. ll, and the final pair at pos. A You now haveyour face down cardson cachface up indicator. Let a spectatorturn the cardson eachindicatorfaceup for the climax. "SURPRISE SURPRISf,'' lllfect !'ive cards ate fre€lv selectedbv a spectatorand isola!€d.A iurther .ard is selectedand initialledby a secondspeclator.Whenthe firsl five .rrds are examined,four of them are found to be aces-lhe fifth on€ is lound !o be |he inilialled selection The lrick was inspired by Alex lrlmsley's "B€lweenYour Pdms." $orking Secretlyget the four a.es to the top of the pack. Hold the pack iace ,lown in ihe lefl hand. and cul about + oI the pack from face ro rop, rrking a left little finger break belweenthe sectionsas they squareup lurn the pack fac€ up, and Half Passthe lower sectionat the break I'oint. retakingthe left little fingerbreakabovethe now facedown lower (The break was of cou.semaintainedwhen you turned the pack face Bringth€ righl hand over the pack lo cul off a sectionfrom the face. rl,umbat the near short end, and fingersat the far one. Drop five cards 1'om tbe bottom of lhe upper secrionof the pack al the break point by clcasingthem from the righl thumb, and retake the left litrle finger l,rcakabovethesefive cards.Th€ ri8h1lhumb no\r movesupwardsunlil Lrreachesthe approximatecentrepoint of the compi€tepack. and then , ursoffthe facChalfandspreadsil facedown on the table Aspectatoris ,rvited to push five cardsour of this spread.Gatherup th€ remainderof rhespread,and placethem faceup a8a;non the remainderof the faceup in the left hand. 'rtck 'lransfer |he face up pack to the riSht hand for a moment,lhe hand .!ting it from abovein a Biddl€typegrip, and th€ lhumb takingoverthe I'rcak from the left litlte finger- Pick up the five face down cardsliom hc table wirh the lefr hand. and slip them still tace down' beneaththe irccup pack. Retakethe faceup pack inlo the lell hand' takingoverthe l,r.rk again with the little finger. Take care that you do not flash the r.ructof the face down cards,and make sur€that tbe audierceunder' rrnds clearly that lhesefive cardsare face down al the tol/om of ihe 121

I Card ScriPI

Card Scriql

Neededare two packsof 52 cards,one with blue backs,and the other red. Arrange one pack so thal readingfrom lhe face vou have 24 'ed backed carAs.Each 24 card g/'orp mus! consisi of the same cards from eachpack, althoughth€y do not need to be in the sameorder as each

other. Arrangethe secondpacksolhat r€adingfrom the faceyou have24 btueb.ck€d aards,four red backedcardsand 24red backedcards Again cach24cardseclionmustconiainlhe samecards.Placetbe packsin their fasesand you are all set. Removeeach pack from its caseand give each pack a shuffle thal .xhibils the back colourswell, but doesnot disturb the positionof the roD and face24 cards.I usea simple overhandshuffle, runnirg small scitionsof cards from ahetop, and throwing them back on lop You rnu$ not exposeany of the ba€ksof the face 24 cards. Placeoneof the packsin the left hand and quickly count off ?6 cards lrom the toD of th€ face down pack Count out loud so that the \peciatorsu;derstandtbat you are countingoff half tI€ pack-Secretly' ,:ount27 cards,by taking two as on€ on your first count This is quite casvif vou take a left little finger break underahetop two calds' befole uou stait counting.Hand the countedcardsio speclatorA and request him to Dlacethem in his pocket. Pla€etbe remainderof the pack, care' lullv souared.face down on the table in froni of speclatorA. nepeil the proceduredescribedin the previousparaSraphwith the .ccondpack, and spectatorB. Pick up th€ cardsin front of spectatorA, and placethem face up in of the right hand, vo r left hand. SDreadthem out wiih the assislance faceof the lower_ noi expose the one Do select io mentally rnd askhim rnostcard whilst he makeshis choice. KeeDthe cardssquarein the left hand after spectatorA bas noted a card, ind pick up lhe half pack in front of spectatorB, placingthem in rhe lefr htnd a iittle aboveand jogged forward, of the cards already rhere.and holding fiem near th€ left fingertips.They are also tace up l'an them out with |he help of fte right hand, and requesispeculor B 10 ,rentallymakea not€of a card in this half. Again' do not let him seelhe laceof the lowermostcard. After he has made his choice,clos€up the and ger a feff little finger brcak above the lowemosl card of this 'pread, ,cction.Also, as you closelhe spread,move this half pack inwardsaod ,lownwards,so that ir more or lesslinesup with th€ other half pack. to removethe half Al this stagein the irick, requ€slthe two spectators Drcksfrom their oocketsand hold them facedown in their hands Under rltcmisdirectionthat this actiongives,turn the cardsyou arehoidinSface ,lown, doing a Turnover Pass at the break point, and immediately ,Ineadingout the facedowncards,unlil you reachthe colourbreakponi rhece;tre ofthespread.Remov€the uppersectionand placei{ in front ,'l spectatorA, and placeth€ lower one in front of spectatorB, Make some magicalSestu.efrom the tabled half pack in fronl of .r,cctaiorA. towaralsih€ hallthathe is holding,and ih€n placethe tabled l;ili faceup in the left hand. Deal the cardsfrom ihis half faceup onlo 1l,r|able,counlingthem out loud as you do so Ask spectatorAto slop lou whenhe seeshis card. You will only reach25 in your count' and he \,ll nor seehis card. Havehim checkthrough lhe half he is holding' and

128

'179

Riffle the outer l€ft cornerof the pack with the lefi thumb, inviting a spectarorto call slop at somepoinl. Reallycarry out lhe slandardRiffle Forc€,and cut at the break point, Invite the spectatorlo rememberlhe facecardoflhe lowersection,and ifconvenient,havehiminilial lhe face of this card, as vou extendlhe half pack lowardshim R€Dlacethe right hand sectionon top of the left hand one' and immediatetyllalf Passthe lowerseclionofthe pack, and then spreadthe fac€uD Daakbetweenlhe hands,until you cometo the five facedown cardsit ihe bottom. Placethe main pack aside,and just retain the five Hold the facedown caldsin th€ lefi hand, readyfor a minor variauon on the JordanCount. Pull the first oneoffwith the right thumb, pull the next one off with the righ! thumb, pull the n€xt one off, put all in the risht hand back belowthetwo cardsremainingin the left hand, and then oish ofl rheunperfour cardswilh lhe lefLthumbrnd tdkerhemin the ;iphrhand.ol;celhe final cardon lop ot the lour in the Irghrhand A' lheselivr cards$ere freel)selecled vJu do thi'. ray, remember ' FanourLhefl\ecdrd\tacedown.Turnlheloponeraceupandteplace it in the sameposition.Say "how slrange,it's an ace " Turn lhe bottom one face up and replaceit in the sameposilion, saying' "how slrange. anotherac;". Turn the secondfrom top overand replac€it in lhe same position, saying, "how strange,anotherace". Turn the secondfrom bortom faceup and replaceii in the sameposilion'saying'"how slranSe' a fourth ace", You now havea faceup fan ofaceswith a facedowncard in the centreof them. Say, "the skangestthing of all is this centrecard (laDlhe back of i0 because thal's the onethat wassigned."Turn the lan as ovir to show the card, voLrconcludethe senlence. ..COLOUR ME JORDAN'' Off€cl Two mentally selectedcards vanish and appear in each of lwo sDectarofspockets. This trick is not mine, but a classicof charle! irdan, ail I havedone is.o add back coloursto the effect. Wo.king

Card Script he will find it lhere.Repeatthis procedurervith the otheriabledhalf and spectatorB. ..CREEN TURTLE'' Effect and replacedliom The A.S. is placedon ihe table, and a card selected the remainderof the pack. The acefirsl of all drawsthe chosencard lo of the chosen the face of the pack, then itself |akeson the appearance card, and finally vanishes,to reappearfaceup in the centreof the pack, with the other threeaces. Working Arrangethe pack as follows, readingfrom the facelx card, AH, AC, AD, rcveBed9D, aD, rcmainderof pack, with the AS al aboutthe c€ntre of this seclion. Fan rhrouahthe faceup pack, and throw ihe AS onio the table. Push the facedozenor so cardsoveras a block so that you do no! exposeyour stack.Turn the pack backstowardsth€ audienc€andSiveii an overhand shuffle,pulling the top and botlom cardsoff logetherfirst, and throwing the final s€ctionof th€ shuffle back on the face. This bringsyour stack back io the face, rr,firr the original face€ard. Fan the pack facedown for one to be chosen,As soon as a spectalor hastakena card, closeup the cardsinto th€ lefahaod,and get a l€falitlle finger breakunder the top card. Take back the chosencard and placeil on top of ihe pack. Give the completepack a few cuts(doubleundercut iechnique)so ihat the chosencard endsup secondfrom the face Turn the pack faceup in the left hand, and gel a little finger br€ak underthe facecard of the pack, Pick up ihe A.S. with the righ! hand and talk aboul ils magn€oc powers-Placethe ace/ace down on the face of the pack, and rub the back of the acewith the fingersof lhe right hand, explainingthat this generates the magnetism.Now movethe right hand to the nearshort end of the pack, and grip the two cards abovethe left little finger breal tightly together,and draw them towards you for abou! l]". This will exposeahefaceofthe chosencard, apparentlybelow|he facedown ace Keepyour thumb on lhe nearshort end of lhe injoSgedcardG)and move lhe righl hand fingersupwards,so that they restpartly on lhe backofthe ace,and partly on the faceof ihe chosencard. Now movethe right hand outwards,so that the facedown acesquaresup with the main pack, and ihe chosencard ouljogsat the far short end. Removelhe ouljoggedcard 130

Cad ScriPt $ith the right hand and plac€it on the lable, and then removethe ace' urn rt faceup and placert alsoon the lable Iurn rhemiin pail' tocedoqn rn rheletrhandand'a) vottsill Iepeal rhe aemon.tration. wlilsl the right hand is still ov€r the pack' riffle uDwardsfrom the facewith the thumb, until you seethe reversedcard (liv€ from the face,so you can couni rather than look if you wish) and iake a left little finger break abovethis card Pick up the chosencarcl sirh the riehl hand, and after showingit, turn il fac€down' and push it ,nro ttre pict at ttt. nearshor! end, reallyinsertingit at the breatpoint' (annolseeexaclly$hereil it being \nele rheDact5lrIhal theaudience abour+" jogg€doul al the nrirted.q. you pu.h il inlo lhe pack.leave ncarshon eni. furn the pack faceup into the left hand, and beforeyou rigtrrtranO,lifiup on thejoggedcardwith therightihumb' so '.rno'eitre rhat the left fitlle finger can take up a break belowthis card' tici uD the A.S. from lhe tableand placeii faceup on lhe faceof th€ n,it tft. face of ih€ acewith the righi fingers, and then slide it -"t. slightlyso thal the faceof lhe card belo* i! is exposedAppear iowards ri"r ittit i' no' the cho\encard. and repeatlhe squaringof lhe ',roiir.a pack,rubbjngandslidingdowna fewtimes bulstrllwilhout .h wilh I he e Al a poini when the ace is in an iniogged position' push t! 'uccess. uDwardsio sqiare with the pack, but placethe righ! fingerson the face outjoggedas ihe acesquaresup' oi lhe card belowit, so that it becomes pack with the right hand, and pushit lhe out of card outjogged l'ull th€ hack into t;e;ack at approximatelythe centre As vou do this' say' 'leLe set rid ol thiscard,perhaps rl\ an unlucly one (;o ; rub the faceof lhe A S. a8ain.andlhensa) "oh I Inow qhat-' the aceshouldte facedown." Turn all the cardsabovethe little '"rons. 'r.rceibreal overonlo rhepackasonecald Rubthebackoftheaceand lhal il.ctill andappear'urprrsed i,.t1ir Uu.t ro e.po,ern.;ard b€nealh. of times a couple rubbing the Repeat riusn'l attractedlLe chosencard. faceis ils it so that hold and down card, face remove the and then 'iore, ir pulledtoo hard andgor .,*ards\ou. Sav, 'l \ee $har\ happened. ."'r cari srucl on il' lace lhrowlhecardlouarehold'nSfaceupon rhetable. g;vethe main pack tJnderthe surpriseofihe chosencardsappearance il irn l fac€do\rnonlhe ldble and'a' ' inelecut.Spreadrhepack " Tap here righr lriend\ , .,tti'ru.t royout catd.ir'\ 'tucl "ith rhree $e sentence as complete forefinger vou t',, iace up aces*ittr the righi .RI:IURN OT THf, CANNIBALS''

I I lerl

Iiur jacks are shown,and one by one, six cardsare insertedbetween t3l

I card scnpl havingapparcnlly rhem,dnd complelel)\anish.Ihe lacks lcannibalrl i' lo bringLhemoul in ,r,.rn._ii"*ftit,ecL themealh3' on them "r,"" tpi{e.unniual ptot uetongslo Lin searles'a genliemanwhosecontributions 10 card magichavealwaysbeenvery llne Working Secretl\havethe four ten\ on top ol the nack' rhe jack\ and placinslhem on rhe R;;';;1;;;; ii'. p".*. '."-i"e up in the nghLhand in the arddle pack face Hold lhe r^"".fift. pacL thumbonthenearshorIend the "i.f. over 6*, tr,. tt":Jl.rng iured inlo rheleft handoneb' of l rhree lacks Dra$ r; .i.ii;.".i'.r,it. the on rht face.ot card'in rherishthand -e tv"pij.;,uir,r.iiriihumb lell "iii, i", * a.i" oIf Lhelourrhja(|. repla'elhr Ihreecard(in the retr iinser:' $irh Lhe 'L' bv^pressute ana riehi p;;i;;Lhe ;;;i;;; '; f,i*.r.o\r iacl'into Ihe lefl hdnd At lhe lame rime the i"" tft. jn 'irl" Iheracerack \ ouend$irh rwoiack'onl)

a'";i"e;rr iiiiiii'i"jt sorharrhevale " ;? i;ii;;il.;;Ji'h; lacr"facedownon rhelabre surethevare Mal€ llighrlv table the o' .t..u""i""lt'. n.u. reep' thetop\i\ I hat pacr tarse "ag" a Cl;; 'hurne ;;;i;:i;d,,;;; ';;"ain '"'roi*Lf?'ii'ii. ,* ,nreecard,or rheracedo*n pack.Lhu.re,p,v''g up onrhetabler uInrhepackrace ;;;;ihilin a heap ,h";;;;; pacrrn a Lhe Prdce hand r€rl t"to* vou' ;;;i;;i; ;'ili";i;1,'' to the sothattheourel\hottendrspointins 'l;;i;;i";ilfp"'iit; approximaletwo o'clock Poslrlon'

t;i ;;i;.'i; ;;;;;ks andhord,rhem.rqual:l: wirh lCl' *j"5i.illf: cannital' ii.;".i. I !ild"',il: rhe slide:l: or thejacl's pt"" i' on Lop'h"' "pieienrine ^i*'"uii, ;i,i'" .ol".;;;;r'ffi;;; "n"o 8j\c place.ir or,Lopandsav"$e'lljus( b.i,"''.-a"i ir'.i"J' outand Countqilh thejacl\ (l

irr"t u .o..nt loi rherrmeal Do lhe chost As vou do the ;. ;i ;i;;ing the rastcard counredon top ;il;;;;; and then sav' rour"' one' t*o' three' ;h;;;;;;;i;;;-i"o"d." "lhat's 'i;i.r onegone." on the Lableandplaleir lhe two remaining *ro * in? "op* Slide "trhebortomiackour and place on Lop and on t.p .i ,r'. 1"'.i, 't anotheron( rhar's r4 (ard\ a5 '1' -5a\ins on( ';;F;ii17;;;;,-;;ain t'i iriled cardon top of rhe iack\' and sain cut i;i"*-,r'i -u"iii,.-i" sa1 4) as and cards t5 asain ".'..:i count i"" cho'r ii'i r..rn

:il:tl"ft

il;i;;;;;;!."

to isthestand Norett'atthecountreferred

sametechniqueis usedafter the first and third "na-,fte ".iif-lf"tot". '-i;.; pu'hinso!el 'p'erd Ihemoverrn a fan ;; r;.i:;,.",p.rnd '"tJ ti.pitg the lasttwo squaredasone Displavthe fan for 0,*.-."rat.

Card ScriPt a momenr,saying"hungry little fellows," and then squarethem up/ace ddrn berweenth€ hands,the righl hand being curved over rhem, thumb ar lhe nearshort €nd and fingersat the far one. Gel a breakunderthe lop card wirh rhe righaahumbtip. A1 this slageact as if rhe rrick is over. The following ac(ionis difficslt to describe,but done smoothlyis very deceptive.lt is an unloadingmove for the fout cards below the break, ihesecards at the moment being supportedby the lefr hand. The left hand twisrsin a clockwisedirection,and moves down iowards the face up pack on rhe table, taking the four cards it is holding with it, and Jddingthem to the face of the main pack, as the hand opensand draws lhe pack inwardsand off the iable edge,and then twisis over so that the r)ackis facedown in the hand. In a continuingaction, the top threecards ,,f the pack are rhumbedoff one by one into a face down heap on lhe rable,and the main pack is lhen placedaside, face down on the table. I'racricethis move to ge1it smooth and fairly rapid, and it can be used Jeceptively,evenwhen surrounded. The right hand is lefi holding a singlecard, but the fingershide the rck of thicknessat the far short end. As you carry out the unloadjng \equence,say, "let's seeif they are still hungry." Transferthe card in the right hand 10 the lefi, keepingthe back of rhe fard towardsthe audience.Pick up the top card ofthe thr.e cardson the rable,and placeii on top of the card in the left hand. Slidethe facecard ,,u1,and placeit on top, usingthe sameaction as when sandwichingrhe , rrds at the earlierstageofthe trick. Now count the two cardsas four by rrking the first card fairly, the next unfairly, by loading $e first one r,.rckinlo ihe fingersof aheleft hand as you take the second,the third Lrnfairlya8ain, repeatingthe sametechniqueas used on the secondone, .rnd(h€ final one fairly. Count out loud l, 2, 3, 4 as you take enchc.ud, Ind repearthe line, "anoth€r one eaten." You will find no rroubleat all { h this count if you can alreadydo the standard Chost Count, and .,)unting 2 as 4 looks mu€h the sameas counting 4 as 4. Placeanolher one from the two remaininSon the table on top of the ,.rnnibal group, and again cul on€ card from bottom to top. Chost ( ount the threecardsas four, repealilrgyour patter lines about another I'lacethe final card on top of the cannibal group, and cut one card ,om bottom to top. ChostCountthe four cardsas four to showthe final .,,d has been eaten. You could do a fair count here, bur I think tbe rt)tcaranceis more consistentwilh your pervious actionsil you do the r ,l!)st Count agaln. l.rn out the four cardsfacealowrin ihe right hand, and say, '\he only Llrlfecls of all this eating,is to bring them out in spols." Turn ihe fan ,'cr, and drop ii face up on th€ table.

133

Trigger l:igure2.1(Audience'sview) Ihe right hand hascomeover the pack, thumb reslingon lhe nearshort cdgeand fing€rson the far one.

Chopter5 Trigger

pa55 ,, \ ihakevou r youcanarreadydorlf+ff;:lxr.."rrl"",,'ff'"

*lill'::',:il;'"''; :l"i;l; l"'i""'#,'ii ;:l'i,l'il,iii[":J.Tl'ffi

Figute24

Frgure25 (From the performert viewpoint) 'Ihe lower half of the pack k twisteddownwardsand out to the righ! by loweringrhe Ieft hand fingersslightly, and then pushingon the faceof rhe half pack with lhe left firs! finger until the pack k in |he position ihown by the drawing.The right hand is still in position,concealingtbe lcft hand action.

[itr,if,'rui*l'*[:if#r3ilir'"''J'.il]il,f:#i:*il t"Tnt"ri"l;n, in linewirhtheillustrations *ut o' o"scribed

Figu€ 25

f,i"'r}i;'rnt: rtq*hili#*i+,{txi*i**l*:**ft .2 a Figurc23

l.isure26 (Audience'sview) Ihe left hand thumb movesdownwardsand towardsyour right and al the sametime both handslwisl inwardstowardsthe body slighdyso that ,l,e pacl Irp\ up Io an appro\imare45'anSle. lhe left hand thumb fontinuesto push downwardsso that its half squaresup wi.h the other ,'ne. Watchthe actioncarefullyin a mirror, to makesurethat you do nol llash the face card of the upperhalf as you tilt the pack upwards.

)i Figure26

134

135

T gger

Trigger

vicw) Figure27 (Audience's ils hold on the pack, whilsr the left hand rel€asas righl hand The contirues its twisting action until the pack is vertiaal. Thc right hand tak€shold of it againat the uppershortend.

Figure29 (Audience'sview) conainue the riSht hand action, finally placing the pack facc donn in the left hand as the turning action brings thc pack to a horizontal position.

Figute27 Figuro29

Firurc 2J (Audicne's view) its holdoDlh€ pack.nd thctlShrhandcontinuas Th; kft handral.ases by lhe twistingaction lumin8 its wrist i[wards slightly.

All thc aboveactionsshouldblcndinto onesmoothscqucncc,with no .i€rkiness.It should be carried out rapidly, rerhembcringthe small amountof timc it would take tolairrl lum the packovcr.

',sHowlx)wN" Figure28 Uffect A sp€ctator notes the top and face cards of thc pack ard thc pack ir immediately spread to show that the c6!ds rDted have tumd f4ce up et lhe cenlreof th€ pack. Preprr.liod s€crctly havc two cards face up at the bottom of thc face down pack. Th€ intercsting thing about this trick is tbat the cards that revcrscfor tha .limax of the effect, are really already reversgdbeforr the ldck stans. How els. could tlcy turn face up so quickly? 131

Tfigger

Shuffle th€ pack, retainingand concealinglhe reversedcardsa! the botiom and end with lhe pack face down ill the left hand' Cut the pack once, taking a left lirtle finger break betweenthe two halvesasth; sectionscometogether.As you are complelingthe squaring of the Dackbetweenthe hands,drop onecardfrom the faceofthe upper seclio; to the top of the lower and retak€a break at this poinr' Apparentlytu;n the pack face up, but really carry out Trigger at the break ooint. Hold the squar€dpack faceup in the left hand Reou""ta soectatortoiememberthe facecard ofihe pack' pointinSto it wilh rhe foiefinger of rhe right hand Take the face up pack into the righl hand, fingersat th€ far short end and thumb at the nearone. the hand beingcurvedover the Pack. Draw out the lowermostcard with lhe lefl hand and requesta spectator ao rememberthis catd, Replaceit in the sameposltlon. Tum the Dackfa€edown but really carry out Trigger al the approxr' matecentreDoint.sDleadthe facedown packout lo showthat lhe noted cardshavejumped io the centreand havealso turned face up' YNriltion involving threecrrds Start with two cardsreversedat botiom of face down pack as in the '

Fan Dackfor a card io be taken and r€tained.Closeup the cardsand cut on;e and take a left iittle finger break betweenthe reversedcards, exactlyas before, and then tak€it back face Re;uestthal the card takenis remembered. pack al the nearshort endso ihat downind push it into rhe centreof the cardis partiallyinto the poinl lhe once ir eoesin tractlv at the break tinger' leil litlle bv the released can be rhe break oaik. ' As'ih€ card is souaredwith th€ pack, lift ir slightlyso that a left liltle finger break can ba laken below it. Trisser at the breal point and requesta speclalol lo remembertne face;d. Takethepackinto rherighl hand.finger\al the fat lhorl end and lhumb at the n€arone,the hand beingcurvedover the faceup pack' ADDearto draw oul the lowestcard wilh the fingersof rhe left hand bul reailvout out the secondcard slighalyby usingihe Sideclide Requesta speciaiorto rememberthis card. Push the protruding card squareand then apparenllvturn the pack fac€down, reallycarryingoul the TrigSermoveat the appropnatecenlrc Doint. the facedownpack out to revealthalihe top and botlom cards Soreaal travi turned face uo at ihe centreand caughlthe seleciedone between them.

r38

I ftqqer ..HOP.A.LONG HOFZINSER'' Elfecl Four acesare shown and then a card is selected.The selectedcard .hangesover wilh lhe aceahatmatchesits suit.

Run through the faceup pack and removethe aces,placingthem on rhetable.Closeup the packand hold it squaredin the lefl hand, drawing .rrtentionio the four aceson the table.Drop the lefl handto your sidefor Pick up th€ aceswith th€ righl hand and hold them in a slight spread, rrcesiowardsthe audience,fingerson the facesand thumb on the backs. t heacesshouldbe in a knowr suit order from top to face,in mycasethe ,rder being,heart, spade,diamondand club. Bring(heleft hand up with the main pack,but keepthepacklow in the rrrnd,the pack stili beingfaceup. As lhe hand movesup, placethe aces li om the right hand facedown on top of the faceup pack. If sufficient rrtentionis drawn to the aces,it will not be apparentthat |hey areSoing !'r top of the face up pack. l-ifr up aboul one quarterof the pack with the right thumb at the near l()rl end, pick up a breakal this poinr and carry out Triggerso that the r{rk h apparentlyturned faceup. slowly spreadthe cardsout from the face and requesta spectatorto ,lrrlv any one from the spread,Rememberto spreadthe cardsslowlyso rlrat you do noi reachthe reversedaces.After a card has beentaken, .,tuareup ahepack and hold it in the lefi hand. Note the suit of th€ card llreakthe pack at the n€arshort sidewith the right thumb at the poinl pack. If you "lll:re the lowestacefacesthe low€r quarterof the faceup .limateabout ihree quartersof the pack and lift lhis up with lh€ right of the l,rnnb,you will normallyhit lhe right poini straighlaway,because r".rk which will naturally form at the r€versedcards. If you missthe drop the break and riffle up with the right thumb until ',.,ruralbreak, \,'Lrseea back drop from the thumb and then take a breakwith ihe left l,rl( lingerbelowthefacedownace.Lift up all thecardsabovethe break ",1h rhe right hand and exiendthe left hand with ils cardstowaldsihe .l..raror and requesthim to placehis chosencard facedown on top of I r,1,,\ccrion. Replaceth€ righl hand seclionof the pack on lop of the l€ft squarethe pack. '.,, one and l'ush over the cardsfrom the facc until you comelo a facedown card L,rl rhcnsquarethe cardsagainbut get a left little fingerbreakabovethe 139

t r88er

TriSSer

.,\ you cometo them, and leavingtbem in an outjogBedposition. Hold r[c partiallyspreadpack in the left hand and pull ouathe four kingsone )r onewith rheright hand,makingsurethar you havea king ofrhe same r olour ar eachendof the group. Turn all four facedown and placethem l)elowthe faceup pack. Now pull oui the aceof spad€sand placeit face ,l(rwnbelowthe pa€k. furn the pack face down in the left hand and squareit up wilh the .rssislance of the righl hand. The kjngsand aceare faceup at lhe top of rlre lace down pack. Make surethat you do not €xposethe red backsas \()u squarethe pack and turn it over, 'Ihumb over the aceand r€moveit with the right hand, placingit face ,rt on rhetable. Thumb overthe facedree kingsto showthefacesof the four and then them back on to the pack with the right hand, in this action 'qLrare |eting a left litde finger break under the threekingsthat were spread. \tpear to removelhesquaredup kingswilh the right hand, fingersaithe 1.trshort end and thumb at the nearone, but actuallyonly removeth€ rlrrcecardsabovethe break.As th€ right handmovesawaywith its cards, rhcleft hand doesa wrist turn so that the pack endsfaceup and the king place, the right hand placesits '. eoncealed.As ihis wrist turn iakes ,tuaredkings face up on the table a liule apa( from the ace. With lhe assistance of the right hand, readjustthe pack so that il is r,fld in a naturalpositionfa€eup in the left. During thh action,get a left Llllcfinger break aboveth€ low€rmostcard of the pack (a king). Apparentlyturn the packfacedown bui useTriggerar the breakpoin!. l,rnsferring jusl one card will feel strangeat first, but wirh a litle / ,.rcticeit's not Loodifficult. The pack now appearsto be facedown in 1l,cl€ii hand. Irjck up ihe pile of kings from the lable and place rhem face up l{ r$eenthe fingersand thumbof the lefi hand,the main pack beingheld ,1,cperin the samehand. GhostCount (Alex Elmsley)rhe threekingsas ,,ur wilh the assistance oi the right hand and rhenllip rhem facedown ,Llop of rhepack. Apparentlylurn the pack faceup bur usethe Trigger | 1,!c, taking your initial breakal the approximaiec€nre positionof the r k. \\'ith the left thumb, geta slighlbreakabovethe four facedown cards LLLhecentreof the pack, the break beingheld almosl at the outer left ,t,ticrcorner.The pack wili normailybreaknaturallyar $e correctpoint , ,, rhe break, bur if any difficulty is experienc€d , ihe pack can be riffled poinr is reached. wirh th€ left ihumb until the appropriare 'r'lrtly I'L.k up the aceof spad€sand insertit facedown into ihe pack at the , frl poin! beingh€ld by the l€ft rhDmb.As the aceis squaredup with ,li. pack, get a iefi little fing€r breakaboveir with lhe left lillle finger. \r,j'xrently rurn the pack face down, really carrying ou! the Trigger ,,r,,\car the breakpoinr. Jlumb off (he top four cards and uke them inlo the right hand

your card is facedown facedown card. As you do this say' "Remember ' in the faceuD Dack

pornL arr ou carrrouri i;eeer Ihebreak i,:l:,jiJiJ[.:ff X ea5fi

"ar acestace doqn ln a I tace down. Deal lhe lour

and thecardcho\en llli i,l''"i'ri.-i..ir'1i;;rie,pond,to Lhe'uir orafter this one' lf ior

i""ii""" i" **tJ a""l on anv acesthal come wasa diamondvouwoulddealnormallvon ;;;;;i.-. i;;;;;."i.;,"d dealonrhelastrwo (tl lhe'uitorderoi(he il;iii;ii;;;;;J...ond aces*as heart,spade,diamond,club) 'I riqqertheDaakaLtheapproximate cenlrepoinla5youappearlo Iurn lable on lhe it aside "it taci-uoanoolace rhatrheface andadjunrhem.so in a tlighrspread ;il;lh.;;;' lo lhe auolen(e Ih€ spread threecon;ealstherearone Flashrhefaceof facedown them turn then and hand i"i *".""i Uvt"it,i"g the rigbt " *'J':.Tit:::"J:jl'T"lf,

prace il rn.g,oupanarar' rnenextoneand q

iepear rhis piocedureuntil vou are left. ith.one ;; ihi';;. r;;; you hatebeen i... J[*n."ta i" ttt. t"tl hand.Poinl out thal slrangel) sav "rhar'\ card cho\en the suit a\ rhe 5ame ii it'.]* ir,"i i. lhe cardrn )our turn "f " "J Slosly one h a better this bur noi a Uaarrick, \pleadlhe then and one trto* iI i\ rhe acluals€lected rr"ni i".. dce ir i' the "p '. wrthin one pich anOreuealthal the reversed ..TRIGGER HAPPY''

Effect ofspadesface The four kingsareplacedon top of lhe packand ihe ace the speedoi ace and wjth the places 'rftiUngs change uo-"i'rf,i Ir lo nhrase hol or red paik become' ""noi. the lhar la\i ,ri.iiunsoo'ir'onis 'o Io red i.tt ai""i",ii"rrv, trt. u"cks changelrom blue Prept]ation from a red backedpack and Removethe kingsand the aceof sp^ades a blu€ backedpack' Scall€r ace from .".i"". *t"t with kings and an arenot roo nearthe top or thev sure p:"ck, making ;t!r1ii""gi't trt. *a

Pedormanc€ spadesand kings Run throughthe face up pack, up.joggingthe aceof 140

t 4l

t

Trigger

T gger

of the guardsa thick prison wali. Close up the spread,and in doing this get a left little finger break rbove the facedown card nearestthe face end of the pack. Apparently turn the pack face down but carry out Trigger at the break point. Hold the fac€ down pack squarein the left hand. Talk about the impossibilityof the prisonersescapidgand then cary the posiaions ofthe top oul the ErdnaseColour Changewhich transposes andsecondcard (pagel5l of "E\pert at lhe Card Table" by Erdnas€,or pag€49 of "lnner Secrelsof Card Magic" by Dai Vernon). The effect of the Colour Change is to causeone of the acesto appear lace up on top of the pack. Place the ace on the table saying, "One t.isoner has escaped."Repeatthe Colour Changemove three more Iimesand as eachaceappearsfaceup at the top removeit and placeit on rherable. Appear to turn the pack face up but really carry out Trigger at lhe ,lppropriatecentrepoinl. Spreadthe cards out lo show ftat ih€ two Auardsare left reverseda1the centrebui that the prisonershaveescaped lrom betweenthem.

uit:l$fl'rs+*i*$.;er:+**"';;.u{$

$$ffiffi#sm*mffi #*t{**rg*1*ttrr.l;*i;q',:':r

;tt*',l'i{Hi*',.i"1#}tiilli#,l*'5:,,':i,',I:'. ..CREENHORN"

l.ltfect

..JAIL BREAK''

An instanttranspositionof awocards,one beingfaceup and the other EflEcl I'reprrdiotr

n!::';,'*lr.'l*j;l"Lf'#Ei*':t'"".'#t,'l;il,,".'llli [::J.':i.ilX':lf

Startwith one card faceup al the bottom ofthe facedown pack. Try l"lt'":.t#cautionsdrenrisonersescapeandreavethe .itd arrangeth€ face up one to be a very easyone to remember.As an .\rmple, let's sayit's the Joker.

P€ ormatrce in Removethe four acesand placelhem

a slight spreddface up on lnc shuffle the fac€ down pack without revealingth€ face up one and $lrhout alteringits position. Spreadout the pack facedown, requestinga spectalorto selecta card, \. soonas he hasremovedone,closeup the pack and appar€ntlyturn it r,(c up but really carry out Trigget immediatelyabovethe faceup card .rr rhe bottom. An easyway to get lhe starting break, is to buckle the ll'|lom cardslightlywith the tip ofthe left forefinger,sothat il opensup .hAhtlyat the near short end.

+:,i#*;al;'",'* i;ii:5i."l;';;;[i:l*il;

.'h3**ri.iifsJl*"'H'l'"'"#rots":'+i""1$t :{tf ril:f#ii#;l: ;* lfmf--li*',"rn.g* 143

rL)

Tritger the spectaiors Draw atlention to the face card of th€ pack and r€quest

ir wir betheJokq',

ln o* .-,--..^ ^'^-* "*ample t'r'rTa.Id-l*:*:l?:1 K:U',#;;:i;;;;;rt'i"* "ni"'r" 1ll"-:11'::*.:l'f p""lL'* ""'n ""1*#i'"iJ'ii'iifriii'"-J'i"i"''itn; ;ffi" ffi ;"J#l'.;:fi#i.*i..i ii'i*li "p ::-l'l'31'1"'i tu'"rhepack Aor*entrv ii,llii'lii TiJ'iiii,il'iili.i-iilii'd^ii'; poinl treal trissc' at thc

toiierilo'ii.

oui

il;;i;-"d oiiE*G'"a""'a ii".il #;#i,t"'i"i; l;i of.the :fl :':*v place Jokcr' in facern-t9"":lJl"* thcruo -a, on,m ir nowoo iii''no* ir'lil'ifii; ,ipiii;;h";it r"fffil.i:iil;" thc @ntret at up racc 'ili" now til-.il

Asr na sDcclarcr tne flarn

i;;:#il

;;-#i1;;h.*

theJoko is

T gger Ask a sp€ctatorto nodindtethccenheJokersor th€endJokers.Whcn hemakcshis choic€,pull theappropriatepair awayfrom the fan andinto therlghthand. If hc hasnominotcdthe etrdpair, rub the backsof th€ Jokcrson thc rableor sl€evcof your jacketand tum theol overto showthat the backs hav€changedto rad. Pausefor a momcntatld thansay, ..you areprobably wond€ring*hat I would hayedona if you had choscntlrc ccnlre pair; well, in that caseI nould havechangcdthcD to qucdrs." Slowly iurn thc jraL in the lcft hlnd faca up to sbow that this h8s actually happened. Obviouslyit do€snot matterwhichpair hechoosas,you limply adjust your patter accordingly.

.ITORSE SENSE" Eff.ci Choice" Thc [ick is brscd upon Bro. Hamm'n's "A Four-tunate

and.t.::Jr:ti:ll:-:i::; s4z, r",l,iiui'iiri"u.ilJlr,iri.io. ?,pagc two or arother th' raccs

il$;i";iff'-;iffi;;"i5ff;;i ;;;'?;;

l'.r-"ti"

q"*"il ottrv four cardsareus€dandnoncar'

faked.

Pnp|rrdon backedque'ns' Th€ Tvo rad backcdJokds are raquit'd andtwo bluc suils' ouecnishoutdbc of rhc samccolour as rcgards dow! que'nsand rh' faceup bctwccnth€ race 5il.;;;;l;G; pocl(ctor walld' andyou ar€all s'l' your bacletof four cardsin Pattordanca that the top catdis a R.novc thc pockelof cardsandhold th'm so of rhepacket asvou

r^i]'iiit^ i'ii 'fri'i

"i'e-rit

roflashtheothcrside

145

I ChaPter6 SomeLate Extra Csrd Tricks ..TIIE 'TIIING ER ME JIC' TRICX'' plot originatedby J N Hofzinser' This trick usesthe remember/forget

Some Lale Extra Card Tricks size, i.€. undercut about half the group and run six cards on lo the r€mainder.Throw the remainderofthe cardsin the right hand on top of thosein the left but outjog them. Undercula1the jo8, run six cardsand throw rhe balanceon top. Hold the packetFACE UP in the lefi hand. If he names Ask the spectatorthe nameof the card he r€membered. thepacketFACE UP.lfhedoes NOTname thecardyou glimpsed,leave the glimpsedcard, casuallyturn it FACE DOWN, b€foreproceeding Spellout the word REMEMBER, deaiingonecardfor eachlelter, and you will end on fte card he remembered. Say "do you remenber the card you forgot?" w}latever his reply, ,ip€llout the word FORCET, continuingfrom the next card of the ones remainingin your hand, and you will concludeon the card he forgot. .'SATAN'S MIRROR'' Eff€ct

P€dormlnce

: :'"'iL:fi :f :.lifJi:J'':i:i : :?ti."i :",f xiX,,1',1"'iLl"ol;'fi ""f

This is really a form of suckertrick, althoughit usesa themethal I havefound audiencesfind interesting.A pocketmirror is shownand the performerclaimsthai it hasthe powerto capturereflections.He successthe mirror's ability, and in conclusionthe refle.tions lully demonstrates rre turned to their ownersquite safely,

"u,r'.';:::+:r #tii+ijfili'f#ui"st':n'.'".'".'; :ffi'ill;ffi1ffxqlii"i'*[#;8. {i:li i'll'3lhii! ilill,'l,lli! laequiaem€lts

A small pocker mirror and carrying caselo hold it. Mosl chemists (drugstores,acrossthe water)sell these.Also,5 blank facedcards

m(: iiii:".*'.rft .Tlil",''xi:"* r Lhe o,o'e l;Jli.'"l'fl ""iff :.;*',, once, par l;x'*'ili':x1"J :; lil:'ii:"1;:.1 ", 1r;lx',i:l'l*l'm'":l' *;r rl:ft*',rff *;ijt'

l'rep|]stion

Placethe mirror in its casein your left handjackel pocket,and along,rclethe mirror with their facesiowardsthe body, placethe following five , rrds, wirh the 95 at the faceofthe group, 75, loD, 6C, 8H, 93. On top )l the remainderofth€ pack placethe 6s,8D, 7c, I0H,9c,lhe 9c being i[e top card of the pack. Have the 5 BLAN( facedcardsat the faceof r|lepack.

iitl,-:":,"liilliHll*# ;**$i f$;6y';'L4:5 tac' rr'e uni,.m.mu'r ,',:.,,.i:#ilt;, ifii:'i,,,lt*,Trff, r d. card,

Ihe reTi"S^q.n.':L"-l:T Pf;cerhecaldsin rherighrhandon top ol

i;iih"";'";'"-p '?:':""i'"::l:,'5i,1 orrhi\ d pact'er *. *r'i..r'n.' i"'t'' "errqith

p"i'"^-*r'"'o't1]:j?1"'jl'.:ll: 'J:1':;l'';:':;'[l'ii..i"'i;; ;i:;;i;;; *li.r'in. ;1lilii;: 'Jiffil;l;T'#i; ;."p.ii"'a',r'"- !::Y':1f: ::h:,:i:'; ri';'Jr;it::l:;.,"';i:;"'i"i

1 46

shuffle the pack without dislurbingth€ stackedcards,and end with il .recdown in the left hand. Then take aboul a dozencardsfrom the top 147

SomeLate Exttu Cad Tricks

ij.iT';:ff': iil';,i.llff'1,::;ili;". :i"ii:3iii.-li}.:H#i,i'

i; l:1ii:Ti;nii'i :itil,i,":lH":.:fi *il:i' *1";",';t;::f ffi tt''J.'ilt"::i

a(rhe break rhe :iiil,:lii:,'ll'll,."0o"'",""dre(ake

Some Lale bctlo Ca

Tick

'I Jont rhinl )on b€hevelhal the mirror reallyha\ capluredlheir ,ctlections." Turn eachof the five cardsover to revealthat $eir faces lrrle vanished.This is quite surprisingto the audience,and you should .tir as if the trick is over. Carher up the 5 blank cardsand hold them in the left hand' rleally quared, wiih your thumb stretchedover their face,the cardsreallybeirg l,cld betweenihe left fore-fingerat the rear and thumb at the face.The ,,rirror is sti held in the right hand and you should make some , ommentsabout its stmngepowers,despileits normal appearance. As you draw attentionto fie mirror, the left hand goesto the pocket 1)rrhecase.The blankcardsareinsertedinlo the pockelso that theyend rcarestthe body, and at the sam€time the caseand other 5 cardsare rripped (ogetherby th€ left forefinger on one side and th€ remamng ring;rs on lhe other. The hand is withdrawn from the pocketwith the ,.rseand cards,but the 5 blank facedcardsar€ left behind.The switchis '''.hnicallyeasy, buL musl be Siten sutficien(practiceIo acquire ,rroothness.Remember,you are apparentlyjust going to the pock€tlo ,)btainthe case,and you must act as if this is your ONLY intenlron Keepthe facesof the 5 cardsgrippedagainstlhe caseand awayfrom rl\'audience,Placethe miror in the caseand drop the cardsfacedown ,'I the table. As if a sudder thought has struck you, say, "t wonder if we could r.rxrn the capiuredreflectionsfrom the mitror?" Take the mirror from ,rs caseand iap it on the backsof the tabled cards, as if shakingthe , fllectionsout;fthe mirror. Turn the cardsoverto revealthat theyhave qainedtheir reflections. 'f

t*:"'.'nllnilll"''1.:l r:ili'',ii"iir"Jt,f +i},,!tJ,,:;: ffi *i.f;.,0,n'j: *i,nrr,. to reston lop oI the faceoflhe uppersecrion

*"i;""-"*jv "pp.,

lur'1 1-.a

ilX'f'r#:J::1.".i1 * n"ri r'""J ,,er,i ;i'ir'. ; ll:';',":,:},'ifiilf li"li:li'ilJi;Il# " hand inrtretCft i"p inecards ,ni ii

'.'r'hand "" tong"iside Now flip thrscard rhe righ(

Xl?Tllt;t;til,,t;""';

:[':""T';81;. ,,i'fr"I.' ;ii':'ft ii:'iJ; rli':* :i"inl*** down' fa,:e nip tttl. onefa€eup andthen i"iiirr"rnt, -

*nen you rnit '.quen.euntil 5 cardshaveheensho$n bul ioniinu. ""a

.,"j;::lilfff.'llhl"ti':'.:{'il i:i":ff:iii :ly,s'Jl'.:1,',"'f

:l::i :ri"*l'*llhltig[:tl'",'*l'#:illxTi"T":'iff i:i:'Lili"".'iff; :l':'u:.::11T i:1:fiTfi"Jts:iinFill'n: namedftem, this is importanl.

illJ:! i"ji,Li,":';ii:JTi' ,.x"**tm*:i.liYi.i,';iilli

'WITCHCRAFT''

:H"*iiilq!*!ijil,!::i*::ft r::y*l:".Tlmi"l,l;'il i5T:?:'#::iifj*?lilX'iiiT#'*^*Esrv;urbodv.

I his, and the effect that follows, use the rather tediousdown/under l,,,lfle. lt is nol ih€reforesuggesledthat they ar€ used as programm€ but rather, in mol€ informal conditions,lo which they are much 'r.rns. r' |lcf .uited.The firsl itemis thelocaliono[ a card,and thetecondlhe l :,rionotacardpluslherevelalion of anapparentlyunIno$nquantily I know, bu( I hope the methods effects, .ards. Hardly breathtaking 'l rll be of interest. "

";:*:lik*t*l"mm:xl,:";':'ni.'-:Ti#::l!:?11': I;:lJ;i{",;x**ul#:.HT.ffill?'J,l'#i,x"'i'.1h"':l':x: "ji;:'xH: :liiu,,"li 31i:' if'8ii"fr xl"l,it*.';lsfr; lHll'tl$ii:Jff i":1, ;lillillllH";;.1;: r#vi:l;*"*it'', willconsider l)il;li;;;;il;;; ;;;apr,rrea ren"ciion" rr'e audience #:: i1?:ii'li':ll *i*u*:t,*.i;;'l'*::;:,:Y:l"l *'ii.l'i,ilin*',,"..0"1.*', n^ "'''';ff li:.,liil11? ;ll[?Jiii L'"'J,:;':; anri'a, .i'u'*l'il#l,l;;' ;; ireaudience ii":li":',';$,"',?"Tfl 148

NrrlhodOn€ (fairly easy)

I lrve lhe following 13 valuesstackedon top of the pack' ihe 2 b€ing r,, ror card,2,4,6,8, 10, Q, l, 3, 5, 7, 9, J, K. The surlsare nor 149

Some Late Extru Cord Trick important but should be well mixed, and the suir of the K shouldbe remembered. Pe ormrrce

Sonte Late Exttu Card Tricks lrngersat rhe far oneand 3 cardsare droppedfrom ihe faceofthe cards .rhovethe break. The break is STILL MAINTAINED BELOW the 3 ,l,oppedcards. After dropping 3 cards,the righl hand removesall the ,( mainingupper cardsand appearsto pla€ethem belowthe cardsin the eft handin a cuttingfashion.However,theMarlo PullDown is executed l,y the left little fingeras they go under th€ packet,so that lhey reallygo l)clowthe uppei 3 cards.They arealsoinjoggedslightlyasthey squar€up lreadthwisewith the olher section.ln a continuingaction,the right hand rxkesthe cardsabovethe injoggedsectionand plac€sthem BELOW the ,cmaining cards. The effect of this procedurefrom the audiences' ewpoint, is tlat the packet bas been casuallycul twice, following a nruffle. Saytha! you are now going to use a procedurethat will haphazardly .liminateall the cardsexceptone, Placeone card facedown on fhe table ,urd then one under the packet, and continuethis procedureuntil only rne cardremainsin your hand. Ask the nameof the notedcard, and then rrrrnit slowly face up.

Falseshuffle th€ pack and then cut the packetof 13cardsfrom the top and place them face down on the table. The exact point to cul at is made asyou estimatel3 cards.It is easyby looking for the K you remembered, drop cards until the K is in viewat the and lhen betterto OvER€stimate face of the upper section, before lifiing this section away.and placing it face down on the table, Explaintha! you would like a spectatorto think ofany valu€from I to 13 and then to dealcards€qualto this value,into a fac€down heapon the table. Illustratethe procedureyourselfby dealing3 cardsfrom the main pack saying, "If you were to think of I you would deal 3 cards down." Hand the remarnderof the pack to the spectalorso thaahe can deal down his value.Turn awaywhilst he doeslhis, explainingthat you do not want to haveany idea of his chosenvalue, Whenhe indicatesthaahe hasfinisheddealing,turn back and askhim to place the remainderof the pack aside.Pick up the 13 card packet placed asideearlier and fan them facestowards the spectator. Ask him 10 look to seeiflhere is a card amonSstthem ofhis v?rlue.Say,"lfthere is, pleaserememberit, if thereis not,let me know and I will add somecards to this group from the pack." This is just a'throw off" line, because there will alwaysb€ a card of his valu€ in the 8roup. Point out th€ impossibilityof knowingthe card he remembers. Squareup the 13cardpacketand hold it facedown. Pick up the cards that the spectatordealiand the 3 that you dealt,and placeBOTH on top of the 13 card packet. Position the cards ready for a faro shuffle and cut exactly 7 cards from the face of the group with the right hand. This cut is madecettainand easyifyou rememberthat the Queenmustbe at the faceof th€ remarning sectionwhenyou havecut 7 cardsoff. Justbreak off what you estimatc is 7 with the right hand thumb, and thenadjust to get a Q at the faceof th€ remainder,beforelifting the cardsawaycompletely,by pickingup or droppingcardsfrom the righ! thumb. Faro shufflethe cardsin the right hand into thosein the left from the faceendof the left handgroup The King must be at the face after the shuf{le(out shuffle from face) As you completethe faro shuffle, push the right hand sectionin slightlydiagonally,so tha! when the packetis returnedto a face down posidonin the lef! hand,theleft little fingercanobtain a breakabovethc uppermostjoggedfacedown card. A breakis thus beingheld abovethc face 13 cards when the packet has been squarefaceddown in the left hand. The righl hand comesoverthe packet,thumb at ih€ nearshortendand

Cnt off the lop 13cards,as before,and placefacedo\I1ron the table. Let the spectatorthink of a value from I to 13 and deal cardson the r.rbleequal to this value. Illustrate the dealingprocedureby dealing3 version. ,rJsin a pileon the tableyourself.as in previous I:anthe I 3 cardsfor the spectatorto notethe cardof hisvalueand then rrvethis packe!a ReverseFaro Shuffle, leavingthe K on the face,before l'hcing it face down on lhe table. ReverseFaro meanssimply running rhrcughthe face down packetwiihout alteringits order, but jogging all Lrrds at evenpositionsup slightly.Thesecardsare thenstripp€dout asa l'lock and placedon top of the remainder. ( iatherup the packetsby takinSyour 3 card one firsi, the 13card one Ltr\1, and the spectator'sone on top of all, Il you usea good falsecut, useil at this poinl in the uick, and thendo rl,f down/undereliminationto concludethe trick.

150

t51

MethodTwo (very easy) l'r€p8rrtion Havetbe following 13 value cards stackedon top of the pack, the 7 l,erngthe top card: 7, 1, 8, 2, 9, 3, 10,4, J, 5, Q, 6, K. As in the pr€vious v.rsion. the suitsshould be mixed. and the suit of the K remembered.

I

lr

Some Late Extru Card Tricks

Some Late Exlru Cqrd Tricks ..NOW AND THEN''

M€thod Run through the faceup pack,countingfrom the faceuntil you come to the twenti;th card (twenty-firstifyou are usinga 53"cardpack) Injog the twentiethcard, and removeihe cardimmediaielyaboveit, and place it facedown on the table, sayingthat this card will help you with a pdr! of the trick. Placethe pack face down on the table wilh the iniog slill maintained The pack shouldbe in a casuallysquaredpositionso that the injog is not obvious. Casuallycui off a seciionof the pack, but really cul at the down on il shghllvuiLh lhe riShl thumb.and gi\e this inios. ore55ins ,.ition,o u.J".r",ot tor shuffling.He is reall' Sivenexactly12 cards After he has shuffledthe cards,turn your headaway and ask him to deal two handsof cardsfrom the sectionhe is holding The handsare dealt in conventionalfashionand must of coursehavethe samenumber of cardsin each.Thereare no restrictionson the dealing,and he may stopwheneverh€ wishes.T€ll him to dealqrietly, as vou do not want to have any idea of the numb€rof cardsbeingdealt. Now requesthim 10 placeone of the dealt handsinto his po€ket.He then looks at the top card of the remainiry hand, and finally drops the und€altcardson toD of this hand so thaahis noted card is sandwiched betweenthe two sections.He can be allowedto shuffle the two sections BEFORE noting his card and assemblingthem' if you wish Turn around and pick up the compositeheap, casuallygiving it a couoleof falseculsthaLwitl leateit eraclly in thesameorder.Il lou are roo honestro everindulaein falseculs.do nothingal all Io lh€ paclet Do an under/downeliminationshuffle with the packet,and as you do this, silentlycou.rt the numberof cardsas they are dealt on the table ask the spe€talorthe 'trrhenyou are left with a sirSle face down card' you are holding faceup one nameof his notedone, and slowlvturn the counl. ir mental last card Do not includethis vour Pick up th€ card that you removeda1the beginningof the effect and hand i1 to the assisiingspectaior'Say this card hasihe power 10 count, andaskhim to touch ii on the cardsin his pocketfor a moment,and then hand the cardtoyou. Placeii to vour earso that il canwhisperils findinS to you. Whilst il is whispering,mentallydeductyour total from 3l and lhen announceihe quantily of cardsthe spectatorhas in his pocket' If you wish 10 do a DOWN/UNDER insteadof an UNDER/DOWN elimination, cut one card from top 10 face before you commencethe eliminationshuffle.

152

Proc€dure ^lt€tnrlive Follow the instructionsfor the first versionuntil you hav€cut off the 12cardsand handedthem to the spectator,Now continueas follows: Requesthim 10dealout ihree handsof cardsand to stop wheneverhe wish€s.He mus(ofcourse havethe samenumberofcards in eachhand, xrd as beforeyou look awaywhilst he is dealing. A5k him to placeoneof the handsin his pocket.He tlen shufflesthe undealtbalanceremainingin his hand, and makesa noteofrhe facecard ol rhis group. This sectionis now sandwichedby the spectatorbetween rheremainingtwo handson the table,onegoingaboveit, andonebelow. You turn around and take the assembledpacket from him, false shuffleand falsecut if you wish, and then do a DOWN,/UNDERelimination, ro end on his notedcard. Follow the sam€instructionsas in the first versionto find out how Inanycardshe hasin his pocket. NOTE:-The precedingtwo ideaswill work equallywell with 16cards, if you wish to cut down (he amountof eliminationdealing. Just count to 16 at the beginningof ahetdck and injog the 16th card, throwing out the previous one as already explained.Wten you cut off the upper sectionof the face down packetat the injog, placethis sectionasid€and lei the spectatorpick up th€ LOWER one ro deal from. Finally,your key to subtractfrom to find out the quantity of pocketedcardswill be 15. .'STRETCHING A POINT'' Somelittle time ago, PeterKane marketedan excellentclose-upcard rrick called"The ElonSatedLady." This effect was inspiredby Petert rrick, and I suggesrit shouldbe usedas a lead-into your favourirefour ,rr routine, ratherthan as an effect in isolalion. Pcter'strick rrsesa differentmethodto this version,and I recommend lirt you shouldinvestin his effect,if you would like to add a strongoffl,fa1rtemto your repertolrel,llecl '\

card is apparentlystretchedand then revertsto irs normal size.

llse cardsihat havea close.consistentback design. lJ3

someLate Extru Card Tricks

Some Late Extra Card Tricks

Me(hod

rheleft hand remainsinposition, fingerson lhe bottomofthepacket and rhumbon the top, and turns thepacketoverin an inwardsdirectionuniil rl is facedown. The right hand hasofcourse beenremovedto allow ihis

R€movethe 4 acesfrom the pack and hold them facedown in the left hand. Haveany one selectedby a spectator,and then take it and placeit faceup, in the fhird from top position. Closeup (he spr€adof acesand 8et a break under the face up oneTurn the completepackel face up, maintainingthe break, and then do the Half Pass with the lower 3 cards. If you are familiar with Ken Kr€nzel\ "Automatic Half Pass" publishedin EpilogueSFecialNo. 2' usethis, as il fih in perfectly. Hold the cards face down in the left hand, and draw the top card slightlyinwardswith the right. Push the top card and the secondcard forward together,by placingaheright fingerson their backs'until the top one squaresup with the lower two aces.This will leaveth€ second from top card out-joggedfor about l" and the audi€ncewill assumethis to be the back oftheir chosenace.Move the facecardfolward for about +" which will exposea back below it at the near shorl end DurinSthe next phaseof the trick the left hand grip on th€ packetis impo(ant. The packet must be deep in the hand, with the left thumb restingon the facecard, and pressingdown very slighily.The left fingers curl dightly around the right long edgeto keepthe cardssquareacross $eir width. Us€the right hand to pull the facedown cardsout along th€ir length slightly,alternatingat far and near short ends,as if stretchingthe face down card out. Pull eachend oul about +" al a time until a faint click is heard andlor feh, which meansthe two cardsar€ now butted together belowthe top and bottom cardsof the packet. Because of the light pressureon the facewith the left thumb' you can now appearto push the "slretched" card back and forth with the right hand. The right thumb pusheson the near short end to move the ''stretched'card forwardaboul l , and lhen move
Finally fan the four cards out to show ihai the chosenace is still reversedin its original position,and briefly showit on both sidesbelbre droppingthe spreadon the table. ..THE PAINT BRUSH CHANGE'' No claim for originalityis madefor this sleight,althoughil wasoneof rhe first "moves" I workedout many yearsago,and usedprimarily as a colour change.lvhen Dai vernon visited Britain for the first time, he rrenlionedin conversationthat he had usedthe movehimselffor exactly rhesamepurpose.I do not know if Dai inventedthe move, but it's likely hc did, and possiblyothers have hit on the sameidea. In any case,I lvould Iike to describemy handlingof the sleightin conjunctionwith a .imple effect, and follow this by threeother tricks usingit. \s a Colour Chrnge rnd Appe ance Have a card chosenand returnedto the pack, and conlrol it lo the .ccondfrom top position. (Bluff passis a good method.) Turn the top card faceup and th€nflip il facedown again.Durina this .r.tion, get a left little finger breakunder the chosencard (secondfrom Take the top two cardsasone,facedown into the riShthand, the cards lieinggrippedat the exrremeri8hr hand long side,ihumb on lhe lop and lingersbelow. Move the righi hand and its card(s)away from the pack lor a moment,and thenusethis cardG)to assistin flipping the next iop ,ard of the pack face up. The card is left faceup on top of th€ pack Hold the packcompletelysquarein the left handand draw attentjonto rhecardfaceup at the iop. Bringthe right handand its facedown card(s) r. rhepack and let the facesof the cardslouch. Now movethe right hand rt) rhe right, so thaathe facedown card(s)slowly travelsacrossthe face ,,p one. wlen the point is reachedwherethc overlapis about 1", tilt the r rghthand card(s)up slightlyso that its facerestson the fingerlipsof the lcfuhand, and iN left hand long edSeis still touchingthe faceofthe card .,r the top of the pack. Ihe right hand now movesto iheleft and upwardssliShtly,and the left hand fingertipspresson the faceof the lower card of the pair, so that it r,,ldsdown on top of lhe card a1the top of the pack. The right hand ,.achesa position of aboui 3" above the pack, and then immediately ,Iovesdownwardsagainwith its singlecard, and flickstbeleft hand long

154 l

I

Some Lote Extra Card Tricks

Some Late Extrc Card Tricks

sideof this card on th€ lefi hand finSertips.This up and down aclion is repeat€dlwo or threetimes.11shouldlook as if you are jusl flicking thc left fing€rtipswith the card in rh€ right hand, and during this actionthc faceup card on top of the pack visibly changesto rhe chosenone. The completesequence shouldbe a rapid one. Drop th€ card from the right handfaceup on th€ table,remarkingthal it seemsto hav€ strangepowers-As you do this, get a left litde finger break under th€ rop two cardsoI ihe pack. Apparenlly turn the fa€eup card on the pack face down, but really rum overtwo cardsas one,wiahthe assistance of the littl€ finger break. Take the lop card and pushit into the centreof the pack bui retain lhe break underlhe singlecard now left at the top. Pick up the card from the table and placei! facedown on top ol the pack. Repeatthe Paini BrushChangesequence alreadydescribed,taking the top two cardsof th€ pack as one. Nore that you DO NOT turD the lop card of the pack faceup, afrer r€movingthe top card(s).Justcarry out the changeasdescribed,bur this time on the FACE DOWN top card. The chosen card appearsto magicallyjump from rhecentreand appearsfaceup on top of the pack.

, hancein this action,andthendrop ih€ faceup cardin the right handon lir rable,still face up. 'Iurn the pack iace up and spreadit betweenthe hands,requestinga tjcctalor10 selec(any card (not the top one).After he hastakena card, quarethe remainderof lhe pack and hold it facedown in the left hand. Take his selecledcard and placeit face up belo\rvthe top card of the i.r.edown pack. Spreadthe cardsslighdyto showexacdywhat you have l, e and then squarerhemup, taking a left little fingerbreakbelowthe

..WARPAINT''

Effecl This is a straightforwardmatchingand colour changetrick which is easyio do, but carriesa strongimpact at its conclusion. Prepsmtion Placea card with a different colouredback to your main pack in the secondfrom top position.Thetop cardof the packshouldmatchthe odd one's face. P€rformance Shuffle the pack, relainjngthe top two cardsin position,and iaking carenot to expos€the odd colouredback. Doublelift the top card(t ard leav€it face up on the pack, keepinga break belowjt. Let a sp€ctatorsignthe faceof this card whilst you hold the pack, Take hold of De faceup card(s)wilh the righr hand and flick ir on rhe righl handlong sideofthe packa coupleof times.doing rhe Paint tsrush t56

l'akethe signedcard from the lable and placeit faceup on lop of lhe ,,rck, poinling oui that although il is unable to actually louch the 'r.aredcard,il i' slill ableIo exerra slrang€poweroveril. 'I akethe top threecardsas one into the righl hand, grippingthem at Lcir dght long edge,readyfbr the Painl BrushChange.Twisl the right lirnd briefly to showthe appareniback of the card(s)it is holding,and rl,cnturn the hand back to its original positionwith the card(s)faceup il!)!e the face down pack. alarry out the changeas aheady describedbu( lhis time addingtwo ..I ds !o the pack from the rear of the threein th€ right hand. After the hange,the situalion will appear lhe samefrom the speciator'sview' t\)inr, you hav€ apparentlyjust flicked the left hand fingertipsa few ' |,c. sith the laceup cardin rheriShthand. Movethe right hand wilh its card away from th€ pack for a momen(, .,'rd lhen spreadthe top card of the pack wilh the left thumb to reveal hatthe selecledcardbelowit haschanged!o aduplicateof the onein the rshthand. Mention rhal tbereis little poinr in having two identicalcardsin ihe pack,so the bestrhing to do will be to changerhebackoftbe signed 'nre j,rc to avoid confusion.Turn the right hand ca(d overto revealthe back Iange,and thenhandit !o the speciatorwho signedi(, saying,"Perhaps !t'u would like to keep this as a souvenir, who knows, you may \cntually fiDd the other 5l cardsand havea completepack." ,'sAMtr AGAIN PLEASD'' l:rfect lhis is a form of coincidencetrick in which cards are magically , hangedto match others. There is an apparent lailure on the final .,rrcmpt,but this is quickly rectifiedby the performer. Iteparation Secredyarrangethreepairsof similarcolourand lalu€ cardson top of l,c pack,in lhe followingorder:45, QD,7D, ?H, QH,4C. The cards rtlrgested are just givenas an example,of course. t5'7

Some Late Exttu Cad Tricks

Cive ihe pack an "in" Faro shuffle,in whichonly lhelop 6cardsfrom If you do not usethe Faro eithersidene€dto be accuratelyintermeshed. jusr place a card between each of the stackedones,and ooe al shuffle, the top ofth€ pack, beforeshowingthe effect.Eitherapproachwill leave you with the 45 (in th€ examplegiven)in the secondposition from the top, with the remainderof the stackoccupyingthe evenpositionsbelow rt. Follow the shuffle with a falsecur, which losesthe top card, and then deal oui two face down handsof cards from a pack in a conventional dealingfashion, threecardsin eachhand. Turn ihe top card of the left hand group of threecardsfaceup, and leaveit face up on the table. It will be the 7D. Take the top card of the other group, and placeit faceup below the top card of the pack. As you squareup the pack after placing it in position,get a left little finger break below the faceup card. Placethe 7D from ihe tabl€ face up on top of the pack and then take thetop threecardsofthe pack with the right hand,holdingthemsquared as one card. The grip is al the right hand long side,in the position used for the Paint BrushChange.Flick the right hand long sideof the pack with the faceup 7D, carryingout the changeas alreadyexplained.Place the 7D back on the table face up, and then spreadover the top three cardsof the pack and take them io a dighl spreadinto th€ righi hand to show that the face up card betweenthem has changedto a matching Removethe 7H from the centreof the two fac€down cards,usingthe extr€mefingertipsof the left hand first and secondfingers,and placeit on the table with the 7D. Place the two cards in the right hand UNDERNEATH ihe main Dackin the left hand. describedin the previousfour paragraphs Repeatexactlythe sequence by placil8 to producethe two queens,and aSainconcludethe sequence the two facedown cardsin the right hand back beneaththe pack. As you are squaringihe pack betweenlhe handsafter replacingihesecards,lift up the top two cardsof the pack slightlywith the right thumb tip, and move th€m as one card about +' ao the right Afier moving them over, lock rhem in position by pressurewith the left thumb. Turn up the final two facedown cardson the table face up. Leavethe 45 on the table and placelhe other card still faceup, apparentlyin th€ secondfrom top posilion of the pack. Reallyjust push it in from the right hand sideso that it goesbelowthe two cardsjoggedoverasone.Do not attemptto squareir wiih the pack at this stage,just pushit in enough so that ifyou releasethe right hand grip on it, it will remainsupportedby the cardseithersideofil, assistedby slightdownwardspressurewith the l€ft thumb. of the right hand, and obtain a Squareup the pack wilh the assistance '

158

Some Lale Extra Card Tricks L,ll little finger breakbelowthe faceup card (belowthe top threecards) l'lacethe 4Jfrom the lable faceup on top of the pack and carry out the I'rinl Brush Change,bui this lime holding four cardsas one After lhe placelhe 45 faceup on the table. l,.,nge, l'u5h;!er the top cardof th€ pack,and removeil and loseiI someNherein lhe centreof the pack Appear surprisedthat the faseup card ' . r'oredat thetoDof thepackdoe\nol marchIhe45 PlacrIhepacl inlo t'e righrhand.ai you do lhis carryout th€ Dai lernon Top Palmfrom 'sel;l Secrets."In a continuingaciion,lel the packdrop on to the table lrom a height of aboul 6". lf lhis sequenceis performedsmoothly,the *rong card'will almost visibly change1o lhe right one, and the effect ,,)ncludeswith a co(ect match It is easyto gel rid of the palmed card, by scoopingup fie fac€ up ,,urls lying on ihe table, and in this action adding the palmedcard to rt,em.Lefire turning thim face down and retuming them to the main

.'(]OMMAND APPEANANCE'' lllfccl l.rom a shuffled pack, the performer magicallyproducesthe four ,tueens(or aces,if you happento do four aceiricks). t'rcpsrltion \ccretly cull the queens1o the top of th€ pack, each pair of the same ,,'lour beingtogether.

(;rvethe Dackan "in" laro shuftle,in whichonly Lhelop fotll cards tnterme\hedlolloq thi\withdSlip , r cachhali haveto be accuratelv i ur or DoubleUndercul,(o losethe iop card. The pack has apparently l,ccnshuffledand cut, bul actuallythe top card is a queenand the oth€r rl,ree6re in odd positionsbelow it. If you do nol Faro shuffle' simply .,rrangethe quee;s in the akemaling s€quencea1 the lop of the pack I'clore commencing. i'la.elhe toDca; ol thepacl faceup on lhe lable lake the nexlcard placeir F^CE UP belowlhetop cardof lhe pack.Aftersho\tingIhe "'.i get a lu,siiionof the faceup card, squareup the pack, but in this action k lr litde finger break belowthe face up card. 159

SomeLate E tra Card Tricks

SomeLate Extro Cord Tricks

c?rd from the rablefaceup on rop ofrhe pack and rhenlake L^Pfacerle noro,or rhe thre€cardsaboverhe breakwirh rhe ,iet i h_J. i" ;rti;; ror,the painr,BrushChange.Carry our rhe changeas ajreadydiscribej an!.rhen reptacelhe card remainingin rhe riShi hand f"".."p;;;; raote.,rrom the audiences'viewpoinr,you havesimply flicked.rheriehi nanofongsrdeot rhepack wirh rhe faceup card, an,i tir." i.pl..a i,i" the top three cards of the pack to show that rhe card below the }^_Spread

8.a to a queen, .aichng rhecolourof rheoneon f3,:T-ht Place T1""l" therrable. rhequaen t o. ir,. p""l Jongiia.,r,.o* jr.ua'yon,ii table.

rlmost the salnemovementtwist the riSht hand so that aherear card of rhcblock endsup faceup abovethe pack,theright thumb on its faceand lrncerson the rear. ihe complete scquencedescribed in the previous paragraph is per' lormedsmoothlyand a! speed,and the actiooshouldappearto be much rh€ sameas the normal Palnt Brush Changeaction, us€din the first part ,rl the trick, but the effect this time is that the face up card iII the right hand visibly changesto a queen.This queenh held in lhe riSht hand, whilstthe left hand thumb pushesover the top ca.d of the pack to show rhatthe faceup card in the secondfrom top positionhasalsochangedto ir queen. You have now produced all four queens and wtth sufficient inlensivethoughtcan proceedwith a follow-up trick usingthem.

.]:,5#iiHlillli"ff ",il::H;rur, ,-J,fi [i:J,"'fr tabre' seta IertriLtilrine!'o'ear ;fl.tilf1"'Ji"J:'":l;.card;:nnrhe Bring rhe righr hand to the rear

end of . rhumb inrorhebreak ar ,n. ,,rr, n-o .no'lil,i."i#tJ:1iHl.";'il: pact

:rndrhefingers on rhebackof rher"p.".afrr. nr"* rir.1"iji.j

Dackwardsslighrly.and then right away f

ffiif,ind,if; ..$ ,'g;1$irimr*xi:t'if;il,'*

h€-raceup card(s),from rI€ riShrhandbelowrhejrigg.il."ra. J"i, i""h rr rn rromlre r'ghrhandsideof lhepack,feeding ii i"ir"*.i" ,f,ii"L; caroand theon€belowit. Onceit hasbee

card,. rerease rherishtr,",a*j i".iiir,.iLpHl':,L'l'":r"';:;::;:i posrlronry pressure

wirh _rhelefr ,t oi"pr"y ir,i-"arai pos,lronlor,a momenr.. "ru. of rh; rl!1, f,unJ i"'ir,i" wirh lheassisrance ,*"r.ifi. pacx,butlakea Ieftlirrtefinserbreakbetow.the fac;p;il il;t"*;;i; loJ,lhreecardsof thepack),Fromtheaudrlncesvrewpornt, you bavr

"HAPPY FAMILIES''

The idea for this trick came about aft€r reading Stewart Judah's ''t,ightning StrikesTwice." It is a card trick without any manipulative skill whatsoever, so may be slipped in after your demonstlation of one hand centredealing,to give youl hand a rest.

Removethe J, Q and K of hearts and place them in a fac€ up fan on rhetable.Repeatthis witll the J, Q, K of spadesand the J, Q, K of clubs l'atrer about each of the groups reprcsentinga fanily-mother, father Hand one of the setsto a spectator ?rndask him to riix them up, and rhen deal them in a face down low on the table. Hand a s€cond ''Family" set to another spectator(or the sameone, if your average :rudienceis about the samesizeas mine) and let him mix theseup and dcal one on top ofeach one alreadyon the table. Repeatthis procedure wilh the final group of three. If you are lucky, this will resultin three lrce down Dileson the table. Requesta spectatorto Satherthe pilesup in any order, one on top ol rheother, cut them if he wishesand then hand them lo yolr. Mix the face down packet up by doing as many ReverseFaros and cuts lls vou wish. and the audiencewill sland. ReverseFaro meanssimplyto ,un through the group of cardsjogging upwardsall alternatecards,and rhenstrippingthemout as a group, and placingth€m aboveor belowthe rcmainder.As you shuffle the cardsin this way, say, "As the families rravelthroughlife, they tend to get separated."Cu|s canbe interspersed betweenthe shufflesif You wish. Deal out the nine cards in a face down row from left to dght, leavinS a v all gap betweeneachcard and its neighbour' 161

.i:,ilTi[7"1i "iiirliiEi+i_i-Jffi ".'#T.trJi:.';:rfi?ff 'liffi: ""'r:;d:ril:ii;ti[ti'i.#:r111'":f ;:t"'nf rn€ pack. you are now goingro flick rhericl

#ilil:: *,Jlfflf;T5ffi:-,;l."'ffi 'J,,j; imi::_'ll';l:

i,,t:_*ll'l*,J: ff_r|p-fiLtr*Ji:i,Ti"i13fii:."/ff asonecard unrir ;" l"ii

lil:::XTf*:',$J:'*'#8hI

Trist rhe btock upwardssligirty, lrninc it

't''r "*

'.iri"c

.;:'l,r'#,i;:fffiffi'ffiTifff;: i:l'."t:l * t*i;I"- d;";i',i nnge,s,"r,icrr iiri ,esulInrherearcardbeinr

Itjt_Llf.!]l*o scparaled trornthe:""na facf rhree.Moverherighrhana that the lacelhreecardsof thegroupfold-duwn ,o*"rai if,.l"fr'.i on lo thepackand in 160

Some Late Exttu Card Tricks Hand your penor pencilto a spectatorand askhim to placeit on rhree cardsin a row, by positioningil horizontallyso thal it touchesall rhree. Gatherup the line of cardswith the exceplionof the threecoveredby the pencil,slartingat the left handendof th€ row, and placingeachcard on top of the one to its right. As you gatherthe cards,count the onesto the LEFI of the threechosen,which will giveyou an answerfrom 0 to 6. lfthe answeris 0, think of it as 3. lf the answeris ABOVE 3, subtract3 from it to give an answerof l, 2, or 3. You will thereforebe Ieft with a key numberof l, 2 or 3, and this must be remembered. Placethe gatheredcards behindyour back, or under the table, and hold them face up. with the assistance of the right hand, count off the facethreecards,so that their orderis rev€rsed,and thenplacethem back on the faceof the remainingthree.Pull off lhe faceand rear cardswith the righahard and bring them out in a facedown condition. Mov€ th€ pair of cards back and forlh along the line of lhree face down cardson the table as if se€kingan empathybetweenthe pair you are holding and one of the tabledones.Finally, drop the facedown pair just below the card that correspondsto your menial key numberwhen readingfrom RICHT to LEFI of the tabledthree, i.e. Key l, extreme right hand card; Key 2, middle card; Key 3, extremeleft hand card. Remov€anotherpair with theright hand,takinSonefrom the faceand one from the top ofthe remainingfour cards,and bring them facedown into view. Drop this secondpair on the card 10 the RICHT of lhe one with the previouspair on il. If thereis no card to the righl, just move back to the oppositeend of the row and drop the pair on this card. Placethe final pajr, facedown, on top of the remainingsinglecard. Patter about the familiesalwaystrying to unite for chrisimas, and then turn eachof the pairs faceup, one by on€, to revealthat eachis of facedown cards. the samesuit. Replacethemjusl belowtheir associated Say that only one memberof eachfamily is missing,and then turn each of the thre€ face down cards over in tum, to reveal that they completethe respectivefamilies. ..MONTMARTRE" This trick has becomea favou te of mine becaus€of the mulliclimaxeswhich seemto appealto specta{ors. The plot in which a group of cardsfollow the face uplface down condition of a masterone, was shownto me by Mr, Gordon Bruce. Pr€plrstion ln additionto four cardsfrom your normal bluebackedpack,you will needfour yellowbackedpictur€cards,saythe JC, KH, JH and KC, and

162

Some Late Extra Card Tricks (uggelled .\.' red backedpicturecardr.5ayKS and QD the colours ln aratFDlllfy to sull r . rf rre ol cour\earbirrar!and may be changecl \, rur particulararea, lo commenceth€ eflecr, the cards should be arrangedat follows' lrom the face of the packet Yellow backedJC, blue backedJD' blue r,.'.r.J ,r,,i. vello* backed KC. red backed KS. veltow backed KH' ,Lllow backrd JH. red backedQD face down blue bacled Joker and r,re down blue backedAD. This packetof ien cardsis placedin your effecl' r,.,.f"ior ,rullet, so that whenyou removeit to demonstratethe rlrr faceof fte cardswill show.

Alrer Derforminqoneor rwo lricks. saythat you would Iike lo showan ,'r.resriicrhrnc*]th someof rhe piclurecards.and to sav€lim€ vou .-i*.,"4 ,fte appropriatecardsfrom the pacl anc placed ".,t" rhem"ii."'d" in your pockel. nemouerhi packetof cards lrom your pocketor wall€t' Ialing care i"..r.*,i" u**. and hold the packeltac€up in the lefl hand ',." i,',,," trr.'rl"rur'"na otir rhepacket lhumbat lhe nearshotlend and i',i ,i, , iii r;"."ii it'* t'alf the lhickn€ssof the packerwilh rherhumb I ct lie cardsdrop singlyoff the thumb tip, unlil you seethe KS at tbe lrce of the lowe; s€ction.Lifi off the upper four cards with tbe right l,rnd and Dlaceth€m in a squaredface up pile on lhe table' cardsin th€ handso that fr'"nn.',ft. r.f' handgriton the remaining tlre left long sideand lhe fing€rs rt., rh;;b is on the faci orerlapping you when doing|he Elmsleyor Jordan grip use l,clow.(This is ihe same r,!hecounts). tlr ino rhe risht hand to thesroup and placetheIhumb on the face Use ,,,rti o'"es.ure"wlrl rle rtrumbio draq lhe lacecardoff. andinloIheI ighl cards in the left hand mus! remain absoluielv i'i'ial irt" *."i.i"g ,ruare.Drawoff rudmorecardlinlhe\amefa.hion.and LhenLalelhe l,:ralone(reall)threeas one)on top ol lhosealterJ, in lhe righl hand i;',,"i* trri. count well, as it is used conlinuouslv throughout the ,ourine.Tilt the cardsslightly,so that the facesare towardsthe spectait: Ait€r showinsthe (lour) picturecards,place ,",iii io"Jitlo., "rro" face up on the lable packet, squared. rl,. carefully pi.r ,oir'.otrt"i gtir"p of piclurecaldstlom the lableand Elm\lev t o,rnt thirn to show foui picturecards Placethe last card counledon lacedo*n.andIhumbo[[lheLop rl,r laceoflhesrouo.Turnrhepacker cardscarelo keeplhe remaining care rakrnS hand, the rishl ,,rdinto (he themin a and drop lefl handfaceup. f"urnrft. cardstn 'ouat.a. "if" from the righl card ihe sjngl€ Drop r,r6i-up spne.ro on the lable. down it face leaving still spread, card lurnd , ''irr*on toD of the three r.om oneheapbeingableto influencecardsfrom "uoitir," "".a. 163

Some Lote Extra Card Tricks

Some Lale Extn Card Tricks

the other one, and illustratethis premisein rhe following way. Pick up the first group you counted,and hold il face up in rhe left hand. Takethe facedown card from the othergroup, and placeir on th€ faceofihe cardsin the left hand, but in an injoggedFosirion.Now place the finSersof the righ( hand on thejoggedcardand the onebelowit, and push both forward togetheruniil the injoggedface down linesup with the lower cards, and the face up card becomesoutjogged.Take the outjoggedcard awaywith the right hand and drop it siill faceup on th€ table 1o form a new packet, Jordancount the sixcardsin the left hand asfour, placingih€ lastcard BELOW the previousones.The cardshave apparentlyall turned face down in sympathywilh rhe facedown card placedwith them. Afrer the count, hold the cardssquarein the left hand. Take the JC from the tabledgroup and placeit face up on rop of rhe left hand group in an injoggedposition. Exchangeit for the facedown one below it using the techniquealreadydescribed,and drop the face down card on the table to form a new pile, still facedown. Count the cardsin the lefl hand to showtheyare all faceup usingthe simple pull off counl describedat the beginningof the rourine, and rememberthat the final card (threeas one) is placedon the face of rhe precedinacards. Hold fte faceup cardssquarein the left hand, and takerhe JD (lower of the two on table)and placeit facedown and injogged,on ihe faceof the left hand cards.E\changeit lbr the facecardofahe group asalready explained,and drop aheKSon top of the QD that is alreadyon the table. Jordan Count th€ six cards in the left hand as four to show they are all lace down, rememberingthat the final card must go BELOW the previousones, Take the KC from the table and placeit siill faceup on top of the left hand cardsio an injoggedposition.Exchangeit for the facedown card below it, and drop the face down card on top of the facedown card alreadyon the table. Count the cardsin the left hand usingthe pull off count to show all four are now faceup, but this time placethe final card counted(rhreeas one)belowthe others.As you squarethe cardswith rhe assistance of the right hand after the count, let the lower two drop from rhe right thumb which is restingon ahenear short end of the group .rnd take a break abovethem. Takethe completegroupinto the right hand, tbumb still on the near shori end and fingerson the far one, the hand beingcurved abovethe face up group. The break above the lower two cardsis still maintainedby the thumb. Picl up the main pack with the left hand and hold i! facedown. Push overthe top cardslighrly10the r;ght with the lefr rhumb, and thenflip ir laceup on to the top of the packwith the left loDgedgeofthe cardsbeinS heldin the righr hand. Menlion that thereis one card in the pack thar is mor€ powerful than any olher and that this card is th€ (here, name

$hdte!ercardappears). Flip it doqn again.bur in Lhisacriondrop the rhebreakon rop ot ir. (srandardDrop Addirion :)o."r9:_1,919.191 \'1ove.) IMMEDIATELy DROplhe laceup cardsin rheriehihand,in a rrceup plleon rhetable.andpushorer thesupposed namedcard,a lirrle ro the oght with rhelefr lhumb. Tale. rhc card of the pack inro lhe right hand. and placelhe I fmainderof_rop rhepackon thetablewith rheleft handwellawayfrom rhe rhreegroupsof cardsalreadyon the tabie. Offer to demonstrat€thepowerof the cardwhichyou are holdingface down in the righi hand. First.rubit onlhe backsofthe facedown pair and then flip rhemface up to show they havechangedto a pair of aces.Now rub it ;n the faces ''l rhe faceup pair {QD and KS} and flip rhem facedown ro show rbar ,'rerrbackshavechangedro red. Rub ir on rhe facesof rhe final group. .rndthen flip thesefour facedown to revealrheir yellow backs. Pausefor a moment,and then say, ,,This card ia so powerful, h€ can .ven changehis own personality."Slowlyturn the cardin your hand face Lrpto revealthe Joker.

164

165

That Certoin Something ,,,Ibo cards.Hold the jumbo cardsface up in the lefl hand, the packer firg grippedat irs left long sidcby the tips of the left hand fingersand r,L,mb.The normalsizepack is also beingheld in the lefi hand,but rfped down in the hand, so as not ro interttre with the grip on the "

Chapter7 That CertainSomething ..GROWN UP HOFZNSER'' The classicHofzinser effect, upon which lhis effect is based,is a strongoneand canhardlybe improvedon. This, therefore'is a variation and not an improvement,and, as such,will hopefullyescapeAl Baker's wisewords aboul many a good trick dying of imptovement. I considerthis effecrto be a strongcommer€ialpres€ntationfor a lay will read audienceand, in sayingthat, realisethat somecardenthusiasts no further. Requircments Neededare four jumbo cards which reading from the face of the packetshouldbe the AH, AS, QD and AC Thesefour cardsale plac€d in the insidebreastpocketof your jacket. On top of your normal sizepack, placelhe AD followed by the QD and you are all set. QD is the top card of the pack. P€ ormrnce and Presentrtion Outlln€ Removethe normal sizepack from your pocket and give il a brief shuffle, retainingthe top two cardsin position.Cut the pack and take a lefl litlle finger break betw€fl the two halvesas they come logether' Riffle down with the left thumb al the outer left corner and invite a to call slopal somepoint Whenhe ha\ doneso uselhe right sDec(alor h;nd to litl off all rhecardsabovethe break This i\ lhe srandardRiflle Forceprocedure.Thumboff the top cardofihe lower sectionfacedown ihe pack,by placingthe lower half on iop onto the table and reassetnble of the upper one, and holdingthe pack face down in the lefi hand Say thit you havefour cardstaken from anotherpack that will help you out with the irick. Reachinto your pocketand bring ou! the four 166

ItrinSthe right handup to thejumbo cardsand ElmsleyCounithemto li,rw ihe four aces.Ailer the count, the AH will againbe at the faceof l|c pack€l. The count should be casualiydone, only mentioningaces .Lrrerthe first onehasalreadybeencountedinro the righl hand.Turn the fL:rot"aces'r facedown and deal them from left to righr in a facedown , Liwon th€.able. I'ick up the facedownselecledcard from the tablewith the right hand, ,,ilding jt at the right lower corner. Tih lhe card so that its face is ,'wardsthe audienceand say, "The suit of your chosencardmustbe tbe ..,Jneas one of the aces,but we do not know which aceit is." Continue, ''l am going to movethe card facedowr over the acesand try and stop ,,\ cr the acewhosesuit is idenlical to the chosencard." l urn the selecledcard face down and slowly move it backwardsand r,,rwardsalong the row of aces, firally bringing it to rest over the f\lreme l€fl handoneof the row. Ask a spectatorto turo oneofth€ other .k$ faceup and leaveit in its original position.Wh€nhe hasdonethis, ,,rn the card towardsthe audienceand say, "Does its suit match the , Iosencard?" Whenhe cl€nieslhis say, "Well, lhat leavesme wjtb a one irLthreechanceof beingright." Turn the chosencard face down again ,rJ hav€him turn anotherof the acesin positionstwo to four fa€eup. I lr the chosencardup so that its faceis towardsthe audienceand again ,Lfk il the suit of the lurnedup a€ematchesit. Whenthe spectatorassistriLrtsays"No," conlinuesaying,"Well that givesme a onein two chance ,l beingright." lurn the chosencard so that it is face down againand havethe final .r.c down acein the secondto fourth positionturned face up. At the \rry moment that this aceis being turned over, top changethe card in \,'ur right hand for the one on top of lhe pack. The misdirectionis very .rong and high technicalabilily in the executionof the Top Changeis , ,'r required,iust do it qrrelt and without haste.To help evenmore,as rlLeaceis beingturnedfaceup say, "I wonderif this suit matches?"The .t,(elalorwill denyrhat it doesonce againand il appearsthai the lrick l,.r\ be€nsuccessfully concluded,for logicallythe card you are holding I r'c down abovethe first "ace" must be of ihe samesuit. (bnlinue saying,"SometimeswhenI havedonethis trick peoplehave .rLdi1'squite good, but it could be just luck and nothing more, but it's !'r luck and thereis somethingmore. Watchvery closely,for I am going l,) causethe imageof the ace beiow your card 10 contract and lravel Lt,qards."Turn the cardin the right hand faceup to revealit is now the Al). Placethe faceup AD in the left hand. Proceed,saying,"and con\., selythe imageof your chosencard will expandand traveldowo to the t6'l

I

Thal Certain Something

That Certain Something

ace." With your right hand pi€k up the first aceand turn it faceup to show thal it is indeeda giant replicaof the chosencard

r rt?i e it lace up, placeir below the ieft hand sectionof rhe meshed ,,[ds beingheld by !h€ right hand, so rhat the card ar the boftom of rhis ..clron is completelycovered. Iwist lhe righr hand slightlyso that the cardsmove in an anii_clock\r'\c directionand lake them into the left hand, which grips rhem at the ,,,cshedpart,.thumb.on top and fingersbelow. Releasedre righr hand frp complerely,andlift the cardsup so that the faceofrhe bolt;m oneis '.r.Ir8the speclaror\. Requesr th€specrarorr ro makea noreof rhecard to rhem.Rerakerhecardsin rherighl hand.againgrrppinS near .,.rble '/rc.centle \o lhal lhelr pafliall) mergedcondirionis maintained, and ,.placethem on top of rhe remainderof the pack which was left on the r.,hle.As the righr hand replaces(hem it movesthem in a siighr anri_ , ockwisedirecrionso thal tbe reversed cardat the faceendsup;n top of lt.ic.ight hand.sectionof the rabledpositionof the pack. Now strip out |,, L'omplereghr handsecLion ot rhepdckanddtopir on ropof rhelefr one. ow to lhts action b) a fewsLraighr cutsof thepack,Notelhat ','rd 'r'' .rflp out aslroncanbe a sloq openone,or a secrelone.by u.ingone ,,1 rhe standardpush through or strip out techniques. | \plainlhar therev€rsed cardis a form of Careiaker andwill hetp)ou iorm lhe lnck. you As t'(r aresayinS rhis.r un rhroughlhe facedown ' " ., o\ andremovethereversed one,placingit nill faceup on rhetable.As \."r rcmovett. cur rhepackar rhispoinrandcomDlele Lhecur, \dv $ill lestrheCareraler\abiliryb) !pellingirsname,onecard ' r ed(h.fe 'or er. Do rhis. /n.luding "the.' ar.d, ol., In lhe spelling.when \,',, reachthe final letter,hold rhe card facedown in the right h;nd and l ' for th€ nameofrhe cardnotedearlier.Turn the card faJeup to show 1[. C]aretaker has beensuccessful.

..THE CARETAXf,R'' Perhapsa be(er title would havebeen"Karl's Concept" for the trick usesa placementprocedurewhich to the best of my knowledgewas originatedby Karl Fulves.The basiceff€ctis a cardlocationthat involves no prior artangementof the pack, nor indeedthat the pack shouldbe a complet€one. In other words,an idealtrick to do with a borroweddeck. Pmceduae Run ihrough the face up pack, secretlycounling from ih€ face until you havethumbedover l8 cards.Mark off this positionby keepingthe right secondfinger pressedon the back of the l8th card from the face Continuespreadingthroughthe pack until you r€achthe 3, 7, 8 or Q ol diamonds,which is removedand placedface up on the table;it doesnol matterwhich oneof th€ four vou use lt is unlikelythat all four are in the face l8 €ardsof the pack, but if you do haveto removea card from this section,you must alter your mark off positionso that it still is l8 cards from th€ face. clos€ up the face up pack and take up th€ break with the left little finger. Wlilst the righi hand is still overthe packafler squaringit, press the right thumb againstthe break at the right hand end of the nearshon endofthe pack. Move the right hand thumb towardsihe left hand sideol the faceup pack, the br€ak beingcarriedalong with the thumb. At the samelime move the lefl thumb down to the lower left corner unlil thc thumbs meet. fhe lefl hand thumb now tales over the breal The precedingmoves are made under a natural squaringaction, after the spread cardshave beenclosed, _ Twisl &e left hand so lhat the pack is facedown in preparationfor a riffle shuffle.With the right hand cut the lower s€ctionofthe pack to the right, cutting exactly at the break. Riffle shuffle the two sections tolether, tDengto get a fairly evendistributionof the smallerright hand sectioninto the left one. Pushthe two sectionspatridll, togeiherso that rhey m€shfor about one-thirdof their length. Pick up the completepack from the table with th€ right hand by plac ing (he thumb on the nearlong sideand fingerson the far one, position ing the grip ai the meshedsectior. Holding the completepack about one inch abovethe sulfaceof lhr table,slowlyreieasethe still mesh€dcardsand let themdrop to the table' invitinga spectatorto call stop at any point he wish€s.As soonashe has calleditop, pick up the card you removedearlierwith the left hand and I68

,I)A(;WOOD'S EATS'' ime y€afs.aqo there was a newspapercartoon seriesrunning jn , rrain, lr, which-lrhink originatedin America.The main characterusi to ( lond-of mulli-layersandwiches calledDagwoods,and this is the story ,' irlineI useto present the following..small packeririck." Needed,are four blank facecardswith blu€ backsand threekingswilh ,'11backs.The back colour of th€ four blank cardsdoesnot hav; ro be l'lrc. but it should contrastwith rhe red of the kings. place the three |,,,!! on the faceof the four blanksand the set of sevencardsin yollr ru\ krt, walleror whereveryou keepyour smallpack€ttricks_(Dusrbinis ',,r accepredas an answer!). Ialk aboxtgoinginto a sandwichbar andaskingfora DagwoodSand! " h Saythar the counterasshtantdid not underitandwhai you meant, ,, ,i you explainedthat it wasfour slicesof breadand threesticesof meai ,, rre sandwich.By this time you have removedrhe Dackerof sev€n ''.l\ dndareholdingthemlacedownIn rherighrhand,fingersar rherar 169

That Ce ain Something palmof thehandbeingtoqards shortendandthumbal Ihenearone'lhe the sandwichlike this Userhe left prepared 'n"rl;il;, ,n. assisrant rurn to; facedowncardinto rheleft hand Now ,la*i rllX'i:iJ[H*,1 up bv tac€ 'r'"'iiu "iiir'" hand rishr ."J'i" iiii',"".ii"i"e

ll:

'r';

wrist. Draw off th€ uppermostface up km8

thereTwist.the alreadv [ii'iit"'i'l rJ'ir''li rt iandson rop or the.card thumblo theleft use is facedownand ,o rrt",thepacket .i"ii rrinJ "*"in

i',"i",i'. I'T9],g:"-'lli,'il5f,f ff:''fi:i,li:li:? ".i,.*a-i",",n..[ft in the right handand drawlngcaro lhe Dackei

tl":T ff':T"i::i Hi:'#'xl'"5i:1';111; ';ii : iliF^'j fi a card wirh .i.n coincidins ,ii.. ?:li:iff,"Ji;t1n;i,; 'ric€ "iii."a," ";* hand' rhereft :ffi'#:'i""""1?'1,1ff;'i'lX"."Yi"iTii;. '",o

condilionandsav' .."." taids to showtheiraltemare quanrilv oI mealbul tlr€ it's theright "ii^ii noi" o"g**a sand\aich' took backthe alsista coun-ret 6; ;t.ther'" sav the .;;:ilt;

"';;;;J'";;ih.

jil i;'.'; :H'.:Tf 'sl';r?f".ff l*'J"tJ.i:T',[f iil{#lhi"fl

lable'-nowtaLethe next-but€xecutelne pr"* i, ii'"iiit-[ of lheooealreaoy "n'lbe iiii. ii'trt"-J tl"ona r"cedowncardis placedon lop " rwo-cards-normtll.:":: ne\t ;'Jil.i;; ;'.";';"' the

::,it;Ti: u''r" L ir''"' iil,.iui :l1"fJ:l:',i1ili"','llii"'1ll"r',i;ihiH,;: rhe bread' i"e.'h;rin thecentre.or fi."iiii""iii'wiii

That Certain Something ,,r(l illustratethis by spreadingover the rop few cardsof the pack. As !,'u closeup th€ spread,get a lefi lilrle finger break under the top five ,,rrdsof the pack. Ask the speclatorto dide onecard oui ofthe spreadand rememberit, lrLe back the remainingthreecardsand placethem on top of the pack. | ,lt off all the cards abovethe break wirh the right hand, the fingers , {,ncealingthe lack of thicknessat the far short endand havethe spectar,r replacehis noted card on top of the lower sectionof the pack. Slap rhc cardsin the right hand on lop of thosein the left, and squarethe card shouldnow be in the ninth positionfromthetop. l'.rtik.The selected (;ive the pack an out Faro shuffle. Only the top nine cardsof the pack ,,rcdto be accuratelyshuffled.Turn the pack faceup and appearto pull the cards from top and bottom togetherand losethem by pr.dring "ll thnt inlo the centreof th€ pack. As you pull them off, carry out the ( ilde at the lower side of the pack so that the secondfrom top card h ,(rlly pulledout, togetherwith the face card. Placethe pack facedown ,r, rherable. lnvite a sp€ctatorto cut off about half the pack, and hand it ro you. Stale that yor.rwill carry out an eliminatingprocedureto lind the , h{,sencard. Do this by running through the face down pack ard ,rt,togging alternatecards,thusthe secondfrom top is outiogged,fourth lrom top, etc., strip out the joggedpacketand placEthe remainingone li,rc wirh the original top card) face down on the table. Repeatthis .|minating procedureuntil you are left with a singlecard. As you elimirrrtca seciion,placeit facedown on lhe tablealongsidethe previousone. lhis will resultin four facedown heapson the table. Ask the name of the noted card and slowly turn i! face up to show you ||,rvr been successfulin finding it. Mention that the card chosenhas ,lwaysbecna lucky one for you when plaing poker, and that you will frlc it a liule test.Take the top card ofeach of the four facedo$n heaps irkl addthesefour cards,still facedown to thechosenone,to form a five ,ird poker hand. Say, "I wonder if it's still lucky for me?" tum lhe , xrds face up and show that it is.

",Tf;:i#il*i::JlH'l;:l**:1il':;,fi'iis: *ii,.."llffi f#r tt:lr'Ti1'..}ro:i;l;:ii"Jil;if J''lT,ff: ;:iit#ii:'#'fJ facesJ' rheir revear to i'"u,nii'.;;; ;;;; ;"'ds o;er ..JUSTINTIME''

;l'ii:.i,:'.'.";iii'-'! ,;i.T,'ll"uli::lE: :;',""lJ;lifl ,.*i'"H.i fourandsixfrom three two one ;'R;r",iffilh- t;;;i*. in posirions

,,I I'S A SET UP''

Ihis trick is based on the calbrealh principle, which was firsl , rplainedin the "Linking Ring" severalyearsago. Other peoplehave ,'.,::i:ilH.'ffi i:il"'"illi claimedthe discoveryof the principlebut as I'm not a teal magician y,11i"^19;i .lX9 i fii ,j,T"li,il::fr:i ilk) | | |nd it di fficuh to siatewho discoveredit first, so I refcr to the principle

o.iilli.',hi.l,i,li',lii'i'i'i.lilllT[ uroni';a.,r,. I'T.li"i;";.ir,i,""'ur. l,y rhe namemost card magiciansassociatewith it.

l,:::,''*lxr""x''::3';r':"'::ee.::liiiltfl1.::,liiti makingsure rhreeDackets' lr'"'nairJo.o."a*" c"hei up theremaining ro ;preadhis packetout spectaior top rell rhe ' ;;; ;'[ff;"'k:iG t70

lo prepare for the effect th€ pack must secretlybe arrangedin (llcrnatecolour order: red, black, red, black,etc. Any jokers shouldb€ tll

I Thal Certain [amethins Working lnd PresenlationOulline Hand thepack to a spectalorandaskhim 10giveit a few cutsfollowed by a riffle shuffle. He can also concludewith a few cuts if he wishes. Take back the pack and spreadit out faceup, commentingon how well the spectatorhasmixedthe cards.Look for any pair of cardsofthe same colour, cut, and completethe cut belwe€[ thesetwo cards. Explainthat you will play a new card gane with a spectatorinvolving six handsof six cards each.Deal oui six handsof cards,dealingin a conventional fashion from left to right birl arrange the hands in a horizontalrow on the table. Continuedealinguntil thereare six cardsin eachhand. Placethe remainderof the pack aside. Pick up the heapsof cards in positionsone and two of tbe row, holding |hem face down, one in the left hand and one in the right. as hc Explainto the sp€ctatorthat you will give him severaladvantages hasneverplayedbefore.Ask him which of the two handsyou are hold_ ing he would prefer. When h€ nominatesone, placeit face down near him and place the remainingone in line with his, but closerto you Repeatthis procedurewith the handsin positionsthr€eand four of the row and finally thosein five and six. As you offer eachpair for selection, placeonein front ofthe spectatorand onein front ofyourself, until tha sDectatorhas threehandsin a row in front of him and you also havea row ofthree hands.eachofyourhands beingpositioneda litde belowthc

Thal Certain Something h.,l cachhand inro two facedown heapsas you did. I inally, turn eachof his six groupsfaceup and for each wron8colour success. | \c him a minuspoint. Now turn yours face up to show 100ry0 ''.r!, "lt must be beginner'sluck, becauseI've neverplayedthis game ,I'INNY LANE''

Explain that the spectatorhas threehandslo play againstyour threc handsand you have alreadylet him have a free choiceof the handsha by letting will play. Now-saythat you will give him further advantages table and face up on the of his hands his hands. Turn each him look at spreadeachout slighalyso that the coloursof all cardsare visible.Pick up oneofyour handsand continueexplainingthe garne,sayingthat it i3 rcally based completely on chance and that you hav€ to try and guess which cardsare red and which are black with the cardsface down. As you saythis, dealyour six facedown cardsinto two facedown heapson the table, bua as you deal lhem, look at the spectator'sface up hand immediatelyabovethe hand you pickedup and dealout according10tha coloursofihe spectator'shand whenreadinSfrom rcar to tace, i.e.ifhis cardswerered, black, black, red, black, red, you would dealleft, righl' right, lefr, right, left, into two facedown heaps.Repeatthis procedura with eachof your olher two facedown heaps,againtaking your cue fo! the dealing sequencelrom lhe colour order of lhe speclalor'5hand immediatelyabove it. You will eventuallyend up with six face dow[ heapson the table, Turn the spectator'sthreehandsfacedown and saythat it is now hit turn to deal eachhand into two heaps,trying to separalethe reds froh the blacks.Point out that not only was he allowedto choosehis own hands,but he hasalsohad an opportunityto studythem fac€up Let hitD

Ihis trick and the one that follows it were inspired by effects ,lfvelopedby Karl Fulvesand Bro. Hamma[. ( hecklhat the top two cardsofthe pack are spoi ones.Turn the pack j.( c up and secr€tlyreversethe lowertwo spot cards.This is the starting lr\ition for the trick. Run ihrough the face up pack and pick out emytwo kings,placing rl('n] facedown belowthe packas you cometo them, TuJn the complete t,n.k facedown and as you squareit up into the left hand,get a lefi little l,ogerbreakunderlhe uppermostfour cards;this is wherethe cardsare I'xekto back. Pushoverthe top picturecard digbtly to the right with the ilr thumb and commentthat the pair of picture cards have magical |{ op€rties.Bringthe right halld to the packand grip the four cardsabove th. breakand flip ihem face down onto the pack. The effecl beingthat rrtr rwo f,icturecardshave beenllipped facedown. Immediatelythumb , rhe top two cardsand placethem face down on the table. 'll spread the pack between the hands for two cards to be chosen by 'trclato.s A and B. As you spreadthe pack, count off in pairs from the ,'t' and mark off the sixth card from the top by pressingon its facewith |e righr secondfinger. After two cardshave beentaken, closeup the r,,rekand pick up the breakfrom the right finger*ith the left little finger, ,' rhat it now holds a break belowthe top six cardsof the pack. l.ift off about half the pack with the right hand picking up the break N,rh the thumb at the n€ar short end. Let the cardsdribble down onto r[,se in the lefl until all b€lowlhe break havebe€nreleased and just six ,.,,dsremainin the right hand. HavespectatorA replacehis cardon top ,'l rhe cardsin the left hand. Placelhe cardsin the right hand on top of 11,,)se in the left but keepa break belweenthe two sectionswith the left I rlc finger.Lift off abouthalf the packaSainwith the right hand,again l,,|'lngup the break with the dghl thulnb. Ler the cardsdribble down ,{rro thosein tlle lefi hand until you reachthe break.Have spectatorB ,.lilacehis card al this point and ihen drop ihoseremainingin the right l,Ind on top of all. Dudng the abovecontrol sequence which will leave h. chosencardsin positionsseventhand eighth from the top of the I i( k, keepth€ right hand fingersfairly deeplyover the far short end of hc cardsit holds,to concealtheir thickness. ( iive the pack a brief ov€rhandshuffle by undercutlingabout half, irl,)gging the first card pulled off and shuffling off the remainder. i ,Dcludeby undercurtingat the injog, running six cardsand lhrowing

172

173

That Ce ain Somelhing thc balanceon top. This br;ngslhe two chosencardsto the top Plac€the gack face down on lhe table. ' pi"t uo Ltt.r*o p;cturecardrthat are lacedoqn on lhe lableandsa) pacl and lharvou \ ill te\t lh;ir magicalabilily.Takethetop ca'dof lhe hand in lhe right in i'"iit ir"r""", tft" t*o kings Hold the threecards Monle Throw Posinon the "-ir"iii"i causethe iwo kingsto iake on lhe imageof *itit.v "nd Twist the righi hand to show the fac€down ""t pliced with them the c'ard itt" lrt. packetface down and apparentlythrow theJace "^.i-aifr"" onto ttt" tuut.. R;ally ihrow the lop card down by meansof the ""iJ ro cairy out this mo"e, you must lift theuppercard iio"t"-irrro* .econdtinger beforecarrvingout Ihe (hro* Twisr -o".. *lrh r;g}tr rhe sfiqhiiv itririsir handasainro 'ho$ thelacecardandagdinuselhe Monlemove io'"o'o.t.trt tirow the facecald down on top o[ lhe previous-one the table Twr.r rhe risht hand ro \how rhe final ;ir;d;;'d.""." .ard into lhe centreof the main pack All three tnis ttrenousft ".Ju-na lo be |he same, been shown have cards --iut" _on itt. top .".a of the pack and push it betweenthe two facedown tfr" i"trc. Now ripeat the sequencealreadydescribedin th€ .u.Jr oi...aing p"t"g."pf'.,. sho* all thr€ecardsthesameha!ingapparenll) i"r.n otiti. i,i"ei or ,he card placedbel$eenrhem Alter showingrhe la\r card.oushit inro the cenlreof the main pack theirmagtcalabilil)and foundthem'uccess_ irar. ririr ttuuingresrea tesl Ask fol lhe nam(' gite a muchmore *ill rtrem no. fui vou 'evere .i iri. i*o..f..,.-a cards,and lhen dowl) rurn rhe pair ol lacedown cardsup to show thal they haYechangedto the namedcarcls' ..ONE TWO THREE BLANK'' Th€ creditsmentionedin the previouseffectalsoapplvto ihis one' and ln aaaiiion gd*a.a Marlo must be thanked for the "Penetration" usedlowardsthe endof lhe roullne --ln "eouence Jaliion ro tt'. p".k of cards threecardswrth blanl faceswill be *ouiiJ. ,r'.'. back. musl match rhe main pack qlf blank facedcard' rn lhreeacesmaybe used ilh uttlereduclron ca;notbereadibobta'ned. pacl lhe top of (he on or ace\ ir'. ot rrterri.t Place blankcards you are all set. If aces,do not usethe AHand"ii-*

the lo$ermosllhreecard\' Hold rhepacklaceup and \€crell'Ieverse in the MonleThro$ Routinc desclibed richnique sane rle lor" fotto* place lhem in a pilefacedownon remoreLhte€kingsand io apoarenrlr blank card(on the table three endrngwith lhe rtr. iatt.. 'erltl 114

That Certain Somethinp lurn the pack face up and run throughil, removingthe A, 2 and 3 of l,farls. Placethem in a face up line on the rable in numericalsequeflce lr()lnleft lo rightl'icl up the tbreekingsfrom rhe tableand hold rhemfacedown in the 1rt hand with a little finger br€ak belowthe rop one. pick up the AH { rrh ihe right hand and placeir facedown on top of rhe king packerand l,cnimmedjat€lylake off ihe top two cardsasonein the sameright hand r'r'p and rub this cardG)on the top of rhe lefr hand packeta few times. Now rub the card(s)on the face of rhe left hand packera few times. lL,rallysliding it b€low the packet.The effect shoutdbe that you have ,rbbedthe aceon rhe rop and faceoffie paclet so thar it canpick up its ,rrrage,finally placingit below the packd. Triple lift the top threecardsof the packetby bucklingihe facecard lrghtlywith the fingersof the lefr hand, and let jt fall face up onlo the ,f,naining card. Triple lift again, and flip ir face down, finally placing rlc top card facedown on rhe table. l)ouble lift to show the next card, flip it face down and placethe rop , irJdfacedown on the table on top of the card previouslyplaceddown. Iurn lhe next card face up genuinelyand then piaceit facedown on r()t of the previoustwo. The effect of rheseactionshasbeento showall rh'eecardsas the AH. Placethe final card r€mainingin your hand face ,|,'wn on the iable in the original positionoccupiedby the AH. l'lacethepile of threecardsfacedown in the left hand, gettinga break Itr.lowthe top on€,and thenpick up the 2H and repearth€ proceduredes,lhed in the previousfour paragraphsio show that all threeca.rdshav€ ,t)parentlychanAedto the 2H. Placerhe final facedown card in the left r,.urdback on the table in the position originally occupiedby rhe 2H. liftreat the procedurewith the 3H. Al the conclusionthe positionis that the thre€kingsare facedown in I r)jleon the table and the A, 2, 3 of heartsare back in their original t!)sitions,but face down. Placethe pile of kings face down on top of r[. ]H, pausefor amoment and thenturn the top cardof the packetface ,t' to showthe 3H hascometo the top. Placethe 3H faceup on the table. l'lace 2H face down on top of the threecards,pausefor a moment ,rd th€n slideout the facecard ofahe packet,turning ir faceup to show l,( 2H hastravelledfrom top to face. Piacethe 2H faceup oo the tabl€. I'lacethe threecardson top of lhe AH and showir hastravelledto tbe r,'l), finally placingit face up on |he table. llold the thre€ kings face do*n in the lefa hand and say, ..A11this r ||vity hasmadethe kingslose(heiridentiry." Tum th€m over ro reveal ||. blank faces(or aces). .I ITI] SMILING MULf,'' llctbre describingthe technicaldetailsof this effect, I should exolain

Thot Certa!n Some!htng

That Certdin Something

lhat ii is a card lrick in two parts,the first a humorousprocedureand thc seconda surpriselwist on ihis procedurewhich justilies the gag. I hope this also clarifiesthe litle.

l.l short end and thumb ai the nearone,the hand beingcurvedoverthe

Performrncernd PatterOutline Run through the pack and remove the iwo red aces. Push them iogether into the approximalecentreposition of the pack. Spreadlhe pack face up betweenthe handsto show the pair of acesat the centre, making sure the audienceunderstandthe posilion Closeup the pack' lhe ace.,andlurn lhe nackfacedoqn carrylnS serrinaa breal belween pac[ fa.c iu, uJulnorer Pa(sat the breat pornr.Pldcelhe cqLlared down on the table. Explain thai you will invite a spectatorto nameany cardand thal this card will immediatelyappearbetweenthe two aces Poinl out strongly rhe impossibilityof this actionand evenhavea speclatorplacehis finger manipulalion,if you wish on topof the pack to preventany subsequen! Whenth€ sDecla(orhasnameda card, reiterateyour sut€mentthal lt will ttett een the two red aces.Pick up th€ pack using no fasl ^ppear movementsand turn it faceup. Showthereisar€d aceat eachend' so lhe namedcard is indeedbetw€enthem-Spreadthe cardsbetweenthe hands until you reachthe namedone and exhibitthe spreadin this conditionto the audienceto prove your claim. This situadonalwayscausesamuse' assumethat they "have beenhad" with a gagwhjch ment and audiences even rarely noticethe facethat in someway the aces is now over-they havejumped from the centreto lhe ends Under cover oi the "misdireclion of amusemeni" carry out the HofziNer cull movewith the namedcard, so thai whenyou closeup the facespread,it endsup belowthe pack. Turn the pack face down, carrying out the Turnover Pass al the approximatecentrepoin( and placethe pack facedown on the table if just'our Sat.'l rhinl \ouqouldharebeenmuchmoteimprer\ed q pacl Prckup Ihe hole in'tead of lhe ace5, between card'had appearid lhe packvery cleanly,and dowlyspreadit faceup betweenyour handslo revealthe acesat the centrewith the namedcard caughlbetweenlhem'

',rAcE TO rACE" I believelhe principleusedin lhis €ffecl wasoriginatedby Dai Vernon and recordedin lhe "Daley Notebooks" This is a very simpleapplica lion of ihe principle,bul givesa quick straighlforwardeffect for thosc occasionswhen you ar€ handeda pack and ask€dlo "do a lrick." Hold the Dackfacedown in the lefl hand and cut off aboul half with the right. Hold the right hand sectionfrom above,with lhe fingersal lhe

lwist the right hand to showthe facecard ofits sectionand thenturn rrr. hand back so that the cardsar€ again face down. l'ut the left thumb belowiis halfand usethe thumb to fliD il faceuo on l,r hand.Pushrhefacecardovera litrlero Lherighr,dra*ingaueniion Ilring the right hand half towardsthosein the left and pivot the face ,,rrd out dighdy usinSthe Ovette/Kellytechnique.As lhe halvesmeet l.r(r to face,ler the sid€joggedcard at lhe face of the left hand section '.1,r)in immedjatelyabove the pivoted card of the rigir hand section. ( ontinuemoving lhe right hand towardsthe left, but Dositionia about l, forward ot the left, so that the cards come face lo fac€ in an ,rrtjoggedposition. Adjust the cards so that each half is square,bu! iLr.rintain th€ outjoggedpositionof the upper face down s€ction. I'akehold ofthe completepack with th€ right hand, thumb on top and r,nsersbelow, and grip ir fairly righdy ro keepthe roggedcondition as lr,u let go conpletelywith the left hand. Twist the right hand back and l,{th a few timesto sho* the cardsat the faceof eachhalf ard requesta t)cclatorto oameone,pointingout that he hasa completelyfreechoice. wh€n he har chosenone, placethe pack back in the left hand so thar rhc half containinghis card is uppermostand in an outjogSedposiiion. I'hce rhe right thumb tip on rhe near short end of the upper facedown .f.rion and the fingersat the far short end and tilt lhe packetforward by li,rinSthe innerendwith the lhumb. At the samelime pushwith the dght r,'r8erson its endso that it movesinwardsarld linesup with the far shora ,,,d of rhe lower section.Now lift th€ upper sectioncompletelyaway lr,'n the packand placeit facedown on the table,inviting a spectatorto ,,!er it with his hand. I ou are left with a face up half in lhe left hand with a face down card rr,rt has secretlybeenloaded below lhe face card. Turn this half face l,trln and in this action cary out a Turnover pass at the approximate ,.,,tre poiDt.End by holding the half face down in the right hand. \ay you will causethe card noted at the faceof the half the spectator 1.,\ his hand on do a circus trick. lt will leap inro the air and do a .,{nersaultand, whilstit is in lhe air, you will catchit in your right hand. ll,'ust your right hand forward, aboul 12" abovethe sDectator's.and .'\, Cor it. 'Spreadyour facedownhalf out lo showrhefaceup card rhecentre.Lel the speciatorlook at the faceof his half to seethat his 'r ,,r{l really has gone. He will normally do this withour any prompting

I IRESIDE FACES'' A nory is told of how picturesform when gazinginto a coal fire. the

That Certain Something story being acled our with playing cards.The trick has an unexpected visualendingwhich is quite effective. The only paeparationis to havea card secretlyreversedin the second from top position. The name of this card and ihe top card of ahepack should be remembered,and they should bo|h preferably be spot cards. For example,l€l's say the top card is the 4D and the rcversedsecond from top is the 5C. Cive the pack a brief shuffle, retarningthe top two cardsin position, and th€n extendit towardsa spectator,requestinghim to cut off about half the pack. Flip the cut off sectionfaceup onto the remainderof tha pack, Spreadthrough the face up sectionof the pack, sayingthat you will removea card for yourself with stralrgepowers, lt do€snot malt€r which card you choosebut try and find a pictureone, as it makesfor a morc effectiveending.Placeyour card faceup on the table. Continue spreadingthe face up section until the top face down card of the lower sectionshowsup, Lift the lower sectionto a verticalposition and thumbover the top card, requestinga spectatorto rememberit. Dua to Mr. HenryChris!'singenuitythe cardhe looks at will be the 5C. After he has noted it, draw ii back squarewith the packet,and lowet it io a horizonralposition.Placethe other sectionofthe packon top, but keep a br€ak betweenthe tl{o halves. Cut or Double Undercut tle pack at thc breakpoint to bring the lo*er secion to the top. Repeatthe procedure already explained, having another spectalor cul off about half lhe pack, and place it face up on the remaining face dowtl se€tion. Run throug:hthe face up seclion as before, removing a card for yourselfwhichis placedwith the onealreadyon thetable.Try 10removc anotherpicturecard that links in someway with the first one, i.e. sama suit, sam€colour, etc., and give lhis link as your reasonfor removing these particular cards, Let the spectator not€ the first face down card (4D) and thm reassemblethe pack, finally cutting at the break to briog the 4D and 5C back to the top. Pick up one of th€ picture cards from the table with the right hand and dudng this action get a left little fin8er break under the top two cards of the pack. Placethe picture card face up on top of the pack but ouljoggcd by about one-thirdof its length.Gazeat the faceof this card, patterin8 about pictures appearing when you gaze at a fire, and how you havc developedthh processand applied it to playing cards. After a secondor two, stalethat the cardyou canseeis the 5C, the first sp€ctatorconfirding fta! this was his card. Pick up the secondpicturecard from th€ lable and placeit faceup on top ofthe pack so that it is injoggedfor about I'Gaze at the faceof Gii card for a few secondsand then name the 4D, the secondspectator't

t hat cer,atn somerntng ,'hovethe l€ft litde finger. Continuepushingwith the riSht thumb which ,\ now pushingthreecardsasone,until about+" ofthe backshowsat the ,,r er end of the pack. The pair of face up cards will now be slightly , tjoSged in an overlappinS display. Bring the right hand to the far short edgeof the face up parr, placing rhe fingersbelowlhem and thumb on the face.Crip them tightly (really Iour cards)at thepositionnearestthe far shortendof the main packand, lceping them locked toSether,lift lhem away from the pack and lurn rhemfacedown by simplytwistingth€ dght hand towardsthe body until rhecardsassumea facedorl'r|position,Placethem back on the pack so rhat the lop card(s)linesup exactlywith the main pack, the singlecard I'clow it assuminga[ injoSgedposition. With rhe right hand,lift offtheupper card(s),placingthethumbat the rear short end and fingersat the far one, the hand b€ingcurvedabove rlrccard(s).Usethe left hand long sideof this card to flip the injogged itrrr belowit fac€up and take this cardin its faceup conditionbelowthe Ltcedown oneG)in the right hand, positioningit so that it projectsfor ,rbour1' beyond the left hand /org sid€ of the upper card(s),its face I'cingclearlyvisibleto the spectators.Supportthe cardsin this position lor a momentby holding them againstthe pack with the left thumb and rli€ntakethem againinto the right hand,cha[gingthe right handgrip so rlc thumb is on top and fingersbelow,their positionbeilg suchthat the lour cards are locked together and from the audience'sviewpoint ,rl)Dears as just two cards being held face to face in an overlappiry (rsplay. 'fhe prec€dingmovestake only a few seaondsto carry out, and are ll.signedto give a fairly logicalway of turning the cardsover. Explain that somepeopl€ have difficulty in s€€ingpictures in fires, so \i,u will try and makethe imag€syou haveseena little clearer.

Fagure 30

Placeyour right thumb on the inn€r edgeof the injoggedcard and push it forwards until you feel your thumb butt againstthe two carda

178

119

i

That CertainSomething

That Certain Something

K€€Dincthe cards in the righl hand in a horizontal position' bring hand' rfri. i-iiitr.io lrt..igttt of th; main pack being htld in thr lefi place llngenlps.or lhe aclion this and during No!! movc them upwalds on the bact of lhc prorruding face up card By pre\sing .rr. i*,l*a

\r'C'clators and twist the wrist so that th€ two cardsit holdsare faceup. sry, "What do the two values add up to?" This approachdraws nrrentionto the right hand and not the pack in the left. The pack has tr.rually landed into the left hand face up, but if you catch it fairly dcep Ir the hand and usea little coveringmovementin the throw, it will pass

,rti-riii n"iersthccardis pu downontothelop of the ,r*rri" "i*r sametimetherisht l0 asin FiEurc iiii"i i'iii i.,, 'd At rhe pah solhal it movls "iation lhe upper of card lower on rtte [r"a nn"o. oustt

overtowirds-thclcfl to replaceftc one fiat hasb€€nstolenonto lne r*i, il" eiiJ oi tit procedureis to Sivea visualchanSeof the faceup iiJi. iii" lo.l" taaiiion ihe fac€down uppercardhaschangedto the iC. irriiecrtniquels similarto tharof the PaintBrushchanS'e' -'o."r tt. i*"-.-atliom therighthandtaceupontorh€table'sayinS' "15"11. levv g41vou seethem?" "REVERSf, PREDICTION'' Thisis a strarahtfonardcardrevelalionAfler all' youshoulddo one colour,growlarge,growsmall'lurn ttict'*rr.*i'trii".i a*sn't change etc. a somersault. 'iii. tr,etac€two cardsof the packand mentallyadd irt.''ii""t thefacetwo rev€rsc rrr.iior.iic" iu* "rlrt" packfacedownandsecretly race up ar the cards two of lhe toral ttre iJ'i sav F;;;;;i;, ;;. bottomis elevcn, *i;i;;;;;;io. to be r"kenand as vou do this countonc less "". t"rDirnU"*arotalandmarkoff a breakat thispoint ln our ,fr* "oui J*"-ii. ir *o"to t r.n cardsfrom thelop oncea cardhasbeentaken' keepthebreakwilh thr lefl little ling€r'Requesl J.* iro ii. pt"i lhc csrd and lo showil to any otherspec' rcmember -a ,rt" iJt"ii'i. drop the lcft handdown towardsvour lefi side ;;;i;, ;;";;. ;;; packsecretly ii"fttf". *a lhen brinS$; handup againbur with the Th€break lop al the now are rcversediards to,rt",,t'"1wo iuioJi*i, be maintained. must 'i""i '''?rr"still irti ..t..,.a cardandpushit fac€do*n inlo thepackarthe a lefrlitrlenngerbreakabowir' under b';;;"fi:';;;;;-;it,ger srrgnrrv ol tnepacx upthctopcard action,lifl squaring cover;fftesame ;d rakea breakb.low it with the lefi lhird finger' GiverheDacka Doubleundarcu!,talinSoff lhe rop hall al tnelllrlc n,ti--urea[ ooinranafeepinglhc top cardbreakwilh lhe riSlt thumb o."tte tjndircutmouesotharrhetop cardendsat rhc ii"]i"."iiiiG brcaksareheld fee'-i"v Th; Dackis souareandnolwo cardsin lh€packwhoierorallalu€s find ,]i"r vou *ift i.v "nd card Takelhepackinlo lh' chosen lhe of *ililu irt. .i"",'p"silion "".i ir,"tu o",tte top and fingerson theface'and Lhenlhrowit .i"ii fr"i,a. i;i; rhe left irand. T1rerop and facecardswill autoli"'k;;;il i; the rishr hand Move this hand towardsthc ;;ifi ;;;;i;6; 180

Hand the pack to a spectalor and lei him count down from th€ top of rhc pack to th€ value indicated by the two cards. When he does so, he \Iould b€ surp sedto find the chosencard hasturned face up. Conclud€ hy saying,"You may haveseenme ge! your cardto the number,but did vou seeme turn it face up?" ..STUDIED IMAGf,'' In this effect a "tongue in cheek" patter theme is used to sell a rcversedcard trick. This ce ainly is a casewherethe pres€ntationis more x portant than the method, although I think the technique used is casonablydirect alld efficient. ' working rnd Presentrtion Outllne You must stafl with a card secretlyrevers€dat the bottom of the face {lownpack. spread the pack casually betwe€nthc hands and then closethe spread !r ihai the pack k held squarein lhe left hand. Take carc that you do not crpose the reversedcard. I normslly givc thcm a shufll€, retaining the hotlom card in position, and when spreading them !o show the Ddc*s, uy, ''Look how well m;xedthey are." This type of line can be delivcred wrthoutcomicability and still laise a grin. Close up th€ cards and hold tham face down in the lefl hand. Riffle rlown rhe outcr left comer with tbe left thumb, inviting a spectator lo nop you at somepoint. Break the pack at the request€dspot, taking t}le uper half off with the right hand and requestthe spectatorto remcmber Ihc card at the fac€ of this half. Rcplacethe upp€r half on thc lo*er but furry out the ovette/Kelly Placement, so that the noled card endsup at rhc faceof th€ pack. spread the pack face do$n bctw€en the hsnds, taking care not to Irveal the reversedcard ncar the facc. Look at the backsand sayyou are roing to try and makc an image appear on th€ back of one of lh€ cards rhnrwill tell you the namcof the notedone. Saythat thc imagewill only lt a faint onc, but that with yearsof practice you are able to se€it. Close {l) the spreadas you are explaininS this and in doing this carry ou! the stread Half Pass at the approimate centre point of the pack, All tlis Incansis that the lower half is secretlyturned face up under @ver of the l8l

Thot Certain Something

That Certain Something

half beingclosedaboveii loD '-'e*"i" n"\r faint the imagewill be, slowly slarl lo \pread o.i"ii* "", rhe Jack Letweenthe handr unlil the faceup card showsup at the centre i. ,t'"t ,he risht hand is holdins rh€ upper half wirh the ii..irir'. "".i irt. s.,rom oi it. Move rhe righLhand towardsrlte rable L* ""."iJ"i tlre face up card lhere lor a moment Lean over and ga?eal aioosir ^na lt \ nol loo clearbut I think il's lhe imageol ini.",rv, *ytig. G. ""ti (her.-namewhateuertard ir is) As vou do lhis'.push ii" i*a;"rt-"ai1; itt ttt. Ieft hand half sliShtlyand get a break belowil tfr" itp "-a "r.r irt" ritii" iing"t. so.etimes a spectatorwill smile and sav that he €an *iirr .." it. itug.. ,o-o.If tttit hupp.n.' .otm€nl, "Can you reall)? It lool y""rt or practiie and ir's still none too clear"' rn. vi"ri*i "'pi*"ir'. the ,leh, handseclionbackon top of the lefl mainlaininS with the left liltle finger. break " pushjr i,i"f r"ifrfl""irp *rd iom thetablewiLhtherighl handand A\ md .tiir'i"".irJinio rrt. p""k makinSsureil.Soesverl near-theJace al,lhe a Half.Pass soon as rhe card is squarewirh Ihe pack catry oul lnal n N break Doim$d immediorel,t$ist the pack over end lor eno so il is now a card o[ the back the on imag€ tt*i"g teadihe i"", i".. Do card noted paik remo\€ and "ri. the )oLrr ilii,oush t; .;il'-;;i.; this in line with Your Patter.

genuinecuts to finish, fioally glimpsingth€ value of rhe face card and cuttingcardsequalto its valuefrom top to fac€of rhe packet.It is quite easyto transferthe correctoumberof cards if you spreadthe packet beforemaking the cut. If the card you glimpseis a high one, give the packanothercut or two until a low one appearsa( the face,so thal you only have to transfera few cards.lf the ace of heartsis the card you and if rhe card you glimpseis not a Slimpse,no cut ai all is necessary, h€art,cut the packetto get a heart at the face. Spread the packet face do*'ll and remove the second from face card. placingit in your right hand trouserpockel.Make surethat no-onesees its face. As you closeup the remainderof the spread,gei a left little linger break above the fourth card ftom the face. Explainthat you havea magicalsystemfor findiog out the nameofthe card in your f,ocket,and that it consistsof making the cardsrearange themselv€sinto numeric ord€r so that it is easy to seewhich one is mrssng. Turn the packet face up, maintaining the little finger break, and start to spreadthe cardsout slowly.After you havepushedoverthe first two lards, take the next two asone (easyb€cause of the break)and continue spreadingihe remainderout normally.The spectatorswill note that the cardsar€ in numericorder and you point out that it's thereforeeasyto scethal the four of heartsis missing. Clos€up the spread,and as you do ihis, SideStealtI€ eightof hearrs rnto the riSht hand. Reachinto the trouserpocket with ihe rigli hand rnd bring out the palmedcardbackto the audience.Tum it faceup as if ro confirm that it is the missingfour ofhearts. Appearsurprisedthat ii h rot the four, and placeit face up on the table. Tum the packerfaceup rnd re-spreadit to show that th€ missingcard is indeedthe eight spor.

..A IRICX FOR MR. FIELDS'' llnding ln this ettecr, the p€rtormetappearslo explainhi\ svstemtor a'-lrlng catfles his e\planatlon However' the nameofan unkno$n card an effectiveendingto the trick' i"ii" ,rii'; *rri"r, -"1.t P€rformrnc€ Outlitre hearl\' Run $rouch lhe face up pack and remot€ rhe ace ro len of

pr".i'i iii..L

order'endinswirhthe iti. t"* of ihepackin numeric

at the face. ten "'iir*a,r'. r"". tencardsandthenclosethemandlift lhemawav "".i in rhisacrionremoveoneextracardbehindthem r..ri ii. rheirorder' i;;,n the tefr haodro rherisht lhus reversins a;;;ii;..'', "".i.-rt call arren hearts two of rh€ top of on card. :ili;; ;;;ilt i*o on. ^ you them sho* a5 cards ten of lhe ord€r iion tJ the numeric 'Iurn the Dacketfacedownand appearlo mix lhemup Dyuslngrtrc roP rt"*n iri" uo. shutfle.Thatis' pushoff a frw cardsfrom the packet the of ".ir botlom the from cards a [e$ Lhen r.i" ,'rt.t"r'i-iii"i, *a Continuethis action.pushinsolf cardsaltemarrrelv ;;-,;;;iiil;. lookslike 3 i-. il"i.p-""a u",,.m into the righthand This actionpacket a few the cive cards the cuis ili, tti lt.ealitv onlv ".""f""itt 182

..THtr IIELENSBURGH TRJANGLE'' Briefly, the ploi of this effecr is that cards placed betweena pair of queensvanish.Eventuallythe wholepack is placedbetweenthe queens, .rndil, too, vanishes,but in an unexpected way. Put anotherway, it's a t)lot for the colour changingpack-confused?Then readon. worldry Outline You will ne€d a red backedpack of cards, plus the iwo black faced ,tucensfrom a blue backedpack.The packshouldbe stackedas follows, rerding from the face of ihe pack. About ten cards, red backed QS, ,lbour ten cards, blue backd QC, remainderof pack, reversedred l,xckedQC and finally the blue backedQS facing rhe sameway as rhe l,ulkof the pack.

r83

That Certain Something

That Certain Something

To p€rform the effect, run throu8h the face up pack and removethe QS and QC asyou cometo them, placingt}lem faceup on the table, the QC beinS on the face of the QS. Turn the remainder of th€ pack face down in t}le left hand and get a left little finger brcakbelo\r the top card ofthe pack. Pick up lhe pair of black queensin the right hand, keeping them fac€ up, holding them in a slightly spraad condition. Bring them towards thc pack and let the card above tle little finger brcak feed in between them. Squarc the cards on top of the pack with the right hand but keep the break (now below three cards) with the left little fin8er. Place your lcft thumb on the face of the QC and hold it in position on top of the pack whilst the right hand draws out the two cards below it to the right ard away from the pack in a squarcd condition, fingers at the far short end a|ld thumb at the near one. The left little finger keepsa break below the QC. Bring the right hand cards back over the pack and add the QC below them as the left thumb go€s onlo the facc down card and retains it in position as the right hand moves away to the right with its packe!. The face do*n card is rctained on top of the pack but should be jogged slightl! to the riart so thot lhe face of the QC shows below it. The remaining card(s) in thc rigit hand is placed on top of the pack, also jogged to the righr. This r€sults in a very fait display of the face down card sandwichcdbctweenthe face up queens. Close up the spread snd get a left litde finger brcak below the facc down card, Now d€al the quecnsonto the table one on top of the othet in a sliahtly spr.ad condition to show that the face do*n card has vadshed from bctwccn thern. The QC wiU bc on the facc of lhe labled quecns. Repeat t}lc vanishing sequencedescribed in the preceding three paraSraphsa couple more limes, finally cnding with the que€nsface up on lhe lable. Adjust the left little finger break so that is is oow below the top two cards of the pack. Pick up the qucens from the table with the right hand by first pickiru up tbc QC and using it to scoop up the QS. The QS is thus transfcrred to thc face of the pair, after which thcy are adjusted to a squared face down position in the right hand, lhe grip being at the opposite short ends. Bring the right hand over th€ pack and place the left thumb on thc back of thc uppermost queenas if you are going to draw it onto thc pack, but really change the pair of cards in the riSht hand for the pair of cards on top of th€ pack by gripping the pack pair with the third finger and thurrb of the rigllt hand and moving them to the right and away from tbe pack ss the left thumb presscsdo*'n on the pait originally in the righl hand ard keepsthem on top of thc pack. It should look as if on€ facc down quecn bas beenretained on lop of lhe pack altd one left in the riSht hand. No left litlle finger break is any longer requrred. Say as well as making cards vanish betweenthem, lhe queenscan also do acrobatics.Placethe card(s)in the right hand on top of the pack,

lrjoggedslightly,then push the cardG)squarewith ihe pack and slidea lngle card back to the injogged position to reveal that the lower queen l,r. rurned face up. fake rhe rop que€nand lurn ir face up, slippingir below lhe face up QC, and then turn both face do*n on top of the pack, rrking carethat they do not spread. Say you will give the quecns a real test by trying to make the whole l)ack vanish from betweel them. Turn the pack lace up and pull out the QC using the Clide, and place it on the face of the pack. Turn the pack lace down and llip the top card (QS) face up and face do$n again, saying,"A queenat eachend of the pack." Position the pack deep in the right hand in a necktie de6l position and rhen deal the top two que€ns face up on the tablc, safng, "Look, the r)ackhasvanished."Flip the queensfacedown with the right h6nd and say, "ltt not hiddenunder one of them!" Look at your lefi hand and say, "Oh! itt this you are wondering about,this pack is nothing !o do with tllis trick, it's a red back€done I use in my next trick," Spread the pack in a long facc down spread slowing that it is indeeda red backcdone.

184

185

Sleighls

Chapter8

the face one of the pair, the section moving downwards as a locked block. Figure 32 shows the position after the cardshave becn pushed downwards. Figure 33 shows an exposed view wit}l the left hand removed completely and the position of the rear sectiob of the pack and upjogSed card can be clearly seen.ln practice of coursethe left hand is nevcr removed and in faal does not changeposition at all, oncei! has pushedits sectiondown.

Sleights ..THE MIJLTIPLE SHTFI"

Figure32

I first read of this excellent slerghtin the Tarbell Courseof Ma8ic, the move b€io8 the invention of the Master himself, Dai Vernon. The handling I us€ is a little different to Mr. vernons, and i5 as We iill assumethat two cardsare to b€ inse ed into the packand conrrolled.alrhoughil could be a largerquantity or jun a iinSle card.

Figure3'l //\

,1t Figur€33

l) Hold the packin the rrghthand asshownin Figure3l and inserttwo cardsinlo different parts of the rear half of the pack with the left hand. Ke.p the left halld in position as shown in Figure 31. Note how the for€finger is at the centre of the upper short end. 2) Push the left forefinger slightly forward towards the face sid€ of the pack so that the protruding cards are sliShtly under tension and the cardsbetweenthem are locked together.Grip the sidesof the pack with the fingersand thumbsof both hands,keepingthe right hand forefingeron the face of the pack as shown. 3) K€ep the riglt hand absolutel! still and mo\e lhe left hand downwards,taking with ii the protrudingcardsand all the cardsbehind 186

.l)The right hand thumb and liitle finger now grip the injoggedrear section of the pack on opposite edges,th€re being no need to alter the positionofthe righr hatld at all to do this. The lefi handSripsthe front section of the pack and $e upjogged card betwe€nthe thumb and secondfinger, the rhumb beingmovedvery slightlyupwardsto make this possible. t87

Sleights Th€dght handnowbrisklypulls its sectiondownwardsandplaces it on the faceof lhe sectionbeingheld by the left hand, the right handgrip still belngcompleielyb€tweenthe little fingq and thumb. Theresultof this actionis to leavethe two cardsodginallyinserted into diff€rent partsof the pack, togelherat the top.

Sleights

.THE HAIF PASS" I do not knowwhoto creditfor this sleight,it seemsto beasold asthe Passitself andtet slill not usedto any greatextentby colljurers.The basichandlingI useis as follows: l) Start*ith thc packfacedownin thelef! handwith a fleshbreakheld at thc baseof the thumbat the point al whichthe Half Passh to be mad€. 2)Bring lhe righl handoverthe pack, fingersat the far shortendand tbumbat thc nearoneand takehold of the sectionabovethe break. Kcepth€right handwcll overthe packsothat the fingersgiveplenty of coverat the outer sho end. 3)Keepinghold of theuppers€ctionwith th€right hand,pull thelower secliondownwith the fingersof lhe left handso tharit hidgesdow[wards,thepivotpointbeingat thebascofthe left thumb.Theleft forcfingeris just aroundtle outer shortendof the pivotinghalf. As lhe left hand continuesthe pivoting action, the sectionleavesits pivot point asshownin Figure34,andrevolvesuntil it is almostfac€ up. Theleft handnow movesupwardstaking thecelldsup, to square with the uppersection,as shownin Figure35.

The left thumb moves down to rest on lhe top of lhe pack (Figure 16)so that it is now aduauy grippedbetweenthe lefi fingersb€low and the lhumb on top. The Half Passis complcteand ftc righl hand can b€ removed if the trick requircs it. However, I nomally con_ tinue thc actiod a3 follows:

Figure36

Figure34

188

189

Sleights

Sleights

Figurc36a

Figute37

ao

a

e 4)fie.rlghr hand is rnovedslighlty upwardsaway from the pack and me rctl DaDdrmmc
Figure38

"sEcoNDstN" This is my handlingof a rnovedevisedby VerneChesbro.lr is, in fact, _. (he.oppojrle result to a seconddeal, the top card being shown ani rcptacedDut,$cretly€ndingup secondfrom the top, lt is usefulin many tricks bur will rake a little limc ro learn and perform wilh confidence-. The technical details are as follows: 1)Hold the pack face down in tlle l€ft halld and remove the top card vrith the riSht hand, boldine it as sho*n in Figure 3? at the bottom right hand corner. Twist the right hand as sfiown in Figure 37 tJ show the face of the top card, keeping the card close!o th; pack and not quite in a face up condition as compared with the f;ce down pack. A sideon vi€w of this positionis shown in Figure38. 190

t9l

Sleights

Sleighls

2)As the card is beingshown by the right hand, the left thumb pus rhe lop card ol the pack over sliChtly.Thi\ action is exDosed Figures37 and 18, but it is imporlant to rememberthat Figure 3 showsthe audiences'view and that the card you can see from the top of the pack slightlyin this illustrarion,would not mally be seer,dueto the card in the riShthand concealingit. F 38 is an exposedsideon view. 3)Theright hand now startsto turn so that its cardwill againend in fare down condirion but in doing this it feedsthe left hand long of the card below the one protruding from lhe top of the p Figure 39 rhowsan exposedside on view ot rhis aclion.

A perfect weavemeans tbat exacily half the pack is merged rdth.lhe tnhc; half so thal everycard alternates,however,nearlyall of the tricks \||l'l the weaveshuffle in tbh book, only requirea few cardsfrom the r',t);f eachsectionto be accuratelymeshed,a much easierprocedure. I he handling usedis the same,whether the complete halvesale me.geal a few cards,so the descriptionwill assumethat you wish to carry ',r iusl r'[r a completeweaveof a filty two card pack.

Figure40 \

Figure39 The right hand continuesthe action of twistingto bring the card completely fac€ down and pushesit inwards using the forefinger on the right long edgeso that it squaresup with the main pack. Tha right forefinger also servesthe purpose of pushing on lhc edSeof tha card it is bein8fed under, so that this alsosquaresup with the main pack. As the card is b€ing fed below the top card, the left hand Divoti rh€ pack downwards vert sliehtD. This action is importani and helpsconsiderablyin coveringthe move. The move can be fitted into mary tricks, one of rhe most obviou! beingthe 'Ambitious Ca.d', its usecutting down on the excessive useof the flouble Lift in this effect.

Figurc41

..TIIE WEAVE SHUTFLE'' The perfect weave (or faro) shuffle has been around for a long tima but in my opinion, it was not until Alex Elmsleydevelopedhis many tricks and principlesusing tlle shuffle, that its full Dotentialbecam;

192

193

Sleights

SleiShts

Hold the pack in the left hand as shown in Figure 40, thumb on thl near long side, for€fingd restinS on the back of t}lc pack and remainint fingers at the far long side. Bring the right hand !o the face of the pacl and use the thumb to lift off cxactly half the pack by placing it on tha near long side, €stimating the half way point and lifting thesesway frorl the face end of th€ pack by raising the right thumb slightly as in Figura 40. The forefingerand lillle finger of the righl hand rest on rhe faceo the pack, the remainingfingersbeingon the far long side.Lift the fac! half completely away from the tear one for a moment. Move the right forefingerto th€ uppershort end of the pack and brini the halvestogetherasshownin Figure4l. Note how the dght little fingcr forms a restfor the facecardsoflhe two halves.Adjust the halvesso thst only lhe edgesof the cardsimmediatelyabovethe riSht little finger ara touching,the halvesbeingheld in a slightV shapero make thh possibla. Now move the upper half slightlytowardsyou with the right hand and the lower one slightly away from you with the lef!, which will result in tha halvesmeshingtoSethera5showoin Figure41. Do not hold the cardstoo tightly whilst the shuffletakesplace,althoughonly practicecan tell you the correctpressures to apply.

.nd and the thumb the nearone,the hand itselfbeingcurledoverthe top r)l lhe card. The riSht forefingerrestslightly on the back of the card Now take the second card below the first, third finger pressingagainst rhli far short end and thumb the near one, The thumb is now pressing rgainstthe near short edgeof two cards.The two cardsshouldb€ lined up one b€low thc other and kept very close togethet, the left hand long (dgesactually touching each oth€r and the right hand onesbeing about a (tr;rter ofan inch apatt. lt is easierto pick the cardsup from lhe table,if rhey are curved along their length sliShtly. The rigbt hand twhts clockwiseat the wrist to show the faceof the lower card, It turns to bring the cards fac€ down again and moves rowardstlle left. After moving about six inches towards the right second fingermovesoutwardsvery slightlyand at the sametime the riSht hand nrovesback towards the right. The result of theseactionsis that th€ lpper card of the parr drops strarS]rtdown onto the table. As the righl hand is moving back the grip on the card remainingin it is changedby the third flacingthe right secondfinget on the far short endand released iurger.Wllen the right hand comesto rest,the lingersare exactlyin the |osition they would assumeif the lower card really had beendropped. Practice the throw by really dropping the lower card and imitating this rction. lt is possibleto get to a standardwhereit is quite impossibleto (lclectthe fekethrow and not too much practiceis requiredto reachthis nandard.

G.ncrd Notes on W€av€ Shuffles a)An 'out' shuffle with an evenquantiryof cardsmeansthat the top and face cards of the group remain in these positions afier thc shuffle. b)An 'in' shuffle with an evenquantity of cardsmeansthat the top and face cards lose these positions after the shuffle, ending second from the rop and secondfrom the face. c) An 'out' shuffle from the face of an odd quantity of cardsmeans that you must cut the largersection(in the caseofa 53 cardpack,2T cards)from the lace beforeyou shuffle. d)An 'in' shuffl€ from the faceofan odd quantity ofcards meansthat you must cut the smaller section from the face bcfore you shuffle. e) For 'out' or 'in' shufflesfroh the top of an odd quantity of cards, just follow the rulesin 'c'and 'd'abov€, but apply them to the top of the pack. 0 A no.mal odd quantity weaveshufflemeansyou merelyshufflethc smallerhalf into the larger. ..THE MONTE THROW'' My monterouiin€is describedin ChapteroDeof rhisbook and for rhat routine it is only necessary to learn a good righr hand rhro*, so th€ left hand will be ignoredin rhe descriptiontbat follows. You will needjust two cardsto practicethe move.Tak€ rhe first face down in the right hand, the secondfinger pressingagainsrthe far short 194

,.IHE CLASSICPASS'' It seemsto me that the Pass is a much underratedsleight when .orreclly done,it is fast, silentand extremelyefficientand well wortb the trracticer€quiredto achievethesecharacteristics. 'Ihereare ofcoursemany substitutesfor the Pass,but b€foreconsidel_ ulg them,makesureyou comparctheeIJectrheygivewith that whichthe l'assgives.The effect of the Passshould be that a card is chosenfrom rhcpack by a spectatorand then replacedon top of the lower half of the t)ack.The upper half is then plac€don top to sandwichthe card aathe (cntre. The card in th€seaciionshas been€ontrolledto the top of ihe spreads,cuts or shufflesfrom the tJack,thereare ro post replacements, \pectator'sviewpoint.There are few view substitulesthat will give this .xact effect in sucha cleartwaY. My handlingof the ClassicPassis as follows: I ) Fan the Dackfor a card to be taken and thencloseit and cut off the upper half witb the right hand. 2)Havethe card replacedon lop of the lower half and then placethe upperhalf on top of the lower one, insertingthe tip of the left little finger betweenthe two halves.Note in FiSure4l how the left hand forefinger is curled around the outer short end of the pack. The 195

Sleights

Sleights

right hand is not shown in Figure 4l for clarily, bul is of course curvedover lhe pack afrer replacinglhe upp€r half. . r,In€ rl8nl nand ts stretchedwell over the pact, so rhal the finsers give plentyof coverat rhe fronr, rhe hand only gripplng tl,e lo_wii secnonot the pack betweenthe fmgersat the far shon end and rnumDat ti€ oear one, My grip is only reauy berweenthe senond lrnger and rhumb of thf right hand, as can be sefn in Figure42.

l) Ihe left hand now movesthe upperhalf slightlyto th€ ieft by simply movingth€ fingerstowardsihe left. This actionwill causethe upper half to pivot upwardsas shownin Figure 42. At ihe sametime the right hand pulls upwardsslightly on the lower half, a rear view of rhis being shown in Figure 43. The combinedactionsof the two handswill result in the two sectionschanSingplacesand it only remainsto closethe left fingersin again to bring its half back to square up with the one gripped by the rieht hand. The reason for thc left forefinger being curled around the outer short end is to preventthis half from swingingout too far, a very common fault in the executionof the Pass. (;rreral Noteson the P.ss

Figure42

t I is most important that the halves do not touch each other dttritrg the ( tions. This resultsin a completelysilent Pass. Neveratlempt the Passwithout someform of misdir€.tion Cet their ircntion away from your handsfor a momcnt, liming (which is part of misdirection)is most importan!. I normally I'lncethe upperhalf on top ofthe lower and immediatelydo the Pass,as I l()okstraightat tlle spectatorsand say "you didnl take th€ Joker did r'rr? , or someother typ€ of pointlessqu€slion. .' I'HE TIJRNOVER PASS'' Ihe Turnover Pass I use is based on the Hermann one and its ,ohsequent updatingby Hugardand 8raue, in their book "The Invisible A card is selectedfrom the pack and retumed to the lop of the lower lrilf. As the top half is replaceda flesh break is taken betweenthe two l,rlvesat the baseof the left tlumb. Ihe right hand com€sover th€ pack 1otake up the positionshownin t rsurezg. Note how the hand h low on the back to give plentyof finger , i,ver at the outer short end. I he left hand fidgersnow pull down on the right hand long sideof the t)rek and as this sectionstartsto reacha verticalposition,tlle left hand 1,nr8sidemovesacrossthe faceof the upper half, not touchingbul very , losero it, until the lower half reachesthe positionshownin Figure45. As soonasthh positionis reach€d,th€ right hand startsto pushdown on rlc upperhalf slightly,so that it pivots againstthe right lhumb and the I rFhthand long sidestarlsto move downwards. l heleft hand now startsto twist over to a palm down position,the left r||trmbpushingon the edgeof the long sideit is touchinguntil the lower |nll squaresup with the upper half as shown in Figure46. As the pack r.irehesits faceup positionthe right hand is removed.

Figure43

196

19'l

Sleights

SleiShts Notelhat in FiSure45 the right hand fingershavebeenextendedto thes€fingersremain ,heacti6n.ln performance. ."p"*a tl!" " "r pack "" in Figure'14' as ot the .-''urlcdovir the tronl I)o IIot usethe TumoverPassunlessyou havea partIn yourrouune an obvlous qhcrethe packhasto be turnedover' I know this seems any wrthoui move the us€ but I haveseenmany con.iurers 'rmark, knowledge own their pa;k than over, other the ,".iiii"ition iot tutning r||lt themoveis deceptive.

Figure44

"'I'HE PUT DOWN''

Figure45

sometwentyyealsagoI workedoul thismovelo usein an Ambitious , ,'.ai""ri"", iir, if vi, learnir, manvolheruses\rill bediscovered iiuiiuv frofalngtfti p".k tacedownin theleli handandriffle o[[ the troimthi tertthumbat lhe oulerleft cornerof th€ pack' i*o ','n ""ra" by rherighthalldwhichcomes t lic action ofthe left thumbis conc€aled left cornercompletely outer ,,".r itri oacf oam ao*n, covednglhe that hasb€€nformed the break tipslnto ft-a nnger ir.*iifr"ifftt top of thepack crip lhe on resring th; thumb i"" ,',J.iii. iro "*at, therighl handfingersandthumbandtwrsllhe r{o cardsasonettetwe€n i'""J op*"iaito .rto* the facJof thetop card'asshowrin Figure4?

Figwe 47

Figure46

198

Sleights

Sleights

Twist the hand downwards again and at the same dme slide the fac€ card slightly to the left with the right fing€rs.An exposedview of this action is shown in FiSure48.

As soonas the lower cardhasenteredthe pack and the upperone has ||,rei:lup with the short ends,the right hand rel€oses its grip completely I'r( h still curvedover the pack. The fingersof the right hand are kept r{'8ether,but Figure 50 showsan exposedvi€w at this point with the r'rgersapan.

Figure48

Place the uppermost card on top of the pack so that only the corner is act$lly on top. Agarn refer to Figure 48 for this position. Pressdown on the pack with the outer l€ft corner of thc card resling on it. This will causeth€ card below it in the right hand to separalesliShtly at the ilner shorl end. Now start lo move thc right hand and tle card(s) it holdsinwardsto line up with ih€ short endsof the pack. The lower card will automalicallybe fed inlo the approximatecentreof lhe pack by this stidingaction. Figure49 showsan exposedview from underneathof this

Undercoverof the right hand, the left finger tips drarvthe lower side r()8gedcard squarewith lhe pack and the left little finger takesa break Ihe right hand now, slowly cuts off all the cards above tlle break, positionand completcsthe cut. The l.avingthe lop card in its sidejogged t,rck is completely squaredwith the aid of the left hand and then the top .ard flipped face up to show thc apparent rise of the cen[e card to thc NOTE:-lf you wish to brinS the card to the bottom of the pack, jusl pressdown a linle harder at the stagein the move wherethe lop card h overlapping the pack (Figure ,E) and the lowermost card will slide under the pack during the right hands action, rather than being fed into the centre. ln this variation no subsequent cut is made, ..THE SECONDDEAL'' 'fhis sleighthasa reputationof being€xtremelydifficult, it is difficult, but not extremelyso. I hereare an awful lot of techniquesin print but in the main they fall rrlo two basicapproaches, a 'pushoff' dealor a'strike'deal. I haveused &nh typesof deal, and have concludedfor generalconjuring applicar(rns that the 'strike' techniqueis the better one lo use. One major , vantagethe strikedealhasoverthe 'pushoff' h Lhatit is not essmtial

2N

ml

Sleights that the cardsar€in good condition,if your techniqueis correcl,you use even old cafds successfully. Do not be pul off by friendstellingyou its not worth the effort to a SecondDeal, as it has very little usein card magic, it is a sleight powerwhich has not beenusedextensively, simply considerable not many peopledo it. Itt not that they cannotdo it, but that they they caonot do ii. Once this mental block has been pushed progresswill be rapid. So, take your cards in hand and give it try-please.

Sleights Figure52

Figure51

Figure 5l shows how the pack is held in the left ha[d. Note how pack is slightly beveled,k€ep this b€vel very sliglt. The fingers are at th side of the pack and lhe lhumb is r€sting on top. The grip on the shouA be very light, I am now going to describe how to deal the second card, which conlrary to most instructions that s|an with the melhod for dealing top card. lt is my opinion tha! you should make the dealing of the card as natural as possible, and having achievedlhis, lry and duplicate the action whm dealing the top card. Bring the right hand towards the left with the thumb extended in a natural manner and the fing€rs curled in sliShtly but not beyond the tip of the thumb. It is importantthat the right thumb is not extendedout a fish hook with the fingerscurledtightly in, to makethe positionofthe thumb look evenInoreunnatural.Look at Figure52 for the appearance the right hand shouldhave.

As lhe risht thumb movesovel the top of lhe pack' pull tbe top card ,r.'$', slightlywith a lighl pressureof lhe lefi lhumb as shownin FiSure \r t' v;d le€p rhissap no morethan a whiteborderwidrh, but do not *,r !;f vou haveto;ate it widcr for a reliabledeal Al lhe time lhe lefl ' moves,the riSht one should be positionedjust past the centre rh[l|rb In{'|l of lhe far sho end of lhe pack. ' M6verhericht ha[d lowardsthe right and wirh a light touch. lowerthe |,{trr rhumb s; that it touchesth€ back of the secondcard from the top' r ,,ur,nuemoving the complctehand to lhe righl in a dcaling-actionand ir rhc tame rimemovethe rigltt lhumb lo lhe righl at a much lasterspeeo rlrtrn (hehand. With preaticethe secondcardwill comeout cleanlyand as I Drotrudesfrom lhe right long side of the pack, the rig]t first and ,..,u,d iincersmoueup t6 its faci,locking it againstihe rhumbso thal it the pack.The left thumb moveslh€ lop ' ur be coripletelyremovedfrom , trrJ back squarewilh fie Pack the pafl ;f lhe riSht thumb which hits'or '$rikes' lhe card will varv on the shapeof thet thumb. Look for a *rrh i;dividuals de-pending .,f,lai,ttr.rmp at the teft lland side of your thumb and usethe lower part of r[( oroiectionto strike the card out Ai soonas the card is awavftom the pack and whilst the right hand is ,,rll moving, slide the right thumb downwardsslightly so that it is not at the extremetop edgewhen lhe card comesto resl' lr\ilroned ' t-or dealing the rop card, foilow the procedurealready described wrrhourthe le-ftthumb pull down ofthe top card. lmitate the exacthand that ale madewhen you deal the secondcard ntovements when dealing, do not use an exc€ssiveup and down movement of the ,,rrk in rhe fefahand.rememberlhar a nalural deal will ah'ats be morc ',t,tcprive than a technicaltyperlect oae There should be a lefl hand Ir1)v;ment,but no note than is normallypresentwhenyou dealor take , rrds from the top. In my opinion the goldenrule for seconddealingis lightnessof touch

202

m3

Sleights

SleiShts irl both the holdiw and dealing hands. Think of the pack as an egg you will not go far wrong.

is shown viewpoint t h( left handgrip of thepackfrom theaudiences' takeno hand lefi of the fingers first lhre€ lhe r"c! r" i"i"i ," i'**.ii. thrce grip these wilh vi€w the ll"' i"-lJii* ,rt. t*t *d anexposed of be can it ' illustralion' this rrom 55 in Fisu;e iil.;;;;;il4;'th"; htrtd dsht the botlom posjrioned a! is fing;r ."i',rr"i ii.iJi i-a ri lle lh€bascofrhc of thislingeragainst .:; nd of theDackandit b pressurc areclos€oIn fingers hand iiiiiJin", iup'pout,tt. paci. Tte oth'r.righr rl' part in holding d{rinslthe packbut lakeno

Figule55

Figure53

If you wish lo deal a card faceup, take it in the grip dcscribedbut placethe third fingcr of yoor right hdld on thc back of th€ card altd extendthe third {inger unlil the card takcs up t}e position shownin Figure53. .THE BOTTOM DEAI,'' Figure56

Thc Bottom Deal I use is basedon the Fred Robinson meihod publirhcd manyyearsago in the 'Cen' maSazine.

pushcdoverprlor Ficure56 showsthe $'aythe top card of the packis pivots

Figure54

against anadcatro-ur ' t'lolehowit tir* ty irt. itgttihand of lhe fingers thrce thc olher '.'tii"r .idesovcrthelop-of ii,. r.iiiittr. nni"t i! ar ta*es hand the righl "na pushed slighllv' over i"ii rr-i. ii*.ir rt* *.n mov's and bclow fingers top and onthumb ii. ',ii ,igrtirt-a upper couses 6ri airnlj'tia"novt -*er, andawalfrcm thepack .Thisoction trom aw^v side\+ovs move of titetelt tiulelinset-and )ii iiri to i"i $e card dkeclion the "tt )/ shows lrgure rh€Dack,ralherthancllaSonally ,"".,'.i"tii

204

"lirt"tgtt

rttltillustritionshowsthebotlomca'dbeinglaken'

m5

Sleights theposi.ionappliesro rhe rop cardalso. Having undcrsroodthe acrionoI r€rlng the rop card, lhe acrualBo$om Deal is carrieaorrrin rtreililoiing lnanner. Firsr oI all rheieft hand thumb pushesover the top card as shownin Tlj rishrhandapproaches -lls_yl 56:. p"cr rr,. toi"l. ir,i.".l"*l po_sttror$ so rhatirs lhumb reslslighdv on rop ot ttrc prrrtrJ ,ltsettiii caro, whllsl secondfingergoesbeneaththe pacK and rests on the face ot tlle outer'ls right corncr of thc bollom card rt|e nght secondfingcr pushesupwardsand the completehand moves ._

de€tine acrion. },i, a"ti""*iii al"* ir,. l^.,:._r1+,,i" oorromcardto i.*1":"rionat therighralso,firsllv

Divorinc agaiootf,. f.f, fii f" ingir, atu thm snappinS__off lhe furgerandmovin-g in a convenrional side;ay; orrcctlon.f-igure57showsthisaction.

SleiShts eardinto the right hand without dealingit down somakesureyoucando rhisin a deceptiveway. ..THE GHOST COUNT'' The 'Chost Counl' or 'Fouf as Four' count was originatedby Alex Elmsleyand first publishedin his booklet ritled, 'The Four Card.Trick'' Beca;seof its many applications, it has becomevery popular with coni rersand like manygood thingshasperhapsbeena little over used this in no way a crilicism of lhe move ilself. qhich h quite brillianl' ^ My owniandling, is a little different to that originallv describedby Alex, and is as follows: l) i'Iold four caralsface up in the left hand in a squared condition, the gnp beingal lhe extremeleft hand long edge'thumb-onthe faceand iiniers bilow. SeeFiguIe58 qhich showshow lhe lefi handgripsthe cards, Figure58

Frgureb/

At_thesametimeas the bo[om cardis I carorsdra*n rapidryb""t ,o rouur. uo *,;lollng to the right, lhe top

trrurnu. ro acrie.ve I jicc;ii;ia: ;f.;:1,:1,:li1:i;:-.,!i,,:i,,"r: *liT^:Tgg9 ro rheleft of lhe

lop onemrrstU.madein rinison....' r constoer rr lmporranr rhar ,o undu€ upanddo"n lnorionoiit. letr . nand sholld be.madewhen

rhe deel takesplace.N"r. tt. nurur"t_".rion or lhe lelt hand when a normai deal is m;de and ao no Inor. ** i.t;, wnen you cary out the feke deal. . Kee! ti€ teft hand grip on rhe pack lighr and also pressureof thr agJlthand, wherh€rir is dealingihe top-or bonom the carO. rhar you pracrice rhe Borrom Deal wirh a fu Dack. ."j_lT:_TT."d M-any books reco-mmend half a pack bur you gJ ; ;;; #;:; rerurnror rfforr, in rhewayof increased "ll ;ri"" piri*i user,

'our

iii^:iii

deatcards.onlo rhe rabtr.whenyou praclicing, .-P^"_lil 1*."f remember rhat in manymagicLricksyou wi simptyUeare takingrtreiil 206

2t Brinc the right hand up to lhe packel and strelch the Ihumb w?// over-the facl and thc fingers below. Draw off the face card by with the right thumb until ii restsin the right downward Dressure hand as sho'w! in Figure 59. Note carefully how it is taken well into the halld. l)Pull slightly with the left hand fingersbelow the packet and push -slighdy;id the thurnbaboveso that the uppertwo cardsar€jogged over a little way as shownin Figure59. 201

Sleights

Figure 59

Sleights slightlyto the left with the left fingers.This actionh similarto thar shown in Figure 59. ln a continuingaction take the threejogged cardsawayinto the right hand by grippingthem, ihumb above,and fingers b€low. Finally take the last card from the left hand on top of tiose in the righl to completethe count. ..THE OVETTE/XXLLY PLACEMENT''

4) BrinSthe right handup to the packetto apparenllydraw offthe face card on lop of rheone aheadyin lhe righr hand. Actually placethe nghr handcardbelowthe packerwhereir isgrippedby rhe fingenips of the left hand, and take off the upper two joggedcardsinto tire right hand by gripping them betweenthe thumb above and finsers below. th€ grip beinglhe sameas shown in Figure59. The acrions describ€din parag.aph3 and 4 blend into almosta singlesequence. 5) Take off the rernaining two cards in the left hand one by one, by drawingthernoff inlo the right hand by downwardpressurewith ah;

righathumb. The aboveactions,whilstlookinglike a fair countof four cards, actuallyconcealsthe third card down from the face. ..THE JORDAN COUNT" This countwasinventedby CharlesT. Jordanandconcealsthe boriom cardofa four cardgroup. The originalhandlin8givenby Jordanwasnol quite the sameas that which follows. l)Hold the four cards in the Ieft hand in exactlythe samegrip as shown in Figure 58. 2) Ule the ri8!t thumb to draw off the uppet rwo cardsone by oneinro the right h.nd. 3) Bring the right hand up to the left ro draw off anorher card from rhe face,in this actiol the two cardsin the right hand going belowthe lwo in th€ left. As soonas the right hand cardssquareup wjth those in the left push all the cardsabovethe bottom bne slightly to the right with the left thumb a! the sametime, pulling tha iower one 208

This is an extremely useful move in card ougic, and becauseof its comparatively simple technique, tends to be overworked as a control. Havingleamt it, my adviceis to useit with discretion. Hold thc pack facc down in the left hand, the position of the left hand itself being fairly low do*'n in front of the body. Use the lcft thumb to riffle do*n from top to bottom at th€ left outer corner of the pack, inviting a spcctator lo call stop at somepoint. Lift off lhe upper section of the pack at the rcqucstcd position with the right hand. The position of lhe right hand is important. It is curvcd over the pack, palm down, fingers al the far short end and thumb at the near one. The fingers should extend ell down over the front of thc pack. Lift off the uppcr section and move the right hand upwards so that the face card of the upper section is facing the spectator. The right hand just movesnaturally up, until its back is towa.dsyour body to do this. Ask the spectator to remember the face card. Start to move th€ right hand back do*,n towards the packet in the left hand. Kcep the right hand a little to the front of the left as it comes to*ards it. As thc right hand movcs downwards it naturally turns its section forward to a horizontal position. As soon as it rcachesthis position, lhe right hand fingers curl slightly until thcy rest on thc face card of the ri8ht hand section. The right hand fingers now move Jrigrtt to the right and then&rward, taking the fqce card with them during thcse moveme s. This action will causethe fac€ card to pivot away from the packet, maintaining contact with the pack at the outer short end and moving away from i! at ihe inner one for about l'onlr. The right hand moves back to place its sectionon top of the left and as il does this the lcft hand grips its section solely betwe€ntb€ littl€ finger and baseof left thumb so that the first three fingers can be moved away from the pack slightly. Do rol straighten the fingers, just move them away from the pack a little to allow room for tlle face card of the upper sectionto slip in betweenthem and the bottom of the left hand section as the right hand replacesits scrctionon top. Refer to ihe illustralion given in the Bottom Deal descriplion elsewherein this chapter, for the lefi hand grip. The aclion of the right hand is a slightly diagonal one as it approaches

26

Sleights rhe left hand secriona little to the front and right of t}le left hand's packets outei comer. The face card of the righl hand packet runs smoothlyonto the face of the left one, whilst the remaindergo on top. The l€ft hand finger move up to tetake their posirion on the righr haltd long side of the pack, the right hand moves away, and the move is

Chapter9

..THE HAMMAN COUNT"

Round Up

This sleight was invented by Bro. Hamman and has become very polular with card conjurers. The quantity of cards used call vary but I will describe&e move as usedin 'Oil and Queens'from Chapter l. Hold the nine cards face up in the right hand, the hand being pat$ down and curv€d over the length of the cards, the fingers pressingagaiost the far short €nds ard lhe thumb against the near ones. Using the left thumb, draw off the cards fiom the face of the Dacket oneby oneso tMr rhcy rcsron rhe fingersoflhe left hand, which i palm up. Draw off four cardsin this way and as lhe lefr hand approacheilhc right to apparently draw off the fifth card, move the left hand and its cards well to the right below those in the right hand. This meansthat the right hand cards are jogged to th€ left of the oDesbelo* them and the left hand can grip them at the basc of the thumb and draw the complete right hand packet into tlle left hand. At the sametime the right hand grips tlle opposite short ends of the left hand packet betweenits third finger and thumb at the part of the packer that is protrudinS slightly to the right of the uDperpacket add retains this packet, as the left hand pulls the upper packet onto its fingers. The appearanceshould be tha! the left halld has drawn off one more card from the face of ftc right band packet, but in fact tbe right and lef! hand packets hav€ b€€n cornpletely exchanged. The remaining cards in lhe right hand are drawn off one by one into the lcft and th€ couni is complete. Thus, one section off the comDlcta packetis reallycountedtwice,so lhat lheother se\ction can beconcealed.

This section contains a number of tricks not previously published and some that origimlly app€3red in Mt. Krrl Fulve's magazines. I am indebted to Karl fo. pelmission to repdnt them. "SHAXf,DOWN" Effect Four aces are sandwiched between two jokers, after one of the aces have been rememberedby a speclator. The packet of six cards is placed beneatha handkerchiefand grippedtightlybya spectator.Heis askedto sive the cardsa shake.which resultsin threeof the acesdroppingfrom Leneaththe handkerchief.The one r€marningis the rememberedone, and it is still trapped betweenth€ jokers. Working Removethe acesfrom lhe pack and drop them in a pile on the lable Now remove the two iok€rs alrd place these face up on the table in a slight spread. Pick up the acesand invite a spcctator to take any one and remember it. Hold the remainingthre€in a facedown spreadand invite him to push his selecledaceamongthem, As he doesthis, rememberhow far down from the top it gocs-it can only be in position two or three, Sayyou will mix the acesup so that eventhe spectalordoesnot know whereiris chosenoneis. ln doing !his, make surethat it endsat the face of the face down packet, an easyoperation, sinceyou know it is at Dositiontwo or threebefore you start mixinS. lf it is at posiiion two, push two cards from the top into the right hand without altering their ordcr and then olaceone of thoseremainingin the right hand oh top of

2to

2rl

Round Up them and one underneath.Now relakethe lour cardsinto lhe left hand and mi\ ftem againby taking the top card into the right hand' ihe text one or toD of jt, the next below and the final one on top. Il th€ chosenacestartsal positionthree,just follow the aboveinslruc tions startingal 'now retake'. Thesesimplemixeslook casuaiand end with the selectedaceai ihe bottom, Sandwichthe facedown acesbetweenthe faceup jokers on the table Pick up lhe complelepackeiand hold them in the left hand in the Jordan Counl position. Count them as follows: take off the first four cards fairly inlo the right hand by pulling lhem off one bv on€ wilh the right ftumb. As you take the fiflh card, placeall the cardsin the right hand below thosi in the left and then immediatelypush off the upp€r fiv€ cardswilh the left thumb and take them into the right hand Placeth€ final joker on top to completethe count. As you count th€ caros say' "remember, four acessandwichedbetweentwo iokers." Transferlh€ pa€kelto the l€f1hand. Take an opaquehandkerchieffrom vour pocket with the right hand and throw ii over the cards. As soon as the handkerchi€fcoversthe cards,useth€ lefathumb to thumb count the upperthreecardsby releasing them from the thumb one by oneand presslhe thumb againslthe side oathe Dacketio rerainthe break for a moment. Now uselhe left forefinser;cain\t lhe oulershortendlo pushdownall the cardsbelot{lhr breil fo=rabouroneinch.KeepIhe iorefingerin positionaller pushing

Round UP is th€ handkerchief ,,rilarway.Notethat vour lefi forefingerbeneath

Figure61

,rrll in positionand preventshim grippinglhe cardstoo far down' once he has a tig.ht grip, remove your left hand from below th€ packet of cards in a r-rraierctriei, matlig suri that he keeps 'he l,orizontalposition still. Ask the nameof the chosenaceand then invitethe assistingspectalor r,' eiiD as tighrlv as he can and thenshakethe handkerchiefandcardsat , ,.,"r.tiir"-*-rt. l-. itr;\ will resultin threeacesdroppingour. noneo{ r' ,f'"m Uiinc rt'e.hosenone. Ask him to look carefultyat lhe oneshe chosen the wiu find he and tiehtlv ben€athihe handkerchief 'iiiigrippiig the jokers ,ne between

Figure60

"SON OF TETRADISM MINUS 4E'' Turn the left hand completelyover beneaththe handkerchiefwithout alteringyour grip on (hepackel.If the handkerchiefwereremovedat this ofthe left hand grip on the cards' point, Figure60showsthe appearance lo gripI he posiLion. inlite a speclaror lhecardsin a horizonlal KeeDinc how forefing€r' lllustrale lhe lelt packeiLiglhtly ar Lheshorlendnearesl position shown your in ar placing right hand grip by them he should 'n Figure61. Removeyour right handand let him takehold of the cardsin a

'Ihis is a different method for accomplishin8one of Peiel Kane's in tfti. version the original full pack stack is reducedto four "ir""ir. .u.alunJin" t""ona a""l is replacedbv the faro shuffle The faro shuffle any false shuffle used' but this would also ."" ir i""t U" r"rno*a "nd ,".o". *e interesringtink betweena basicfaro principleand the effect Lhelrick takeany iour tiketaluecard' and placethemal Io Dreoare ,\brion' l. 18.J5 and 52 from thetop ot a 52cardpacl In lhedescrip-

212

213

Round UP tion t will assumethat foul sixeshavebeenarrangedin th€ appropriate posrtlons.

P€rfolmrnc€

II

Removethe Dackfrom its case,takingcarenot to exposethe six spotal the face. Cive the pack a5 mady'oul' falo sbufflesas you wish, which will retain ihe top and face cards in position and exchangethe cards at Dositions l8 and 35, betweenthesetlvo locations. There musl be no cuts Letweenshufflcs, unlessthey are false onesthat bring the pack back to its original state. After the shuffles cut the pack at the approximale centre point and take a break b€tweenthe two halveswith the left little finger as they come mgemea. Riffle down the outer left hand corner of the pack with the left thumb and invite a spectator to call stop at some point. Appear to cut ofJ $-e point bul rcally lift off uDDersecrionwith the riShl handat his requested .it tle cards above $e litlle finger break Thit is $e slandard Riffle Force procedure. Give the spectator a choice betweenthe card at the top of ihe lower section or face of the upper one. Removethe one he decideson and place it facedown on the table. Reassernblethe halves of lhe main pack, it doesnot matter which half goeson loP of which. The Dackcan now b€ givenas manySeruinecuts and faro shuffle! as uou wish. All faros rnustof cours€b€ Derfeclodd pack ones,as you arr now working with 51 cards. However many faro shuffles and culs you give the paci, the remaining three sixeswill remaln in the samepositions relative to each other. Thumb off l? cards without reversingtheir ordcr and place them in a fac€ down heap on the table. Thumb off another 1? cards to form a second heap and place th€ remainder of the pack face down to form a third heap. Push aDy on€ of th€seheapstowards a spectator. lnviterhesDedatorto turn lhclop cardothis hcapfaceupand replace on ihe tabl€ to form a new pile. In unisonwith him, usingyour left and rirh! handslurn thelop cardsof your hespfaceup and plac€on lhe lable ti form rwo face up heaps.Continuelhis dealingin unison wi$ thc sp€clator until the three sixestum up at exactly the same positions as each other, quite a surprising outcome to watch. Finally havc a spectator revealthat the card chosenat the beginning of the trick is the fourth six spot 214

RoundUp ..CHAIN LIGHTNING'' I like tricks with surpriseendings,particularlvwhenthe methods€€ms ouuiout to the spe{lators,but finally the tablesare lurned' on '.i" rhe;. ln this effecl tour small packetsof cardsare shuffledby a sr'eci'ioi *a i.ot"".a on ltte table. Th€ performer picks up th€ first heap ,,na soellshiarts b! lransferringone card for €ach lelter lrom top to iouoiioi rt'. pu.liuna upon turningthe final card faceup' il is lound '1" ,. rti"n. ittl. i. t"p"a;ed bv spelling and findi[g cards of lhe olhtr ,tlr.. "."iii"i,rt in. orttet ttrreepickets. The performer remarls "the rrick sould be easyif eachpacket _he consistedof cardsof lhe samesulls' ' tums eachpacketfaceup. theyareindeed wtten ,nJ in f""r ,tt.v "t.-. are compl€telydifferent lo thal oI lhe one suits uut tr'" tui, .itirti iura speltout.

Figure62

Performrdce place Run through the Pack and selectany five spadespot cards and

zt5

Round Up them in a face down heap on the table. Nexi remove five diamonds and place them down immediately to the right of the previous heap. Now remove-seven clubsand placerhemro !he righl ofthe previousgroup and tmauy tour heartswhich go al the exlremerigh! hand end of the row, whilst removirg tlle hearts, adjust the pack so that a heart wiU be at tha top when it is tuned face down. It is not ess€ntial that all tie cards rcmovedarc spot onesbut I prefcr them as jt giv€sa clcarer display at the climax of the trick. Requcsta spectalorto pict up eachheapin tum. give it a shufneand replacc it face down on lhe rable in the same Dosition. Wlikr thc shuffling.htaking plac€,top palm rhc heart from rhe packinto rherighl hand and plac€ the balance of tle pack aside. Thc fou. packets on ihe lable will now bc referred to as nos. I to 4 reading from left to right. Scoop up heap I, adding tle paLnad heart to the top in this aation. Spell our HEARTS, transfering one card from top rc bottom for each letter. Tum the NEtlcard face up revealingthat itls a heart and placeil fac€up on rhe rablcar posirionA in Figure62. Transferrheremai;derof the heapto the right hand and in this aclion pairn rhe lop card into rhe dght hand.byusinSDai Vernolt Top palm from ,selectSecrets'or any other you kno* that's as good. (which is unlikely) Scoop_upthe cards at posilion 2, adding the palmed card to the top and spell SPADES, tuming the next card face up aod placing it ;t position B. Drop the remainderof the packerface down on rop of it, agarnpahing the rop card in ftc riAhl hand as before. . Scoopup the cards at position 3, adding the palmed card to the top of tbeh and thed spelling DIAMONDS. Tum th€ next catd face uo ind placeit at positionC. Drop the remainderofrhe cardsfacedown on too of ir, palmingthe rop card in lhe riSht hand in rhe packerrransferacrion, as Delore. Sloop uD th€ final packet at position 4, adding the palmed card and spe CLUBS, tuming the next card faceup and piacingit on the tableat positio[ D. Drop the remaind€r of the packei face do\rn on toD of it. Preparefor rhc climax by slating how easylhe rrick would b; if each pacl€t shulfled by the spectator had been ofthe samesuit. Fidally, turn each packet face up and place it in a spread on top o[ the face up spelt cnrd, as shown in the illustration saying, ..they are, but no! how;ou ihoucht-" ..CHANGING TIMES'' This is an updatingof a well lovedcard effect,the inventorof which, unfortunately,l am unableto credi!.The trick is theonein which asDectator and lhe performer eachselecta card and afier Lhepack ha5been m.ixed in a face uplface down condirion, these are the only rwo cards which are eventually found to be reversed. In the original trick the p€rformer had to miscall hh card. In tiis version rhe performert card is actually shown and th€ general handling changed a little. 2t6

RoundUp P€rfomrnce Hand fhe pack to a sp€ctator for shuffling and after he has done this, ask him to retain about half the pack and hand you the remarnder. Ask him to placehis halfbehindhis backand to pull any card out and hold ir facedown in his right hand.As he doesthis, you appearto do the samewith your half. As soonasyou havegor it behindyourback, thumb ofi the top two cardsinto the right hand,turn the remairderofthe caids lac€ up in the left hand and finally place one card from the right hand pair facedown on top of lhe faceup pack, Now bring your handslo the tront with a card facedown in the riSht hand and the remainderof the cards apparently face down in the left. Show the ca.d in your right hand to a few membersof the audience, inviting them to rememberit. Also take a look at it yourself. Ask the spectatorto look at his card and then show it to a few membersof the audi€nce.lf Dossibletell him io show it to different teople than the oneswho are rememberingyours to avoid confusion. rurn slightlyto your right and away from the spe.tatorssayingyou do not want to get a peekof the spectator'scafd as he showsit round. Al the very moment he is exhibiting his card quietly exchangethe card in your right hand for the one on top of the cardsin youl left by lhe standardTop Changelechnique.Do not rushthe move,the misdirection .over is strong,they will not be looking at you, jusl do it smoothlyand efficiently. Pushthe card in your right hand into the centreof the spectatorshalf and take his chosencard from him and push it into the c€ntreof your half. As you push it in get a left little finger break aboveit. Cur off the section of your cards above the break and place them/ac€ dopn onto the table.lnvite theaJsistingspectatorto cut off about half of his cards,turn them/ace ,rp and placethem on top of the tabledones. Now place all of your r€maining aardsface do$'n on top of the composite heapand finally requestthe sp€ctatorto placethe remainderof his/dc? l/, on top of all. Pick up the completepackand lurn it facedown. Ask the spectatorto name his chosencard and you name yours, both being confirmed by olher speclators who saw them previously, S/oltl/ spread lhe pack face down on the tableto revealtbat the only lwo cardsfaceup are lh€named This trick is very effectivefor an audienceaslong as you carry out lhe assemblyof the face uplface down sectionsin a fair and unhuried

..COLLECT!NG BOX'' Erecr Three cards are removed from lhe pack, turned face-up and

2t1

RoundUp

RoundUp

momentarilyplacedat the faceof the deck.The performerthen hastwo cards chosen and returned to the deck. The thiee reversed cards (and there are only 3) are momentarilyplaced in the card box. On being removed,it's seenlhat there are now 5 cards,with the 2 chosencards sandwiched betweenthe random 3 cards.

card, the other betweenthe centreand botlom card. I normallypoint to thesespaceswith my left,bt finger to emphasizetbe remark. square ahepacket of 3 cards and turn it fac€-up.Slide the face-up packetinto thecardbox. Keepthe cardbox closeduntil you haveslid th€ cardsbetwe€nthe llap aDdthe facesideof the card box. Then flip opeD lhe flap and closeit againaolet lhe 3 cardsfall onto the 2cardsalreadyin lhe box. This procedureinsureslbere'll be no flash of the two cards alreadyin the box. Shake the card box over the deck. Open the cas€ and r€move the packet,holding it fac€ down in the left hand as if for lhe GhostCount. Say, "Instcad of 3 cardswe now have 5". To confirm this, pull off th€ rop card inio the right hand witb lhe right thumb, thenthe 2nd card and the 3rd. Whenapparentlypulling the 4th cardinto the riShthand, put all the right hand cardsback below thosein the left, the[ push the upper block of 4 cardswith the left thumb and take them with the riSht hand. 'Iake the lastcard and put it on top ofthose in the right hand. This is the JordanCount done with 5 cardsinsteadof 4. Fan the 5 cards face-down and hold it in the left hand. Pull out slightly thecardsin positions2and 4. Leavethem ouljogged.Point out that the 2 sDacesmentionedearlier have now be€n filled. Have the two chosen cardsnamed.Then turn the outjoggedcardsface-upto revealthey are th€ seleclions.

Method Prior to presentingthe routin€ leavetwo cards sectetly in the card box. They should both be face-up when the caseis tabled with the half-moon cut-out side up, I suggestatrivinS at this by having ihe complete deck in its casebefore commencing the performanc€ and simply leaving 2 cards b€hind when removiru the deck. The cale is closed and placed asid€. Worldng

i I

Hold the pack face down. Pushthe top 3 cardsover slightlvwith thc left thumb. and take them in the right hand in a slightly fanned condition. Turn th€ pack so itt face-upin thc left hand. Squarethe 3 cards, flash the face card of this group, and place them facedown o[ the faceof the deck. Turn the complete deck face-down. lmmediately half pass the lower section. Take a left little finger break between the halves as they come together. lvhilst the right hand is still over the pack, lift up the top card of the lower section and rctake the left little fingcr break below this card. Move the right hand away from lhe pack for a moment. Riffle down from the outer left corner wilh the lef! thumb. Riffl€ Force the card below thc break on Spectator "A". When you show the card he stopp€d at, keep the Iower pocket horizontal and push the top card over with the left thumb so part of the card under it is exposed Lift the half pack to a vertical position so "A" can seethe face of his card Do ,ol obscure lhe face end of this packet. You wan! the back of the r€vers€dcard there to be visible to the spectator. Reassembletb€ deck. As you squareup with the righ! hand, drop one card from the face ol the upp€r sectionto lhe top of the lower onc. Retake lhe left little finger break above this card. Move ihe right hand Use the Riffle Force to have "8" note a card, using the lechnique already describedfor "A". When the deck is reassembled,immedialely half passthe lower seclion of the pack alrd in almost the samemovement iurn the completepack face-upas describedin chapter8.. Thumb off th€ 3 face-down cards, holding lhcm slightly fanned in t}le right hand. Put the remainderof the deck aside. Point out the lwo availablespacesin the spreadof 3 cards,one betweenthe top and centre 218

..DIVIDED WN STAND'' The inspirationfor this routrnewas "Even MoneyProposition"in ihe May, 1969PallbearcE Revievl, Run through the pack and remove any 6 red cards, dropping lhem in a face-uppacket on the table. Now remove 6 blacks and drop lhes€face'up on top of the red cards aheady on the table. Finally, remove the Joker and place it on the fac€ of the tabled packet. Th€ remaindcr of the deck is Dlacedaside as it is not uscd in the routine. Pick up the packet of 13cards and spreadthem in a facc-up fan, holding the fan in the right hand. ExNbit the cards to the spectators,and by rndicating eachcard in ium wilh the left fingers, point out carefully that there are 6 reds followed by 6 blacks, with the Joker at the face. A5 you tap each card with the left fingers, work from the back to the face of the 8roup. Close up the face-up spread with the assistanceof the left hand and tick up a left little finger break above the 3rd red card from the back of rhe group. Turn the cards facedown and in this action carry out a turooverpassat the breakpoint, thusshifting 3 cardsfrod the top lothe face o[ the group. Hold the cardsface-downin the left hand usingthe lype of grip you'd normallyusewhenholding a small packet.With the dght hand slideoff

2r9

RoundUp

Round Up

the face card and place it face down on the table at point "A" in the sketchbelow.Call this cardthe Jokerand saythat it will act asa Divider Card.

vou closethe spread,pick up a left little finger breakabovethe 3rd card iinrn ttt" fu"" of,t" pi"tet if you remembered"face" eaflier,and under rl)c 3rd card from the top if you remembered"top." Iurn lhe crouD face-up,carrying oul a lurnover passal rhe break Doinrand spieadihecardiin a face_upline on the lable, showinglhatlhe distributed6 cardsof the samecolor on either lpectatorhassuccessfully \ide of the Joker. NOTE:-Cards can be flashedat appropriatepoints in the routine' but ;on't be tempted to overdo this. I personally do not think. it necessaryto flash any more than the two cards detailed in th€ rnsalucuons.

Spread thg top 5 cards off the group without altering their order and place them still faceiown in a squared packet as position "B". Count the rernaining 6 cards from left to right hand, thus reversingtheir order. Hold them still face{own in the rigltt hand in a squaredcondition. The right hand holds them f.om above by the narrow ends in a Biddle-typ€ 8np. Flash the face card of the packet in the right hand, sa)Tng, ". . . and here are the 6 black cards." Place the packet face down at position "C" and immediately rernove the top card with th€ right hand. At the same lime the left hand remov€sthe top card of packet "B" and flashes its face,safng, "we will take onered and oneblackcard." The cardin the ri8!t hand has of coursereheined face{own sincebeing removed from the top ol packetC. The two cards are now mixed together face-do\rrl and handed to a spectator.He is askedto slid€oneundernealhth€ Jokerat position"A" and placethe remarningone abovethe Joker. A further two cards are taken by the performer, one from (he rcp of each packet at "'8" and "c", mixed face{o*'n and handed to the spec_ talor. He is againrequestedto placeeilher one belowthe Joker packet. To a.sisthim in doingthis, you lift thepacketat "A" with the righl hand and then replace it facedown again on top of his sel€ction. lndicate that he shoulddrop the remainingcard on top of the Joker packet. The next c?fds are now taken from packets mixing theseyou must rememberthe one that comesfrom "8". The trvo cards are ar usual handed to thc spcctator to distributc above and below the Jokerpacket,but you must makea menlalnoteofwhetherhe places your packet "B" card on the fac€ or top of the packet. Just remember Continuethe p.ocedureoflaking a card ftom the top ofpackets "8" and "C", mixing them and letting the spectatorplacethem aboveand below the Joker packet, until all the cards are used. Always lift packet "A" to allow the spectatorto place his seleclion trelow it, becauseif you let him slide it under there is a chance that he will no( place his card exactlyat the bottom. Pick up lhe group of 13 cards fiom the table and spleadthem out slightlybetweenthe hands,the cardsstill face{own. Say,"Now remember, you have freely dhtributed cardson eithersideof the Joker." As

220

..SIMPLE MATHS'' ln ihis trick the magician apparently locates the speclator's card^bya The trick is brought to a surprise finish nro"* of .mpt" turns face_up' -"t-lt"matic;: card unexpectedly whenthe spectator\ StNting Positlon Ihe pack is held facedown in lhe left hand in the usual dealing noiiton. Ttt. bouot threecardsof the pack are reversedHold a lefl irrrlefincer break abovelhe lhree face-upcards. Perlormatrce SDreadthe Dack betwe€nthe hands, requestin8 a spectator to lelec' a .uJ. ioi.J Li.."ta,.rowlv lrom rh€top so that he'll takea cardbefore rcar ths rsvers€dcardsat lhe bottom of the pack ,ou '-wien "si he takesa card, closeup the d€ck and take it in the dght hand lrom above,fingersin front, thumb at the back' in whal is sometimes

i"i"i.J io i. trrJniaat"Grip Thebreskabovethebottomthre€cardsis

bv lherighl lhumb.Usetherightforefingerto swingout th€ mainrained ,i"".. truir.tirr" a*i t" il canbetakenbi thelefl hand Placelhecards r;mainincin therighlhandon topof lhos€justplacedin lheleft Reiake rtrebrealitrom rhi riehrlhumbwilh lhe left lillle finger' iit.. itt. rp""t"to. ttu. nol€dhis cardtakeit from him andpushit into oo.f.ai ifren.ar sftonmd, insertingil into lh€ break As soonasil 't'" ."- i" ifr. oaci. t.l."t. rhr break.Pushihe cardflushwiththedeckwilh a breakaboveit as you do so The br€akis itri richrriurnu, obra;ning downon lhecard'andthenshrll
RoundUp

RoundUp

the deck a false shuffle that retains the top four cards. Tell ihe sDectator. "Your card is losr somewhere in rhe pack. I'm going lo rr) ro iind ir by simple maths. I'll let you fre€ly selecttwo cards from the pack and we'il concern ourselvesonly with the numeric valuesof thesecards. All Dicture cardscount as len. Whenyou chooselwo cards,we'll subtractth; lalue of onc from the value of the other and use the answer to count do*n in the pack and find your card." Hold tlle pack in thc right hand ftom above (Biddle crip). Let rhe cards slowly dribble ftom the face or bottom of the Dack into the left hand, inviting a spacraror!o call srop at any rime, \then hc callsnoD. flip rhe scctjonremainingin rhe right hand face-uponlo the face-dotn portion in rhe left hand. Jap the €xposedfacecardofthe pack with the right forcfinger,saying, "This is one card you cut to." Then spread the face-up cards rapidly until you reach t}le first facedown card. Removethe face-up section and place it face-up on the table. FIip tbe top card of the remaining section face-up,saing, ". . . And tlds is the other." As soon as you seethe valucs of the two cards, mmtally subtract one from the olher and think of the answet as a word rather than a number. (If the two vallles are the same, think of the answer as ZERO). This will giveyou a word that spellswith three,four or five letters.Ifit sp€lls with 3 letters, rehove the face-up card on top of the face-down packet in the left hand and place it face-up on th. tabte. If it spellswith 4 l€tters, do nothing. If 5 lctters, take the card lying face-up o; the labled section and place it still fac€-up on top of the section you are holding in the left hand. Now say, "Recall I said we'd subtract one card's value from the other." The sp€ctatordo€sthis and announcesthe result aloud. Hand him the packet in your left hand. If there are any face-up cards on top of this packet, flip them faccdown. Thc spectator spells out thc answer, dealing a card for €ach letter. His card ends up on the last letter and it is also face-up. Say, ..I made it turn face-up in ca.seyou were not interest€d in mathematics."

and quicklydealthe twentycards surelhe pairsar€reallyseparated," into two packets. thecards Pickup eitherpacketandplaceit on top of theothe..Square packeta fewSenuine cuts. andgivethe combined

..DOUBLE DISCOVERY" In this cffect thc mates of lwo fr€cly chosencards are discovcredin a novel manncr with the cards in the spcctators hands from start to Iinish. Any d€ck is used and there is no prior prepanlion. Whm thc cards arc handcd to you, remove ten pairs from thc pack, each pair consisting of two cards ol the same value and colour. DioD eachpair on top of rhe Fevious paL removedfrom rhe deck. Pick up the packet oftwenty cardsand apparently give it a casualoverhand shuffle. In fact you run an even numbet of cards and reDlacethern atroveor below rhe remainderof rhe packct. Finally say, ..ier.s make

Prcsentation Nominate two speclators"A" and "8" to help you. Deal out the twenty cardsinlo two face{own heaps,altematiru a card to eachheap as you deal, unlil thereare l0 cardsin eachheap. Requesteachspectatorto pick up his heapand cut it as oftcn aJ he wishes.Now askspectator" A" to refiole eitherthe top or facecardof his packetand placeit facedown on the table. Request"B" to do the that hehasa choiceof the top or bottorncardof samc.Againemphasize his packet.Tell him to placehis cardon top of the card.emovedby Tell sp€ctator"A" to dealhis remainingnine cardsin a line on the rable,but befor€hedoesthis say, "You candealth€mfrom left to riSht or right to left. You maydealwith your packe!face-upor faceiown." lf thespectaiordecid€s!o dcal from the faceof the packel,askthat helum the cardsface{o*n as he d€ls them onto thc lable, You cr(plainthat you don't want to seelhe facc of any card in the row, This freedomof dealingis a strongfeatureof lhe effect and shouldbc emphasizcd.Whcn "A" hascompleteddea.linghis cards,turn to "8" and give him the sameinstruction; he can deal ftom the top down or froh the bottom up and he can deal fiom l€ft to ri!h! or from riSht to left but he is to deal his catdson top of A's cardsso as to folm palrs. At the cooclusionthere *ill bc nina pairs of face{own cardson the table.You arcr€adyfor the clidax to thetrick. Runyour handabovcthe row of cards,movingit backand forth. Evcntuallystopat thecentreonc (lift! in fronr eirherend). Pushthis pair of cardsout of the tow, saing that it sc€msto beSiving off stronSvibralions. choseearli€I.Thcsemay Tum ovcrlhepairof cardsthatlhespcoalors be the eight of clubsand thc five of heans.Explain that the malcsof thesecardsmarntaina sympathcticbond. Then the othcr pair' the one pushedfrom the row, is tumed ovcr to rcvcalthe othcr black eightaod the other red five, a perfectmatch.

B€forecommencing,arange the packso that thete6resix ttoft poi[ter blackcardson the faceof lhe packand rcmemberthe sevsnthcardfrom thefaceasa kayfor later use.Thenon pointercardsshouldif possiblebe 22!

Round UP

RoundUp spot ones.I say, if possible,because ihe arrangementcan be madevery quickly in fronr ol the audienceand you may find a groupofnon poinre; blackcardsthat conraina picLurecard. and thereis no reasonwhy these should not be used.Having made this arranaemenr,you are reaoy ro comm€ncethe effect, Say you would like to show a trick with twelve catds, six of each colo_ur._ Run throughthe faceup packas you explainthis, pushingover a smallblock first so that your stackis mhsed.Upjog any sii black-pornte, cardsand then strip them out and placethem on the faceof the Dack. Now run throughthe pack againand up jog any six red cardsanj then strip them ou! and place then on the face of the Dack. Squareup rhe pack and in rhis aclion usr the righr rhumb lo make a break at the near shott end of the pack at a point which you estimate is about twenty two catdsfrom the face. Let cardsdrop off of the thumb tip one by one until you seeyour rememberedkey card, and lhen take a left little finger break imm€diately aboveit. This meansyou have a break underthe faceeighteencads ofthe pack. The packis now faceup in the left hand and the right hand hal beenremoved. Bring rhe riShr hand back ro rhe pack and sran ro spreadrhe cards from the fac€with rhe left hand. counrin8from one to six ;r5you do so, Do not altrr rhe order of the cardsin rhe counring,simply push lhem over slighrlyand supportrhen wi!h rhe righl hand. Do ror spreadlhem nfally, let them jog up and down a lirrle. When you have reachedihe numberfive, pausefor a moment.beforesayingsixand pushingrhe final red one over. Now stan to push the black cardsover. again counling Irom one to six and pausingwhen you reachthe number five. As yoi bring rhe group of elevencardsbeinSsupporredby the righr hand back ovcr the pack to apparentlytake rhe final black card belo$ rhem. oush rhe rip of rhe righr third finger inLothe breakberngheld by rhelett iittte finger and continue moving tle righl hand toward the l€ft until the eleven cards being held are immediatelyabove the block below. The untidy conditionof the cardsthat have alreadybeencountedwill concealrh; edgeof the block being added below them. Removeall of the cards above the left litde finger break with the right hand and placethem belowthe pack, immediatelytuming the pack face down and squaring it up. Rememberthat when pushille off th€ face cardsto show thera are six redsfollowed by six blacks,the order of the cardsis not alteredin anv way..They?r€ simply pushrd over b) rhe lett thumb and supportedbi the right hand. Thumb off the top six cardsand drop them in a heap on the table. Now Lhumboff thenexrsixanddroprhemar a drfferenr posirion.place rheremajnder ofihe pacl a5ide.picl,up eachgroupof 5ixin lurn. gite rnem a Dfler snu te ancl reptacelh€m on the lable, !!hen you do rhis movethet$o packets aroundrhelablea bit, thepurpose of rhisbeinglo makeir almolr impossiblefor rhe spedarorsro rememberwhich paalel shouldbe red cardsand which should be black. Take carerhat they do

not seeany faces when you shuffle the cards. Finally spread out each group of six cardsdightly. Explainlo oneofthe spectatorsthat you will lurn yow back alld he is then to slide any card he wishesout of one of the groups, rememberwhat it is and then push it anyrhere he wishesadong the cards of the ot er group. When he indicates that he has done this, turn ?found and pick up the group of five cards ftom the tabl€ and push them into the cenler of the main pack, saying,"Thes€are no longer rcquired." Pick up the remarning group of cards from the table and casually shuffle them, finally holding thetn squared, face down in lhe left hand. Say "Somewhere in this group is a card that you have chosm and although the cards have beenwell mixcd, I am going to find it instantly." Act as if you are performing a miracle location, and tben turn the packet so that the facesare loward you and spread them out. Look for the odd card in the group of seven, which will be a pointer or a non pointer and removeit and placeit face up on the iable. Say, "ls that co.rect?" and after the sp€ctatorhas acknowledgedthat it is, say, "l know it's easy, but it's not as easyas it looks, becausethesearc black as wel]." As you concludethis remark, spreadthe six cardsremarningin your hand face up on the table, ..CIRCULATION'' This is a directlocationoftwo chosencardsusinSa propertyuniqueio rhe weaveshuffle when using an appropriatequantity of ceuds.Th€ handlingis as follows: Run through the face up pack and throw any nine spot face up on the lable, sayingtha! nine is a magic numtter.As you are looking for this card, take the opportunity of mentallycountingtwenty six cardsfrom the faceof the pack and marking off this position by a left little finger break as you closeup the pack. Appearto cut an unknownquantityofcards from the faceofthe pack but really lift off the cards above the break point so that you have exactly twenty six cards. Spreadthe twenty six cardsfacedown betweenthe handsinviaingtwo sDectators to selectone card each.Whilst spreadingth€ cards,mentally count eigh! from the top and after the two cardshavebeentakcn, close up the spreadand keep a left litile finger break under the top eight cards Invite one of the spectators!o replacehis card on top of the packet, cive thepack€ta singlecut at ihe breakto apparendylosethe cardbut as rhe two halvescome logethertake a new break belweenthem. Havelhe otherchosencard replacedon lop and againgive the pack a singlecut at the breakpoint to losethe card. Afier this cur, do nol keep any breaks. Turn the packetfaceup and spreadit out in a fan, taking carenot 10 225

RoundUp exposetherear card. Pick up the nine spot,turn il facedownandinsertit in the ninth position from the face of th€ packet. Make somefurther remark about nine being a magic number. Turn the packet face down and give it as many cuts and perfect weave shuffles as you wish. This gives an exc€llent impression of it beinS well mixed. Finally spread ir face down lenglhways on the table. It is better for the climax if th€ nine spot is fairly centrally posilioned, so if you seeit is very near one of the ends, grvethe packet a further cut to put it nearer the centre, before spreading the cards out. To demonstratethe magic propertics of the face up nine spot, count cxactly nine cards to the left and riSht of it and push the cards at these positions out of the spread.Ask the namesof the two selectionsand then tum the 'countcd to' ones face up.

226

lhe Complete

{ ) -

o

a

Walton

o I a, )

!I

o r| o {

9l I

a

o I

.a Ir

t

l|ot Walton Uol Onc

* ',,,," .'1,1',,",'l']]1.,,

I Nll : ' 1 ' 1\[r\ l r , , , , ,'' t , ' , . ri ' l t r r ! l ' Lr r r\tr,1 l r , , , , ,,, "','

j..;l ;lrlr,, -iii:rliil;lii ',r;;l I )i ::llit:;llrll --,,"'

qith , xr'rlr r'trr,1 rr \l'i!ht\ ',,11.1 l"u',,.,"t API)s iLhJ\ th< ,' . "" rh'^( wh":rrt n'rt " ','r' ','

*u.itft*-. t:u,rtflt,*im. ll*'lffir'*.'

li['il:$i*ilr+:{'"l;lii *,"):*";i:li:;l:'*.

H$ilfrffi :l"'Xfl:,":ro'"..0.''' i,ii, Ti',',iii "t:,{:il.'n" :f'):11*,.;; tru.o\onii?T'ro,'o*..

\ lt lr l

I lt ll

\ l lllox

l{o} Wr ll, r r L, | , t r , , 1,,{ I niir r r r ' 1912,he r |cnl , , nt rl' , 'i 1". \ ( nr ll' r r r the magic depots{hcrc hrs rDtcrcsl was sparkedotf by and early gift ol r box of tricks ai the tender age of eight. Thai paticuldr box ol "Maskelyne"iMysleries"came liom Davenpon's and it wa$ 1(rthis depot that he was drawn. Saturday. wrs his day. He met a numberofmagicians who bccnmehis close friends.and 10this day he saysof them "their kindnesscannor be overstated' . In Panicular he remembersVal An&ews. Jack Avis. Bobby Bemard, Ted Danson. John Deris, Alex Elmsley md Hugh Scott who all stronglY influcnced his magical thinkinr At l9 he joined the R.A.F ibr h's Nalional Service and then at 22 hc joined I.C.T.. the British Compurel Grcup where he bec.me an ExecutiveAnalyst al the age ol r'l Il was thenhe made the decisn)nl,' toully commit himself to Mati.. managingas he doesthe Scotl(ll businessof D:Nenports. His lJ yearstherehas allowedhis nNtuirl wilh crrlls r,, skills and inventiveness develop.He has contributedc[ (l effectsto almostall of the contempofarymngicalmagarincsrrr both English and other langursc\ In ihe wodd. His prolific writing has howclcl neverbeencollntedinto a mat()f work. It was to reciify this, thal ,THE COMPLE]E WALTON' project was devisedas a fitting tribute ro sorne30 Yearsol mar(rl

Etrr A lmq?ln

Air.q- Te,zz 4^!3?

-

A +rsl Q rr

i-

-ta_a--l

t-t1

ttr

/ rrl\,} LJ { t lll. Coryrtgfrf2ffi$€$$1|-_*'

I